《根经》的注释巴利
1. Mūlasuttavaṇṇanā
50 《三集》第一品里说的“三”,是数量上的限定。“这些”是把它们摆在眼前来说。“不善根”是指出被限定的法。其中,既是不善又是根,所以叫不善根。另一种解释是:从因、缘、发生、产生、生起、令生的意义上说,它们是不善法的根,所以叫不善根,意思就是不善法的原因。所谓原因,就是说果从它而转起,所以叫因;依它而来,所以叫缘;从它而发生,所以叫发生;生出自己的果,所以叫能生;使它生起,所以叫令起;使它产生,所以叫能产生。如是,以安住的意义说就是根。因此,不善根就是使不善法得以稳固成立的东西,也就是原因。巴利
50. Tikanipātassa paṭhame tīṇīti gaṇanaparicchedo. Imānīti abhimukhīkaraṇaṃ. Akusalamūlānīti paricchinnadhammanidassanaṃ. Tattha akusalāni ca tāni mūlāni cāti akusalamūlāni. Atha vā akusalānaṃ hetupaccayapabhavajanakasamuṭṭhāpakanibbattakaṭṭhena mūlāni cāti akusalamūlāni, akusaladhammānaṃ kāraṇānīti attho. Kāraṇañhi yathā hinoti etasmā phalaṃ pavattatīti hetu, paṭicca etasmā etīti paccayo, pabhavati etasmāti pabhavo, attano phalaṃ janetīti janakaṃ, samuṭṭhāpetīti samuṭṭhāpakaṃ, nibbattetīti nibbattakanti ca vuccati. Evaṃ patiṭṭhaṭṭhena mūlanti, tasmā akusalamūlānīti akusalānaṃ suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanāni, kāraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
有些人却说:就像稻谷等的稻种,宝石的光泽等的宝石颜色那样,贪等作为根本,能成就不善法的不善性。如果这样说的话,对于那些由不善心产生的色法,它们就不能以因缘的方式成为这些色法的缘了。因为那些色法并不能成就它们的不善性,可它们也不是贪等的因。确实有这样的说法:巴利
Keci pana ‘‘sāliādīnaṃ sālibījādīni viya maṇippabhādīnaṃ maṇivaṇṇādayo viya ca akusalānaṃ akusalabhāvasādhako lobhādīnaṃ mūlaṭṭho’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sante akusalacittasamuṭṭhānarūpesu tesaṃ hetupaccayabhāvo na siyā. Na hi tāni tesaṃ akusalabhāvaṃ sādhenti, na ca paccayā na honti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
因作为与因相应诸法的缘,也作为由那些因所生起的色法的缘,是以因缘的方式。巴利
‘‘Hetū hetusampayuttakānaṃ dhammānaṃ taṃsamuṭṭhānānañca rūpānaṃ hetupaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa.1).
无因的痴也不可能有“不善”的性质,因为缺少能让它成为不善的另一个根。也许有人会说:贪等的不善性是由其自性本身成立的,而与它们相应的心所则是依附于贪等才成为不善。若真是这样,那么无贪等也应同样由自性本身成立为善,这样一来无贪等就只能永远是善,不可能是无记——但事实并非如此。所以,就像对相应法一样,对诸根也要追问善、不善、无记的问题。应当这样理解:正如如理作意等是善的原因,非如理作意等是不善的原因。这样一来,不从“能成就不善性”的角度,而从“能成就稳固安立”的角度来理解贪等作为根的含义,就没有任何过失。因为获得了因缘的诸法,就像根扎得深的树木一样,坚固而安立良好;没有因缘的法则像胡麻种子上的苔藓一样,安立不牢。因此,以“因”等含义资助不善法的,就是不善的根,称为“不善根”。又因为没有任何不善心的生起能离开根,所以应当知道,一切不善的积聚已被这三根完全涵盖并显示出来了。巴利
Ahetukassa ca mohassa akusalabhāvo na siyā akusalabhāvasādhakassa mūlantarassa abhāvato. Athāpi siyā lobhādīnaṃ sabhāvasiddho akusalādibhāvo, taṃsampayuttānaṃ pana lobhādipaṭibaddhoti. Evampi yathā lobhādīnaṃ, evaṃ alobhādīnampi sabhāvasiddho kusalādibhāvoti alobhādayo kusalā eva siyuṃ, na abyākatā, na ca honti. Tasmā yathā sampayuttesu, evaṃ mūlesupi kusalādibhāvo pariyesitabbo. Yonisomanasikārādiko viya hi kusalabhāvassa, ayonisomanasikārādiko akusalabhāvassa kāraṇanti gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ akusalabhāvasādhanavasena lobhādīnaṃ mūlaṭṭhaṃ aggahetvā suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanavasena gayhamāne na koci doso. Laddhahetupaccayā hi dhammā virūḷhamūlā viya pādapā thirā honti suppatiṭṭhitā, heturahitā pana tilabījakādisevālā viya na suppatiṭṭhitāti hetuādiatthena akusalānaṃ upakārakattā mūlānīti akusalamūlāni. Yasmā pana mūlena mutto akusalacittuppādo natthi, tasmā tīhi mūlehi sabbo akusalarāsi pariyādiyitvā dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
为了显示这些不善根各自的面貌,才说了“贪是不善根”等等。其中,关于贪等应当说明的内容,前面已经讲过了。不过,前面讲的是第三道所断的贪等,而这里则是毫无遗漏的一切不善根,这就是差别所在。巴利
Tāni akusalamūlāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘lobho akusalamūla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha lobhādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tattha pana tatiyamaggavajjhā lobhādayo āgatā, idha pana anavasesāti ayameva viseso.
偈颂里说的“恶心思”,是指因为和不善法相应,所以是低劣的心。“迫害”,是指在它自己生起的刹那,以及将来果报成熟的刹那,都逼迫、损害它。“自所生”,是指在自己身上生起的。“以皮为心材”,是指有节结的、也就是竹子的意思。“与自果俱”,是指带着自己的果。这里说的是:就像竹子之类,不像儿茶树、黄檀树等那样具有内心材,只因为外面有实质而被称为“皮心材”,它们自己所生的果会迫害、毁坏它们自己;同样,一个内心没有戒等真正心材、只有低劣心的人,正是由自己身上生起的贪等不善法来毁灭他。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ pāpacetasanti akusaladhammasamāyogato lāmakacittaṃ. Hiṃsantīti attano pavattikkhaṇe āyatiṃ vipākakkhaṇe ca vibādhenti. Attasambhūtāti attani jātā. Tacasāranti gaṇṭhitaṃ, veḷunti attho. Samphalanti attano phalaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – khadirasīsapādayo viya antosāro ahutvā bahisāratāya tacasāranti laddhanāmaṃ veḷuādiṃ yathā attasambhūtameva phalaṃ hiṃsati vināseti, evameva anto sīlādisārarahitaṃ lāmakacittaṃ puggalaṃ attasambhūtāyeva lobhādayo vināsentīti.
《界经》注释巴利
2. Dhātusuttavaṇṇanā
51 51. 在第二部经里说的“界”,是指因为能承载自己的果报和自性,所以叫“界”。在这里,凡是能产生果报的,就是因为它能承载自己的果报和自性,所以叫“界”;其余那些不能产生果报的,则只是因为它能承载自性,所以叫“界”。“色界”,就是色有。在说到“界”的地方,要用“有”来限定;在说到“有”的地方,要用“界”来限定。这里说的是用“有”来限定。因此——巴利
51. Dutiye dhātuyoti attano phalassa sabhāvassa ca dhāraṇaṭṭhena dhātuyo. Yañcettha phalanibbattakaṃ, taṃ attano phalassa sabhāvassa ca, itaraṃ sabhāvasseva dhāraṇaṭṭhena dhātu. Rūpadhātūti rūpabhavo. Dhātuyā āgataṭṭhāne bhavena paricchinditabbaṃ, bhavassa āgataṭṭhāne dhātuyā paricchinditabbanti idha bhavena paricchedo kathito. Tasmā –
哪些法是色界法?下以梵天世界为下边界,上以阿迦腻咤天为上边界,在这范围内存在、属于这范围的蕴、界、处,这些法就是色界法。巴利
‘‘Katame dhammā rūpāvacarā? Heṭṭhato brahmalokaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito akaniṭṭhe deve anto karitvā etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā khandhadhātuāyatanā, ime dhammā rūpāvacarā’’ti (dha. sa. 1289) –
像这样所说的色界诸法,就是色界。“无色界”,指的是无色有。在这里,同样是以“有”来作界定——巴利
Evaṃ vuttā rūpāvacaradhammā rūpadhātu. Arūpadhātūti arūpabhavo. Idhāpi bhavena paricchedo kathitoti –
哪些法属于无色界?从下面算起,把空无边处天包括在内,从上面算起,把非想非非想处天包括在内,在这范围内存在的、属于这范围的蕴、界、处,这些法就是无色界法。巴利
‘‘Katame dhammā arūpāvacarā? Heṭṭhato ākāsānañcāyatanūpage deve anto karitvā, uparito nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpage deve anto karitvā, etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā khandhadhātuāyatanā, ime dhammā arūpāvacarā’’ti (dha. sa. 1291) –
如是说的无色界诸法,是无色界。灭界则应当知道是涅槃。巴利
Evaṃ vuttā arūpāvacaradhammā arūpadhātu. Nirodhadhātūti nibbānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
还有一种理解方式:与色相关的、系属于色的法之生起,是色界,也就是五蕴有和一蕴有,这样就涵盖了整个欲有和色有。与色无关的法之生起,是无色界,也就是四蕴有,这样就涵盖了无色有。这样,通过这两句就说明了三有的一切、整个轮回的运作。而第三句则只涵盖了无为界,所以在这里,道和果就成为超越三界之法,称为“离三界法”。不过有些人说:“色界就是具有色之自性的法,无色界就是具有无色之自性的法,用这两个词就毫无遗漏地涵盖了五蕴。”他们还说:“作为色渴爱之对象的法是色界,作为无色渴爱之对象的法是无色界。”这些说法在这里都不被认可。因此,应当只按照前面所说的方式来理解其含义。巴利
Aparo nayo – rūpasahitā, rūpapaṭibaddhā, dhammappavatti rūpadhātu, pañcavokārabhavo, ekavokārabhavo ca, tena sakalo kāmabhavo rūpabhavo ca saṅgahito. Rūparahitā dhammappavatti arūpadhātu, catuvokārabhavo, tena arūpabhavo saṅgahito. Iti dvīhi padehi tayo bhavā sabbā saṃsārappavatti dassitā. Tatiyapadena pana asaṅkhatadhātuyeva saṅgahitāti maggaphalāni idha tikavinimuttadhammā nāma jātā. Keci pana ‘‘rūpadhātūti rūpasabhāvā dhammā, arūpadhātūti arūpasabhāvā dhammāti padadvayena anavasesato pañcakkhandhā gahitā’’ti. ‘‘Rūpataṇhāya visayabhūtā dhammā rūpadhātu, arūpataṇhāya visayabhūtā arūpadhātū’’ti ca vadanti, taṃ sabbaṃ idha nādhippetaṃ. Tasmā vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo.
在偈颂中,“遍知色界”是指:对系属于色的法的生起,以知遍知等三种遍知来了知。“于无色界不依住”是指:对无色界的法,不因有贪而安住,不因有见而安住,不黏着。也有人读作“于无色不依住”,意思一样。到这里,已经说了对三地之法的遍知。“于灭中得解脱者”是指:那些人依最上道与果的力量,在涅槃这个所缘中,以断除和止息,从一切烦恼中彻底解脱出来。“他们是胜死者”是指:这些漏尽的人,已经超越了死亡。巴利
Gāthāsu rūpadhātuṃ pariññāyāti rūpapaṭibaddhadhammapavattiṃ ñātapariññādīhi tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā. Āruppesu asaṇṭhitāti arūpāvacaradhammesu bhavarāgavasena bhavadiṭṭhivasena ca na patiṭṭhitā anallīnā. ‘‘Arūpesu asaṇṭhitā’’ti ca paṭhanti, so eva attho. Ettāvatā tebhūmakadhammānaṃ pariññā vuttā. Nirodhe ye vimuccantīti ye nibbāne ārammaṇabhūte aggamaggaphalavasena samucchedapaṭippassaddhīhi anavasesakilesato vimuccanti. Te janā maccuhāyinoti te khīṇāsavajanā maraṇaṃ samatītā.
这样,通过超越三界而显示证得不死之后,为了激发他们的精进,说出第二首偈颂:“这条道路,以及我所行之道,已经为你们开示。”其中,“以身”是指以名身,也就是以道与果。“触证”就是到达。“无依”是指远离蕴等一切依止。“弃舍依”就是使那些依止被舍离的因。因为以道智现证涅槃时,一切依止都被舍离,所以涅槃就是它们被舍离的因。“作证”是指时时进入果定,亲自证得之后,无漏的正自觉者便开示这离忧、离垢的涅槃境界。因此,应当为了证得它而努力精勤。巴利
Evaṃ dhātuttayasamatikkamena amatādhigamaṃ dassetvā ‘‘ayañca paṭipadā mayā gatamaggo ca tumhākaṃ dassito’’ti tattha nesaṃ ussāhaṃ janento dutiyaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha kāyenāti nāmakāyena maggaphalehi. Phusayitvāti patvā. Nirūpadhinti khandhādisabbūpadhirahitaṃ. Upadhippaṭinissagganti tesaṃyeva ca upadhīnaṃ paṭinissajjanakāraṇaṃ. Nibbānassa hi maggañāṇena sacchikiriyāya sabbe upadhayo paṭinissaṭṭhā hontīti taṃ tesaṃ paṭinissajjanakāraṇaṃ. Sacchikatvāti kālena kālaṃ phalasamāpattisamāpajjanena attapaccakkhaṃ katvā anāsavo sammāsambuddho tameva asokaṃ virajaṃ nibbānapadaṃ deseti. Tasmā tadadhigamāya ussukkaṃ kātabbanti.
第一受经的注释巴利
3. Paṭhamavedanāsuttavaṇṇanā
52 在第三经中,“受”是指领受所缘的滋味,感受、体验,所以称为受。为了说明它的分类,就说“乐受”等等。其中,“乐”这个词,按照词义解释的方式,前面已经说过了。而“苦”这个词,在“生也是苦”等说法中,是用来指苦的实例;在“摩诃梨,因为色是苦,随逐于苦,陷入于苦”等说法中,是指苦的所缘;在“恶业的积聚是苦”等说法中,是指苦的因缘;在“诸比丘,乃至用言语都难以表达地狱有多苦”等说法中,是指苦缘所在之处;在“由于舍断乐与舍断苦”等说法中,是指苦受。在这里,也正是指苦受。巴利
52. Tatiye vedanāti ārammaṇarasaṃ vediyanti anubhavantīti vedanā. Tā vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘sukhā vedanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sukha-saddo atthuddhāravasena heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Dukkha-saddo pana ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.387; vibha. 190) dukkhavatthusmiṃ āgato. ‘‘Yasmā ca kho, mahāli, rūpaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhānupatitaṃ dukkhāvakkanta’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.60) dukkhārammaṇe. ‘‘Dukkho pāpassa uccayo’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 117) dukkhapaccaye. ‘‘Yāvañcidaṃ, bhikkhave, na sukarā akkhānena pāpuṇituṃ, yāva dukkhā nirayā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.250) dukkhapaccayaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.232; dha. sa. 165) dukkhavedanāyaṃ. Idhāpi dukkhavedanāyameva.
从词义上说,能带来快乐,所以叫乐;能带来痛苦,所以叫苦;既不是苦也不是乐,就叫不苦不乐,其中m这个音是顺着连读而说的。在这三种受当中,乐受的特点是体验可意的东西,苦受的特点是体验不可意的东西,不苦不乐受的特点是体验与这两者相反的东西。因此,乐受和苦受的生起很明显,不苦不乐受则不明显。当乐生起时,它让整个身体震动、挤压、遍满,就像吃下百次提炼的酥油,像涂抹百次熬煮的油,像用一千壶水浇灭燥热一样,生起时让人发出“啊,真乐!啊,真乐!”的声音。当苦生起时,它让整个身体扰动、挤压、遍满,就像插入烧红的铁犁,像浇下熔化的铜汁一样,生起时让人发狂地喊叫:“啊,真苦!啊,真苦!”这样,乐受和苦受的生起就是很明显的。巴利
Vacanatthato pana sukhayatīti sukhā. Dukkhayatīti dukkhā. Na dukkhā na sukhāti adukkhamasukhā, makāro padasandhivasena vutto. Tāsu iṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇā sukhā, aniṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇā dukkhā, ubhayaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā adukkhamasukhā. Tasmā sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppatti pākaṭā, na adukkhamasukhāya. Yadā hi sukhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ bhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ satadhotasappiṃ khādāpentaṃ viya, satapākatelaṃ makkhentaṃ viya, ghaṭasahassena pariḷāhaṃ nibbāpayamānaṃ viya ca ‘‘aho sukhaṃ, aho sukha’’nti vācaṃ nicchārayamānameva uppajjati. Yadā dukkhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ tattaphālaṃ pavesentaṃ viya vilīnatambalohaṃ āsiñcantaṃ viya ca ‘‘aho dukkhaṃ, aho dukkha’’nti vippalāpentameva uppajjati. Iti sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppatti pākaṭā.
不苦不乐受却难以了知,难以阐明,像黑暗一样晦暗不明。它在乐与苦消退时,以对治可意与不可意的方式,表现为中舍的状态。只有按道理去把握的人,它才变得清楚。就像什么呢?就像在前后都有尘垢的地方,鹿沿着惯行的路线在平坦石头上走过的足迹。同样地,通过对可意和不可意所缘的乐与苦的体验,也能以体验中舍所缘的方式了知它。对中舍所缘的把握,就像在平坦石头上行走一样,因为此时没有对可意和不可意所缘的执取。而在那里那种体验,就是不苦不乐受。巴利
Adukkhamasukhā pana dubbijānā duddīpanā andhakārā avibhūtā. Sā sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātapaṭipakkhavasena majjhattākārabhūtā nayato gaṇhantasseva pākaṭā hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā pubbāparaṃ sapaṃsuke padese upacaritamaggavasena piṭṭhipāsāṇe migena gatamaggo, evaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇesu sukhadukkhānubhavanenapi majjhattārammaṇānubhavanabhāvena viññāyati. Majjhattārammaṇaggahaṇaṃ piṭṭhipāsāṇagamanaṃ viya iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇaggahaṇābhāvato . Yañca tatrānubhavanaṃ, sā adukkhamasukhāti.
在这里,受虽然按乐、苦、不苦不乐三种性质被说为三类,但在某些地方也按乐和苦两种性质被说为两类。就像这样说的:“阿难,我也说过两种受,也就是方便说的乐受和苦受。”(《中部》2.89)在某些地方,三种受又各自按乐、苦、不苦不乐的性质分别这样说:“乐受是住立时乐、变坏时苦;苦受是住立时苦、变坏时乐;不苦不乐受是有智时乐、无智时苦。”(《中部》1.465)在某些地方,一切受都按苦的性质来说。因为这样说:“凡任何被感受的,我说那一切都是苦。”(《相应部》4.259)巴利
Evamettha sukhadukkhaadukkhamasukhabhāvena tidhā vuttāpi katthaci sukhadukkhabhāvena dvidhā vuttā. Yathāha – ‘‘dvepi mayā, ānanda, vedanā vuttā, pariyāyena sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.89). Katthaci tissopi visuṃ visuṃ sukhadukkhaadukkhamasukhabhāvena ‘‘sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā, dukkhā vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Katthaci sabbāpi dukkhabhāvena. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259).
在这里或许会有疑问:如果三受就像这里所说的那样,而且在其他同类经典和阿毗达摩中也没有这样说,那为什么又说“凡是被感受到的,这一切我都说是苦”,以及“阿难,我也说过二受”呢?这是有针对而说的,所以那是方便说。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
Tattha siyā – yadi tisso vedanā yathā idha vuttā, aññesu ca edisesu suttesu abhidhamme ca evaṃ avatvā kasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti, ‘‘dvepi mayā, ānanda, vedanā vuttā’’ti ca? Sandhāyabhāsitametaṃ, tasmā sā pariyāyadesanā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
阿难,我是针对诸行的无常、针对诸行的变易才这样说:凡是所感受到的,这一切都是苦。巴利
‘‘Saṅkhārāniccataṃ, ānanda, mayā sandhāya bhāsitaṃ saṅkhāravipariṇāmataṃ, ‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasmi’’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.259).
阿难,我也曾以方便的方式说过两种受。巴利
‘‘Dvepi mayā, ānanda, vedanā vuttā pariyāyenā’’ti ca (saṃ. ni. 4.259).
在这里,乐和不苦不乐这两种受,从直接了当的角度来说并不是苦;但为了随顺所教化众生的根机意乐,让他们看清自己对这些受并无贪爱,所以从间接的角度说它们是苦。因此,那种说法是间接的教说。而这里讲三种受,是在说它们的真实本性,所以是直接了当的教说。这是诸位论师一致的说法。巴利
Ettha hi sukhā adukkhamasukhāti imāsaṃ dvinnaṃ vedanānaṃ nippariyāyena dukkhabhāvo natthi, veneyyajjhāsayena pana tattha nicchandadassanatthaṃ pariyāyena dukkhabhāvo vuttoti sā tādisī pariyāyadesanā. Ayaṃ pana vedanattayadesanā sabhāvakathāti katvā nippariyāyadesanāti ayamettha ācariyānaṃ samānakathā.
诡辩派的人却说:“因为提到了两种苦性,所以关于三种受的教导只是方便说。”对这个人应当这样回答:“不要这样说!”因为世尊是依意趣而说一切受都是苦的,也就是:“阿难,我是针对诸行的无常性、针对诸行的变异性而说:凡是所感受的,一切都苦。”如果这里关于三种受的教导是方便说,那就应当说“我是针对这个而说三种受”,但世尊并没有这样说。巴利
Vitaṇḍavādī panāha ‘‘dukkhatādvayavacanato pariyāyadesanāva vedanattayadesanā’’ti. So ‘‘mā heva’’ntissa vacanīyo, yasmā bhagavatā sabbāsaṃ vedanānaṃ dukkhabhāvo adhippāyavasena vutto ‘‘saṅkhārāniccataṃ, ānanda, mayā sandhāya bhāsitaṃ saṅkhāravipariṇāmataṃ ‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasmi’’’nti. Yadi panettha vedanattayadesanā pariyāyadesanā siyā, ‘‘idaṃ mayā sandhāya bhāsitaṃ tisso vedanā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, na panetaṃ vuttaṃ.
不过,这里仍然应该这样问:朋友,教导三种受的用意到底是什么呢?如果他回答说:微弱的苦受被称为乐,强烈的苦受被称为苦,中等的苦受被称为不苦不乐,这是根据所化众生的根性意乐而说的。因为对众生来说,在这些受当中,并不会因为它们是乐等就有所增长。那就应该这样反驳他:朋友,那么苦受的本质到底是什么,凭什么能说一切受都是苦呢?如果一种受生起时,众生只希望它消失,那可以说是苦受的本质。可是,如果一种受生起时,众生只希望它不要消失,另一种受生起时,众生对消失或不消失都无所谓,那它怎么能是苦受呢?再者,如果凡是损害自己依存之处的,就是苦,那么凡是利益自己依存之处的,又怎么能是苦呢?再者,如果凡是圣者们视为苦的,就是苦受的本质,那么圣者们是依行苦性而将受视为苦的,而行苦性是一直存在的,这样一来,那些受怎么还会有微弱、中等、强烈这种苦的差别呢?如果仅仅因为行苦性,诸受就是苦,那么经中说的“比丘们,有三种苦性:苦苦性、变坏苦性、行苦性”,这种对苦性的分别教导就成了没有意义。若真是那样,经本身就被否定了。而且,在前三种色界禅那中,就会变成有微弱的苦受,因为那里说的是乐受。在第四禅和无色界禅那中,就会变成有中等的苦受,因为那里说的是不苦不乐受。这样一来,前面的三种色界等至就会比第四禅等至和无色界等至更殊胜了。或者说,在更殊胜、更精妙的等至中,怎么还能成立苦受更多呢?所以,把三种受的教导说成是方便说,这是不合理的。巴利
Apicāyameva vattabbo ‘‘ko, panāvuso, vedanattayadesanāya adhippāyo’’ti? Sace vadeyya ‘‘mudukā dukkhā vedanā sukhā, adhimattā dukkhā, majjhimā adukkhamasukhāti veneyyajjhāsayena vuttā. Tāsu hi na sattānaṃ sukhādivaḍḍhī’’ti. So vattabbo – ko panāvuso dukkhavedanāya sabhāvo, yena ‘‘sabbā vedanā dukkhā’’ti vucceyyuṃ? Yadi yāya uppannāya sattā viyogameva icchanti, so dukkhavedanāya sabhāvo. Yāya ca pana uppannāya sattā aviyogameva icchanti, yāya na ubhayaṃ icchanti, sā kathaṃ dukkhavedanā siyā? Atha yā attano nissayassa upaghātakārī, sā dukkhā. Yā anuggahakārī, sā kathaṃ dukkhā siyā. Atha pana yadariyā dukkhato passanti, so dukkhavedanāya sabhāvo, saṅkhāradukkhatāya vedanaṃ ariyā dukkhato passanti, sā ca abhiṇhasabhāvāti kathaṃ tāsaṃ vedanānaṃ mudumajjhimādhimattadukkhabhāvo siyā? Yadi ca saṅkhāradukkhatāya eva vedanānaṃ dukkhabhāvo siyā, ‘‘tisso imā, bhikkhave, dukkhatāyo dukkhadukkhatā, vipariṇāmadukkhatā, saṅkhāradukkhatā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305) ayaṃ dukkhatānaṃ vibhāgadesanā nippayojanā siyā. Tathā ca sati suttameva paṭibāhitaṃ siyā, purimesu ca tīsu rūpāvacarajjhānesu mudukā dukkhā vedanāti āpajjati sukhavedanāvacanato. Catutthajjhāne arūpajjhānesu ca majjhimā, adukkhamasukhavedanāvacanato. Evaṃ sante purimā tisso rūpāvacarasamāpattiyo catutthajjhānasamāpattiyā arūpasamāpattīhi ca santatarāti āpajjati. Kathaṃ vā santatarappaṇītatarāsu samāpattīsu dukkhavedanāya adhikabhāvo yujjati? Tasmā vedanattayadesanāya pariyāyadesanābhāvo na yuttoti.
那么,前面引经说“在苦上生起乐想,这是想颠倒”,这句话该怎么理解呢?这是针对两种情况说的:一种是对变坏苦和行苦不能如实了知,于是完全当成乐;另一种是在苦的相状上,生起乐的相状想。那句话就是针对这些情况说的。那么,“比丘们,乐受应当看作苦”这句话又该怎么理解呢?这是为了让人把注意力放在观照变坏上,从而生起厌离。因为这种观照是生起离欲的方法,也因为乐受总是伴随着许多苦。确实,乐是苦的因,被无数苦法所跟随,所以智者连乐也一并看作苦。巴利
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhe sukhanti saññāvipallāso’’ti (a. ni. 4.49; paṭi. ma. 1.236), taṃ kathanti? Vipariṇāmadukkhatāya saṅkhāradukkhatāya ca yathābhūtānavabodhena yā ekantato sukhasaññā, yā ca dukkhanimitte sukhanimittasaññā, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evampi ‘‘sukhā, bhikkhave, vedanā dukkhato daṭṭhabbā’’ti (itivu. 53) idaṃ pana kathanti? Idaṃ pana vipariṇāmadassane sanniyojanatthaṃ vuttaṃ tassa tattha virāguppattiyā upāyabhāvato sukhavedanāya bahudukkhānugatabhāvato ca. Tathā hi dukkhassa hetubhāvato anekehi dukkhadhammehi anubaddhattā ca paṇḍitā sukhampi dukkhamicceva paṭipannā.
就算这样,乐受也根本不存在,因为乐因并没有确定性。那些被认为是乐受之因的东西,比如食物、衣服等,一旦过度使用、在不合适的时候使用,反而会变成苦受的因。而且不能说:同一个因既产生乐,又产生苦。所以,它们并不是乐因。只有在苦消失的时候,无知的人才会生起乐想。比如长时间站立等姿势之后,换成别的姿势;或者背负重担的人放下重担、得到休息时,就会觉得乐。那么,难道真的根本没有乐吗?这种说法,其实是因为没有如实了解乐因,才臆想它没有确定性。要知道,那只是把所缘本身当成了唯一的乐因,才会这么说。应当理解为:外在所缘和内在身体特定状态这两者合在一起,才是乐等感受的因。而且,某种内外状态如果是乐受的因,这种状态任何时候都不会成为苦受的因。因此,乐等感受的因是确定的。就好比火界,对于稻谷、大麦等作物,当它达到某种特定状态时,会成为甘甜可口的因;而同样的火界,在达到那种状态时,任何时候也不会成为不甜、不可口的因。应当这样理解。巴利
Evampi nattheva sukhā vedanā, sukhahetūnaṃ niyamābhāvato. Ye hi sukhavedanāya hetusammatā ghāsacchādanādayo, te eva adhimattaṃ akāle ca paṭiseviyamānā dukkhavedanāya hetubhāvamāpajjanti. Na ca yeneva hetunā sukhaṃ, teneva dukkhanti yuttaṃ vattuṃ. Tasmā na te sukhahetū, dukkhantarāpagame pana aviññūnaṃ sukhasaññā yathā cirataraṃ ṭhānādiiriyāpathasamaṅgī hutvā tadaññairiyāpathasamāyoge mahantañca bhāraṃ vahato bhāranikkhepe ceva vūpasame ca, tasmā nattheva sukhanti? Tayidaṃ sammadeva sukhahetuṃ apariññāya tassa niyamābhāvaparikappanaṃ. Ārammaṇamattameva hi kevalaṃ sukhahetuṃ manasikatvā evaṃ vuttaṃ, ajjhattikasarīrassa avatthāvisesaṃ samuditaṃ pana ekajjhaṃ tadubhayaṃ sukhādihetūti veditabbaṃ. Yādisañca tadubhayaṃ sukhavedanāya hetu, tādisaṃ na kadācipi dukkhavedanāya hetu hotīti vavatthitā eva sukhādihetu. Yathā nāma tejodhātu sāliyavaḍākasassādīnaṃ yādisamavatthantaraṃ patvā sātamadhurabhāvahetu hoti, na tādisameva patvā kadācipi asātaamadhurabhāvahetu hoti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
有时,只有在苦消失之后,才会感受到乐受。在这里,乐想其实是在“乐”本身之上生起的,并不是仅仅在苦消失这一点上。比如一个人因为长途跋涉而疲惫不堪,在按摩或变换姿势时会有乐想;否则,如果只是疲劳消失,在其他时候也应该同样会有这样的乐想,但事实并非如此。如果仅仅把苦的消失就当成乐,那就无法认识到受的差别了。这一点必须完全接受:因为众生总是付出极大努力去追求那些最殊胜的所缘,而且对于他们所生起的渴爱,不可能靠随便得到的一点条件就满足。这正是“以受为缘而生起爱”的道理。在这种情形下,对于香气、甜味、舒适的触感等对象,随着它们优劣不同而生起的殊胜乐想,是在鼻门、舌门、身门中哪种特定苦的消失时生起,还是在耳门听到像天乐一样的五支乐器声时那种特定苦的消失时生起呢?因此,并不是只有在苦受本身的苦消失时才有乐想,也不是苦的消失本身就是乐。从圣教和正理两方面都可以确定,三种受是存在的。世尊关于三种受的教导,是已经说尽究竟义的,不是还需要再引申的,对此应当信解。这样理解才是相应的,才是善巧的。如果不这样认为,那就让他做完自己的说法后说走吧,随你高兴。巴利
Dukkhāpagameva kadāci sukhavedanantaraṃ upalabbhati. Tattha sukheyeva sukhasaññā, na dukkhāpagamamatte yathā addhānagamanaparissamakilantassa sambāhane iriyāpathaparivattane ca, aññathā kālantarepi parissamāpagame tādisī sukhasaññā siyā. Dukkhāpagamamatte pana sukhanti parikappanā vedanāvisesassa anupalabbhamānattā. Ekanteneva cetaṃ evaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, yato paṇītappaṇītāniyeva ārammaṇāni mahatā āyāsena sattā abhipatthayanti, na ca nesaṃ yena kenaci yathāladdhamattena paccayena patikāraṃ kātuṃ sakkā taṇhuppādenāti . Vedanāpaccayā hi taṇhāupādi, tathābhāve ca sugandhamadhurasukhasamphassādivatthūnaṃ itarītarabhāvena sukhavisesasaññā jāyamānā katamassa dukkhavisesassa apagamane ghānajivhākāyadvāresu, sotadvāre ca dibbasaṅgītasadisapañcaṅgikatūriyasaddāvadhāraṇe. Tasmā na dukkhavedanāyameva dukkhantarāpagame sukhasaññā, nāpi kevale dukkhāpagamamatteti āgamato yuttitopi vavatthitā tisso vedanāti bhagavato vedanattayadesanā nītatthāyeva, na neyyatthāti saññāpetabbaṃ. Evañcetaṃ upeti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce, kammaṃ katvā uyyojetabbo ‘‘gaccha yathāsukha’’nti.
这三种受,各自以彼此对立的自性和明确的特征而被区分开来,正是世尊所教导的。世尊这样教导,是为了让修观禅的修行者以“受”为入口,看到无色业处。业处有两种:色业处和无色业处。其中,世尊讲色业处时,用简略作意的方式、详细作意的方式,或者四界差别等方式来讲。讲无色业处时,则用触、受或心的方式来讲。为什么呢?因为有些人把注意力转向所缘时,心与心所中第一个投向所缘的“触”非常明显——它接触所缘而生起,清清楚楚;有些人则是体验所缘而生起的“受”非常明显;还有些人是了知所缘而生起的“识”非常明显。所以,世尊就根据这些不同人的根性倾向,按照他们各自能清楚觉察到的法,以触、受等为入口,把无色业处分三种方式来讲。巴利
Evametā aññamaññapaṭipakkhasabhāvavavatthitalakkhaṇā eva tisso vedanā bhagavatā desitā. Tañca kho vipassanākammikānaṃ yogāvacarānaṃ vedanāmukhena arūpakammaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ. Duvidhañhi kammaṭṭhānaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ, arūpakammaṭṭhānanti. Tattha bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento saṅkhepamanasikāravasena vā vitthāramanasikāravasena vā catudhātuvavatthānādivasena vā katheti. Arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ pana kathento phassavasena vā vedanāvasena vā cittavasena vā katheti. Ekaccassa hi āpāthagate ārammaṇe āvajjato tattha cittacetasikānaṃ paṭhamābhinipāto phasso taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusanto uppajjamāno pākaṭo hoti, ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantī uppajjamānā vedanā pākaṭā hoti, ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vijānantaṃ uppajjamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Iti tesaṃ tesaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena yathāpākaṭaṃ phassādimukhena tidhā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ katheti.
在这里,如果某人对触特别明显,他就会这样去把握:并不是只有触生起,与它一起,体验同一个所缘的受也生起,认取的想也生起,作意的思也生起,了别的识也生起。他就这样在以触为第五的诸法中去把握。如果某人对受特别明显,他也会这样去把握:并不是只有受生起,与它一起,接触着的触也生起,认取的想也生起,作意的思也生起,了别的识也生起。他就这样在以触为第五的诸法中去把握。如果某人对识特别明显,他也会这样去把握:并不是只有识生起,与它一起,接触同一个所缘的触也生起,体验的受也生起,认取的想也生起,作意的思也生起。他就这样在以触为第五的诸法中去把握。巴利
Tattha yassa phasso pākaṭo hoti, sopi ‘‘na kevalaṃ phassova uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ tadeva ārammaṇaṃ anubhavamānā vedanāpi uppajjati, sañjānamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa vedanā pākaṭā hoti, sopi ‘‘na kevalaṃ vedanāva uppajjati, tāya saddhiṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, sañjānamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi , vijānamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, sopi ‘‘na kevalaṃ viññāṇameva uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, anubhavamānā vedanāpi, sañjānamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti.
他这样观察:“这些以触为第五的法,是依靠什么而存在的?”然后清楚了知:“它们是依靠所依处而存在的。”所谓所依处,就是业所生的身体。经中就是针对这个而说:“而我的这个识,就依在这里、系在这里。”(《长部》1.235;《中部》2.252)从究竟意义来说,所依处就是四大种以及所造色。因此在这里,所依处是色,以触为第五的法是名,他这样只见到纯粹的名色。在这里,色是色蕴,名是四种无色蕴,所以正好只是五蕴。因为离开了名色就没有五蕴,离开了五蕴也没有名色。他再进一步探究:“这五蕴是以什么为因的?”于是了知:“是以无明等为因。”接着他又了知:“这只是缘以及缘所生之法,并没有另一个有情或人存在,纯粹只是一堆行的聚合而已。”于是,他就有因有缘的名色为所缘,把三相套上去,依照观修的次第不断思惟审察:“这是无常的、苦的、无我的。”他心里盼望着“今天、今天”就能通达。在这样的时刻,他得到适宜的气候、适宜的人、适宜的食物,或者适宜听法的条件,就以一个跏趺坐姿坐好,把观修推到顶点,最终安住在阿罗汉果。应当知道,这三个人的业处修法,一直到阿罗汉果为止,就是这样的。不过在这里,世尊是为了那些以受为入手而觉悟的人,随顺他们的根性,开示无色业处,所以从受的角度来说法。其中——巴利
So ‘‘ime phassapañcamakā dhammā kiṃnissitā’’ti upadhārento ‘‘vatthunissitā’’ti pajānāti. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idañca pana me viññāṇaṃ etthasitaṃ etthapaṭibaddha’’nti (dī. ni. 1.235; ma. ni. 2.252). So atthato bhūtā ceva upādārūpāni ca, evamettha vatthu rūpaṃ, phassapañcamakā nāmanti nāmarūpamattameva passati. Rūpañcettha rūpakkhandho, nāmaṃ cattāro arūpino khandhāti pañcakkhandhamattaṃ hoti. Nāmarūpavinimuttā hi pañcakkhandhā, pañcakkhandhavinimuttaṃ vā nāmarūpaṃ natthi. So ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā kiṃhetukā’’ti upaparikkhanto ‘‘avijjādihetukā’’ti, tato ‘‘paccayo ceva paccayuppannañca idaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthi, suddhasaṅkhārapuñjamattamevā’’ti sappaccayanāmarūpavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā’’ti sammasanto vicarati. So ‘‘ajja ajjā’’ti paṭivedhaṃ ākaṅkhamāno tathārūpe samaye utusappāyaṃ, puggalasappāyaṃ, bhojanasappāyaṃ, dhammassavanasappāyaṃ vā labhitvā ekapallaṅkena nisinnova vipassanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāti. Evaṃ imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idha pana bhagavā vedanāvasena bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Tattha –
相、依处、生起,以及随眠,同样地;
处、生起的时机、根,以及两种类别等。巴利
‘‘Lakkhaṇañca adhiṭṭhānaṃ, uppatti anusayo tathā; Ṭhānaṃ pavattikālo ca, indriyañca dvidhāditā’’ti. –
这一段属于附带说明,应当了解。其中,相在前面已经说过了。依处就是触。因为经中说触缘受,所以触是受的依处。正因如此,触作为受的依处,就用剥了皮的牛来作比喻。其中,能感受乐的触是乐受的依处,能感受苦的触是苦受的依处,能感受不苦不乐的触是不苦不乐受的依处,这里依处的意思是近因。那么,受是谁的依处呢?因为经中说受缘渴爱,所以受是渴爱的依处,因为受是所希求的状态。乐受是渴爱的依处暂且不说,另外两种受又怎么是呢?回答说:处于乐中的人尚且希求与之相似或更超胜的乐,何况正处于苦中的人呢?而不苦不乐受由于寂静,也被称为乐。因此,这三种受都是渴爱的依处。巴利
Idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ – tattha lakkhaṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Adhiṭṭhānanti phasso. ‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti hi vacanato phasso vedanāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā hi so vedanādhiṭṭhānabhāvato niccammagāvīupamāya upamito. Tattha sukhavedanīyo phasso sukhāya vedanāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ, dukkhavedanīyo phasso dukkhāya vedanāya, adukkhamasukhavedanīyo phasso adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ, āsannakāraṇanti attho. Vedanā kassa padaṭṭhānaṃ? ‘‘Vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti vacanato taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ abhipatthanīyabhāvato. Sukhā vedanā tāva taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ hotu, itarā pana kathanti? Vuccate sukhasamaṅgīpi tāva taṃsadisaṃ tato vā uttaritaraṃ sukhaṃ abhipattheti, kimaṅga pana dukkhasamaṅgībhūto. Adukkhamasukhā ca santabhāvena sukhamicceva vuccatīti tissopi vedanā taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
“生起”是指生起的原因。确实,作为可爱所缘的众生诸行,是乐受生起的原因;同样是这些行,作为不可爱所缘时,是苦受生起的原因;作为中性所缘时,是不苦不乐受生起的原因。而在这里,应当从果报和执取行相的角度来理解可爱与不可爱。巴利
Uppattīti uppattikāraṇaṃ. Iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtā hi sattasaṅkhārā sukhavedanāya uppattikāraṇaṃ, te eva aniṭṭhārammaṇabhūtā dukkhavedanāya, majjhattārammaṇabhūtā adukkhamasukhāya. Vipākato tadākāraggahaṇato cettha iṭṭhāniṭṭhatā veditabbā.
所谓随眠,就是在乐受、苦受、不苦不乐受这三种受中,贪随眠潜伏在乐受里,嗔随眠潜伏在苦受里,无明随眠潜伏在不苦不乐受里。世尊确实这样说过——巴利
Anusayoti imāsu tīsu vedanāsu sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anuseti, dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo anuseti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
贤友毗舍佉,对于乐受,贪随眠潜在。巴利
‘‘Sukhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.465).
在这里,见随眠和慢随眠应当归入贪那一类。因为执著邪见的人喜欢乐受,就以“常住”等说法死死抓住五取蕴不放;而慢这一类的人则不断念叨“我更好”之类的话来抬高自己。至于疑随眠,则应当归入无明那一类。正如《缘起分别》里说的:“以受为缘而有疑。”另外,随眠之所以在各种心相续中一直潜藏,是因为它没有被断除。所以,“对乐受,贪随眠随增”的意思是:因为还没有被道断除,一旦遇到合适的条件,贪就会生起,它就像睡在乐受里一样。这个道理也适用于其余几种随眠。巴利
Diṭṭhimānānusayā cettha rāgapakkhiyā kātabbā. Sukhābhinandanena hi diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘sassata’’ntiādinā sakkāye abhinivisanti, mānajātikā ca mānaṃ jappenti ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā. Vicikicchānusayo pana avijjāpakkhiko kātabbo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ paṭiccasamuppādavibhaṅge (vibha. 288-289) ‘‘vedanāpaccayā vicikicchā’’ti. Anusayānañca tattha tattha santāne appahīnabhāvena thāmagamanaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti maggena appahīnattā anurūpakāraṇalābhe uppajjanāraho rāgo, tattha sayito viya hotīti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi.
“处”指的是:身体和心是感受生起的地方。这确实说过:“当时,由身体接触所生的身乐,是舒服、快乐的感受。”(《法集论》449)“当时,由心接触所生的心乐,是舒服、快乐的感受。”(《法集论》471)巴利
Ṭhānanti kāyo cittañca vedanāya ṭhānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ tasmiṃ samaye kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ kāyasamphassajaṃ sātaṃ sukhaṃ vedayitaṃ (dha. sa. 449). Yaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cetasikaṃ sukhaṃ cetosamphassajaṃ sātaṃ sukhaṃ vedayita’’nti (dha. sa. 471) ca.
转起时,就是转起的刹那,也包括转起的过程。因为正是依据转起的刹那,乐受和苦受的乐性与苦性才得以确定。正如经中所说:巴利
Pavattikāloti pavattikkhaṇo, pavattanākalanañca. Pavattikkhaṇena hi sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ sukhadukkhabhāvo vavatthito. Yathāha –
贤友毗舍佉,乐受在持续时是乐,在变坏时是苦;贤友毗舍佉,苦受在持续时是苦,在变坏时是乐。巴利
‘‘Sukhā kho, āvuso visākha, vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā, dukkhā kho, āvuso visākha, vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465).
乐受存在就是乐,乐受不存在就是苦;苦受存在就是苦,苦受不存在就是乐。对于不苦不乐受,则要观察它生起时是否有扰动、是否被了知,由此判定它的苦乐属性。这一点也已经说过:巴利
Sukhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo sukhaṃ, natthibhāvo dukkhaṃ. Dukkhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo dukkhaṃ, natthibhāvo sukhanti attho. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya pavattanākalanaṃ pavattiyā ākalanaṃ anākalanañca jānanaṃ ajānanañca sukhadukkhabhāvavavatthānaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
贤友毗舍佉,不苦不乐受,有知则是乐,无知则是苦。巴利
‘‘Adukkhamasukhā kho, āvuso visākha, vedanā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā’’ti.
“根”:这些以乐受等为首的三受——乐根、苦根、喜根、忧根、舍根——依“增上”之义而称为根,共分为五种。身体上的舒适感称为乐根,不舒适感称为苦根;心理上的舒适感称为喜根,不舒适感称为忧根;这两者都不是的、既不舒适也不不舒适的,称为舍根。那么这里有什么理由呢——身心的乐受和苦受被分别说为“乐根、喜根”和“苦根、忧根”,为什么对不苦不乐受不这样分别呢?因为没有差别。乐受和苦受各有饶益和逼迫的性质,对身体和心以不同方式产生饶益和逼迫的作用,而不苦不乐受并非如此,所以因为没有差别就不作分别。巴利
Indriyanti etā hi sukhādayo tisso vedanā sukhindriyaṃ, dukkhindriyaṃ, somanassindriyaṃ, domanassindriyaṃ, upekkhindriyanti adhipateyyaṭṭhena indriyato pañcadhā vibhattā. Kāyikañhi sātaṃ sukhindriyanti vuttaṃ, asātaṃ dukkhindriyanti. Mānasaṃ pana sātaṃ somanassindriyanti vuttaṃ, asātaṃ domanassindriyanti. Duvidhampi neva sātaṃ nāsātaṃ upekkhindriyanti. Kiṃ panettha kāraṇaṃ – yathā kāyikacetasikā sukhadukkhavedanā ‘‘sukhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ, dukkhindriyaṃ domanassindriya’’nti vibhajitvā vuttā, na evaṃ adukkhamasukhāti? Bhedābhāvato. Yatheva hi anuggahasabhāvā bādhakasabhāvā ca sukhadukkhavedanā aññathā kāyassa anuggahaṃ bādhakañca karonti, cittassa ca aññathā, na evaṃ adukkhamasukhā, tasmā bhedābhāvato vibhajitvā na vuttā.
有两种等:一切受,从感受这一意义来说虽然只有一种,但按所依的不同就有两种——身的受和心的受;按乐、苦、不苦不乐分,就有三种;按四生分,就有四种;按根和投生趣分,就有五种;按门和所缘分,就有六种;按与七识界相应分,就有七种;按以八种世间法为缘分,就有八种;乐受等每一种再按过去等的区分,就有九种;这些又按内和外的区别,就有十八种。同样,在色等六种所缘中,每一种所缘都按乐受等分成乐、苦、不苦不乐三种,这样也成了十八种。或者,按十八种意近行来说,就是十八种。经中确实这样说:巴利
Dvidhāditāti sabbāpi hi vedanā vedayitaṭṭhena ekavidhāpi nissayabhedena duvidhā – kāyikā cetasikāti, sukhā, dukkhā, adukkhamasukhāti tividhā, catuyonivasena catubbidhā, indriyavasena, gativasena ca pañcavidhā, dvāravasena ca ārammaṇavasena ca chabbidhā, sattaviññāṇadhātuyogena sattavidhā, aṭṭhalokadhammapaccayatāya aṭṭhavidhā, sukhādīnaṃ paccekaṃ atītādivibhāgena navavidhā, tā eva ajjhattabahiddhābhedena aṭṭhārasavidhā, tathā rūpādīsu chasu ārammaṇesu ekekasmiṃ sukhādivasena tisso tisso katvā. Rūpārammaṇasmiñhi sukhāpi uppajjati, dukkhāpi, adukkhamasukhāpi, evaṃ itaresupi. Atha vā aṭṭhārasamanopavicāravasena aṭṭhārasa. Vuttañhi –
用眼睛看到色之后,他思察能引发喜悦的色、能引发忧愁的色、能引发舍的色;用耳朵听到声音之后……(中略)……用心识知法之后,他思察能引发喜悦的法、能引发忧愁的法、能引发舍的法。巴利
‘‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā somanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ, upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati, sotena saddaṃ…pe… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya somanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ, upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicaratī’’ti (a. ni. 3.62).
这样就有十八种。同样地,六种依于在家的喜、六种依于在家的忧、六种依于在家的舍,以及六种依于出离的喜、忧、舍等,这样就是三十六种。过去有三十六种,未来有三十六种,现在有三十六种,加起来也就有一百零八种。在这里应当这样理解“二种等”的含义。巴利
Evaṃ aṭṭhārasavidhā honti. Tathā cha gehassitāni somanassāni, cha gehassitāni domanassāni, cha gehassitā upekkhā, tathā nekkhammassitā somanassādayoti evaṃ chattiṃsavidhā . Atīte chattiṃsa, anāgate chattiṃsa, paccuppanne chattiṃsāti aṭṭhuttarasatampi bhavanti. Evamettha dvidhāditā veditabbāti.
在偈颂中,“入定者”是指以近行定和安止定这两种定而入定。以此显示他致力于修止。“正知者”是指具备义正知等四种正知而正知。以此显示他致力于修观。“具念者”是指保持正念的人。以此显示依止观之道,诸法走向修习圆满。以此显示他具足这些。“了知受”是指:他如实了知“这些是受,这些是若干受”,从自性上、从分类上,以及从“无常、苦、变易法”等无常等特相上,在前期阶段以三种遍知而遍知,增长观之后,以圣道的遍知通达而了知。“受的集起”是指集谛。“这些在哪里灭”到这里是指这些受在哪里灭,那就是灭谛。“导向灭尽”是指他了知导向受灭尽的圣道,这是关联。“由于受的灭尽”是指如此通达四谛,以圣道使受不再生起而灭尽。“无饥、般涅槃”是指无有渴爱、已断尽渴爱,依烦恼般涅槃与蕴般涅槃而成为般涅槃者。巴利
Gāthāsu samāhitoti upacārappanābhedena samādhinā samāhito. Tena samathabhāvanānuyogaṃ dasseti. Sampajānoti sātthakasampajaññādinā catubbidhena sampajaññena sampajāno. Tena vipassanānuyogaṃ dasseti. Satoti satokārī. Tena samathavipassanānayena dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Tena samannāgatattaṃ dasseti. Vedanā ca pajānātīti ‘‘imā vedanā, ettakā vedanā’’ti sabhāvato vibhāgato ‘‘aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’’ti aniccādilakkhaṇato ca pubbabhāge tīhi pariññāhi parijānanto vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ariyamaggena pariññāpaṭivedhena pajānāti. Vedanānañca sambhavanti samudayasaccaṃ. Yattha cetā nirujjhantīti ettāvatā vedanā yattha nirujjhanti, taṃ nirodhasaccaṃ. Khayagāminanti vedanānaṃ khayagāminaṃ ariyamaggañca pajānātīti sambandho. Vedanānaṃkhayāti evaṃ cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhantena ariyamaggena vedanānaṃ anuppādanirodhā. Nicchāto parinibbutoti nittaṇho, pahīnataṇho, kilesaparinibbānena, khandhaparinibbānena ca parinibbuto hoti.
第4个《第二受经》的注释巴利
4. Dutiyavedanāsuttavaṇṇanā
53 53. 在第四项中,“应当从苦的角度来看”:乐受应当以智慧之眼,从变坏苦的角度来看它是苦的。“应当从箭的角度来看”:苦受因为难以拔出、向内刺入、逼迫伤害,具有苦苦的性质,所以应当把它看作箭。“是无常的”:不苦不乐受因为生起后便消失、有生有灭、只是暂时存在、与恒常相反,所以应当把它看作无常。不过在这里,虽然一切受都应当从无常的角度来看,但相比观察无常,观察苦更能特别有力地成为引发离贪的因,导师为了说明这个道理,才说:“诸比丘,乐受应当从苦的角度来看,苦受应当从箭的角度来看。”另一种说法是:凡夫总是执著于乐受,为了让他们生起厌离,才那样说。由此,乐受依行苦而有的苦性就被显示出来了。当说“凡是无常的,就是苦”时,这是依变坏苦而说“诸比丘,乐受应当从苦的角度来看”;当人们心里想“乐受尚且如此,苦受又该怎样呢?”时,这是依苦苦而说“苦受应当从箭的角度来看”;至于不苦不乐受,它正是依行苦而为苦,为了说明这一点,便说“不苦不乐受应当从无常的角度来看”。巴利
53. Catutthe dukkhato daṭṭhabbāti sukhavedanā vipariṇāmadukkhavasena dukkhāti ñāṇacakkhunā passitabbā. Sallato daṭṭhabbāti dunnīharaṇaṭṭhena antotudanaṭṭhena pīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhadukkhabhāvena dukkhavedanā sallanti passitabbā. Aniccatoti hutvā abhāvato udayabbayavantato tāvakālikato niccapaṭipakkhato ca adukkhamasukhā vedanā aniccāti passitabbā. Kāmañcettha sabbāpi vedanā aniccato passitabbā, aniccadassanato pana sātisayaṃ virāganimittaṃ dukkhadassananti imamatthaṃ dassento satthā ‘‘sukhā, bhikkhave, vedanā dukkhato daṭṭhabbā, dukkhā vedanā sallato daṭṭhabbā’’ti āha. Atha vā yattha puthujjanā sukhābhinivesino, tattha nibbedajananatthaṃ tathā vuttaṃ. Tenassā saṅkhāradukkhatāya dukkhabhāvo dassito. Yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhanti vipariṇāmadukkhatāya ‘‘sukhā, bhikkhave, vedanā dukkhato daṭṭhabbā’’ti vatvā ‘‘sukhāpi tāva edisī, dukkhā nu kho kīdisī’’ti cintentānaṃ dukkhadukkhatāya ‘‘dukkhā vedanā sallato daṭṭhabbā’’ti āha, itarā pana saṅkhāradukkhatāya eva dukkhāti dassento ‘‘adukkhamasukhā vedanā aniccato daṭṭhabbā’’ti avoca.
在这里,通过“乐受应当看作苦”这一句,指出了断除贪的方法。因为贪的随眠总是潜伏在乐受里。通过“苦受应当看作箭”这一句,指出了断除嗔的方法。因为嗔的随眠总是潜伏在苦受里。通过“不苦不乐受应当看作无常”这一句,指出了断除痴的方法。因为无明的随眠总是潜伏在不苦不乐受里。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘sukhā vedanā dukkhato daṭṭhabbā’’ti etena rāgassa samugghātanūpāyo dassito. Sukhavedanāya hi rāgānusayo anuseti. ‘‘Dukkhā vedanā sallato daṭṭhabbā’’ti etena dosassa samugghātanūpāyo dassito. Dukkhavedanāya hi paṭighānusayo anuseti. ‘‘Adukkhamasukhā vedanā aniccato daṭṭhabbā’’ti etena mohassa samugghātanūpāyo dassito. Adukkhamasukhavedanāya hi avijjānusayo anuseti.
同样地,第一句说明了断除渴爱这一烦恼,因为乐受是贪著产生的原因;第二句说明了断除恶行这一烦恼,因为对苦不能如实了知的人,为了逃避苦而造作恶行;第三句说明了断除邪见这一烦恼,因为以无常来看待的人没有邪见,而邪见以无明为原因,不苦不乐受也以无明为原因。或者,第一句是对变坏苦的遍知,第二句是对苦苦的遍知,第三句是对行苦的遍知。或者,第一句是对可爱所缘的遍知,第二句是对不可爱所缘的遍知,第三句是对中性所缘的遍知——因为当那些作为所缘的法已经离染时,所缘本身也就离染了。又或者应当这样理解:第一句通过举示断除贪,显示了由苦随观而生的无愿解脱;第二句通过举示断除嗔,显示了由无常随观而生的无相解脱;第三句通过举示断除痴,显示了由无我随观而生的空解脱。巴利
Tathā paṭhamena taṇhāsaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ dassitaṃ tassa sukhassādahetukattā, dutiyena duccaritasaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ. Yathābhūtañhi dukkhaṃ aparijānantā tassa pariharaṇatthaṃ duccaritaṃ caranti. Tatiyena diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ aniccato passantassa diṭṭhisaṃkilesābhāvato avijjānimittattā diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa, avijjānimittañca adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Paṭhamena vā vipariṇāmadukkhapariññā, dutiyena dukkhadukkhapariññā, tatiyena saṅkhāradukkhapariññā. Paṭhamena vā iṭṭhārammaṇapariññā, dutiyena aniṭṭhārammaṇapariññā, tatiyena majjhattārammaṇapariññā. Virattesu hi tadārammaṇadhammesu ārammaṇānipi virattāneva hontīti. Paṭhamena vā rāgappahānaparikittanena dukkhānupassanāya appaṇihitavimokkho dīpito hoti, dutiyena dosappahānaparikittanena aniccānupassanāya animittavimokkho, tatiyena mohappahānaparikittanena anattānupassanāya suññatavimokkho dīpito hotīti veditabbaṃ.
“Yato”的意思是“当……时”,或者“由于”。“圣者”是指因为远离烦恼而安住于清净的人。“正见者”是指对一切感受,或者对四谛,都能不颠倒地看见的人。“他断除了渴爱”是指以最上之道断除了以受为根本的渴爱,彻底无余地断尽。“他消除了结缚”是指翻转了十种结缚,把它们彻底连根拔除。“正确地”是指由因、由缘。“由于慢的现观”是指对慢的见现观,或者断现观。因为阿罗汉道在作用层面上能看见慢,这就是对慢的见现观;而慢被此道看见之后,就在那时立刻被断除,就像被见毒所见的众生的性命一样,这就是对慢的断现观。“他作了苦的边际”意思是:如此以阿罗汉道看见慢、断除慢之后,对于一切轮回之苦的顶点——也就是所谓的边际,他作出了界限、作出了终结;也就是说,只剩下最后一生所依的一点点苦。巴利
Yatoti yadā, yasmā vā. Ariyoti kilesehi ārakā ṭhito parisuddho. Sammaddasoti sabbāsaṃ vedanānaṃ catunnampi vā saccānaṃ aviparītadassāvī. Acchecchi taṇhanti vedanāmūlakaṃ taṇhaṃ aggamaggena chindi, anavasesato samucchindi. Vivattayi saṃyojananti dasavidhaṃ saṃyojanaṃ parivattayi, nimmūlamakāsi. Sammāti hetunā kāraṇena. Mānābhisamayāti mānassa dassanābhisamayā, pahānābhisamayā vā. Arahattamaggo hi kiccavasena mānaṃ passati, ayamassa dassanābhisamayo. Tena diṭṭho pana so tāvadeva pahīyati diṭṭhavisena diṭṭhasattānaṃ jīvitaṃ viya, ayamassa pahānābhisamayo. Antamakāsi dukkhassāti evaṃ arahattamaggena mānassa diṭṭhattā pahīnattā ca sabbasseva vaṭṭadukkhassa koṭisaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ paricchedaṃ parivaṭumaṃ akāsi, antimasamussayamattāvasesaṃ dukkhamakāsīti vuttaṃ hoti.
在这些偈颂中,“凡”指的是那位圣弟子。“他见”就是看见,意思是他把乐受看成苦。因为乐受就像掺了毒的食物,吃的时候给人乐味,可一旦发生变化,就纯粹是苦了。“他见苦受为箭”:就像箭在正要刺入身体、已经刺入身体、以及被拔出来的时候,都只会造成逼迫和伤害;同样,苦受在生起时、持续存在时、坏灭时,也完全只是逼迫伤害,所以他把苦受看成像箭一样。“他见不苦不乐受为无常”:因为不苦不乐受相比苦受和乐受,本性是寂静的,属于更寂静的一类,但它仍然是无常的,所以他把不苦不乐受看作无常。巴利
Gāthāsu yoti yo ariyasāvako. Addāti addasa, sukhavedanaṃ dukkhato passīti attho. Sukhavedanā hi visamissaṃ viya bhojanaṃ paribhogakāle assādaṃ dadamānā vipariṇāmakāle dukkhāyevāti. Dukkhamaddakkhi sallatoti yathā sallaṃ sarīraṃ anupavisantampi paviṭṭhampi uddhariyamānampi pīḷameva janeti, evaṃ dukkhavedanā uppajjamānāpi ṭhitippattāpi bhijjamānāpi vibādhatiyevāti taṃ sallato vipassīti vuttaṃ. Addakkhinaṃ aniccatoti sukhadukkhato santasabhāvatāya santatarajātikampi naṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ aniccantikatāya aniccato passi.
那位真正正见的人,就是能如实看见三种受是苦等等的人。Yato 的意思是“因为”。Tattha 的意思是“在受上”。Vimuccati 的意思是“通过断除而解脱”。这里说的是:因为他看见乐受等是苦等等,所以就在那受上,通过舍断与它相连的欲贪,以断除的方式而解脱。因为文中说了 yaṃ 这个词,就应当引出 taṃ 这个词来配合。或者另一种解释:Yato 的意思是以身、语、意而调御、已调御,或者已精进、已努力,所以叫 yato,意思是“已伸展”。Abhiññāvositoti 的意思是:通过感受为门,修习四谛业处,由第六神通达到究竟,所作已办。Santoti 的意思是通过平息贪等烦恼而寂静。Yogātigoti 的意思是已超越欲轭等四种轭。Ubhayahitamunanato munīti 的意思是:因为谋求自他双方的利益,所以是牟尼。巴利
Sa ve sammaddasoti so evaṃ tissannaṃ vedanānaṃ sammadeva dukkhādito dassāvī. Yatoti yasmā. Tatthāti vedanāyaṃ. Vimuccatīti samucchedavimuttivasena vimuccati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā sukhādīni dukkhādito addasa, tasmā tattha vedanāya tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena samucchedavasena vimuccati. Yaṃsadde hi vutte taṃsaddo āharitvā vattabbo. Atha vā yatoti kāyavācācittehi saṃyato yatatto, yatati padahatīti vā yato, āyatatīti attho. Abhiññāvositoti vedanāmukhena catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā chaṭṭhābhiññāya pariyosito katakicco. Santoti rāgādikilesavūpasamena santo. Yogātigoti kāmayogādiṃ catubbidhampi yogaṃ atikkanto. Ubhayahitamunanato munīti.
5. 第一寻求经的注释巴利
5. Paṭhamaesanāsuttavaṇṇanā
54 第五种,“寻求”:就是寻找、遍求、探索。为了详细说明它们,所以说了“欲寻求”等。其中,“欲寻求”:就是对各种欲乐的寻求,或者以欲为名的寻求,就是欲寻求。这就是所说的:巴利
54. Pañcame esanāti gavesanā pariyesanā magganā. Tā vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmesanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāmesanāti kāmānaṃ esanā, kāmasaṅkhātā vā esanā kāmesanā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
在这里,什么是欲寻求?就是对诸欲的欲贪、欲染、欲喜、欲爱、欲渴、欲迷、欲黏着,这称为欲寻求。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā kāmesanā? Yo kāmesu kāmacchando, kāmarāgo, kāmanandī, kāmasneho , kāmapipāsā, kāmamucchā, kāmajjhosānaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati kāmesanā’’ti (vibha. 919).
所以,欲贪应该被理解为对欲的寻求。对有的寻求也是同样的道理。经中也这样说过:巴利
Tasmā kāmarāgo kāmesanāti veditabbo. Bhavesanāyapi eseva nayo. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
在这里,什么是有寻求?对种种生命存在状态的欲求……乃至对有(存在)的执迷,这就称为有寻求。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā bhavesanā? Yo bhavesu bhavacchando…pe… bhavajjhosānaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati bhavesanā’’ti (vibha. 919).
因此,对存在的渴求,也就是对色界和无色界存在的希求,应当理解为“有寻求”。对梵行的寻求,就是“梵行寻求”。正如所说的:巴利
Tasmā bhavesanarāgo rūpārūpabhavapatthanā bhavesanāti veditabbā. Brahmacariyassa esanā brahmacariyesanā. Yathāha –
在这里,什么是梵行寻求?就是这样的见解:世间是常,或世间是无常,或世间有边,或世间无边,或命就是身,或命与身不同,或如来死后存在,或如来死后不存在,或如来死后既存在又不存在,或如来死后既非存在也非不存在。凡是这一类见解、见执、见丛、见林、见荒漠、见扭曲、见动摇、见结缚,以及执取、执持、固执、把持,邪道、邪路、邪性、外道的立足处、颠倒执取,这就称为梵行寻求。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā brahmacariyesanā? Sassato lokoti vā, asassato lokoti vā, antavā lokoti vā, anantavā lokoti vā, taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti vā, aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīranti vā, hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, yā evarūpā diṭṭhi diṭṭhigataṃ diṭṭhigahanaṃ diṭṭhikantāro diṭṭhivisūkāyikaṃ diṭṭhivipphanditaṃ diṭṭhisaññojanaṃ gāho patiṭṭhāho abhiniveso parāmāso kummaggo micchāpatho micchattaṃ titthāyatanaṃ vipariyesaggāho, ayaṃ vuccati brahmacariyesanā’’ti (vibha. 919).
所以,应该知道:把执持邪见的梵行当作梵行来寻求,就是“见的梵行寻求”。到这里,就已经说明了贪和见就是寻求。而且不只是贪和见才是寻求,与它们同类的业也是寻求。这一点也有经上说:巴利
Tasmā diṭṭhigatasammatassa brahmacariyassa esanā diṭṭhibrahmacariyesanāti veditabbāti. Ettāvatā rāgadiṭṭhiyo esanāti dassitā honti. Na kevalañca rāgadiṭṭhiyova esanā, tadekaṭṭhaṃ kammampi. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
在这里,什么是欲的寻求?欲贪,以及和它同属一类的不善身业、语业、意业,这称为欲的寻求。在这里,什么是有(存在)的寻求?有贪,以及和它同属一类的不善身业、语业、意业,这称为有的寻求。在这里,什么是梵行的寻求?执取边见的邪见,以及和它同属一类的不善身业、语业、意业,这称为梵行的寻求。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā kāmesanā? Kāmarāgo tadekaṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati kāmesanā. Tattha katamā bhavesanā? Bhavarāgo tadekaṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati bhavesanā. Tattha katamā brahmacariyesanā? Antaggāhikā diṭṭhi tadekaṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, manokammaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati brahmacariyesanā’’ti (vibha. 919) –
应当这样理解这三种寻求。巴利
Evametā tisso esanā veditabbā.
在偈颂中,“生起”是指无明等以及渴爱,它们是这些寻求生起的因,所以叫“生起”,也就是“集”的意思。应知“它们在那里灭尽”:梵行的寻求由初道灭尽,欲的寻求由不还道灭尽,有的寻求由阿拉汉道灭尽。其余内容按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Gāthāsu sambhavanti ettha esanānaṃ uppattihetubhūtā avijjādayo taṇhā cāti sambhavo, samudayoti attho. Yatthacetā nirujjhantīti brahmacariyesanā paṭhamamaggena nirujjhati, kāmesanā anāgāmimaggena, bhavesanā arahattamaggena nirujjhatīti veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
6. 《第二寻求经》的注释巴利
6. Dutiyaesanāsuttavaṇṇanā
55 第六经中“与梵行的寻求一起”,意思是与梵行的寻求一同。这里是用省略格尾的方式来表达,或者也可以说,这是把具格的意义用主格来表达。也就是说:与梵行的寻求一起,还有欲的寻求、有的寻求,一共是三种寻求。为了从它本身的样子来显示梵行的寻求,经文说“如此真实执,见处为积聚”。它的意思是:执取“如此是真实”,就是“如此真实执”。这显示了邪见生起的方式,即“唯此是真实,其余皆虚妄”。诸见本身就是一切不幸的原因,所以叫“见处”。经中也这样说:“比丘们,我说邪见是最严重的过失。”当这些见不断增长,又由于贪等烦恼的积聚时,也叫“积聚”。因此,那些执著“只有这个是真的,别的都是假的”、陷入邪执、成为一切不幸的原因、成为烦恼和苦积聚之因的诸见,就被称为“梵行的寻求”。应当知道,这里是从活动方式和生起方式两方面显示了梵行的寻求。巴利
55. Chaṭṭhe brahmacariyesanā sahāti brahmacariyesanāya saddhiṃ. Vibhattilopena hi ayaṃ niddeso, karaṇatthe vā etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘brahmacariyesanāya saddhiṃ kāmesanā, bhavesanāti tisso esanā’’ti. Tāsu brahmacariyesanaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘itisaccaparāmāso, diṭṭhiṭṭhānā samussayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassattho – iti evaṃ saccanti parāmāso itisaccaparāmāso. Idameva saccaṃ, moghamaññanti diṭṭhiyā pavattiākāraṃ dasseti. Diṭṭhiyo eva sabbānatthahetubhāvato diṭṭhiṭṭhānā. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ, bhikkhave, vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310). Tā eva ca uparūpari vaḍḍhamānā lobhādikilesasamussayena ca samussayā, ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti micchābhinivisamānā sabbānatthahetubhūtā kilesadukkhūpacayahetubhūtā ca diṭṭhiyo brahmacariyesanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena pavattiākārato nibbattito ca brahmacariyesanā dassitāti veditabbā.
对一切贪都已离染:是指对一切欲贪和有贪都已离染。正因为如此,他已在被称为渴爱灭尽的涅槃中解脱,所以是渴爱灭尽而解脱的阿拉汉。诸寻求已彻底舍离:是指欲的寻求和有 的寻求都已彻底舍离、断除。诸见处已被根除:是指被称为梵行寻求的诸见处,也在最初之道中就被彻底根除。由于诸寻求的灭尽:是指这三种寻求这样灭尽——不再生起的灭尽——因为烦恼已被破除。比丘:则是在一切处都无所希求的人。无期望者:又因为与见相应的疑和犹豫之箭已被断除,所以也被称为无疑惑者。巴利
Sabbarāgavirattassāti sabbehi kāmarāgabhavarāgehi virattassa. Tato eva taṇhakkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne vimuttattā taṇhakkhayavimuttino arahato. Esanā paṭinissaṭṭhāti kāmesanā, bhavesanā ca sabbaso nissaṭṭhā pahīnā. Diṭṭhiṭṭhānā samūhatāti brahmacariyesanāsaṅkhātā diṭṭhiṭṭhānā ca paṭhamamaggeneva samugghātitā. Esanānaṃ khayāti evametāsaṃ tissannaṃ esanānaṃ khayā anuppādanirodhā bhinnakilesattā. Bhikkhūti ca sabbaso āsābhā vā. Nirāsoti ca diṭṭhekaṭṭhassa vicikicchākathaṃkathāsallassa pahīnattā akathaṃkathīti ca vuccatīti.
7-8. 两篇漏经的注释巴利
7-8. Āsavasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
56-57 56-57. 在第七中,“欲漏”是指对诸欲的漏,或者称为欲的漏,所以叫欲漏。但从含义上说,欲贪以及对色等的欢喜,就是欲漏。对色界和无色界存在的欲贪、对禅那的贪爱、与常见相应的贪,以及对存在的渴求,这些是“有漏”。无明本身就是“无明漏”。巴利
56-57. Sattame kāmāsavoti kāmesu āsavo, kāmasaṅkhāto vā āsavo kāmāsavo , atthato pana kāmarāgo rūpādiabhirati ca kāmāsavo. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavapatthanā ca bhavāsavo. Avijjāva avijjāsavo.
诸漏亦在此生起:不如理作意,以及无明等烦恼,就是诸漏的生起。因为这样说过——巴利
Āsavānañca sambhavanti ettha ayonisomanasikāro avijjādayo ca kilesā āsavānaṃ sambhavo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,如果一个人不如理作意,未生起的诸漏就会生起,已生起的诸漏就会增长。巴利
‘‘Ayoniso, bhikkhave, manasikaroto anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjanti, uppannā ca āsavā pavaḍḍhantī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.15).
比丘们,无明是不善法成就的前导,无惭和无愧然后也。巴利
‘‘Avijjā, bhikkhave, pubbaṅgamā akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā anvadeva ahirikaṃ anottappa’’nti (itivu. 40) ca.
“导向灭尽之道”,就是导向诸漏灭尽的圣道。其中,欲漏由不还道断除,有漏和无明漏则由阿罗汉道断除。他们说,就像欲取一样,欲漏也由最高之道(阿罗汉道)所当断除。其余内容按前面所说的方式理解。第八经中没有新的内容。巴利
Maggañca khayagāminanti āsavānaṃ khayagāminaṃ ariyamaggañca. Tattha kāmāsavo anāgāmimaggena pahīyati, bhavāsavo avijjāsavo ca arahattamaggena. Kāmupādānaṃ viya kāmāsavopi aggamaggavajjhoti ca vadanti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Aṭṭhame apubbaṃ natthi.
第9项《渴爱经》注释巴利
9. Taṇhāsuttavaṇṇanā
58 第九经里,因为具有渴求的特性,所以叫渴爱;或者说,它对色等所缘境生起渴求,所以叫渴爱。现在为了把它分别显示出来,就说了“欲爱”等。其中,属于五种欲功德所摄的贪,就是欲爱。对色界、无色界存在的欲贪、对禅那的喜爱、与常见一起生起的贪,以及以存在为对象的渴求,就是有爱。与断灭见一起生起的贪,就是无有爱。另外,除了后面这两种渴爱,其余一切渴爱都只是欲爱。正如经中所说:巴利
58. Navame taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā, rūpādivisayaṃ tasatīti vā taṇhā. Idāni taṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmataṇhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmataṇhā. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavavasena patthanā ca bhavataṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo vibhavataṇhā. Apica pacchimataṇhādvayaṃ ṭhapetvā sesā sabbāpi taṇhā kāmataṇhā eva. Yathāha –
在这里,什么是有爱?与常见一起生起的贪、染着、心的染着——这称为有爱。在这里,什么是无有爱?与断灭见一起生起的贪、染着、心的染着——这称为无有爱。剩下的渴爱就是欲爱。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo sārāgo cittassa sārāgo – ayaṃ vuccati bhavataṇhā. Tattha katamā vibhavataṇhā? Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo sārāgo cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati vibhavataṇhā . Avasesā taṇhā kāmataṇhā’’ti (vibha. 916).
这三种渴爱——色渴爱……乃至法渴爱——按所缘对象的类别来分,每一种各有六种,这样就成为十八种。它们在内在的色等所缘上有十八种,在外在的色等所缘上有十八种,合计三十六种。然后,过去的三十六种、未来的三十六种、现在的三十六种,按时间类别来分,就成为一百零八种。如果再加以归纳,不涉及时间的区分来取,就只有三十六种;不对色等作内外的区分,就只有十八种;只按色等所缘的类别来取,就只有六种;连所缘的类别也不作区分来取,就只有三种。巴利
Imā ca tisso taṇhā rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhāti visayabhedato paccekaṃ chabbidhāti katvā aṭṭhārasa honti. Tā ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, iti atītā chattiṃsa, anāgatā chattiṃsa, paccuppannā chattiṃsāti vibhāgato aṭṭhasataṃ honti. Puna saṅgahe kariyamāne kālabhedaṃ anāmasitvā gayhamānā chattiṃseva honti, rūpādīnaṃ ajjhattikabāhiravibhāge akariyamāne aṭṭhāraseva, rūpādiārammaṇavibhāgamatte gayhamāne chaḷeva, ārammaṇavibhāgampi akatvā gayhamānā tissoyeva hontīti.
在偈颂中,“以渴爱之轭”是指以被称为渴爱的轭,也就是欲轭和有轭。“相连”是指相连接,或者被系缚于有等之中。因此说“对有与非有心染着”,意思是心无论对小有还是大有都粘着。或者,“有”是常见,“非有”是断灭见。因此,“对有与非有”就是指在常见和断灭见中,有情那颗粘着、系缚的心。这就显示了有爱和无有爱。在这个解释方案中,应当知道“以渴爱之轭”这句话只显示了欲爱。那些被轭系缚的人就是魔罗的:那些处于这种状态的人,被名为魔罗套索的轭所系缚、所捆绑。因为贪染就被称为魔罗之轭、魔罗之套索。正如所说:巴利
Gāthāsu taṇhāyogenāti taṇhāsaṅkhātena yogena, kāmayogena, bhavayogena ca. Saṃyuttāti sambandhā, bhavādīsu saṃyojitā vā. Tenevāha ‘‘rattacittā bhavābhave’’ti. Khuddake ceva mahante ca bhave laggacittāti attho. Atha vā bhavoti sassatadiṭṭhi, abhavoti ucchedadiṭṭhi. Tasmā bhavābhave sassatucchedadiṭṭhīsu sattavisattacittāti. Etena bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhā ca dassitā. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘taṇhāyogenā’’ti iminā kāmataṇhāva dassitāti veditabbā. Te yogayuttā mārassāti te evaṃbhūtā puggalā mārassa pāsasaṅkhātena yogena yuttā baddhā. Rāgo hi mārayogo mārapāsoti vuccati. Yathāha –
那在虚空中游走的套索,也就是这个在心意中游走的心;
我要用这个来折磨你,沙门,你逃不出我的手掌心。巴利
‘‘Antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso; Tena taṃ bādhayissāmi, na me samaṇa mokkhasī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.151; mahāva. 33);
不被四种轭所折磨,所以叫“轭安稳”,也就是涅槃和阿罗汉果。因为没有证得这个,所以就是“不得轭安稳的人”。由于上上下下不断生起烦恼和种种造作,所以叫“人”,即有情。在色等对象上贪著、被绑住,所以叫“有情”。巴利
Catūhi yogehi anupaddutattā yogakkhemaṃ, nibbānaṃ arahattañca, tassa anadhigamena ayogakkhemino. Uparūpari kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ jananato janā, pāṇino. Rūpādīsu sattā visattāti sattā.
诸蕴的次第,以及界与处的次第;
它不间断地持续运转,这就叫作轮回。巴利
‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti. –
像这样,他们就在被称为诸蕴等法反复生起的轮回中流转,无法从那里解脱。为什么?因为他们被渴爱的束缚所系。他们是“走向生与死者”,也就是一再地趋向生与死的人。到这里为止,先显示了流转;现在为了显示还灭,而说了“而那些断除渴爱者”这一偈。这一偈依照前面所说的方式,很容易理解。巴利
Evaṃ vuttaṃ khandhādīnaṃ aparāparuppattisaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāraṃ gacchanti, tato na muccanti. Kasmā? Taṇhāyogayuttattā . Jātimaraṇagāmino punappunaṃ jananamaraṇasseva upagamanasīlāti. Ettāvatā vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca taṇhaṃ pahantvānā’’ti gāthamāha. Sā heṭṭhā vuttanayattā suviññeyyāva.
第10篇《魔罗领域经》的注释巴利
10. Māradheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
59 59. 第十经是怎么来的呢?据说有一天,导师被许多有学比丘围绕着坐在一起,他观察了这些人的根性与意乐之后,为了激发他们向上追求更殊胜的成就,便赞叹无学的境界,说了这部经。其中,“超越”等词的大意是:“超越”就是越过、征服。“魔罗之境”就是魔罗的领域、他的势力范围。“如同太阳”:就像太阳摆脱了云雾等杂染,具备神通、威力、光明这三种品质,升上天空时,越过、征服、驱散虚空中一切黑暗,然后照耀、放光、炽燃;同样,漏已尽的比丘具备三种法,摆脱一切杂染,征服了称为魔罗之境的三界诸法之流转后,朗然照耀。巴利
59. Dasamassa kā uppatti? Ekadivasaṃ kira satthā sekkhabahulāya parisāya parivuto nisinno tesaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ oloketvā upari visesādhigamāya ussāhaṃ janetuṃ asekkhabhūmiṃ thomento idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi. Tattha atikkammātiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – atikkamma atikkamitvā abhibhavitvā. Māradheyyaṃ mārassa visayaṃ issariyaṭṭhānaṃ. Ādiccova yathā ādicco abbhādiupakkilesavimutto attano iddhiyā ānubhāvena tejasāti tīhi guṇehi samannāgato nabhaṃ abbhussakkamāno sabbaṃ ākāsagataṃ tamaṃ atikkamma atikkamitvā abhibhavitvā vidhamitvā virocati, obhāsati, tapati; evameva khīṇāsavo bhikkhu tīhi dhammehi samannāgato sabbupakkilesavimutto māradheyyasaṅkhātaṃ tebhūmakadhammappavattaṃ abhibhavitvā virocatīti.
对于“无学”这个词,这里的意思是:在诸学处中生起的,就是有学;或者说,属于七种有学的,就是有学;又或者说,因为还没有完成修学,自己仍在修学的,就是有学——这指的是诸道法以及下面三种果位的法。至于最高果位的法,因为再没有需要修学的东西了,所以不是有学,而是无学。要知道,凡是有可能被怀疑为有学的地方,这里就加以否定;因此在世间法和涅槃中,应该看到并不会出现“不能称为无学”的过失。因为被称为戒、定、慧的修学,已经与各自对治的烦恼脱离,清净无染,甚至不会成为随烦恼的所缘,所以完全可以说它是最殊胜的修学;它存在于八种道果之中。因此,就像对四道和下面三种果位的法一样,对阿罗汉果的法也可能产生这样的怀疑:认为它们也是“在那些学处中生起的”;认为具足那种修学的阿罗汉,也像其他圣者一样是有学;于是认为“这些属于有学”,以及“他们的学就是戒等”,从而把它们看作有学。为了消除这种怀疑,就否定了上面所说的有学性,而说为“无学”。因为,在阿罗汉果中生起的修学,由于所作已办,不再执行修学的功能,只是以修学之果的状态存在。所以,它们不配称为“学”,具足它们的人也不配称为“有学”,与它们相应的法也不是以修学为性质。用“在诸学处中生起”等含义来说,最高果位的法并不是有学。但在下面的果位中,修学因为能成为一来道、观禅等的资助条件,所以仍在执行修学的功能,因此配称为“学”,具足它的人配称为“有学”,与它相应的法也是以修学为性质。有学法按照上面所说的含义,确实就是有学。巴利
Asekkhenāti ettha sikkhāsu jātāti sekkhā, sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ eteti vā sekkhā, apariyositasikkhattā sayameva sikkhantīti vā sekkhā maggadhammā heṭṭhimaphalattayadhammā ca. Aggaphaladhammā pana upari sikkhitabbābhāvena na sekkhāti asekkhā. Yattha hi sekkhabhāvāsaṅkā atthi, tatthāyaṃ paṭisedhoti lokiyadhammesu nibbāne ca asekkhabhāvānāpatti daṭṭhabbā. Sīlasamādhipaññāsaṅkhātā hi sikkhā attano paṭipakkhakilesehi vippayuttā parisuddhā upakkilesānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvampi anupagamanato sātisayaṃ sikkhāti vattuṃ yuttā, aṭṭhasupi maggaphalesu vijjanti; tasmā catumaggaheṭṭhimaphalattayadhammā viya arahattaphaladhammāpi ‘‘tāsu sikkhāsu jātā’’ti ca, taṃsikkhāsamaṅgino arahato itaresaṃ viya sekkhatte sati ‘‘sekkhassa ete’’ti ca ‘‘sikkhā sīlaṃ etesa’’nti ca sekkhāti āsaṅkā siyunti tadāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ asekkhāti yathāvuttasekkhabhāvappaṭisedhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Arahattaphale pavattamānā hi sikkhā pariniṭṭhitakiccattā na sikkhākiccaṃ karonti, kevalaṃ sikkhāphalabhāvena pavattanti. Tasmā tā na sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, nāpi taṃsamaṅgino sekkhavacanaṃ, na ca taṃsampayuttadhammā sikkhanasīlā. ‘‘Sikkhāsu jātā’’ti evamādiatthehi aggaphaladhammā sekkhā na honti. Heṭṭhimaphalesu pana sikkhā sakadāgāmimaggavipassanādīnaṃ upanissayabhāvato sikkhākiccaṃ karontīti sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, taṃsamaṅgino ca sekkhavacanaṃ, taṃsampayuttā dhammā ca sikkhanasīlā. Sekkhadhammā yathāvuttehi atthehi sekkhā hontiyeva.
或者,“有学”是指那些还没有完成修学的人;“无学”这个词则是指已经完成修学的人。所以,不能说世间法和涅槃成了无学。如果有些在有学法上已经达到增长的人成了无学,那么这里说的增长就是指阿拉汉道法达到了无学的状态。那么,按照上面说的这些含义,它们既然被称为有学,怎么又成了无学呢?不是这样的,因为对相似的事物可以用不同的名称来称呼。实际上,除了遍知等作用上的差别以及异熟的性质之外,阿拉汉果和阿拉汉道并没有不同。因此,完全可以说,正是那些有学法转成了阿拉汉果的状态。而且,异熟乐比善乐更寂静、更殊胜,所以这些法本身已经达到了增长,因此被称为“无学”。巴利
Atha vā sekkhāti apariyositasikkhānaṃ vacananti, asekkhāti padaṃ pariyositasikkhānaṃ dassananti na lokiyadhammanibbānānaṃ asekkhabhāvāpatti. Vuḍḍhippattā sekkhā asekkhā ca sekkhadhammesu eva kesañci vuḍḍhippattānaṃ asekkhatā āpajjatīti arahattamaggadhammā vuḍḍhippattā. Yathāvuttehi ca atthehi sekkhāti katvā asekkhā āpannāti ce? Taṃ na, sadisesu tabbohārato. Arahattamaggato hi ninnānākaraṇaṃ arahattaphalaṃ ṭhapetvā pariññādikiccakaraṇaṃ vipākabhāvañca, tasmā te eva sekkhā dhammā arahattaphalabhāvaṃ āpannāti sakkā vattuṃ. Kusalasukhato ca vipākasukhaṃ santataratāya paṇītataranti vuḍḍhippattāva te dhammā hontīti ‘‘asekkhā’’ti vuccanti.
世尊把那类无学法按蕴分成三种,然后通过具足这些法的人——也就是漏尽者——来显示其威力,于是说:“以无学的戒蕴……”等等。这里“戒”这个词的含义前面已经讲过。“蕴”这个词则在积聚、施设、惯用语、功德等多种含义上都有用例。比如在“不可计算、不可测量,只以‘大水蕴’来计数……”这类经文里,它用的是“积聚”义。在“世尊看见一大截木头被恒河的水流冲走……”这类经文里,用的是“施设”义。在“心、意、意思、心脏、白净、意处、识、识蕴……”这类经文里,用的是“惯用语”义。在“贤友毗舍佉,不是以圣八支道来摄集三蕴,而是以三蕴来摄集圣八支道……”这类经文里,用的是“功德”义。这里也应该看作“功德”义。所以意思是:以无学的、称为戒的那种功德。“具足”就是与之相应、成为具备者。“定”就是以此令心等持,或者自身等持,或者本身就是等持。“慧”就是以种种方式了知、如实通达。戒本身就是蕴,所以叫“戒蕴”。其余几个蕴也是同样的道理。巴利
Te pana asekkhadhamme khandhavasena idha tidhā vibhajitvā tehi samannāgamena khīṇāsavassa ānubhāvaṃ vibhāvento bhagavā ‘‘asekkhena sīlakkhandhenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sīlasaddassa attho heṭṭhā vutto. Khandhasaddo pana rāsimhi paññattiyaṃ ruḷhiyaṃ guṇeti bahūsu atthesu diṭṭhappayogo. Tathā hi ‘‘asaṅkheyyo appameyyo mahāudakakkhandhotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.51; 6.37) rāsimhi āgato. ‘‘Addasā kho bhagavā mahantaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ gaṅgāya nadiyā sotena vuyhamāna’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) paññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ hadayaṃ paṇḍaraṃ mano manāyatanaṃ viññāṇaṃ viññāṇakkhandho’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 63, 65) ruḷhiyaṃ. ‘‘Na kho, āvuso visākha, ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena tayo khandhā saṅgahitā, tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.462) guṇe. Idhāpi guṇeyeva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā asekkhena sīlasaṅkhātena guṇenāti attho. Samannāgatoti sampayutto samaṅgībhūto. Samādahati etena, sayaṃ vā samādahati, samādhānameva vāti samādhi. Pakārehi jānāti yathāsabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhatīti paññā. Sīlameva khandho sīlakkhandho. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
其中,作为最高果位的正语、正业和正命,从它们本身的性质来说,就是“无学戒蕴”;同样,正定就是“无学定蕴”。不过,从助成定蕴的角度来说,正精进和正念被归入定蕴。同样,正见就是“无学慧蕴”;从助成慧蕴的角度来说,正思惟被归入慧蕴。应当这样理解:在这里,八种阿罗汉果位的法已经用三蕴加以统摄并显示出来。巴利
Tattha aggaphalabhūtā sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo ca sabhāveneva asekkho sīlakkhandho nāma, tathā sammāsamādhi asekkho samādhikkhandho. Tadupakārakato pana sammāvāyāmasammāsatiyo samādhikkhandhe saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tathā sammādiṭṭhi asekkho paññākkhandho. Tadupakārakato sammāsaṅkappo paññākkhandhe saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti evamettha aṭṭhapi arahattaphaladhammā tīhi khandhehi saṅgahetvā dassitāti veditabbaṃ.
这些无学法蕴——也就是戒等——在谁身上已被善修习、被很好地增长,那个人就像太阳一样照耀。这就是这里要说明的关联。也有版本读作“这些在谁身上”,其中的“ca”只是语气助词。这样一来,在这一品中,第一经讲的是轮回流转,最后一经讲的是还灭,其余各经则既讲了流转也讲了还灭。巴利
Yassa ete subhāvitāti yena arahatā ete sīlādayo asekkhadhammakkhandhā subhāvitā suṭṭhu vaḍḍhitā, so ādiccova virocatīti sambandho. ‘‘Yassa cete’’tipi paṭhanti. Tesañca saddo nipātamattaṃ. Evametasmiṃ vagge paṭhamasutte vaṭṭaṃ, pariyosānasutte vivaṭṭaṃ, itaresu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.
《福行事处经》的注释巴利
1. Puññakiriyavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
60 在第二品的第一篇里,“福行事”是指:这些福能带来应受恭敬的果报,或者能净化自己的心相续,所以叫“福”;这些福又要依靠各种因缘条件去造作,所以也是“行”,因此叫“福行”。这些福行本身就是各种利益的依托之处,所以叫“福行事”。“施所成”是指:对于还没有断除轮回根本的人来说,出于护助或恭敬,把自己该布施的东西舍给他人,这一思就是“施”——通过它来行布施,所以叫施,这施本身就是施所成。具体来说,对衣等四种资具、食物等十种布施物,或色等六种所缘,当一个人布施这些对象时,从它们生起开始,到正式施舍之时,再到事后以喜悦心回忆之时——在这三个阶段中,按上述方式生起的思,就叫作施所成福行事。巴利
60. Dutiyavaggassa paṭhame puññakiriyavatthūnīti pujjabhavaphalaṃ nibbattenti, attano santānaṃ punantīti vā puññāni, puññāni ca tāni hetupaccayehi kattabbato kiriyā cāti puññakiriyā. Tā eva ca tesaṃ tesaṃ ānisaṃsānaṃ vatthubhāvato puññakiriyavatthūni. Dānamayanti anupacchinnabhavamūlassa anuggahavasena pūjāvasena vā attano deyyadhammassa paresaṃ pariccāgacetanā dīyati etāyāti dānaṃ, dānameva dānamayaṃ. Cīvarādīsu hi catūsu paccayesu annādīsu vā dasasu dānavatthūsu rūpādīsu vā chasu ārammaṇesu taṃ taṃ dentassa tesaṃ uppādanato paṭṭhāya pubbabhāge pariccāgakāle pacchā somanassacittena anussaraṇe cāti tīsu kālesu vuttanayena pavattacetanā dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu nāma.
戒所成福行事:有人为了圆满戒行,按恒常戒、布萨戒、自制戒等方式受持五戒、八戒或十戒;他为了圆满戒而想去寺院出家,心里盼着“我要出家”,等出家后,又觉得“我如今真的出家了,太好了”,于是以信心圆满护持巴帝摩卡防护,以智慧省察衣等资具,以正念守护眼门等对现前的色等所缘,以精进清净活命——在这些情形下生起的思就是“戒”,所以叫戒所成福行事。巴利
Sīlamayanti niccasīlauposathaniyamādivasena pañca, aṭṭha, dasa vā sīlāni samādiyantassa sīlapūraṇatthaṃ pabbajissāmīti vihāraṃ gacchantassa pabbajantassa manorathaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā ‘‘pabbajito vatamhi sādhu suṭṭhū’’ti āvajjentassa saddhāya pātimokkhaṃ paripūrentassa paññāya cīvarādike paccavekkhantassa satiyā āpāthagatesu rūpādīsu cakkhudvārādīni saṃvarantassa vīriyena ājīvaṃ sodhentassa ca pavattā cetanā sīlatīti sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu nāma.
同样,按照《无碍解道》(paṭi. ma. 1.48)所说的观道,当一个人以无常、苦、无我的方式观照眼时,也观照耳、鼻、舌、身、意;观照诸色……乃至诸法;观照眼识……乃至意识;观照眼触……乃至意触;观照眼触所生的受……乃至意触所生的受;观照色想……乃至法想;当一个人以无常、苦、无我的方式观照老死时,那里生起的思——以及在地遍等三十八种所缘中生起的禅那思,以及在无过失的业处、技艺处、知识处中,以熟练作意等方式生起的思——所有这些思,因为“以它来修习”,所以称为修,因此就是修所成福行事。巴利
Tathā paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.48) vuttena vipassanāmaggena cakkhuṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantassa sotaṃ, ghānaṃ, jivhaṃ, kāyaṃ, manaṃ. Rūpe…pe… dhamme, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ. Cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ. Rūpasaññaṃ…pe… dhammasaññaṃ. Jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantassa yā cetanā, yā ca pathavīkasiṇādīsu aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu pavattā jhānacetanā, yā ca anavajjesu kammāyatanasippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānesu paricayamanasikārādivasena pavattā cetanā, sabbā bhāveti etāyāti bhāvanāmayaṃ vuttanayena puññakiriyavatthu cāti.
在这里,每一种都应当根据具体情况来理解:从前期准备阶段开始,以身去做,就是身业;为了那件事而说出话来,就是语业;不发动身体和言语,只用内心去想,就是意业。布施食物等东西时,如果心里作意“我在布施食物等”,或者先忆念布施波罗蜜再布施,那么在布施的时候,就成为布施所成的福行事。如果站在持戒的立场上来布施,就成为戒所成的福行事;如果从坏灭、衰败、业的角度建立起观照之后再布施,就成为修所成的福行事。巴利
Ekamekañcettha yathārahaṃ pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya kāyena karontassa kāyakammaṃ hoti, tadatthaṃ vācaṃ nicchārentassa vacīkammaṃ, kāyaṅgaṃ vācaṅgañca acopetvā manasā cintentassa manokammaṃ. Annādīni dentassa cāpi ‘‘annadānādīni demī’’ti vā dānapāramiṃ āvajjetvā vā dānakāle dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti. Vattasīse ṭhatvā dadato sīlamayaṃ, khayato vayato kammato sammasanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā dadato bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti.
另外还有七种福行事:恭敬俱行的福行事、服务俱行的福行事、布施成就、随喜功德、教示所成、听闻所成、见正直福行事。就连皈依,也归在见正直里面。至于这里应当详细解说的内容,后面自然会清楚。巴利
Aparānipi satta puññakiriyavatthūni – apacitisahagataṃ puññakiriyavatthu veyyāvaccasahagataṃ pattianuppadānaṃ abbhanumodanaṃ desanāmayaṃ savanamayaṃ diṭṭhijugataṃ puññakiriyavatthūti. Saraṇagamanampi hi diṭṭhijugateneva saṅgayhati. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
在这里,见到比自己年长的人时,起身迎接、接取衣钵、礼拜问讯、让路等,这些都属于带着恭敬的行为。对年长者履行应尽的义务和规矩,这属于带着服务的行为;见到比丘进村乞食,接过他的钵,在村里把食物装满再送还给他;或者听到“去把比丘们的钵拿来”之后,赶紧跑去取钵等,这些也属于带着服务的行为。布施四种资具,用花香等供养三宝,或者做其他类似的善行,然后回向说“愿一切众生都得到这份功德”,这属于回向功德。同样,对别人回向的功德,或者仅仅对别人所做的善行,以“善哉,太好了”的心态随喜,这属于随喜功德。不指望回报,出于利益他人的心,把自己熟悉的法讲给别人听——这叫做教示所成的福行事。但如果有人想“这样别人就会知道我是说法师”,依靠利养、恭敬和名声来说法,那果报就不大。以“这确实是自利利他的修行方法”这样的如理作意为先导,用充满利益他人之心、柔软的心来听法,这成为听闻所成的福行事。但如果有人只是为了“这样别人就会知道我有信仰”而听法,那果报就不大。见解走向正直,就是“见正直”,这是对“有布施”等正见的另一种说法。因为这种见在前阶段或后阶段即使没有跟智相应,但在令它正直的那一刻,就是跟智相应的。不过另有人说:“以了知、遍知的方式,所见是善的,以及识和业报智等,就是正见。”其中,以善的识即使智未生起时,也包括忆念、称赞、随喜自己所做的善行等;以业报智则包括业道正见。而那个见正直,是一切善行的必然特征。因为无论做什么善行,只要见解正直,那善行就会有大果报。巴利
Tattha vuḍḍhataraṃ disvā paccuggamanapattacīvarapaṭiggahaṇābhivādanamaggasampadānādivasena apacāyanasahagataṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuḍḍhatarānaṃ vattapaṭipattikaraṇavasena, gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā pattaṃ gahetvā gāme bhikkhaṃ sampādetvā upasaṃharaṇavasena ‘‘gaccha bhikkhūnaṃ pattaṃ āharā’’ti sutvā vegena gantvā pattāharaṇādivasena ca veyyāvaccasahagataṃ veditabbaṃ. Cattāro paccaye datvā pupphagandhādīhi ratanattayassa pūjaṃ katvā aññaṃ vā tādisaṃ puññaṃ katvā ‘‘sabbasattānaṃ patti hotū’’ti pariṇāmavasena pattianuppadānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tathā parehi dinnāya pattiyā kevalaṃ vā parehi kataṃ puññaṃ ‘‘sādhu, suṭṭhū’’ti anumodanavasena abbhanumodanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Attano paguṇadhammaṃ apaccāsīsanto hitajjhāsayena paresaṃ deseti – idaṃ desanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu nāma. Yaṃ pana eko ‘‘evaṃ maṃ dhammakathikoti jānissantī’’ti icchāya ṭhatvā lābhasakkārasilokasannissito dhammaṃ deseti, taṃ na mahapphalaṃ hoti. ‘‘Addhā ayaṃ attahitaparahitānaṃ paṭipajjanūpāyo’’ti yonisomanasikārapurecārikahitapharaṇena muducittena dhammaṃ suṇāti, idaṃ savanamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti. Yaṃ paneko ‘‘iti maṃ saddhoti jānissantī’’ti suṇāti, taṃ na mahapphalaṃ hoti. Diṭṭhiyā ujugamanaṃ diṭṭhijugataṃ, ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattassa sammādassanassa etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idañhi pubbabhāge vā pacchābhāge vā ñāṇavippayuttampi ujukaraṇakāle ñāṇasampayuttameva hoti. Apare panāhu ‘‘vijānanapajānanavasena dassanaṃ diṭṭhi kusalañca viññāṇaṃ kammassakatāñāṇādi ca sammādassana’’nti . Tattha kusalena viññāṇena ñāṇassa anuppādepi attanā katapuññānussaraṇavaṇṇārahavaṇṇanādīnaṃ saṅgaho, kammassakatāñāṇena kammapathasammādiṭṭhiyā . Itaraṃ pana diṭṭhijugataṃ sabbesaṃ niyamalakkhaṇaṃ. Yañhi kiñci puññaṃ karontassa diṭṭhiyā ujubhāveneva taṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti.
不过,这七种福行事,已经被前面三种——布施所成等——福行事所包含。其中,恭敬和服务属于戒所成,回向和随喜属于布施所成,说法和闻法属于修所成,而见正直则通于三者。因此世尊说:巴利
Imesaṃ pana sattannaṃ puññakiriyavatthūnaṃ purimehi tīhi dānamayādīhi puññakiriyavatthūhi saṅgaho. Tattha hi apacāyanaveyyāvaccāni sīlamaye, pattianuppadānaabbhanumodanāni dānamaye, dhammadesanāsavanāni bhāvanāmaye, diṭṭhijugataṃ tīsupi. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,有三种福行事。哪三种?布施所成……修习所成福行事。巴利
‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, puññakiriyavatthūni. Katamāni tīṇi? Dānamayaṃ…pe… bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthū’’ti (a. ni. 8.36).
在这里,依欲界八种善思的运作,三种福行事都能生起。就像一个人熟练地背诵法时,有些地方还没注意到前后衔接就已经顺过去了;同样,一个人专心修习已经很熟练的止观时,偶尔也会以不与智相应的心生起作意。不过,这一切若依广大善思来说,就只有修所成福行事,而不是另外那两种。偈颂的含义已经在前面说过了。巴利
Ettha ca aṭṭhannaṃ kāmāvacarakusalacetanānaṃ vasena tiṇṇampi puññakiriyavatthūnaṃ pavatti hoti. Yathā hi paguṇaṃ dhammaṃ parivattentassa ekacce anusandhiṃ asallakkhentasseva gacchanti, evaṃ paguṇaṃ samathavipassanābhāvanaṃ anuyuñjantassa antarantarā ñāṇavippayuttacittenāpi manasikāro pavattati. Sabbaṃ taṃ pana mahaggatakusalacetanānaṃ vasena bhāvanāmayameva puññakiriyavatthu hoti, na itarāni. Gāthāya attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
2. 《眼经》注释巴利
2. Cakkhusuttavaṇṇanā
61 61. 第二,所谓“眼”,就是能看、能观察的意思,意思是它们像在指示平坦与不平坦那样运作。或者,也可以从“品尝”这个含义来理解“眼”。那么,什么是“品尝”呢?就是享受味道。正如人们说“品尝蜂蜜、品尝菜肴”,这些眼在感受所缘的味道时,就像在享受一样,所以从“品尝”的含义来说,称为眼。不过,这些眼简要来说有两种:智眼和肉眼。其中,肉眼在前面已经说过了。智眼在这里则分为两种来说,即天眼和慧眼。巴利
61. Dutiye cakkhūnīti cakkhantīti cakkhūni, samavisamaṃ ācikkhantāni viya pavattantīti attho. Atha vā cakkhanaṭṭhena cakkhūni. Kimidaṃ cakkhanaṃ nāma? Assādanaṃ, tathā hi vadanti ‘‘madhuṃ cakkhati byañjanaṃ cakkhatī’’ti imāni ca ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavantāni assādentāni viya hontīti cakkhanaṭṭhena cakkhūni. Tāni pana saṅkhepato dve cakkhūni – ñāṇacakkhu, maṃsacakkhu cāti. Tesu maṃsacakkhu heṭṭhā vuttameva. Ñāṇacakkhu dibbacakkhu, paññācakkhūti idha dvidhā katvā vuttaṃ.
在这里,“天眼”是指:因为它类似天,所以叫“天”。诸天的净色眼是由善业所生,不被胆汁、痰、血等阻碍,因为远离了随烦恼,所以即使很远也能取到所缘,这就是天的净色眼。而这个由精进修行之力所生的智眼,也和它一样,所以因类似天而叫“天”;又因为是通过天住而获得,且自身依止于天住,能掌握光明,所以有大光辉;还因为能看见穿墙等处的色法,所以有大行境,因此也叫“天”。这一切应当依照声论来理解。以“见”的含义来说,它执行眼的作用,所以像眼一样也是“眼”;它既是天又是眼,所以叫“天眼”。巴利
Tattha dibbacakkhūti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devatānañhi sucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ upakkilesavimuttatāya dūrepi ārammaṇaggahaṇasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idañcāpi vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu tādisamevāti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ, dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattā attano ca dibbavihārasannissitattā ālokapariggahena mahājutikattā. Tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanena mahāgatikattāpi dibbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabbaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhu, dibbañca taṃ cakkhu cāti dibbacakkhu.
了知,所以称为慧。了知什么?以“这是苦”等方式了知四圣谛。正如这样说:巴利
Pajānātīti paññā. Kiṃ pajānāti? Cattāri ariyasaccāni ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
贤友,因为能了知,所以称为慧。它了知什么呢?了知“这是苦”等等。巴利
‘‘Pajānātīti kho, āvuso, tasmā paññāti vuccati. Kiñca pajānāti? Idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.449).
不过在注书里是这样说的:“从施设的角度来说,这叫慧。它怎么施设呢?它施设为‘无常’,施设为‘苦’,施设为‘无我’。”再者,这个慧从特相等方面来说,是以如实通达诸法自性为特相,或者像善射者放箭毫不偏差地射中目标那样,以无偏差地通达为特相;以照亮所缘为作用,就像灯一样;以不迷乱为现起,就像熟悉森林的人做向导一样。在这里,特别要指出的是,被称为漏尽智的慧,因为能彻见四圣谛的意义,所以叫做慧眼。针对这一点,才说:“眼生起了,智生起了,慧生起了,明生起了,光生起了。”巴利
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘paññāpanavasena paññā. Kinti paññāpeti? Aniccanti paññāpeti, dukkhanti paññāpeti, anattāti paññāpetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā panāyaṃ lakkhaṇādito yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā vā kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya, visayobhāsanarasā padīpo viya, asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā araññagatasudesako viya. Visesato panettha āsavakkhayañāṇasaṅkhātā paññā catusaccadassanaṭṭhena paññācakkhūti adhippetā. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ udapādi, ñāṇaṃ udapādi, paññā udapādi, vijjā udapādi, āloko udapādī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15).
在这些当中,肉眼是有限的,天眼通是广大的,另一种是无量的。肉眼属于色,另外两种不属于色。肉眼和天眼通是世间的、有漏的、以色为所缘的;另一种是出世间的、无漏的、以四圣谛为所缘的。肉眼是无记的,天眼通可能是善的也可能是无记的,慧眼也是如此。肉眼属于欲界,天眼通属于色界,另一种是出世间的。这些区分应当如此了知。巴利
Etesu ca maṃsacakkhu parittaṃ, dibbacakkhu mahaggataṃ, itaraṃ appamāṇaṃ. Maṃsacakkhu rūpaṃ, itarāni arūpāni. Maṃsacakkhu dibbacakkhu ca lokiyāni sāsavāni rūpavisayāni, itaraṃ lokuttaraṃ anāsavaṃ catusaccavisayaṃ. Maṃsacakkhu abyākataṃ, dibbacakkhu siyā kusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, tathā paññācakkhu. Maṃsacakkhu kāmāvacaraṃ, dibbacakkhu rūpāvacaraṃ, itaraṃ lokuttaranti evamādi vibhāgā veditabbā.
偈颂里说的“无上”,是指慧眼。因为慧眼就是漏尽智,所以是无上的。“人中最上者说”,意思是众人中最殊胜、第一的正自觉者所宣说。“生起”是指肉眼的运作。“道”是方法,是生起天眼通的原因。其实天眼通就是从有肉眼的人身上生起的,因为要先把遍处的光明扩大,才能生起天眼通的智慧;而如果没有在遍处曼陀罗上取得禅相,那智慧就不会生起。“由于”是指“当……的时候”。“智”就是漏尽智。因此他说“慧眼是无上的”。“由获得此眼”,是指由于这位圣者的慧眼生起、修习,就能从一切轮回之苦中解脱,彻底脱离。巴利
Gāthāsu anuttaranti paññācakkhuṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tañhi āsavakkhayañāṇabhāvato anuttaraṃ. Akkhāsi purisuttamoti purisānaṃ uttamo aggo sammāsambuddho desesi. Uppādoti maṃsacakkhussa pavatti. Maggoti upāyo, dibbacakkhussa kāraṇaṃ. Pakaticakkhumato eva hi dibbacakkhu uppajjati, yasmā kasiṇālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbacakkhuñāṇassa uppādanaṃ, so ca kasiṇamaṇḍale uggahanimittena vinā natthīti. Yatoti yadā. Ñāṇanti āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘paññācakkhu anuttara’’nti. Yassa cakkhussa paṭilābhāti yassa ariyassa paññācakkhussa uppattiyā bhāvanāya sabbasmā vaṭṭadukkhato pamuccati parimuccatīti.
3. 《根经》的注释巴利
3. Indriyasuttavaṇṇanā
62 62. 在第三经中,所谓“诸根”,是以“增上”之义称为根。凡是对于俱生诸法犹如主宰者一般存在、并被那些俱生法所随顺的,就称为根。再者,“印达”(主宰)指世尊——他是法的自在者,具足最上的心自在。因为这位名为“印达”的世尊最先见到、最先证得,也因他人所见、所教导、所安立,并通过行境、修习、惯行而见,所以称为诸根。或者,“印达”是指成为证悟道之增上缘的福德业,此业的相状即是根。
“未知当知根”:对于在“无始轮回中,我将了知未知、未证之不死境界,或四谛法”这样行道者的此前行阶段所生起的根,这是对须陀洹道慧的称呼。“已知根”:了知根。其中,其语义是——以初道智了知,不超越已见之界限而了知,故为“已知”。正如初道慧于苦等以遍知现观等方式生起,此慧也如此生起,故为“已知”,并且依上述意义为根,所以是“已知根”。以了知之义,或为已知圣补特伽罗之根,故为“已知根”,这是从须陀洹果开始于六处中慧的称呼。“具知根”:因为具知者于四谛中已究竟智作用、漏尽,且此根于漏尽者生起,并具足根义,故为“具知根”。于此,最初和最后二者依初道和第四果而各为一处,其余者依其余道果而为六处,应知。巴利
62. Tatiye indriyānīti adhipateyyaṭṭhena indriyāni. Yāni hi sahajātadhammesu issarā viya hutvā tehi anuvattitabbāni, tāni indriyāni nāma. Apica indo bhagavā dhammissaro paramena cittissariyena samannāgato. Tena indena sabbapaṭhamaṃ diṭṭhattā adhigatattā paresañca diṭṭhattā desitattā vihitattā gocarabhāvanāsevanāhi diṭṭhattā ca indriyāni. Indaṃ vā maggādhigamassa upanissayabhūtaṃ puññakammaṃ, tassa liṅgānītipi indriyāni. Anaññātaññassāmītindriyanti ‘‘anamatagge saṃsāre anaññātaṃ anadhigataṃ amatapadaṃ catusaccadhammameva vā jānissāmī’’ti paṭipannassa iminā pubbabhāgena uppannaṃ indriyaṃ, sotāpattimaggapaññāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aññindriyanti ājānanaindriyaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – ājānāti paṭhamamaggañāṇena diṭṭhamariyādaṃ anatikkamitvāva jānātīti aññā. Yatheva hi paṭhamamaggapaññā dukkhādīsu pariññābhisamayādivasena pavattati, tatheva ayampi pavattatīti aññā ca sā yathāvuttenaṭṭhena indriyaṃ cāti aññindriyaṃ. Ājānanaṭṭheneva aññassa vā ariyapuggalassa indriyanti aññindriyaṃ, sotāpattiphalato paṭṭhāya chasu ṭhānesu ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aññātāvindriyanti aññātāvino catūsu saccesu niṭṭhitañāṇakiccassa khīṇāsavassa uppajjanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca aññātāvindriyaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamapacchimāni paṭhamamaggacatutthaphalavasena ekaṭṭhānikāni, itaraṃ itaramaggaphalavasena chaṭṭhānikanti veditabbaṃ.
在偈颂中,“正在修学者”:指正在修学增上戒学等、正在修习的人。“随直道行者”:“直道”称为圣道,因为它远离两种极端;由于随念它,所以是“随直道行者”,意思是次第在道上生起的人。“于尽中”:由于断尽一切无余烦恼,所以在称为“尽”的最上道中,智慧最先现起。此后,“已知”无间:从那道智无间,阿拉汉果生起。或者,“随直道行者”:指远离沉滞、掉举、住著、勤策等过失,止观双运而修习,随念、随行、随入于此前行道的人;在种姓智无间,因为断除见一处所摄的烦恼,所以在“尽”——即入流道中,智慧最先现起,这就是未知当知根。此后,“已知”无间:从那第一智无间开始,直到最上道,已知根生起。巴利
Gāthāsu sikkhamānassāti adhisīlasikkhādayo sikkhamānassa bhāventassa. Ujumaggānusārinoti ujumaggo vuccati ariyamaggo, antadvayavivajjitattā tassa anussaraṇato ujumaggānusārino, paṭipāṭiyā magge uppādentassāti attho. Khayasminti anavasesakilesānaṃ khepanato khayasaṅkhāte aggamagge ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ pureyeva uppajjati. Tato aññā anantarāti tato maggañāṇato anantarā arahattaṃ uppajjati. Atha vā ujumaggānusārinoti līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanādike vajjetvā samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ katvā bhāvanāvasena pavattaṃ pubbabhāgamaggaṃ anussarantassa anugacchantassa paṭipajjantassa gotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ diṭṭhekaṭṭhānaṃ kilesānaṃ khepanato khayasmiṃ sotāpattimagge paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ uppajjati. Tato aññā anantarāti tato paṭhamañāṇato anantarā anantarato paṭṭhāya yāva aggamaggā aññā aññindriyaṃ uppajjati.
从此之后,已知解脱者的意思是:从那个已知根之后,在阿罗汉道智无间之后,通过阿罗汉果的慧解脱,以具知根而解脱的人。对于这样的人,确实会有这样的智:从阿罗汉果生起之后,在随后的时刻,对于可意、不可意等境界已经达到如是状态的漏尽者,生起省察智。这个智如何生起呢?他说:我的解脱是不动的。接着显示这种不动状态的原因:因为有结的灭尽。巴利
Tatoaññā vimuttassāti tato aññā aññindriyato pacchā arahattamaggañāṇānantarā arahattaphalena paññāvimuttiyā aññātāvindriyena vimuttassa. Ñāṇaṃ ve hoti tādinoti arahattaphaluppattito uttarakāle iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīsu tādilakkhaṇappattassa khīṇāsavassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ uppajjati. Kathaṃ uppajjatīti āha ‘‘akuppā me vimuttī’’ti. Tassa akuppabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti ‘‘bhavasaṃyojanakkhayā’’ti.
现在,为了赞叹这样一位漏尽者,说了第三首偈颂:“他确实是具足根者。”其中“具足根者”是指:具足前面所说的三种出世间根;或者也指具足清净的、通过止息而获得的信等诸根,圆满无缺;并且因为眼等诸根已经彻底寂静、不再执取对境,所以具足根。因此说“寂静者”,意思是:由于一切烦恼的热恼都已止息,所以寂静。“乐于寂静处”是指:欢喜、倾心于涅槃。在这里,“具足根”显示了道已修习、诸蕴已遍知;“寂静”显示了烦恼已断除;“乐于寂静处”显示了灭已作证。其余内容与前面所说相同。巴利
Idāni tādisaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ thomento ‘‘sa ve indriyasampanno’’ti tatiyaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha indriyasampannoti yathāvuttehi tīhi lokuttarindriyehi samannāgato, suddhehipi vā paṭippassaddhiladdhehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgato paripuṇṇo, tato eva cakkhādīhi suṭṭhu vūpasantehi nibbisevanehi indriyehi samannāgato. Tenāha ‘‘santo’’ti, sabbakilesapariḷāhavūpasamena upasantoti attho. Santipade ratoti nibbāne abhirato adhimutto. Ettha ca ‘‘indriyasampanno’’ti etena bhāvitamaggatā, pariññātakkhandhatā cassa dassitā. ‘‘Santo’’ti etena pahīnakilesatā, ‘‘santipade rato’’ti etena sacchikatanirodhatāti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
4. 《长时经》的注释巴利
4. Addhāsuttavaṇṇanā
63 63. 在第四经中,“addhā”指时间。关于“过去时”等说法,有两种解说方式:经教解说和阿毗达摩解说。其中,依经教解说,结生之前叫过去时,死亡之后叫未来时,与死亡和结生相伴并介于其间的叫现在时。依阿毗达摩解说,诸法经历了生、住、灭三个刹那后已灭去的,叫过去时;尚未到达这三个刹那的,叫未来时;正具足这三个刹那的,叫现在时。巴利
63. Catutthe addhāti kālā. Atīto addhātiādīsu dve pariyāyā – suttantapariyāyo, abhidhammapariyāyo ca. Tattha suttantapariyāyena paṭisandhito pubbe atīto addhā nāma, cutito pacchā anāgato addhā nāma, saha cutipaṭisandhīhi tadanantaraṃ paccuppanno addhā nāma. Abhidhammapariyāyena uppādo, ṭhiti, bhaṅgoti ime tayo khaṇe patvā niruddhadhammā atīto addhā nāma, tayopi khaṇe asampattā anāgato addhā nāma, khaṇattayasamaṅgino paccuppanno addhā nāma.
还有一种分类方式。这里的过去等区分,应当从时、相续、时节、刹那四个角度来理解。其中,从时角度的区分已经讲过了。从相续角度来说:同种类、由同一时节所生,或由同一食物所生的色法,即使前后相续地生起,也仍然是现在。在这之前,由不同种类的时节或食物所生的,是过去;在这之后的,是未来。由心所生的色法,在同一心路过程、同一速行或同一定境中生起的,叫做现在;在这之前的,是过去;在这之后的,是未来。由业所生的色法,各自在相续上并没有过去等的区分;不过,应当通过它们对时节生、食生和心生色法的支持作用,来理解它们的过去等状态。从时节角度来说:在某一片刻、上午、下午、夜晚、白天等时节中,依相续而生起的色法,在各自对应的时节里叫做现在;在这之前的,是过去;在这之后的,是未来。以上就是对色法的分类方式。对于无色法(名法),则从刹那角度来分:属于生、住、灭这三刹那的,是现在;在这之前的,是过去;在这之后的,是未来。此外,因和缘的作用都已过去的,是过去;因的作用已完成、缘的作用尚未完成的,是现在;因和缘两种作用都还未达到的,是未来。或者,在自身作用发生的刹那,是现在;在这之前,是过去;在这之后,是未来。在这里,从刹那等角度的说法是直接究竟的说法,其余则是方便的说法。因为这种过去等的区分,是属于诸法的,而不是属于时间的。不过,依据诸法有过去等的区分,虽然从究竟义上说时间并不存在,但在这里,仍应知道,时间是通过那种世俗说法而被说为过去等的。巴利
Aparo nayo – ayañhi atītādivibhāgo addhāsantatisamayakhaṇavasena catudhā veditabbo. Tesu addhāvibhāgo vutto. Santativasena sabhāgā ekautusamuṭṭhānā, ekāhārasamuṭṭhānā ca pubbāpariyavasena vattamānāpi paccuppannā. Tato pubbe visabhāgautuāhārasamuṭṭhānā atītā pacchā anāgatā. Cittajā ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattisamuṭṭhānā paccuppannā nāma, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Kammasamuṭṭhānānaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ santativasena atītādibhedo natthi, tesaṃyeva pana utuāhāracittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ upatthambhakavasena tassa atītādibhāvo veditabbo. Samayavasena ekamuhuttapubbaṇhasāyanharattidivādīsu samayesu santānavasena pavattamānā taṃtaṃsamaye paccuppannā nāma, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Ayaṃ tāva rūpadhammesu nayo. Arūpadhammesu pana khaṇavasena uppādādikkhaṇattayapariyāpannā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Apica atikkantahetupaccayakiccā atītā, niṭṭhitahetukiccā aniṭṭhitapaccayakiccā paccuppannā, ubhayakiccaṃ asampattā anāgatā. Attano vā kiccakkhaṇe paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Ettha ca khaṇādikathāva nippariyāyā, sesā pariyāyā. Ayañhi atītādibhedo nāma dhammānaṃ hoti, na kālassa. Atītādibhede pana dhamme upādāya paramatthato avijjamānopi kālo idha teneva vohārena atītotiādinā vuttoti veditabbo.
在偈颂中,“有可说想者”这个词里,被宣说、被谈论、被施设的,就是“可说”,也就是论事;从含义上说,就是色等五蕴。这确实这样说过:巴利
Gāthāsu akkheyyasaññinoti ettha akkhāyati, kathīyati, paññāpīyatīti akkheyyaṃ, kathāvatthu, atthato rūpādayo pañcakkhandhā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
可能会围绕着过去的时间来谈论,或者围绕着未来的时间……乃至围绕着现在的时间来谈论。巴利
‘‘Atītaṃ vā addhānaṃ ārabbha kathaṃ katheyya, anāgataṃ vā…pe… paccuppannaṃ vā addhānaṃ ārabbha kathaṃ katheyyā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305).
比丘们,对于过去、已灭、已变易的色,对它来说,“曾是”就是它的称法,“曾是”就是它的名称,“曾是”就是它的施设;它没有“存在”的称法,也没有“将存在”的称法。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ, bhikkhave , rūpaṃ atītaṃ niruddhaṃ vipariṇataṃ, ‘ahosī’ti tassa saṅkhā, ‘ahosī’ti tassa samaññā, ‘ahosī’ti tassa paññatti; na tassa saṅkhā atthīti, na tassa saṅkhā bhavissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.62) –
按照这样所说的《词道经》,这里的意思也可以说明。也就是:在称为“可说”的五蕴——即论事的依据——之上,以“我”“我所”“天”“人”“女”“男”等相续生起的想来说,是有“可说想”的人;意思是在五取蕴上怀着众生、人等等想。在“可说”上,由于渴爱和邪见的执取而安住,或者由于贪等而以八种方式安住。确实,被贪染的人依贪而安住,被嗔怒的人依嗔而安住,愚痴的人依痴而安住,被执取的人依邪见而安住,力量强的人依随眠而安住,被系缚的人依慢而安住,因疑而未获决断的人依疑而安住,散乱的人依掉举而安住。巴利
Evaṃ vuttena niruttipathasuttenapi ettha attho dīpetabbo. Evaṃ kathāvatthubhāvena akkheyyasaṅkhāte khandhapañcake ahanti ca mamanti ca devoti ca manussoti ca itthīti ca purisoti ca ādinā pavattasaññāvasena akkheyyasaññino, pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu sattapuggalādisaññinoti attho. Akkheyyasmiṃ taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhavasena patiṭṭhitā, rāgādivasena vā aṭṭhahākārehi patiṭṭhitā. Ratto hi rāgavasena patiṭṭhito hoti, duṭṭho dosavasena, mūḷho mohavasena, parāmaṭṭho diṭṭhivasena, thāmagato anusayavasena, vinibaddho mānavasena, aniṭṭhaṅgato vicikicchāvasena, vikkhepagato uddhaccavasena patiṭṭhito hotīti.
对于“可说”未能遍知:由于没有用三种遍知去遍知那处于三地法中的“可说”,所以这是不能遍知它的原因。“趣入死魔之轭”:他们趋近、陷入死亡的轭,也就是与死亡相结合,而不是脱离结合——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Akkheyyaṃ apariññāyāti taṃ akkheyyaṃ tebhūmakadhamme tīhi pariññāhi aparijānitvā tassa aparijānanahetu. Yogamāyanti maccunoti maraṇassa yogaṃ tena saṃyogaṃ upagacchanti, na visaṃyoganti attho.
或者,“轭”指的是方法。通过这种方法所编造、铺展开来的,就是像魔军阵地一样的无益之网和烦恼之网,他们正落入其中——这就是这里要说的意思。正如这样说过:巴利
Atha vā yoganti upāyaṃ, tena yojitaṃ pasāritaṃ mārasenaṭṭhāniyaṃ anatthajālaṃ kilesajālañca upagacchantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
我们确实没有和那位率领大军的死神订过什么约定。巴利
‘‘Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.272; jā. 2.22.121; netti. 103);
说到这里,已经显示了轮回流转;现在为了显示还灭,才说了“可说的以及遍知”等话。其中,“ca”这个字表示区别,用它来点明:通过遍知“可说的”所应得到、下面将要说的那种殊胜。所谓“遍知”,就是以与观相应的道智,划定并了知“这是苦”;或者通过断除与苦相连的烦恼而超越它,使三种遍知的作用都达到圆满。“不认为有说者”:因为一切执取都已断尽,漏已尽的人不认为有说者,意思是不承认有任何作者之类的自我自性。“以心触证解脱,无上寂静迹”:因为从一切有为法中解脱,所以叫“解脱”;又因为一切烦恼的热恼都已止息,所以名为“寂静迹”的涅槃法,当他以心触证、接触、达到时,就不认为有说者。或者,“遍知”这一句,是说了苦谛的遍知现观和集谛的断除现观;现在“以心触证解脱,无上寂静迹”这一句,则是说道谛和灭谛的修习现观与作证现观。它的意思是:因为彻底断除,所以从一切烦恼中解脱,这就是解脱,也就是圣道。而这圣道,是以道心触证、接触、修习的;正是通过它,他触证、接触、作证了无上的寂静迹——涅槃。巴利
Ettāvatā vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘akkheyyañca pariññāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ca-saddo byatireke, tena akkheyyaparijānanena laddhabbaṃ vakkhamānameva visesaṃ joteti. Pariññāyāti vipassanāsahitāya maggapaññāya dukkhanti paricchijja jānitvā, tappaṭibaddhakilesappahānena vā taṃ samatikkamitvā tissannampi pariññānaṃ kiccaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā. Akkhātāraṃ na maññatīti sabbaso maññanānaṃ pahīnattā khīṇāsavo akkhātāraṃ na maññati, kārakādisabhāvaṃ kiñci attānaṃ na paccetīti attho. Phuṭṭhovimokkho manasā, santipadamanuttaranti yasmā sabbasaṅkhatavimuttattā ‘‘vimokkho’’ti sabbakilesasantāpavūpasamanaṭṭhānatāya ‘‘santipada’’nti laddhanāmo nibbānadhammo phuṭṭho phusito patto, tasmā akkhātāraṃ na maññatīti. Atha vā ‘‘pariññāyā’’ti padena dukkhasaccassa pariññābhisamayaṃ samudayasaccassa pahānābhisamayañca vatvā idāni ‘‘phuṭṭho vimokkho manasā, santipadamanuttara’’nti iminā magganirodhānaṃ bhāvanāsacchikiriyābhisamayaṃ vadati. Tassattho – samucchedavasena sabbakilesehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, ariyamaggo. So panassa maggacittena phuṭṭho phusito bhāvito, teneva anuttaraṃ santipadaṃ nibbānaṃ phuṭṭhaṃ phusitaṃ sacchikatanti.
具足“可说”的人:在种种灾患逼迫的世间,对于“可说”的相,因为已经断除了颠倒,所以完全从中解脱出来,并具足了由遍知“可说”所成就的种种圆满功德。审虑而受用的人:因为智慧已经达到广大,对于衣服等资具,他总是经过衡量、审察之后才去受用;又因为他是已了知诸法的人,对于进入感知范围的任何所缘,都以六支舍的方式,经过审察之后才去受用。立于法的人:安住于无学法,或者就是安住于涅槃法。极智者:因为已经到达所应了知的四谛的彼岸,所以称为极智者。具足这样功德的应供者,在“有”等一切存在中,未来不再有任何后有,因此不再落入“人”“天”等称谓,只是成为不可施设的状态;开示便以无取般涅槃作为结束。巴利
Akkheyyasampannoti akkheyyanimittaṃ vividhāhi vipattīhi upaddute loke pahīnavipallāsatāya tato suparimutto akkheyyapariññābhinibbattāhi sampattīhi sampanno samannāgato. Saṅkhāya sevīti paññāvepullappattiyā cīvarādipaccaye saṅkhāya parituletvāva sevanasīlo, saṅkhātadhammattā ca āpāthagataṃ sabbampi visayaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena saṅkhāya sevanasīlo. Dhammaṭṭhoti asekkhadhammesu nibbānadhamme eva vā ṭhito. Vedagūti veditabbassa catusaccassa pāraṅgatattā vedagū. Evaṃguṇo arahā bhavādīsu katthaci āyatiṃ punabbhavābhāvato manussadevāti saṅkhyaṃ na upeti, apaññattikabhāvameva gacchatīti anupādāparinibbānena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
第五 恶行经的注释巴利
5. Duccaritasuttavaṇṇanā
64 64. 第五,恶行是指恶劣的行为,或者邪恶的行为。以身所作的恶行,或者从身门生起的恶行,就是身恶行。对剩下的语恶行、意恶行,也应这样理解。这些恶行,既可以按施设来讲,也可以按业道来讲。其中,按施设来说:违犯在身门制定的学处,就是身恶行;违犯在语门制定的学处,就是语恶行;违犯在身语两门制定的学处,就是意恶行。这是按施设的讲法。而按业道来说:杀生等三种思,无论在身门还是在语门生起,都是身恶行;同样地,妄语等四种思,是语恶行;贪欲、嗔恚、邪见这三种与思相应的法,是意恶行。这是按业道的讲法。巴利
64. Pañcame duṭṭhu caritāni, duṭṭhāni vā caritāni duccaritāni. Kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā pavattaṃ duccaritaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo . Imāni ca duccaritāni paññattiyā vā kathetabbāni kammapathehi vā. Tattha paññattiyā tāva kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa vītikkamo kāyaduccaritaṃ, vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa vītikkamo vacīduccaritaṃ, ubhayattha paññattassa vītikkamo manoduccaritanti ayaṃ paññattikathā. Pāṇātipātādayo pana tisso cetanā kāyadvārepi, vacīdvārepi, uppannā kāyaduccaritaṃ, tathā catasso musāvādādicetanā vacīduccaritaṃ, abhijjhā, byāpādo, micchādiṭṭhīti tayo cetanāsampayuttadhammā manoduccaritanti ayaṃ kammapathakathā.
在偈颂里,只有已经构成业道的恶法,才以“身恶行”等形态被宣说;为了把此外的恶法也收摄进来,所以又说“以及其余与过患相应之法”。这里“与过患相应”,意思就是与贪等烦恼相应。剩下的内容很容易理解。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ kammapathappattoyeva pāpadhammo kāyaduccaritādibhāvena vuttoti tadaññaṃ pāpadhammaṃ saṅgaṇhituṃ ‘‘yañcaññaṃ dosasañhita’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha dosasañhitanti rāgādikilesasaṃhitaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第6章 善行经的注释巴利
6. Sucaritasuttavaṇṇanā
65 65. 第六经的注释中,“suṭṭhu caritāni, sundarāni vā caritāni”就是善行,意思是好好做的行为,或者美好的行为。以身所做的善行,或者从身门发出的善行,就是身善行。语善行和意善行也依此类推。这里也有两种说法:依施设说和依业道说。其中,依施设说:不违犯身门所制定的学处,是身善行;不违犯语门所制定的学处,是语善行;不违犯身、语两门所制定的学处,是意善行。依业道说:远离杀生等恶行的人,所生起的三种思和三种离,是身善行;远离妄语等恶行的人,所生起的四种思和四种离,是语善行;无贪、无瞋、正见——这三种与思相应的心所法,是意善行。其余内容如前所说。巴利
65. Chaṭṭhe suṭṭhu caritāni, sundarāni vā caritāni sucaritāni. Kāyena sucaritaṃ, kāyato vā pavattaṃ sucaritaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Idhāpi pana paññattivasena, kammapathavasena cāti duvidhā kathā. Tattha kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa avītikkamo kāyasucaritaṃ, vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa avītikkamo vacīsucaritaṃ, ubhayattha paññattassa avītikkamo manosucaritanti ayaṃ paññattikathā. Pāṇātipātādīhi pana viramantassa uppannā tisso cetanāpi viratiyopi kāyasucaritaṃ, musāvādādīhi viramantassa catasso cetanāpi viratiyopi vacīsucaritaṃ, anabhijjhā, abyāpādo, sammādiṭṭhīti tayo cetanāsampayuttadhammā manosucaritanti ayaṃ kammapathakathā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第七部《清净经》的注释巴利
7. Soceyyasuttavaṇṇanā
66 第七经中,“清净”指清净的状态。“身清净”就是身善行;“语清净”和“意清净”也就是语善行和意善行。正如经中所说:“其中,什么是身清净?就是远离杀生……”等等。巴利
66. Sattame soceyyānīti sucibhāvā. Kāyasoceyyanti kāyasucaritaṃ, vacīmanosoceyyānipi vacīmanosucaritāneva. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ kāyasoceyyaṃ? Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī’’tiādi (a. ni. 3.121-122).
偈颂里说“以身清净”,是因为通过彻底断除,已经断尽了一切身恶行,所以叫身清净。“具足清净”是指烦恼已经止息,因此具备了极其清净的清净成就。其余内容跟前面说的一样。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ samucchedavasena pahīnasabbakāyaduccaritattā kāyena sucīti kāyasuci. Soceyyasampannanti paṭippassaddhakilesattā suparisuddhāya soceyyasampattiyā upetaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
8. 牟尼性经的注释巴利
8. Moneyyasuttavaṇṇanā
67 67. 第八部中,“牟尼性”这个词:在这里,能了知此世与他世、了知自利与他利的人,就是牟尼,包括善凡夫、七种有学以及阿罗汉。但在这里,特指阿罗汉。因为是牟尼的状态,所以叫“牟尼性”,也就是阿罗汉的身、语、意正行。巴利
67. Aṭṭhame moneyyānīti ettha idhalokaparalokaṃ attahitaparahitañca munātīti muni, kalyāṇaputhujjanena saddhiṃ satta sekkhā arahā ca. Idha pana arahāva adhippeto. Munino bhāvāti moneyyāni, arahato kāyavacīmanosamācārā.
或者也可以说,能让人成为牟尼的修行实践法,就是“牟尼性”。关于这些,详细解释如下:巴利
Atha vā munibhāvakarā moneyyapaṭipadādhammā moneyyāni. Tesamayaṃ vitthāro –
在这里,什么是身牟尼?舍断三种身恶行,是身牟尼;三种身善行,是身牟尼;以身为所缘的智慧,是身牟尼;对身的遍知,是身牟尼;与遍知同行的道,是身牟尼;舍断对身体的欲贪,是身牟尼;由于身行息灭而证入的第四禅等至,是身牟尼。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ? Tividhakāyaduccaritassa pahānaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, tividhaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyapariññā kāyamoneyyaṃ, pariññāsahagato maggo kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyasmiṃ chandarāgappahānaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyasaṅkhāranirodhā catutthajjhānasamāpatti kāyamoneyyaṃ.
在这里,什么是语牟尼?舍断四种语恶行,就是语牟尼;四种语善行,也是语牟尼;以语言为所缘的智慧,是语牟尼;对语言的遍知,是语牟尼;与遍知同起的道,是语牟尼;舍断对语言的欲贪,是语牟尼;由语行灭尽而进入的第二禅那等至,是语牟尼。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ vacīmoneyyaṃ? Catubbidhavacīduccaritassa pahānaṃ vacīmoneyyaṃ, catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritaṃ, vācārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ, vācāpariññā, pariññāsahagato maggo, vācāya chandarāgappahānaṃ, vacīsaṅkhāranirodhā dutiyajjhānasamāpatti vacīmoneyyaṃ.
在这里,什么是意牟尼性?舍断三种意恶行是意牟尼性,三种意善行是意牟尼性,以意为所缘的智慧是意牟尼性,对意的遍知是意牟尼性,与遍知同起的道是意牟尼性,舍断对心意的欲贪是意牟尼性,由心行灭尽而证入的想受灭等至是意牟尼性。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ manomoneyyaṃ? Tividhamanoduccaritassa pahānaṃ manomoneyyaṃ, tividhaṃ manosucaritaṃ, manārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ, manopariññā, pariññāsahagato maggo, manasmiṃ chandarāgappahānaṃ, cittasaṅkhāranirodhā saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpatti manomoneyya’’nti (mahāni. 14; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 21).
以最上道之水彻底洗净了罪恶垢染的“已洗净诸恶”。巴利
Ninhātapāpakanti aggamaggajalena suṭṭhu vikkhālitapāpamalaṃ.
第九部 初欲经注释巴利
9. Paṭhamarāgasuttavaṇṇanā
68 68. 第九首偈颂中,“对任何人”是没有指定对象的说法,因此是指任何一个人,无论是在家人还是出家人。“贪未断除”:以染着为本质的贪,没有通过彻底断除而断掉,未由圣道令达不生起之法性。嗔和痴也是这样。其中,能导致堕入恶趣的贪嗔痴由初道断除,粗重的欲贪和嗔由第二道断除,它们剩余的部分由第三道断除,有贪和残余的痴由第四道断除。当这些被这样断除时,与它们同属一聚的一切烦恼也都被断除了。这样一来,这些贪等烦恼,对于任何一位比丘、比丘尼、优婆塞、优婆夷来说,都未被圣道断除。“被魔缚”:是指被烦恼魔所缚。只要被烦恼魔所缚到何种程度,也就被行作魔等所缚到何种程度。“套上魔索”:魔索被这个未断烦恼的人,以那未断烦恼的状态,套在了自己的心相续上,也就是说,被称为魔索的烦恼被套上、进入了自身之中,因此他自己使自己被束缚。或者,魔索被套在他身上。在光明分中,“已解脱”:已被解开、释放、移除。其余内容应按照相反的方式理解。巴利
68. Navame yassa kassacīti aniyamitavacanaṃ, tasmā yassa kassaci puggalassa gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā. Rāgo appahīnoti rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo samucchedavasena na pahīno, maggena anuppattidhammataṃ na āpādito. Dosamohesupi eseva nayo. Tattha apāyagamanīyā rāgadosamohā paṭhamamaggena, oḷārikā kāmarāgadosā dutiyamaggena, teyeva anavasesā tatiyamaggena, bhavarāgo avasiṭṭhamoho ca catutthamaggena pahīyanti. Evametesu pahīyantesu tadekaṭṭhato sabbepi kilesā pahīyanteva. Evamete rāgādayo yassa kassaci bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā maggena appahīnā. Baddho mārassāti kilesamārena baddhoti vuccati. Yadaggena ca kilesamārena baddho, tadaggena abhisaṅkhāramārādīhipi baddhoyeva hoti. Paṭimukkassa mārapāsoti paṭimukko assa anena appahīnakilesena puggalena tāyeva appahīnakilesatāya mārapāsasaṅkhāto kileso attano cittasantāne paṭimukko pavesito, tena sayaṃ bandhāpitoti attho. Atha vā paṭimukko assa bhaveyya mārapāso. Sukkapakkhe omukkassāti avamukko mocito apanīto assa. Sesaṃ vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ.
这里,偈颂只按白半月的方式出现。它的简要含义是:某位圣者的贪、嗔、无明已被最上道清除灭尽,因为修习了身、戒、心、慧,所以在已修习的阿拉汉中,他是其中一位内在已修成者,成为梵者,或成为最殊胜者,已证得阿拉汉果。就像其他诸漏尽者,具足了过去的依止成就而来;也像他们依不落两端的、与戒蕴定蕴慧蕴相应的中道,到达并证得涅槃;又像他们如实通达诸蕴等的真实特相,无颠倒地了知苦等真实法,对色等对象仅以所见等的方式而观见;还像他们舍弃八种非圣者的言语,只以圣者的言语方式说话,身体随语言而行,语言随身体而行。这位圣者也是如此,所以称为如来;因为觉悟四圣谛,称为佛陀;超越了人的怨恨、烦恼怨以及自我谴责等畏惧,所以称为超越怨怖。由于断除了一切烦恼和诸行等,阿拉汉、佛陀等圣者被称为断尽一切者——他们这样说,这样称扬。巴利
Idha gāthā sukkapakkhavaseneva āgatā. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yassa ariyapuggalassa rāgadosāvijjā virājitā aggamaggena nirodhitā, taṃ bhāvitakāyasīlacittapaññatāya bhāvitattesu arahantesu aññataraṃ abbhantaraṃ ekaṃ brahmabhūtaṃ brahmaṃ vā seṭṭhaṃ arahattaphalaṃ pattaṃ. Yathā aññe khīṇāsavā pubbūpanissayasampattisamannāgatā hutvā āgatā, yathā ca te antadvayarahitāya sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhasahagatāya majjhimāya paṭipadāya nibbānaṃ gatā adhigatā. Yathā vā te khandhādīnaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ yāthāvato paṭivijjhiṃsu, yathā ca te tathadhamme dukkhādayo aviparītato abbhaññiṃsu, rūpādike ca visaye yathā te diṭṭhamattādivaseneva passiṃsu, yathā vā pana te aṭṭha anariyavohāre vajjetvā ariyavohāravaseneva pavattavācā, vācānurūpañca pavattakāyā, kāyānurūpañca pavattavācā, tathā ayampi ariyapuggaloti tathāgataṃ, catusaccabuddhatāya buddhaṃ, puggalaveraṃ kilesaveraṃ attānuvādādibhayañca atikkantanti verabhayātītaṃ. Sabbesaṃ kilesābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ pahīnattā sabbappahāyinaṃ buddhādayo ariyā āhu kathenti kittentīti.
第十 第二贪经注释巴利
10. Dutiyarāgasuttavaṇṇanā
69 第十部中,“已渡”就是已经渡过,没有渡过就是“未渡”。“海”指轮回大海,或者指眼处等大海。这两者都因为难以填满,所以像海一样,因此叫海。或者,以涌流之义叫海,也就是因为烦恼之雨,使有情相续生起烦恼的流泄处,这就是它的含义。“有波浪”指有愤怒和忧恼的波浪。正如所说:“‘波浪之畏’,比丘,这是愤怒和忧恼的同义词。”(《如是语》109;《中部》2.162)“有漩涡”指与五种欲功德的漩涡一起存在的漩涡。正如所说:“‘漩涡之畏’,比丘,这是五种欲功德的同义词。”(《如是语》109;《中部》2.164;《增支部》4.122)“有海怪、罗刹”指与那些像凶恶鳄鱼、海怪、鱼鳖、罗刹一样、对进入自己范围的有情造成伤害的凡夫人共存。正如所说:“‘有海怪、罗刹’,比丘,这是女人的同义词。”(《如是语》109)“已渡”指以道智之船渡过了如上所说的海。“已渡”就是已经渡过。“到彼岸”指到达了那大海的彼岸、对面的岸边、涅槃。“立于陆地”指从那里越过了轮回大流和欲等大流之后,立于陆地、对面的岸边、涅槃,被称为除诸恶的婆罗门。巴利
69. Dasame atarīti tiṇṇo, na tiṇṇo atiṇṇo. Samuddanti saṃsārasamuddaṃ, cakkhāyatanādisamuddaṃ vā. Tadubhayampi duppūraṇaṭṭhena samuddo viyāti samuddaṃ. Atha vā samuddanaṭṭhena samuddaṃ, kilesavassanena sattasantānassa kilesasadanatoti attho. Savīcinti kodhūpāyāsavīcīhi savīciṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘vīcibhayanti kho, bhikkhu, kodhūpāyāsassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109; ma. ni. 2.162). Sāvaṭṭanti pañcakāmaguṇāvaṭṭehi saha āvaṭṭaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘āvaṭṭabhayanti kho, bhikkhu, pañcannetaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109; ma. ni. 2.164; a. ni. 4.122). Sagahaṃ sarakkhasanti attano gocaragatānaṃ anatthajananato caṇḍamakaramacchakacchaparakkhasasadisehi visabhāgapuggalehi sahitaṃ. Tathā cāha ‘‘sagahaṃ sarakkhasanti kho, bhikkhu, mātugāmassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109). Atarīti maggapaññānāvāya yathāvuttaṃ samuddaṃ uttari. Tiṇṇoti nittiṇṇo. Pāraṅgatoti tassa samuddassa pāraṃ paratīraṃ nirodhaṃ upagato. Thale tiṭṭhatīti tato eva saṃsāramahoghaṃ kāmādimahoghañca atikkamitvā thale paratīre nibbāne bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇo tiṭṭhatīti vuccati.
这里这些偈颂也只是按照白分(善法分)的方式来的。其中,“波浪之畏”就是前面所说的波浪之畏——因为应当对它感到恐惧,所以它就是波浪之畏。“难渡”就是极难越过。“已渡越”就是已经超越。巴利
Idhāpi gāthā sukkapakkhavaseneva āgatā. Tattha ūmibhayanti yathāvuttaūmibhayaṃ, bhāyitabbaṃ etasmāti taṃ ūmi bhayaṃ. Duttaranti duratikkamaṃ. Accatārīti atikkami.
“超越结者”:因为已经超越并断除了贪等五种结,所以叫超越结者。“他已到尽头,不成为衡量标准”:这样状态的阿罗汉,因为贪等作为衡量标准的法已经彻底到了尽头,所以是已到尽头者;也正因如此,又因为戒、定、慧等法蕴已经圆满,谁也没法用“他有这样的戒、这样的定、这样的慧”来衡量他,所以他不成为衡量标准。或者说,已经到达无余涅槃这个“尽头”的阿罗汉,因为谁也没法用“他投生在某处”“他有这样的名姓”来衡量他,所以他不成为衡量标准,不落入衡量。也正因如此,他让死魔迷惑了,我们说死魔无法追踪他。这样,说法就以无余涅槃界为终点而结束。应当知道:在这一品中,第一、第五、第六经讲的是轮回;第二、第七、第八经讲的是还灭;其余几经则兼说轮回与还灭两者。巴利
Saṅgātigoti rāgādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ saṅgānaṃ atikkantattā pahīnattā saṅgātigo. Atthaṅgato so na pamāṇametīti so evaṃbhūto arahā rāgādīnaṃ pamāṇakaradhammānaṃ accantameva atthaṃ gatattā atthaṅgato, tato eva sīlādidhammakkhandhapāripūriyā ca ‘‘ediso sīlena samādhinā paññāyā’’ti kenaci pamiṇituṃ asakkuṇeyyo pamāṇaṃ na eti, atha vā anupādisesanibbānasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ gato so arahā ‘‘imāya nāma gatiyā ṭhito, ediso ca nāmagottenā’’ti pamiṇituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya pamāṇaṃ na eti na upagacchati. Tato eva amohayi maccurājaṃ, tena anubandhituṃ asakkuṇeyyoti vadāmīti anupādisesanibbānadhātuyāva desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Iti imasmiṃ vagge paṭhamapañcamachaṭṭhesu vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, dutiyasattamaaṭṭhamesu vivaṭṭaṃ, sesesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.
《邪见者经》的注释巴利
1. Micchādiṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
70 70. 在第三品第一经中,“被我见”就是我已见过,也就是我用一切眼和天眼这两种眼亲自看见、直接了知。这样说就否定了传闻等途径,而这个含义稍后就会在经文本身中出现。“具足身恶行”就是以身恶行而具足。“诽谤圣者”就是对佛陀等圣者,甚至对在家的入流者,通过毁坏他们的功德、说不实的话来诽谤、辱骂、指责。“邪见者”就是持有颠倒见解的人。“邪见业受持者”就是因邪见而受持种种业,并且还促使别人受持以邪见为根本的身业等行为。在这里,虽然通过语恶行和意恶行已经包含了诽谤圣者和邪见,但经文再次宣说,是为了显示它们极大的罪过。因为诽谤圣者的罪过极其重大,就像无间业一样。正如所说:巴利
70. Tatiyavaggassa paṭhame diṭṭhā mayāti mayā diṭṭhā, mama samantacakkhunā dibbacakkhunā cāti dvīhipi cakkhūhi diṭṭhā paccakkhato viditā. Tena anussavādiṃ paṭikkhipati, ayañca attho idāneva pāḷiyaṃ āgamissati. Kāyaduccaritena samannāgatāti kāyaduccaritena samaṅgībhūtā. Ariyānaṃ upavādakāti buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ antamaso gihisotāpannānampi guṇaparidhaṃsanena abhūtabbhakkhānena upavādakā akkosakā garahakā. Micchādiṭṭhikāti viparītadassanā. Micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti micchādassanahetu samādinnanānāvidhakammā ye ca, micchādiṭṭhimūlakesu kāyakammādīsu aññepi samādapenti. Ettha ca vacīmanoduccaritaggahaṇeneva ariyūpavādamicchādiṭṭhīsu gahitāsu punavacanaṃ mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ nesaṃ. Mahāsāvajjo hi ariyūpavādo ānantariyasadiso. Yathāha –
舍利弗,就好比一位戒具足、定具足、慧具足的比丘,可能在现世就证得阿拉汉。舍利弗,我说,这种成就即是:如果不舍弃那种言语,不舍弃那种心,不放弃那种见,就会像被搬来的东西一样,被扔进地狱。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno, samādhisampanno, paññāsampanno, diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyya; evaṃsampadamidaṃ, sāriputta, vadāmi taṃ vācaṃ appahāya, taṃ cittaṃ appahāya, taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ niraye’’ti (ma. ni. 1.149).
再没有别的什么比邪见更重大过失了。正如所说:巴利
Micchādiṭṭhito ca mahāsāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi. Yathāha –
比丘们,我不认为有任何其他单一法比这邪见更罪过重大。比丘们,邪见是一切罪过中最严重的。巴利
‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ mahāsāvajjataraṃ yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi. Micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310).
至于“taṃ kho pana”等语句,是为了把前面所说的道理是自身可以亲自证见的这一点,更加坚定地显示出来,所以才这样开始。这一点本身也很容易理解。巴利
Taṃkho panātiādi yathāvuttassa atthassa attapaccakkhabhāvaṃ daḷhataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Tampi suviññeyyameva.
在偈颂中,“把心错误地安放”,是指由于贪欲等,把心不如理地放置。“说了邪语”,是指由于妄语等而说了邪语。“做了邪业”,是指由于杀生等而做了身业。或者,“把心错误地安放”,是指由于邪见,把心颠倒地放置。剩下两句也是同样的道理。现在为了说明他这样行恶行的原因,说“少闻”:意思是缺少能利益自己和他人听闻的教法。“作非福”:正因为如此,由于对圣法不熟悉,就成了造恶者、具有恶法的人。“在此生命短暂”:指在这人世间,生命极为短促。正如这样说:“即使活得久的人,也不过百岁或稍多一点”,以及“人的寿命短促”。因此,多闻又有智慧的人,应当赶快修集福业,成为往生天界的人,或者安立于涅槃。而少闻又作非福的人,身体坏灭之后,因为愚痴,就会投生到地狱。巴利
Gāthāsu micchā manaṃ paṇidhāyāti abhijjhādīnaṃ vasena cittaṃ ayoniso ṭhapetvā. Micchāvācañca bhāsiyāti micchā musāvādādivasena vācaṃ bhāsitvā. Micchā kammāni katvānāti pāṇātipātādivasena kāyakammāni katvā. Atha vā micchā manaṃ paṇidhāyāti micchādiṭṭhivasena cittaṃ viparītaṃ ṭhapetvā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Idānissa tathā duccaritacaraṇe kāraṇaṃ dasseti appassutoti, attano paresañca hitāvahena sutena virahitoti attho. Apuññakaroti tato eva ariyadhammassa akovidatāya kibbisakārī pāpadhammo. Appasmiṃ idha jīviteti idha manussaloke jīvite atiparitte. Tathā cāha ‘‘yo ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.93; saṃ. ni. 1.145), ‘‘appamāyu manussāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.145; mahāni. 10) ca. Tasmā bahussuto sappañño sīghaṃ puññāni katvā saggūpago nibbānapatiṭṭho vā hoti. Yo pana appassuto apuññakaro, kāyassa bhedā duppañño nirayaṃ so upapajjatīti.
《正见经》的注释巴利
2. Sammādiṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
71 第二部经里的含义,应当依照与第一部经所说的相反方式来理解。巴利
71. Dutiye paṭhamasutte vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo.
3. 《出离经》的注释巴利
3. Nissaraṇiyasuttavaṇṇanā
72 在第三经的注释中,“出离相关的”意思就是与出离相应。“界”指的是无有情(有情空)的自性。“欲”指的是烦恼欲和事欲两者。或者也可以说,“欲”就是指烦恼欲。因为从烦恼欲出离了,也就等于从事欲出离,不会有别的可能。确实已经这样说过——巴利
72. Tatiye nissaraṇiyāti nissaraṇapaṭisaṃyuttā. Dhātuyoti sattasuññasabhāvā. Kāmānanti kilesakāmānañceva vatthukāmānañca. Atha vā kāmānanti kilesakāmānaṃ. Kilesakāmato hi nissaraṇā vatthukāmehipi nissaraṇaṃyeva hoti, na aññathā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
世间那些五光十色的东西,并不是真正的欲。
对男人来说,欲望就是内心的贪念和盘算。
世间那些斑斓多彩的事物,依旧那样安住在世上。
在这里,智者调伏欲求。巴利
‘‘Na te kāmā yāni citrāni loke, Saṅkapparāgo purisassa kāmo; Tiṭṭhanti citrāni tatheva loke, Athettha dhīrā vinayanti chanda’’nti. (a. ni. 6.63);
出离就是离去。出离(nekkhamma)指初禅,尤其应当把它看作以不净为所缘。如果有人以那禅那作为基础,对诸行进行思择,证到第三道,以不来道亲证涅槃,那么他的心就彻底地从欲中出离了;这应当被理解为从欲中最殊胜的出离。诸色(rūpānaṃ)指色法,特别是连同所缘,按善、果报、唯作的区分,涵盖一切色界法。无色(āruppa)指无色界禅那。有些人把“诸欲”(kāmānaṃ)解释为一切欲界法,把“出离”(nekkhamma)解释为五种色界禅那;这种说法不见于注疏,也不合理。已生(bhūta)指已经产生的。有为(saṅkhata)指由诸缘和合共同造作的。缘生(paṭiccasamuppanna)指从因缘而生的。用这三个词,就能无余地穷尽三界一切法。灭(nirodha)指涅槃。在这里,第一个界说的是对欲的遍知,第二个界说的是对色的遍知,第三个界说的是对一切有为的遍知,也就是超越一切有。巴利
Nissaraṇanti apagamo. Nekkhammanti paṭhamajjhānaṃ, visesato taṃ asubhārammaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yo pana taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā tatiyamaggaṃ patvā anāgāmimaggena nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti, tassa cittaṃ accantameva kāmehi nissaṭanti idaṃ ukkaṭṭhato kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Rūpānanti rūpadhammānaṃ, visesena saddhiṃ ārammaṇehi kusalavipākakiriyābhedato sabbesaṃ rūpāvacaradhammānaṃ. Āruppanti arūpāvacarajjhānaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘kāmāna’’nti padassa ‘‘sabbesaṃ kāmāvacaradhammāna’’nti atthaṃ vadanti. ‘‘Nekkhamma’’nti ca ‘‘pañca rūpāvacarajjhānānī’’ti. Taṃ aṭṭhakathāsu natthi, na yujjati ca. Bhūtanti jātaṃ. Saṅkhatanti samecca sambhuyya paccayehi kataṃ. Paṭiccasamuppannanti kāraṇato nibbattaṃ. Tīhipi padehi tebhūmake dhamme anavasesato pariyādiyati. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamāya dhātuyā kāmapariññā vuttā, dutiyāya rūpapariññā, tatiyāya sabbasaṅkhatapariññā sabbabhavasamatikkamo vutto.
在偈颂中,“了知欲的出离”,意思是:知道“这就是欲的出离——就是这样从欲中出离”。以这个为超越的方法,所以叫“超越”;了知那超越的方法就是无色界。一切行在这里平息、寂止,所以叫“一切行寂止”,也就是涅槃;他接触、证得涅槃。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Gāthāsu kāmanissaraṇaṃ ñatvāti ‘‘idaṃ kāmanissaraṇaṃ – evañca kāmato nissaraṇa’’nti jānitvā. Atikkamati etenāti atikkamo, atikkamanūpāyo, taṃ atikkamaṃ āruppaṃ ñatvā. Sabbe saṅkhārā samanti vūpasamanti etthāti sabbasaṅkhārasamatho, nibbānaṃ, taṃ phusaṃ phusanto. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
4. 《更寂静经》的注释巴利
4. Santatarasuttavaṇṇanā
73 在第四经中,“色”指的是色界诸法。“更寂静”意思是极其寂静。色界诸法因为能镇伏烦恼、舍弃寻等粗重支分,又属于定地,所以被称为寂静;而无色界法由于支分寂静和所缘寂静,比起它们更加寂静,因此被称为“更寂静”。“灭”指的是涅槃。即使与第四无色定相比,果等至已经达到只余行蕴残存的微细状态,也因烦恼热恼的止息以及以涅槃为所缘而更加寂静,更何况是一切行蕴完全寂止的涅槃呢?因此说“比起无色定,灭更寂静”。巴利
73. Catutthe rūpehīti rūpāvacaradhammehi. Santatarāti atisayena santā. Rūpāvacaradhammā hi kilesavikkhambhanato vitakkādioḷārikaṅgappahānato samādhibhūmibhāvato ca santā nāma, āruppā pana tehipi aṅgasantatāya ceva ārammaṇasantatāya ca atisayena santavuttikā, tena santatarāti vuttā. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvappattitopi hi catutthāruppato phalasamāpattiyova santatarā kilesadarathapaṭipassaddhito nibbānārammaṇato ca, kimaṅgaṃ pana sabbasaṅkhārasamatho nibbānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āruppehi nirodho santataro’’ti.
偈颂里说的“赴色者”,是指投生到色界的众生。因为这里说的“色”就是指色有,就像“修习通往色界再生之道”这类说法里一样。“住于无色者”是指无色界的众生。“不知灭、还复受生之人”——通过这句话,说明跟色界、无色界的法相比,灭才是真正寂静的。“不住于无色者”是指不因对无色的贪染而执著于无色界的人,意思也是说他们能够遍知。“若人于灭而解脱”这里的“ye”只是个虚词。其余部分和前面解释的方式一样。巴利
Gāthāsu rūpūpagāti rūpabhavūpagā. Rūpabhavo hi idha rūpanti vutto, ‘‘rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādīsu viya. Arūpaṭṭhāyinoti arūpāvacarā. Nirodhaṃ appajānantā, āgantāro punabbhavanti etena rūpārūpāvacaradhammehi nirodhassa santabhāvameva dasseti. Arūpesu asaṇṭhitāti arūparāgena arūpabhavesu appatiṭṭhahantā, tepi parijānantāti attho. Nirodhe ye vimuccantīti ettha yeti nipātamattaṃ. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
第五经 子经注释巴利
5. Puttasuttavaṇṇanā
74 74. 第五经中,“子”指亲生的孩子,也可以包括养子等。“存在”指正活在世上、在世间能被找到的——也就是在这个世间真实存在、清楚可见的。因为确实有,所以叫“存在”;因为明显可见,所以叫“存在”。“超生子”指以自身功德超越父母而生,意思是功德比父母更殊胜。“随生子”指功德与父母相像而出生,意思是功德和父母同等。“劣生子”指功德比父母低下而出生,意思是功德不如父母。然而,为了把所具备而使子女被意指为比父母更胜、同等或低劣的那些功德分别说清楚,以欲解说之欲而发问,先问“诸比丘,怎样是超生子呢?”然后以“诸比丘,在这里,儿子的……”等语开始详细解说。巴利
74. Pañcame puttāti atrajā orasaputtā, dinnakādayopi vā. Santoti bhavantā saṃvijjamānā lokasminti imasmiṃ loke upalabbhamānā. Atthibhāvena santo, pākaṭabhāvena vijjamānā. Atijātoti attano guṇehi mātāpitaro atikkamitvā jāto, tehi adhikaguṇoti attho. Anujātoti guṇehi mātāpitūnaṃ anurūpo hutvā jāto, tehi samānaguṇoti attho. Avajātoti guṇehi mātāpitūnaṃ adhamo hutvā jāto, tehi hīnaguṇoti attho. Yehi pana guṇehi yutto mātāpitūnaṃ adhiko samo hīnoti ca adhippeto, te vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, putto atijāto hotī’’ti kathetukamyatāya pucchaṃ katvā ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, puttassā’’tiādinā niddeso āraddho.
在这其中,对于“不皈依佛”等说法里的“佛陀”一词:是指由无碍智所标志的无上解脱的证悟所培育的蕴相续;或者,是依据于诸谛的正觉、以一切知智为依止,而被施设为殊胜众生的那个存在——这就是佛陀。正如所说的:巴利
Tattha na buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatātiādīsu buddhoti sabbadhammesu appaṭihatañāṇanimittānuttaravimokkhādhigamaparibhāvitaṃ khandhasantānaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ vā saccābhisambodhiṃ upādāya paññattiko sattātisayo buddho. Yathāha –
所谓“佛陀”,就是指那位世尊:他自己觉悟,没有老师,在以前从没听人说过的法中,靠自己的力量证悟了诸谛,并且在那里达到了全知,对诸力也获得了自在。巴利
‘‘Buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṃ saccāni abhisambujjhi, tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ patto, balesu ca vasībhāva’’nti (cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 97; paṭi. ma. 1.161) –
这暂且是从含义上对“佛陀”的阐明。巴利
Ayaṃ tāva atthato buddhavibhāvanā.
从字面上看,由于带有潜藏习气的烦恼之眠彻底消失,所以是已觉悟者、已醒来者,因此称为佛陀;或者因为觉慧完全绽放开来,所以是已觉悟者、已明觉者,因此称为佛陀;是已觉悟的人,所以是佛陀;是令他人觉悟的人,所以是佛陀——应当按这样一类的方式来理解。正如经中所说:巴利
Byañjanato pana savāsanāya kilesaniddāya accantavigamena buddhavā paṭibuddhavāti buddho, buddhiyā vā vikasitabhāvena buddhavā vibuddhavāti buddho, bujjhitāti buddho, bodhetāti buddhoti evamādinā nayena veditabbo. Yathāha –
了知诸谛,所以是佛陀;令众生觉悟,所以是佛陀;因为具足一切知,所以是佛陀;因为具足一切见,所以是佛陀;因为不须他人引导,所以是佛陀;因为觉性显发,所以是佛陀;依“诸漏已尽”而称为佛陀;依“烦恼已断”而称为佛陀;因为彻底远离贪,所以是佛陀;因为彻底远离嗔,所以是佛陀;因为彻底远离痴,所以是佛陀;因为彻底远离烦恼垢染,所以是佛陀;因为已走上唯一的道路,所以是佛陀;因为独自证得无上正等正觉,所以是佛陀;因为摧破了无觉并获得了觉慧,所以是佛陀。这个“佛陀”的名字,不是母亲起的,不是父亲起的,不是兄弟起的,不是姐妹起的,不是朋友大臣起的,不是亲戚血亲起的,不是沙门婆罗门起的,不是天神起的;而是诸佛世尊在菩提树下,与证得一切知智同时,亲自证悟的究竟解脱之施设,这就是“佛陀”。巴利
‘‘Bujjhitā saccānīti buddho, bodhetā pajāyāti buddho, sabbaññutāya buddho, sabbadassāvitāya buddho, anaññaneyyatāya buddho, visavitāya buddho, khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddho, nirupakkilesasaṅkhātena buddho, ekantavītarāgoti buddho, ekantavītadosoti buddho, ekantavītamohoti buddho, ekantanikkilesoti buddho, ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddho, eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddho, abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhāti buddho, buddhoti cetaṃ nāmaṃ na mātarā kataṃ, na pitarā kataṃ, na bhātarā kataṃ, na bhaginiyā kataṃ, na mittāmaccehi kataṃ, na ñātisālohitehi kataṃ, na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṃ, na devatāhi kataṃ, atha kho vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti, yadidaṃ buddho’’ti (cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 97; paṭi. ma. 1.162).
“伤害”就是皈依处:它能伤害、消灭、摧毁一切灾祸、一切恶趣之苦、一切轮回之苦,这就是它的意思。所谓“已皈依”,就是怀着这样的心意——“佛陀世尊是我们的皈依处、归趣、究竟归宿、庇护所,是灾祸的消除者、利益的给予者”——去走向、亲近、侍奉、承事佛陀世尊;或者,以“我们这样了知、这样觉悟”的方式前往、接近,这就是皈依佛陀。与此相反,就是没有皈依佛陀。巴利
Hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ, sabbaṃ anatthaṃ apāyadukkhaṃ sabbaṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ hiṃsati vināseti viddhaṃsetīti attho. Saraṇaṃ gatāti ‘‘buddho bhagavā amhākaṃ saraṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ aghassa hantā hitassa vidhātā’’ti iminā adhippāyena buddhaṃ bhagavantaṃ gacchāma bhajāma sevāma payirupāsāma. Evaṃ vā jānāma bujjhāmāti evaṃ gatā upagatā buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā. Tappaṭikkhepena na buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā.
“已皈依法”的意思是:对于已经证得圣道、现证涅槃、按照教导修行的人来说,法能让他不堕入四种恶趣,并使他安住、持守,所以称为“法”。从含义上说,这“法”就是圣道和涅槃。正如这样说:巴利
Dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāti adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne catūsu apāyesu apatamāne katvā dhāretīti dhammo. So atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,在一切有为法中,圣八支道被称为最殊胜的。广说见《增支部》4.34。巴利
‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti vitthāro (a. ni. 4.34).
不仅圣道和涅槃是如此,圣果连同教理也是如此。这在《伞少年天宫》中已经说过:巴利
Na kevalañca ariyamagganibbānāni eva, apica kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammo ca. Vuttañhetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –
远离贪欲、心之躁动、忧愁,
无为且不违逆的法
这个甜美、熟练、善加分别的
你应当皈依这个法。巴利
‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, Dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ; Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, Dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 887);
在这里,所谓“离贪”说的是道,“不动、无忧”说的是果,“无为法”说的是涅槃,“不违逆、甘甜、此纯熟、善分别”则是以三藏所分别的一切法蕴。依照所说的方式,以法为皈依而趣向者,就是皈依法;与此相反,则不是皈依法。巴利
Tattha hi rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito, anejamasokanti phalaṃ, dhammasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ, appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā sabbadhammakkhandhā kathitā. Taṃ dhammaṃ vuttanayena saraṇanti gatā dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā. Tappaṭikkhepena na dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā.
以见与戒的聚合而和合,所以称为僧伽。从含义上说,就是八种圣人的集合。正如在同一部《天宫事》中所说:巴利
Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātena saṃhatoti saṅgho. So atthato aṭṭhaariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiṃ eva vimāne –
而在布施被称为有大果报的地方,
在四种清净的士夫双中;
还有八种人,他们是见法者。
你应该皈依这个僧伽,把它当作归依处。巴利
‘‘Yattha ca dinna mahapphalamāhu, Catūsu sucīsu purisayugesu; Aṭṭha ca puggala dhammadasā te, Saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 888);
按照前面所说的方式,说“我们皈依这个僧团”的人,就是皈依僧。通过否定这一点,不说“我们皈依这个僧团”。巴利
Taṃ saṅghaṃ vuttanayena saraṇanti gatā saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā. Tappaṭikkhepena na saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāti.
在这里,为了在皈依上具备善巧,应当了解这套次第:皈依、皈依的行为、谁是行皈依的人、皈依行为的分类、果报、杂染、破坏、清净。巴利
Ettha ca saraṇagamanakosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati saraṇagamanappabhedo, phalaṃ, saṃkileso, bhedo, vodānanti ayaṃ vidhi veditabbo.
在这里,先从词义来说:“皈依”就是“杀害”。因为皈依者正是通过这一皈依行为,杀害、摧毁怖畏、恐惧、苦、恶趣和烦恼。这是对三宝的称呼。或者也可以说,佛陀因为做有益的事、阻止无益的事,所以杀害众生的怖畏,因此是皈依;法因为能把人从存在的荒野中救度出来、给予安稳,所以是皈依;僧伽因为能让微小的因获得广大的果报,所以是皈依。因此,从这个道理来说,三宝就是皈依。由这种净信和极度尊重所摧伏了烦恼、以三宝为归宿的心念活动,就是皈依的行为。具足这种心的众生,就是皈依者,他正是以之前所说的那种心念,这样认定:“这三宝是我的皈依处,是我的归宿。”应当这样理解皈依、皈依的行为、以及谁是皈依者这三项内容。巴利
Tattha padatthato tāva hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ, saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiṃ parikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti attho, ratanattayassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Atha vā hite pavattanena ahitā nivattanena ca sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti buddho saraṇaṃ, bhavakantārato uttāraṇena assāsadānena ca dhammo, appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena saṅgho. Tasmā imināpi pariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. Tappasādataggarutāhi vihatakileso tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ. Taṃsamaṅgisatto saraṇaṃ gacchati, vuttappakārena cittuppādena ‘‘etāni me tīṇi ratanāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇa’’nti evaṃ upetīti attho. Evaṃ tāva saraṇaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchatīti idaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
从分类来看,皈依有两种:世间皈依和出世间皈依。其中,出世间皈依是见谛者在道的刹那,通过断除皈依的随烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,从作用上在整个三宝中圆满成就;世间皈依则是凡夫通过镇伏皈依的随烦恼,以佛陀功德等为所缘而成就。从意义上说,它就是对佛陀等对象获得信心,而以信心为根本的正见,在十种福行事中被称作见正直业。巴利
Pabhedato pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ – lokiyaṃ, lokuttarañca. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati, lokiyaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati. Taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu saddhāpaṭilābho , saddhāmūlikā ca sammādiṭṭhi dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati.
这个皈依以四种方式进行:献出自身、以彼为归宿、进入弟子身份、顶礼。其中,献出自身就是像这样说:“从今天开始,我把自身献给佛陀、献给法、献给僧伽”,这样在佛陀等面前舍弃自身。以彼为归宿就是像这样说:“从今天开始,我以佛陀为归宿,以法为归宿,以僧伽为归宿,请您这样记住我”,这样确立以彼为依靠的状态。进入弟子身份就是像这样说:“从今天开始,我是佛陀的弟子,是法的弟子,是僧伽的弟子,请您这样记住我”,这样进入弟子的身份。顶礼就是像这样说:“从今天开始,我对佛陀、法、僧伽这三宝,做问讯、起迎、合掌和应有的恭敬行为,请您这样记住我”,这样对佛陀等表达最高的恭敬。因为只要实行这四种方式中的任何一种,皈依就已经被受持了。巴利
Tayidaṃ catudhā pavattati – attasanniyyātanena, tapparāyaṇatāya, sissabhāvūpagamanena, paṇipātenāti. Tattha attasanniyyātanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃ attapariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo, dhammaparāyaṇo, saṅghaparāyaṇo iti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ tappaṭisaraṇabhāvo tapparāyaṇatā. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassa iti maṃ dhāretū’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvassa upagamanaṃ. Paṇipāto nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃ eva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomi iti maṃ dhāretū’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccakāro. Imesañhi catunnaṃ ākārānaṃ aññataraṃ karontena gahitaṃ eva hoti saraṇagamanaṃ.
另外,也可以这样理解“献身”:就像说“我把自身献给世尊,把自身献给法,把自身献给僧团;我献出生命,我的自身和生命都已经献出去了,直到生命结束,我都皈依佛陀,佛陀是我的皈依、我的救护、我的庇护。”而“成为弟子”,应当像大迦叶长老的皈依那样来看待:“我要是能见到导师,那就是见到世尊;我要是能见到善逝,那就是见到世尊;我要是能见到正等正觉者,那就是见到世尊。”巴利
Apica ‘‘bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa, saṅghassa attānaṃ pariccajāmi, jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccatto eva me attā jīvitañca, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇa’’nti evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ; sugatañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ; sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ; bhagavantameva passeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) evaṃ mahākassapattherassa saraṇagamanaṃ viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
我要四处游走,从一个村到另一个村,从一个城到另一个城。
我礼敬正等觉者,也礼敬法的善法性。巴利
‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ; Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammata’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 194) –
应当这样理解:就像阿拉瓦加等夜叉的皈依一样,这里体现的是以佛陀为归宿。至于“那时,梵摩婆罗门从座位上起身,把上衣搭在一肩上,以头面顶礼世尊的双足,用嘴亲吻世尊的双足,用双手抚摸,并报出自己的名字:‘乔达摩贤者,我是梵摩婆罗门;乔达摩贤者,我是梵摩婆罗门’”(《中部》2.394),应当理解为这就是礼敬。巴利
Evaṃ āḷavakādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. ‘‘Atha kho, brahmāyu, brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti ‘brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo, brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo’’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evaṃ paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
这种礼敬,按对象来分有四种:对亲属的礼敬、出于害怕的礼敬、对老师的礼敬、对应当受供养者的礼敬。其中,只有把对方当作应当受供养者来礼拜,才算真正受了皈依,另外三种不算。因为皈依是以最殊胜者为对象才能成立的,也只有当对最殊胜者的认知破裂时,皈依才会失去。所以,如果有人认定“这位才是世间一切众生中最尊贵、最上等的应受供养者”而向他礼拜,这才算受了皈依;如果只是把他当作亲属、因为害怕、或者把他当作老师来礼拜,那就不算受皈依。已经这样受了皈依的男居士或女居士,即使向外道的出家人礼拜,心里想的是“这是我的亲戚”,他的皈依也不会破;更何况是向没出家的人礼拜,那就更不会破了。同样,因为害怕而向国王礼拜——国王受到全国尊崇,如果不礼拜他,他可能会做出不利的事——皈依也不会因此破失。同样,不管向什么人学习某种技艺,即使是外道,只要心里想“这是我的老师”而向他礼拜,皈依也不会破。皈依的种种差别,应当这样来理解。巴利
So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyavasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gayhati, seṭṭhavasena bhijjati. Tasmā yo ‘‘ayameva loke sabbasattuttamo aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva saraṇaṃ gahitaṃ hoti, na ñātibhayācariyasaññāya vandantena. Evaṃ gahitasaraṇassa upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā aññatitthiyesu pabbajitampi ‘‘ñātako me aya’’nti vandato saraṇaṃ na bhijjati, pageva apabbajitaṃ. Tathā rājānaṃ bhayena vandato. So hi raṭṭhapūjitattā avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyāti. Tathā yaṃkiñci sippaṃ sikkhāpakaṃ titthiyampi ‘‘ācariyo me aya’’nti vandatopi na bhijjati. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa pabhedo veditabbo.
在这里,对于出世间的皈依来说,四种沙门果是异熟果,一切苦的灭尽是功德利益果。因为这样说:巴利
Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ, sabbadukkhakkhayo ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
有人已经皈依了佛、法、僧,
他以正慧看清四圣谛。
苦、苦的生起、以及苦的超越;
以及那导向苦的止息的圣八支道。
这确实是一个安稳的皈依,这是最殊胜的皈依。
依靠这个皈依,就能从一切苦中解脱出来。巴利
‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato; Cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passati. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ; Ariyaṃ caṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ. ‘‘Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ; Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 190-192);
另外,不把事物执为恒常等,也应知道是它的利益和果报。因为这样说过:巴利
Apica niccato anupagamanādīnipi etassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,这是不可能的,绝无此理:一个见具足的人,会把任何行执为常、执为乐,会把任何法执为我,会杀母亲的生命,会杀父亲的生命,会杀阿罗汉的生命,会以嗔恨心使如来流血,会分裂僧团,会推举别的导师——这种事根本不存在。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, sukhato upagaccheyya, kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya, mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pitaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, arahantaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, duṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya, saṅghaṃ bhindeyya, aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.127-128; a. ni. 1.268-276; vibha. 809).
不过,世间皈依的果报,就是投生善趣和财富圆满。因为经中这样说:巴利
Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
凡是已经皈依佛陀的人,
他们不会堕入恶趣。
舍弃了人身之后,
他们将使天众圆满。巴利
‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, Na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, Devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.37);
另外也说过:巴利
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
那时,帝释天带着八万天神一起来到尊者大目犍连那里……尊者大目犍连对站在一旁的帝释天这样说:“帝释天,皈依佛陀确实很好。帝释天,正是因为皈依佛陀,这里有些众生在身体毁坏、死后,投生到善趣、天界。他们在十个方面胜过其他天神:天寿、天容、天乐、天名、天威、天色、天声、天香、天味、天触……皈依法……皈依僧……天触。”巴利
‘‘Atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca – ‘sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti. Buddhaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti. Te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti – dibbena āyunā, dibbena vaṇṇena, dibbena sukhena, dibbena yasena, dibbena ādhipateyyena, dibbehi rūpehi, dibbehi saddehi, dibbehi gandhehi, dibbehi rasehi, dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehi…pe… dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ…pe… phoṭṭhabbehī’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341).
也可以依据《韦拉马经》等(《增支部》9.20)来了知皈依果报的差别。皈依的果报应当这样来了知。巴利
Velāmasuttādivasenapi (a. ni. 9.20) saraṇagamanassa phalaviseso veditabbo. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这里,世间皈依会因为对三宝的无知、疑惑、邪智等而受杂染,所以它没有大光明,也没有大影响。出世间的皈依则没有杂染。世间皈依有两种破失:有过失的和无过失的。其中,有过失的破失是通过把自己托付给其他导师等而产生的,它会带来不可意的果报。无过失的破失是在临终时发生的,由于没有异熟,所以没有果报。出世间的皈依则根本没有破失。因为即使转生到别的生命状态中,圣弟子也不会认其他导师。应当这样理解皈依的杂染和破失。巴利
Lokiyasaraṇagamanañcettha tīsu vatthūsu aññāṇasaṃsayamicchāñāṇādīhi saṃkilissati, na mahājutikaṃ hoti na mahāvipphāraṃ. Lokuttarassa pana saṃkileso natthi. Lokiyassa ca saraṇagamanassa duvidho bhedo – sāvajjo, anavajjo ca. Tattha sāvajjo aññasatthārādīsu attasanniyyātanādīhi hoti, so aniṭṭhaphalo. Anavajjo kālakiriyāya, so avipākattā aphalo. Lokuttarassa pana nevatthi bhedo. Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisatīti evaṃ saraṇagamanassa saṃkileso ca bhedo ca veditabbo.
世间层面的清净也是这样:正因为有杂染,才需要从那种杂染中求得清净。而出世间的清净,则是恒常清净的。巴利
Vodānampi ca lokiyasseva yassa hi saṃkileso, tasseva tato vodānena bhavitabbaṃ. Lokuttaraṃ pana niccavodānamevāti.
杀生:这里,“有情”是指本性就是自然坏灭的存在。在它还在相续期间就把它中断,这叫“断堕”,也就是不让它慢慢死去,而是让它迅速死亡。或者,用刀杖等强力压制而令其死亡,这也叫“断堕”,换句话说就是“杀害有情”。这里所说的“有情”,在世俗言说上是指五蕴的相续,也就是通常说的“众生”;从究竟意义上说,则是色命根和非色命根。因为当色命根被破坏时,与它相关联的非色命根也会随之毁灭。对于那个有情,如果持有“这是有情”的认知,并由身门或语门中的任何一门,发起以切断命根为目标的加行之思,这就是杀生。也就是说,当这种思在运作时,作为命根所依的大种,由于加行而引生新的四大;此时生起的四大不再像之前那样,而是生起不同类的四大——能发动这种加行的思,就是杀生。因为受过加行影响的四大,已经不像先前的大种那样清净,所以不能再作为同类大种的因。“由身门或语门中的任何一门发起”这句话,是为了说明:仅在意门中发起的杀害思不可能构成杀生。比如《库伦巴经》中说:“这里有人是沙门或婆罗门,具足神通,心得自在,他以恶意观察另一个众生胎中所怀的胎儿。”这里指的是依知识而生的神通。这种神通如果不通过语门发出,就无法成就,所以它是通过语门来实现的。至于有些人说“这里指的是依修习而生的神通”,他们的说法与善不善三法、受三法、寻三法以及地四法都相冲突。巴利
Pāṇātipātāti ettha pāṇassa saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atipātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha khandhasantāno, yo sattoti voharīyati, paramatthato rūpārūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Rūpajīvitindriye hi vikopite itarampi taṃsambandhatāya vinassatīti. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. Yāya hi cetanāya pavattamānassa jīvitindriyassa nissayabhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetukamahābhūtapaccayā uppajjanakamahābhūtā purimasadisā na uppajjanti, visadisā eva uppajjanti, sā tādisappayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pāṇātipāto. Laddhūpakkamāni hi bhūtāni purimabhūtāni viya na visadānīti samānajātiyānaṃ kāraṇāni na hontīti. ‘‘Kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā’’ti idaṃ manodvāre pavattāya vadhakacetanāya pāṇātipātatāsambhavadassanaṃ. Kulumbasuttepi hi ‘‘idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā iddhimā ceto vasippatto aññissā kucchigataṃ gabbhaṃ pāpakena manasā anupekkhitā hotī’’ti vijjāmayiddhi adhippetā. Sā ca vacīdvāraṃ muñcitvā na sakkā nibbattetunti vacīdvāravaseneva nippajjati. Ye pana ‘‘bhāvanāmayiddhi tattha adhippetā’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ vādo kusalattikavedanattikavitakkattikabhūmantarehi virujjhati.
这种杀生,如果对象是没什么功德的畜生等类众生,杀的又是小动物,罪过就轻;杀的是体型大的动物,罪过就重。为什么?因为加行大。即使加行一样,也会因为对象重大等原因而罪过重。对于有功德的众生,比如人等等,杀功德少的众生,罪过就轻;杀功德大的众生,罪过就重。而当身体大小和功德程度都相当时,则因为烦恼和加行轻缓,罪过就轻;因为烦恼和加行猛烈,罪过就重。巴利
Svāyaṃ pāṇātipāto guṇarahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Payogasamattepi vatthumahantatādīhi mahāsāvajjo, guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo . Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjo.
在这里,由加行重大、所缘境重大等而造成的罪过重大,应当从这些缘所生起的思具有强力的状态来了知。当所意图的加行被迅速完成而达成其作用,且速行多次生起、获得惯习时,决意思的加行就具有重大性。即使有时对小有情和大有情的加行相同,但在杀害大所缘境时,所生起的思更为猛烈,所以所缘境的重大也是思强有力的原因。这样,这两者都是以思的强有力而成为大罪过的原因。同样地,在所杀有情具有大功德时,就像在那种情况下会生起强有力的利益思一样,基于福田的殊胜成就,损害思也会强烈而猛烈地生起,因此应当了知那有大罪过性。所以,即使加行和所缘境等不重大,但依功德重大等条件,仅凭思的强有力性,也应了知有大罪过性。巴利
Ettha ca payogavatthumahantatādīhi mahāsāvajjatā tehi paccayehi uppajjamānāya cetanāya balavabhāvato veditabbā. Yathādhippetassa payogassa sahasā nipphādanavasena sakiccasādhikāya bahukkhattuṃ pavattajavanehi laddhāsevanāya ca sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya payogassa mahantabhāvo. Satipi kadāci khuddake ceva mahante ca pāṇe payogassa samabhāve mahantaṃ hanantassa cetanā tibbatarā uppajjatīti vatthumahantatāpi cetanāya balavabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ. Iti ubhayampetaṃ cetanābalavabhāveneva mahāsāvajjatāya hetu hoti. Tathā hantabbassa mahāguṇabhāve tattha pavattaupakāracetanā viya khettavisesanipphattiyā apakāracetanāpi balavatī tibbatarā uppajjatīti tassa mahāsāvajjatā daṭṭhabbā. Tasmā payogavatthuādipaccayānaṃ amahattepi guṇamahantatādipaccayehi cetanāya balavabhāvavaseneva mahāsāvajjatā veditabbā.
杀生要成立,需要五个条件:有生命、知道有生命、有杀心、有实际行动、因这个行动而死亡。具备这五个条件的,就构成杀生;要理解成:缺少任何一个条件就不构成杀生。其中,知道有生命和杀心属于前分阶段,实际行动则是由杀生的思所发起的。杀生的方式有六种:亲手、指使、投掷、设置、咒术、神通。其中,亲手做成的,叫亲手。通过命令别人而进行的,叫指使。通过投掷箭、矛等而进行的,叫投掷。通过挖陷阱等方式而进行的,叫设置。像阿闼婆尼咒术那样,通过诵咒来实行加行的,叫咒术。像用牙齿咬等由业异熟所生的神通力所做成的,叫由神通力所成。巴利
Tassa pāṇo, pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena maraṇanti pañca sambhārā. Pañcasambhārayutto pāṇātipātoti pañcasambhārāvinimutto daṭṭhabbo. Tesu pāṇasaññitāvadhakacittāni pubbabhāgiyānipi honti, upakkamo vadhakacetanāsamuṭṭhāpito. Tassa cha payogā – sāhatthiko, āṇattiko, nissaggiyo, thāvaro, vijjāmayo, iddhimayoti. Tesu sahatthena nibbatto sāhatthiko. Paresaṃ āṇāpanavasena pavatto āṇattiko. Ususattiādīnaṃ nissajjanavasena pavatto nissaggiyo. Opātakhaṇanādivasena pavatto thāvaro. Āthabbaṇikādīnaṃ viya mantaparijappanapayogo vijjāmayo. Dāṭhākoṭṭanādīnaṃ viya kammavipākajiddhimayo.
这里有人问:在每一个刹那都在坏灭的诸行当中,到底谁是杀者?谁又是被杀者?如果说心与心所的相续是杀者或被杀者,那它属于非色法,根本不可能以切割、破坏等方式去伤害,也不可能被伤害;如果说色法的相续是杀者或被杀者,那它没有心识,就像一块木头或枯枝一样,对它用刀砍等方式根本构不成杀生,就像对一具死尸一样。再者,按照前面所说的,杀生的加行——比如打击、攻击等——应该是对过去的诸行、未来的诸行,或者现在的诸行发动的。可是,过去和未来的诸行根本不存在,因为它们没有实际存在的自性;而现在的诸行是刹那性的,它们的本性就是立即坏灭、正走向消亡,所以对它们施加加行似乎毫无意义。而且,消亡本身没有原因,所以死亡不是由打击等加行所导致的;再加上诸行本身没有主动力,那这个加行到底算是谁做的呢?从刹那性来看,与杀意同时生起的心念在当下就坏灭了,根本撑不到加行动作完成的那一刻,那么杀生的业力束缚到底落在谁身上呢?巴利
Etthāha – khaṇe khaṇe nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu, ko hantā, ko vā haññati? Yadi cittacetasikasantāno, so arūpitāya na chedanabhedanādivasena vikopanasamattho, nāpi vikopanīyo, atha rūpasantāno, so acetanatāya kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipāto labbhati, yathā matasarīre. Payogopi pāṇātipātassa yathāvutto paharaṇappahārādiko atītesu saṅkhāresu bhaveyya anāgatesu paccuppannesu vā. Tattha na tāva atītesu anāgatesu ca sambhavati tesaṃ avijjamānasabhāvattā, paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano payogo siyā, vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappahārādippayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhattā ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo, khaṇikabhāvena vadhādhippāyasamakālameva bhijjanakassa yāva kiriyāpariyosānakālamanavaṭṭhānato kassa vā pāṇātipāto kammabandhoti?
对此,有人说:具备如上所说的杀心与加行的诸行聚集,被称为“众生”,就是杀者。由他所发动的杀加行的因缘,使暖与识和命根消失,成为“死”这个名称所依的那个色法与无色法的聚集,就像在没有施加杀加行之前一样,本来还能继续生起,现在却被杀害了;或者也可以说,心与心所的相续本身就是被杀者。即使杀加行并不直接触及那个相续,但在五蕴有中,由于它依赖色相续而运作,通过对四大种所造色施加加行,令命根断绝,那个相续也就随之断绝。因此,杀生并非不可能,也不是无因,加行也不是没有作用。因为对现在的诸行施加了加行,原本紧接着应当生起的诸行聚便不再生起;而且,这里并不是把刹那诸行的刹那灭当作“死”,相续的死如前所说是有因的,所以死并非无因。诸行虽然没有主动的意志,但依缘生起之后,仅凭其存在,就能决定产生各自相应的果,它们只是在做各自的因缘作用,正如说“灯能照亮”一样,于是假立“杀者”之名。而且,并不是只把与杀意同时存在的那一心与心所的聚集当作杀生,而是把依相续而转起者当作杀生,因此杀生的业缚确实成立。灯等依相续而转起,也能成就其作用,这是可以见到的。这一番考察,也应当按同样道理,随其适用之处,用来说明不与取等其余业道。因此,杀生。未离杀生者,就是未远离杀生。巴利
Vuccate – yathāvuttavadhakacetanāsamaṅgī saṅkhārānaṃ puñjo sattasaṅkhāto hantā. Tena pavattitavadhappayoganimittaṃ apagatusmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matoti vohārassa vatthubhūto yathāvuttavadhappayogākaraṇe pubbe viya uddhaṃ pavattanāraho rūpārūpadhammapuñjo haññati, cittacetasikasantāno eva vā. Vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya bhūtarūpesu katappayogavasena jīvitindriyavicchedena sopi vicchijjatīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo, nāpi ahetuko, na ca payogo nippayojano. Paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katappayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathā anuppattito khaṇikānañca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu yathāpaccayaṃ uppajjitvā atthibhāvamatteneva attano attano anurūpaphaluppādananiyatāni kāraṇāniyeva karontīti vuccati, yathā padīpo pakāsetīti, tatheva ghātakavohāro. Na ca kevalassa vadhādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchito, santānavasena vattamānasseva pana icchitoti attheva pāṇātipātena kammabandho. Santānavasena vattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ atthakiriyāsiddhi dissatīti. Ayañca vicāraṇā adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāvetabbā. Tasmā pāṇātipātā. Na paṭiviratāti appaṭiviratā.
把别人没给的东西拿走,就叫不与取;也就是夺取他人的财物,称为偷盗、盗窃。这里说的“没给”,是指他人所拥有、掌控的东西;对这东西,别人如果随意拿来用,并不会因此受罚,也不会被指责。对于那样的他人所有物,明明知道是他人所有,还生起偷盗的念头,并采取行动去拿,这种偷盗的思,就是不与取。对低劣的他人财物,过失轻;对贵重的,过失重。为什么?因为物品本身贵重。同样,对微小的他人财物,过失轻;对大的,过失重。为什么?因为物品大,而且所下的功夫也大。如果物品本身相当,那么对德行更高者的财物,过失重;对德行较低者的财物,过失轻。如果物品和德行都相当,那么烦恼和所下的功夫轻微时,过失轻;猛烈时,过失重。巴利
Adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti. Tasmiṃ parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Tathā khuddake parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, mahante mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthumahantatāya payogamahantatāya ca. Vatthusamatte pana sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, taṃtaṃguṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ. Vatthuguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ payogassa ca mudubhāve appasāvajjaṃ, tibbabhāve mahāsāvajjaṃ.
它有五种构成条件:属于他人所摄之物、知道这是属于他人所摄之物、有偷盗的心、实际采取行动、以及由那个行动把它拿走。六种加行,就是亲手做等几种。而这些加行,则随着情况的不同,表现为偷盗取、强夺取、谋划取、隐蔽取、欺诳取等取的方式。在这里,通过咒语念诵驱使而拿走他人财物的,是咒术所成的加行;不靠咒语,而是靠神通威力所成就的身业和语业加行,把他人财物拉取过来,应当知道这就是神通所成的加行。巴利
Tassa pañca sambhārā – parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā, theyyacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena haraṇanti. Cha payogā sāhatthikādayova. Te ca kho yathānurūpaṃ theyyāvahāro, pasayhāvahāro, parikappāvahāro, paṭicchannāvahāro, kusāvahāroti imesaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena pavattā. Ettha ca mantaparijappanena parasantakaharaṇaṃ vijjāmayo payogo. Vinā mantena tādisena iddhānubhāvasiddhena kāyavacīpayogena parasantakassa ākaḍḍhanaṃ iddhimayo payogoti veditabbo.
“于欲”是指在性行为中。“邪行”是指完全应受谴责的卑劣行为。从特征上说,以不合正法的意图,通过身体门所生起、违越不可行处的思,就是欲邪行。其中,不可行处是指:对男子来说,有母护女等十种,以及财买妇等十种,共二十种女人;对女人来说,则有有护、罚护这两种,以及财买妇等十种,共十二种女人的其他男子。这种邪行,如果对没有戒德等功德的人行于不可行处,过失小;如果对具足戒德等功德的人行,过失大。即使对方没有功德,若以强力侵犯而行邪行,过失也大;若双方意愿相同,过失则小。即使意愿相同,若烦恼和加行轻微,过失小;若猛利,过失大。它有四种构成条件:不可行的对象、对那对象生起行淫之心、行淫的加行、以及以道入道的领受。其中,出于自己意愿而做的,具备三种;被强力逼迫而做的,也具备三种;这样合起来看虽有四种,但事情的成办只依三种。加行只有一种,就是亲手。巴利
Kāmesūti methunasamācāresu. Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesu micchācāro. Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitādayo dasa, dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo, itthīsu pana dvinnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṃ, dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ itthīnaṃ aññapurisā. Svāyaṃ micchācāro sīlādiguṇarahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Guṇarahitepi ca abhibhavitvā micchā carantassa mahāsāvajjo, ubhinnaṃ samānacchandatāya appasāvajjo. Samānacchandabhāvepi kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanapayogo, maggenamaggappaṭipattiadhivāsananti. Tattha attano ruciyā pavattitassa tayo, balakkārena pavattitassa tayoti anavasesaggahaṇena cattāro daṭṭhabbā, atthasiddhi pana tīheva. Eko payogo sāhatthikova.
“妄语”是指:以欺骗为先导,损害他人利益的身语行为;而由欺骗意图所引发、能促成这种令人受骗的身语行为的思,就是妄语。另一种解释是:“妄”指不真实的事,“语”指把这件事说成真实、如实,让别人知道。因此,对于不真实的事,想要让别人把它当作真实来了解,而发起这种告知行为的思,就是妄语。巴利
Musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjako kāyavacīpayogo, visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Aparo nayo musāti abhūtaṃ vatthu, vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Tasmā atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññāpanapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo.
他破坏的利益越小,罪过就越轻;破坏的利益越大,罪过就越重。再者,在家人因为舍不得把自己的财物送人,说“没有”之类的话,这样犯的妄语是轻罪;但如果是作为证人,通过歪曲事实来损害他人利益,那就是重罪。出家人得到一点点油或酥油,就带着开玩笑的心思说“今天村里的油流得像河水一样”,这种夸大其词说出来的妄语是轻罪;但如果没看见却说“看见了”之类的话,那就是重罪。同样,被妄语损害的那个人,福德小,罪过就轻;福德大,罪过就重。另外,根据烦恼的软弱或猛烈,也同样有轻罪和重罪的区别。巴利
So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Apica gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthīti ādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanavasena vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana ‘‘diṭṭha’’ntiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo. Tathā yassa atthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjo, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjo. Kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasena ca appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā labbhateva.
它有四个构成条件:不真实的事情、想要欺骗的心、为此付出的行动、以及对方知道那件事。因为即使怀着欺骗的意图去行动,如果对方没有理解那件事,欺骗就不算成立,所以对方知道那件事也要算作一个条件。不过有些人说:“说虚妄的话、欺骗的心、对方知道那件事,这三个就是构成条件。”但如果对方因为迟钝,经过思考之后才知道那件事,由于决定性的思心所已经先生起,所以在引发行动的思心所那一刹那,妄语业就已经结成了。巴利
Tassa cattāro sambhārā – atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena hi payoge katepi parena tasmiṃ atthe aviññāte visaṃvādanassa asijjhanato parassa tadatthavijānanampi eko sambhāro veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘abhūtavacanaṃ, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, parassa tadatthavijānananti tayo sambhārā’’ti vadanti. Sace pana paro dandhatāya vicāretvā tamatthaṃ jānāti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya pavattattā kiriyāsamuṭṭhāpakacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati.
酒有五种:粉酒、饼酒、米酒、酵母酒、混合酒。迷罗耶有五种发酵饮:花酒、果酒、蜜酒、糖酒、混合酒。这两类都因为能让人迷醉,所以叫酒类。以某种思心所喝下它,因为它是放逸的原因,所以是放逸处。从特征上说,从上面所说的名为酒与迷罗耶的迷醉物之种子开始,由于迷醉之力,由身门生起的放逸思心所,就是饮酒放逸处。它有四个条件:确认是酒类、想喝的心、相应的努力、吞咽下去。因为一定是以不善心喝下,所以绝对是有罪的。圣弟子即使不知道那是酒,也不会让它进入嘴里,何况是知道的。喝半合左右的量是轻罪,喝大约半斗的量比那更重,是重罪;喝到能让身体摇晃,进而去做屠杀村庄等事,就是重罪。就恶业来说,杀生若杀漏尽者,是重罪;不与取若偷漏尽者的东西,是重罪;邪行若侵犯漏尽的比丘尼,是重罪;妄语若以妄语造成僧团分裂,是重罪;饮酒若喝到能让身体摇晃,进而做屠杀村庄等事,是重罪。在所有这些当中,以妄语造成僧团分裂的罪最重,因为造了此业,会在地狱中受苦整整一劫。巴利
Surāti piṭṭhasurā, pūvasurā, odanasurā, kiṇṇapakkhittā, sambhārasaṃyuttāti pañca surā. Merayanti pupphāsavo, phalāsavo, madhvāsavo, guḷāsavo sambhārasaṃyuttoti pañca āsavā. Tadubhayampi madanīyaṭṭhena majjaṃ. Yāya cetanāya taṃ pivati, sā pamādakāraṇattā pamādaṭṭhānaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana yathāvuttassa surāmerayasaṅkhātassa majjassa bījato paṭṭhāya madavasena kāyadvārappavattā pamādacetanā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānaṃ. Tassa majjabhāvo, pātukamyatācittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, ajjhoharaṇanti cattāro sambhārā. Akusalacitteneva cassa pātabbato ekantena sāvajjabhāvo . Ariyasāvakānaṃ pana vatthuṃ ajānantānampi mukhaṃ na pavisati, pageva jānantānaṃ. Aḍḍhapasatamattassa pānaṃ appasāvajjaṃ, addhāḷhakamattassa pānaṃ tato mahantaṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, kāyasañcālanasamatthaṃ bahuṃ pivitvā gāmaghātakādikammaṃ karontassa mahāsāvajjameva. Pāpakammañhi pāṇātipātaṃ patvā khīṇāsave mahāsāvajjaṃ, adinnādānaṃ patvā khīṇāsavassa santake mahāsāvajjaṃ, micchācāraṃ patvā khīṇāsavāya bhikkhuniyā vītikkame, musāvādaṃ patvā musāvādena saṅghabhede, surāpānaṃ patvā kāyasañcālanasamatthaṃ bahuṃ pivitvā gāmaghātakādikammaṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ. Sabbehipi cetehi musāvādena saṅghabhedova mahāsāvajjo. Tañhi katvā kappaṃ niraye paccati.
现在,对这些学处要从六个方面来判定:自性、所缘、受、根、业、果。其中,从自性来说,杀生等一切全都是思的自性。从所缘来说,杀生以命根为所缘,所以是以行为所缘;不与取要么以有情为所缘,要么以行为所缘;欲邪行以触为所缘,所以是以行为所缘,也有人说以有情为所缘;妄语要么以有情为所缘,要么以行为所缘;饮酒以行为所缘。从受来说,杀生是苦受;不与取有三种受;欲邪行和饮酒有乐受与舍受两种,不过以决定心来说,这两者并不是舍受;妄语有三种受。从根来说,杀生依嗔和痴,是二根;不与取和妄语,要么依嗔和痴,要么依贪和痴;欲邪行和饮酒依贪和痴,是二根。从业来说,这里面只有妄语是语业,其余四种都是身业。从果来说,所有这些都以堕入恶趣为果,即使生在善趣,也会有短寿等各种不可爱的果报。以上就是对这些学处从自性等方面所作的判定,应当这样来了知。巴利
Idāni etesu sabhāvato, ārammaṇato, vedanato, mūlato, kammato, phalatoti chahi ākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo. Tattha sabhāvato pāṇātipātādayo sabbepi cetanāsabhāvāva. Ārammaṇato pāṇātipāto jīvitindriyārammaṇato saṅkhārārammaṇo, adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇaṃ vā saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ vā, micchācāro phoṭṭhabbavasena saṅkhārārammaṇo, sattārammaṇoti eke. Musāvādo sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā, surāpānaṃ saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ. Vedanato pāṇātipāto dukkhavedano, adinnādānaṃ tivedanaṃ, micchācāro sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedano, tathā surāpānaṃ. Sanniṭṭhāpakacittena pana ubhayampi majjhattavedanaṃ na hoti. Musāvādo tivedano. Mūlato pāṇātipāto dosamohavasena dvimūlako, adinnādānaṃ musāvādo ca dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā, micchācāro surāpānañca lobhamohavasena dvimūlaṃ. Kammato musāvādoyevettha vacīkammaṃ, sesaṃ catubbidhampi kāyakammameva. Phalato sabbepi apāyūpapattiphalā ceva sugatiyampi appāyukatādinānāvidhaaniṭṭhaphalā cāti evamettha sabhāvādito vinicchayo veditabbo.
没有远离,是指因为不具备受戒的远离和自然远离,所以没有远离。恶戒者,是指由于同样的原因,连五戒都不具备,所以是没有戒的人。恶法者,是指卑劣的法,下劣的行为。远离杀生,是指通过受持学处而远离杀生,远远地安住于远离。其余的学处也应同样理解。巴利
Appaṭiviratāti samādānaviratiyā sampattaviratiyā ca abhāvena na paṭiviratā. Dussīlāti tato eva pañcasīlamattassāpi abhāvena nissīlā. Pāpadhammāti lāmakadhammā, hīnācārā. Pāṇātipātā paṭiviratoti sikkhāpadasamādānena pāṇātipātato virato, ārakā ṭhito. Esa nayo sesesupi.
在这里,也要从自性、所缘、受、根、业、受持、差别、果报这几个方面来理解和判断离杀生等戒行。其中,从自性来看,五戒既可以属于思心所,也可以属于离心所,不过这里的开示是依离心所来说的。当一个人远离杀生时,所谓“那时对杀生的不乐、远离”,这样说的就是与善心相应的离。从分类来看,它有三种:自然远离、受戒远离、断除远离。其中,没有受持学处的人,考虑自己的出身、年龄、学识等,心想“做这种事对我们不合适”,于是不犯眼前这件事,这时生起的离,就叫自然远离。已经受持学处的人,在受持学处时以及受持之后,即使舍弃自己的生命也不违犯,这时生起的离,就叫受戒远离。而与圣道相应的离,叫断除远离;从它生起之后,圣者们连“我们将杀生”这样的念头都不会生起。在这三种当中,这里指的是受戒远离。巴利
Idhāpi pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīnaṃ sabhāvato ārammaṇato , vedanato, mūlato, kammato, samādānato, bhedato, phalato ca viññātabbo vinicchayo. Tattha sabhāvato pañcapi cetanāyopi honti viratiyopi, virativasena pana desanā āgatā. Yā pāṇātipātā viramantassa ‘‘yā tasmiṃ samaye pāṇātipātā ārati viratī’’ti evaṃ vuttā kusalacittasampayuttā virati. Sā pabhedato tividhā – sampattavirati, samādānavirati, samucchedaviratīti. Tattha asamādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ attano jātivayabāhusaccādīni paccavekkhitvā ‘‘ayuttametaṃ amhākaṃ kātu’’nti sampattavatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati sampattavirati nāma. Samādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ sikkhāpadasamādāne taduttari ca attano jīvitampi pariccajitvā vatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati samādānavirati nāma. Ariyamaggasampayuttā pana virati samucchedavirati nāma, yassā uppattito paṭṭhāya ariyapuggalānaṃ ‘‘pāṇaṃ ghātessāmā’’ti cittampi na uppajjati. Tāsu samādānavirati idhādhippetā.
从所缘来看,杀生等恶行的所缘,就是这些善法的所缘。因为只有在可以违犯的地方不违犯,才叫做“离”。就像以涅槃为所缘的圣道能断除烦恼一样,这些善法也是以命根等为所缘,从而断除杀生等恶戒。从受来看,这一切都是乐受。巴利
Ārammaṇato pāṇātipātādīnaṃ ārammaṇāneva etesaṃ ārammaṇāni. Vītikkamitabbatoyeva hi virati nāma hoti. Yathā pana nibbānārammaṇo ariyamaggo kilese pajahati, evaṃ jīvitindriyādiārammaṇāyeva ete kusaladhammā pāṇātipātādīni dussīlyāni pajahanti. Vedanato sabbāpi sukhavedanāva.
从根来说:以与智相应的心来持守远离时,由于无贪、无嗔、无痴,就成为三根;以与智不相应的心来持守远离时,由于无贪、无嗔,就成为二根。从业来说:离妄语是语业,其余的是身业。从受持来说:在一位值得尊重的师长面前受戒,或者若得不到师长受戒时,自己单独把五戒合在一起整体受持,或者一条一条分别受持,这样都算已经受持。从毁坏来说:在家人违犯了哪一条戒,就只有那一条戒毁坏,其余的不毁坏。为什么?因为在家人的戒并不是固定绑定的,他们能守得住哪一条,就守护那一条。但出家人只要违犯了一条,所有戒就都毁坏了。巴利
Mūlato ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa alobhaadosaamohavasena timūlā honti, ñāṇavippayuttacittena viramantassa alobhaadosavasena dvimūlā. Kammato musāvādā veramaṇi vacīkammaṃ , sesā kāyakammaṃ. Samādānato aññassa garuṭṭhāniyassa santike taṃ alabhantena sayameva vā pañca sīlāni ekajjhaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ vā samādiyantena samādinnāni honti. Bhedato gahaṭṭhānaṃ yaṃ yaṃ vītikkantaṃ, taṃ tadeva bhijjati, itaraṃ na bhijjati. Kasmā? Gahaṭṭhā hi anibaddhasīlā honti, yaṃ yaṃ sakkonti, taṃ tadeva rakkhanti. Pabbajitānaṃ pana ekasmiṃ vītikkante sabbāni bhijjantīti.
从果报来说,在这里,远离杀生会带来这些果报:肢体和分支都完整齐全,身高和围度都圆满,行动敏捷迅速,双脚站得稳当,容貌端正,身体柔软,清净洁净,勇敢,力气大,说话清楚流畅,被众生喜爱、让人觉得可亲,拥有不可离散的追随者,没有恐惧,难以被压制,不会因为别人的加害而丧命,拥有广大的随从眷属,肤色如金,体形匀称,少病,没有忧愁,不会和自己喜爱、觉得可亲的人分离,寿命长久等等。巴利
Phalatoti pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā cettha aṅgapaccaṅgasampannatā, ārohapariṇāhasampatti, javanasampatti, suppatiṭṭhitapādatā, cārutā, mudutā, sucitā, sūratā, mahabbalatā, vissaṭṭhavacanatā, sattānaṃ piyamanāpatā, abhijjaparisatā, acchambhitā, duppadhaṃsiyatā, parūpakkamena amaraṇatā, mahāparivāratā, suvaṇṇatā, susaṇṭhānatā, appābādhatā, asokatā, piyamanāpehi avippayogo, dīghāyukatāti evamādīni phalāni.
远离不与取,会得到这些果报:拥有大量财富和粮食,财富享用不尽,财富稳固,想要的财富很快就能得到,财富不会被国王等人夺走或分享,财富殊胜,无论到哪里都居于首位,不知道匮乏是什么,生活安乐,等等。巴利
Adinnādānā veramaṇiyā mahādhanadhaññatā, anantabhogatā, thirabhogatā, icchitānaṃ bhogānaṃ khippaṃ paṭilābho, rājādīhi asādhāraṇabhogatā, uḷārabhogatā, tattha tattha jeṭṭhakabhāvo, natthibhāvassa ajānanatā, sukhavihāritāti evamādīni.
远离非梵行带来的结果是:没有怨敌,被一切众生喜爱、觉得可亲,能得到饮食、衣服等供养,睡得安稳,醒来也安稳,摆脱堕入恶趣的恐惧,不可能投生为女人或黄门,不生气,说真话,不羞愧沮丧,无猜疑顾虑,易于满足,诸根圆满,相好圆满,无所畏惧,不会与所爱分离,等等。不过,因为远离邪淫的果报也都包含在这里面,所以这里归到远离非梵行来说。巴利
Abrahmacariyā veramaṇiyā vigatapaccatthikatā, sabbasattānaṃ piyamanāpatā, annapānavatthacchādanādīnaṃ lābhitā, sukhasupanatā, sukhapaṭibujjhanatā, apāyabhayavimokkho, itthibhāvanapuṃsakabhāvānaṃ abhabbatā, akkodhanatā, saccakāritā, amaṅkutā, ārādhanasukhatā, paripuṇṇindriyatā, paripuṇṇalakkhaṇatā, nirāsaṅkatā, appossukkatā, sukhavihāritā, akutobhayatā, piyavippayogābhāvoti evamādīni. Yasmā pana micchācārāveramaṇiyā phalānipi ettheva antogadhāni, tasmā (abrahmacariyā veramaṇiyā).
远离妄语所带来的结果是:感官清净明净,说话流畅甜美,牙齿整齐洁白,不太胖也不太瘦,不太矮也不太高大,身体接触起来很舒服,口中带有青莲花的香气,身边有愿意听从教导的人,说出的话让人愿意接受,舌头像莲花瓣一样柔软、红润、细薄,不呆板退缩,也不浮躁掉举,等等。巴利
Musāvādā veramaṇiyā vippasannindriyatā, vissaṭṭhamadhurabhāṇitā, samasitasuddhadantatā, nātithūlatā, nātikisatā, nātirassatā, nātidīghatā, sukhasamphassatā, uppalagandhamukhatā, sussūsakaparisatā, ādeyyavacanatā, kamaladalasadisamudulohitatanujivhatā, alīnatā, anuddhatatāti evamādīni.
远离饮酒放逸处这条学处所带来的果报是:对过去、未来、现在应当做的事都不放逸,有智慧,常常保持正念现前;对已经发生、应当处理的事,能应机提出办法、有辩才;不懒惰,不迟钝,不狂乱,不胆怯,不粗暴,不嫉妒,不悭吝;说真实的话,不说挑拨离间的话、粗恶的话、没有意义的话;知恩、感恩;乐于布施,持戒清净,为人正直,不瞋怒,具足惭与愧,具足正见,心胸广大,贤明有智慧,善于分辨什么是义、什么是不义——诸如此类都是果报。同样地,对于远离杀生等学处,也应当从自性等方面来理解和判别。巴利
Surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiyā atītānāgatapaccuppannesu kiccakaraṇīyesu appamādatā, ñāṇavantatā, sadā upaṭṭhitassatitā, uppannesu kiccakaraṇīyesu ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānavantatā , analasatā, ajaḷatā, anummattatā, acchambhitā, asārambhitā, anissukitā, amaccharitā, saccavāditā, apisuṇaapharusaasamphappalāpavāditā, kataññutā , kataveditā, cāgavantatā, sīlavantatā, ujukatā, akkodhanatā, hirottappasampannatā , ujudiṭṭhitā, mahantatā, paṇḍitatā, atthānatthakusalatāti evamādīni phalāni. Evamettha pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīnampi sabhāvādito vinicchayo veditabbo.
“具戒者”是指依照前面所说的五戒而具戒。“善法”是指善妙的法,意思是由于皈依所说明的正见成就而具足智慧。如果儿子在父母无信、破戒时,自己也同样如此,就应当知道他是“恶生子”。因为这里以不信等作为恶生子的特征,而这些特征确实存在于他之中。但所谓“超生子”等,则是相对于父母而言的。巴利
Sīlavāti yathāvuttapañcasīlavasena sīlavā. Kalyāṇadhammoti sundaradhammo, saraṇagamanaparidīpitāya diṭṭhisampattiyā sampannapaññoti attho. Yo pana putto mātāpitūsu assaddhesu dussīlesu ca sayampi tādiso, sopi avajātoyevāti veditabbo. Assaddhiyādayo hi idha avajātabhāvassa lakkhaṇaṃ vuttā, te ca tasmiṃ saṃvijjanti. Mātāpitaro pana upādāya puttassa atijātādibhāvo vuccatīti.
如果有人是“族姓的香”——也就是断绝族姓、毁灭族姓的人。这里“香”(gandha)这个词的意思是“切断”,就像“青莲香的敌人”等说法里的用法一样。不过也有人读作“kuladhaṃsana”(族姓的毁灭者),意思是一样的。巴利
Yo hoti kulagandhanoti kulacchedako kulavināsako. Chedanattho hi idha gandhasaddo, ‘‘uppalagandhapaccatthikā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 65) viya. Keci pana ‘‘kuladhaṃsano’’ti paṭhanti, so evattho.
这些确实就是世间的儿子。这超生子等三种儿子,才在这个有情世间真正叫作儿子,离开这三种就没有别的儿子了。而在这些人当中,那些成为近事男的人,因为成就了皈依而成为近事男,又凭业所有智而善巧于业,他们是智者、有智慧的人,圆满具足五戒或十戒。他们懂得乞求者的话,只要看到对方脸上的神情就能满足对方的愿望,所以叫知言者;或者听到乞求者说“请给吧”,就想:“这些人过去因为不布施,才变成这样,而我不能也变成那样”,通过施舍而懂得他们的所求,所以叫知言者;又或者他们懂得智者所说的显示业所有等的开示,所以叫知言者。也有人读作“padaññū”,意思是以施舍和戒为足。正因如此,他们去除了悭吝的垢秽,所以是离悭者。如出密云:像乌云,或者像从厚密云层中脱出的月亮,在近事男等众中,在刹帝利等众中,辉耀、照耀,也就是闪耀的意思。巴利
Ete kho puttā lokasminti ete atijātādayo tayo puttā eva imasmiṃ sattaloke puttā nāma, na ito vinimuttā atthi. Imesu pana ye bhavanti upāsakā ye saraṇagamanasampattiyā upāsakā bhavanti kammassakatāñāṇena kammassa kovidā, te ca paṇḍitā paññavanto, pañcasīladasasīlena sampannā paripuṇṇā. Yācakānaṃ vacanaṃ jānanti, tesaṃ mukhākāradassaneneva adhippāyapūraṇatoti vadaññū, tesaṃ vā ‘‘dehī’’ti vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘ime pubbe dānaṃ adatvā evaṃbhūtā, mayā pana evaṃ na bhavitabba’’nti tesaṃ pariccāgena tadatthaṃ jānantīti vadaññū, paṇḍitānaṃ vā kammassakatādidīpakaṃ vacanaṃ jānantīti vadaññū. ‘‘Padaññū’’ti ca paṭhanti, padāniyā pariccāgasīlāti attho. Tato eva vigatamaccheramalattā vītamaccharā. Abbhaghanāti abbhasaṅkhātā ghanā, ghanameghapaṭalā vā mutto candoviya, upāsakādiparisāsu khattiyādiparisāsu ca virocare virocanti, sobhantīti attho.
第六 无雨经的注释巴利
6. Avuṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
75 第六个(即第六首偈的注释)中说的“像不下雨的云”,就是像不降雨的云。有些云堆成百层千层,升起来轰隆作响、雷声隆隆、电光闪闪,却连一滴雨都没落下就散掉了。用这个来比喻某一种人,所以说“像不下雨的云”。“局部降雨”,就是像只在一个地方下雨的云。所谓“像局部降雨的”,就是“只在一个地方下雨的”。有些云只在一个地方,对站在那里的人们,有的人被淋到,有的人没被淋到,就这样只下一点点雨。用这个来比喻某一种人,所以说“局部降雨”。“到处都降雨”,就是像在一切地方都降雨的云,即在包括大地、山、海等的一切世间地方都降雨的云。有些云铺满整个轮围世界,无处不降雨。拿这遍覆四大洲的大雨云来比喻某一种人,所以说“到处都降雨”。巴利
75. Chaṭṭhe avuṭṭhikasamoti avuṭṭhikameghasamo. Ekacco hi megho satapaṭalasahassapaṭalo hutvā uṭṭhahitvā thananto gajjanto vijjotanto ekaṃ udakabindumpi apātetvā vigacchati, tathūpamo ekacco puggaloti dassento āha ‘‘avuṭṭhikasamo’’ti. Padesavassīti ekadesavassimeghasamo. Padesavassī viyāti hi padesavassī. Ekacco ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ṭhitesu manussesu yathā ekacce tementi, ekacce na tementi, evaṃ mandaṃ vassati, tathūpamaṃ ekaccaṃ puggalaṃ dasseti ‘‘padesavassī’’ti. Sabbatthābhivassīti sabbasmiṃ pathavīpabbatasamuddādike jagatippadese abhivassimeghasamo. Ekacco hi sakalacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ pattharitvā sabbatthakameva abhivassati, taṃ cātuddīpikamahāmeghaṃ ekaccassa puggalassa upamaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbatthābhivassī’’ti.
“对一切人”就是“对一切人”,这正是这里的读法。“不是施与者”是指没有布施的习惯,因为固执悭吝,不对任何人施舍任何东西,这就是其含义。现在,为了分别说明布施的福田和所施之物,接着说了“沙门婆罗门”等。其中,“沙门”既指已寂灭恶行的沙门,也指仅具出家身份的沙门;“婆罗门”既指已驱除恶行的婆罗门,也指仅凭种姓的婆罗门,这里说的“沙门婆罗门”就是指这两类人。“可怜者”是指贫穷困苦的人。“旅人”是指赶路的人,他们缺少旅费或资具。“游方乞者”是指这样一类人:他们到处走动,用“请怀着欢喜心、净信心,布施你们喜爱、悦意、应时、无过失的东西,这样布施的人会生到善趣,会生到梵天界”等说法,劝人布施、称赞布施的功德。“乞食者”是指那些只乞求“请给一把,请给一捧,请给一钵”这样少量东西的人。在这里,举出“沙门婆罗门”显示功德田和恩德田,举出“可怜者”等显示悲田。“食物”是指任何可嚼可食之物。“饮料”是指芒果汁等饮品。“衣服”是指内衣、外衣等遮蔽之物。“车乘”是指车、驮具等,乃至从鞋履以上的一切行走之具。“花鬘”是指编结的和未编结的,一切花。“香”是指任何香类,研磨的和未研磨的,以及香具。“涂香”是指能使皮肤变色之物。“卧具”是指床、椅等,以及毛毯、皮革等可卧之物。这里应当知道,举出“卧具”也就包括了坐具。“住处”是指能遮除风、日等危害的庇护处。“灯明”是指灯盏、灯碗等照明用具。巴利
Sabbesānanti sabbesaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Na dātā hotīti adānasīlo hoti, thaddhamaccharitāya na kassaci kiñci detīti attho. Idāni dānassa khettaṃ deyyadhammañca vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’tiādimāha. Tattha samitapāpasamaṇā ceva pabbajjamattasamaṇā ca bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇā ceva jātimattabrāhmaṇā ca idha ‘‘samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’ti adhippetā. Kapaṇā nāma duggatā daliddamanussā. Addhikā nāma pathāvino paribbayavihīnā. Vanibbakā nāma ye ‘‘iṭṭhaṃ detha kantaṃ manāpaṃ kālena anavajjaṃ udaggacittā pasannacittā, evaṃ dentā gacchatha sugatiṃ, gacchatha brahmaloka’’ntiādinā nayena dāne niyojentā dānassa vaṇṇaṃ thomentā vicaranti. Yācakā nāma ye kevalaṃ ‘‘muṭṭhimattaṃ detha, pasatamattaṃ detha, sarāvamattaṃ dethā’’ti appakampi yācamānā vicaranti. Tattha samaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇena guṇakhettaṃ upakārikhettañca dasseti, kapaṇādiggahaṇena karuṇākhettaṃ. Annanti yaṃkiñci khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ. Pānanti ambapānādipānakaṃ. Vatthanti nivāsanapārupanādiacchādanaṃ. Yānanti rathavayhādi antamaso upāhanaṃ upādāya gamanasādhanaṃ. Mālāti ganthitāganthitabhedaṃ sabbaṃ pupphaṃ. Gandhanti yaṃkiñci gandhajātaṃ pisitaṃ apisitaṃ gandhūpakaraṇañca. Vilepananti chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Seyyāti mañcapīṭhādi ceva pāvārakojavādi ca sayitabbavatthu. Seyyaggahaṇena cettha āsanampi gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Āvasathanti vātātapādiparissayavinodanaṃ patissayaṃ. Padīpeyyanti dīpakapallikādipadīpūpakaraṇaṃ.
“像这样,比丘们”这句话的意思是:明明有可以布施的东西,却对接受布施的人一点也不肯给,这样的人就像不下雨的云。这里要表达的是:比丘们,就像那云堆起百层千层,升上天空后却一滴雨也没下就散掉了;同样,有人积攒了丰厚广大的财富,住在家里,却连一勺饭、一勺粥都不肯布施给任何人就死了,无可奈何地落入死神的掌控,这种人就叫作“无雨者”。按照这个方式,其余几句也应当这样理解。在这三种人当中,第一种应当彻底呵责,第二种值得称赞,第三种更值得称赞。或者也可以理解为:第一种是最低劣的,第二种是中等的,第三种是最上等的。巴利
Evaṃkho, bhikkhaveti vijjamānepi deyyadhamme paṭiggāhakānaṃ evaṃ dātabbavatthuṃ sabbena sabbaṃ adento puggalo avassikameghasadiso hoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhikkhave, yathā so megho satapaṭalasahassapaṭalo hutvā uṭṭhahitvā na kiñci vassi vigacchati, evameva yo uḷāraṃ vipulañca bhogaṃ saṃharitvā gehaṃ āvasanto kassaci kaṭacchumattaṃ bhikkhaṃ vā uḷuṅkamattaṃ yāguṃ vā adatvā vigacchati, vivaso maccuvasaṃ gacchati, so avuṭṭhikasamo nāma hotīti. Iminā nayena sesesupi nigamanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Imesu ca tīsu puggalesu paṭhamo ekaṃseneva garahitabbo, dutiyo pasaṃsanīyo, tatiyo, pasaṃsanīyataro. Paṭhamo vā ekanteneva sabbanihīno, dutiyo majjhimo, tatiyo uttamoti veditabbo.
在偈颂里,“samaṇe”用的是受格复数,其余几个词也一样。“Laddhānā”就是得到之后,意思是:向应受供养的沙门发出邀请之后,被问到时却不肯分享。“食物、饮料以及啖食”是指食物、饮料或其他可以吃的东西,他不肯拿来分享。这里的简要意思是:如果有人明明遇到了因有需要而来、能够接受布施的人,却连用食物等稍微分享一点都做不到,那他怎么可能还会去作别的布施呢?对于这种顽固吝啬、人中下劣的卑鄙之人,智者们说他就好比“无雨者”,他们这样说道。巴利
Gāthāsu samaṇeti upayogavasena bahuvacanaṃ tathā sesesupi. Laddhānāti labhitvā, samaṇe dakkhiṇeyye pavāretvā puṭṭho na saṃvibhajati. Annaṃ pānañca bhojananti annaṃ vā pānaṃ vā aññaṃ vā bhuñjitabbayuttakaṃ bhojanaṃ, taṃ na saṃvibhajati. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – yo atthikabhāvena upagate sampaṭiggāhake labhitvā annādinā saṃvibhāgamattampi na karoti, kiṃ so aññaṃ dānaṃ dassati, taṃ evarūpaṃ thaddhamacchariyaṃ purisādhamaṃ nihīnapuggalaṃ paṇḍitā avuṭṭhikasamoti āhu kathayantīti.
“对某些人不布施”的意思是:即使有大量应该布施的财物,他对某些众生,或者因为对那些众生的嗔怒,或者因为贪着那些应该布施的财物,就是不布施给他们。“对某些人却分与”的意思是:他只布施给某些人。“有智者”指的是有智慧、贤明的人。巴利
Ekaccānaṃna dadātīti vijjamānepi mahati dātabbadhamme ekesaṃ sattānaṃ tesu kodhavasena vā, deyyadhamme lobhavasena vā na dadāti. Ekaccānaṃ pavecchatīti ekesaṃyeva pana dadāti. Medhāvinoti paññavanto paṇḍitā janā.
“善言易乞者”是说:对于前来乞讨的人,他能让人家布施,说出“布施食物吧,布施饮料吧”这样的话。因为容易乞到食物,他说出的话就让人容易得到食物,所以叫“善言易乞者”。也有人读作“subhikkhavassī”(丰足降雨者)。就像世间食物丰足的时候,那遍洒甘霖的大云就叫作丰足降雨者;同样,这个人通过广大的布施,处处遍施,所以也是丰足的降雨者。“心喜而散施”是说:他满怀欢喜、兴致勃勃,亲手行布施,就像把该施的东西散布在受施者的福田上一样;口中也说着“布施吧,布施吧”。巴利
Subhikkhavācoti yo upagatānaṃ yācakānaṃ ‘‘annaṃ detha, pānaṃ dethā’’tiādinā taṃ taṃ dāpeti, so sulabhabhikkhatāya subhikkhā vācā etassāti subhikkhavāco. ‘‘Subhikkhavassī’’tipi paṭhanti. Yathā loko subhikkho hoti, evaṃ sabbatthābhivassitamahāmegho subhikkhavassī nāma hoti. Evamayampi mahādānehi sabbatthābhivassī subhikkhavassīti. Āmodamāno pakiretīti tuṭṭhahaṭṭhamānaso sahatthena dānaṃ dento paṭiggāhakakhette deyyadhammaṃ pakirento viya hoti, vācāyapi ‘‘detha dethā’’ti bhāsati.
现在,为了说明他具有“食物丰足、如雨普施”的特质,说出了“犹如云”等偈颂。这里的简要含义是:就像大云先以低沉的声音响起,然后再次轰鸣,让所有河流和山涧都回荡着同一个响声,接着降下雨来,水流遍满高处和低地,到处用雨水充满,汇成一股洪流。同样地,在这里,在这个众生世间,某位殊胜的人对一切众生都怀着平等心,就像那片大云因为应当普降甘霖而成为那样。他也是如此:凭自己的努力和精进所产生的财富,他不懈怠,如法、合理地积聚起来,然后用由此得来的食物、饮料以及其他应当布施的东西,对前来、来到跟前的乞讨者,正确而恰当地,既顺应时间地点,也随顺他们的愿望,使他们满足、饱足。巴利
Idāni naṃ subhikkhavassitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāpi megho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yathā mahāmegho paṭhamaṃ mandanigghosena thanayitvā puna sakalanadīkandarāni ekaninnādaṃ karonto gajjayitvā pavassati, sabbatthakameva vārinā udakena thalaṃ ninnañca abhisandanto pūreti ekoghaṃ karoti, evameva idha imasmiṃ sattaloke ekacco uḷārapuggalo sabbasamatāya so mahāmegho viya vassitabbattā tādiso yathā dhanaṃ uṭṭhānādhigataṃ attano uṭṭhānavīriyābhinibbattaṃ hoti, evaṃ analaso hutvā tañca dhammena ñāyena saṃharitvā tannibbattena annena pānena aññena ca deyyadhammena patte sampatte vanibbake sammā sammadeva desakālānurūpañceva icchānurūpañca tappeti sampavāretīti.
《乐愿经》的注释巴利
7. Sukhapatthanāsuttavaṇṇanā
76 第七句中,诸乐指乐的因由。正在希求,就是正在想要、正在渴望。戒就是在家人的戒和出家人的戒。这里的意思是:如果是在家人,就是在家人戒;如果是出家人,就是四遍净戒。应守护,就是受持之后不违犯,好好地保护。愿赞誉来到我这里,就是怀着愿我的好名声传出去这样的想法,有智慧、有善慧的人应当守护戒。因为对具戒的在家人来说,在众人当中会传开这样的好名声:某某家的儿子具戒、有善法、有信仰、有信心,是施主、是行善的人,等等。对具戒的出家人来说,也会传开这样的好名声:某位比丘具戒、具足行仪、柔和、与人共住安乐、恭敬、尊重,等等。确实有这样的说法。巴利
76. Sattame sukhānīti sukhanimittāni. Patthayamānoti icchamāno ākaṅkhamāno. Sīlanti gahaṭṭhasīlaṃ pabbajitasīlañca. Gahaṭṭho ce gahaṭṭhasīlaṃ, pabbajito ce catupārisuddhisīlanti adhippāyo. Rakkheyyāti samādiyitvā avītikkamanto sammadeva gopeyya. Pasaṃsā me āgacchatūti ‘‘mama kalyāṇo kittisaddo āgacchatū’’ti icchanto paṇḍito sappañño sīlaṃ rakkheyya. Sīlavato hi gahaṭṭhassa tāva ‘‘asuko asukakulassa putto sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo saddho pasanno dāyako kārako’’tiādinā parisamajjhe kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchati, pabbajitassa ‘‘asuko nāma bhikkhu sīlavā vattasampanno sorato sukhasaṃvāso sagāravo sappatisso’’tiādinā…pe… abbhuggacchatīti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
再者,居士们,持戒的人、戒行圆满的人,他的好名声会传扬开来。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, gahapatayo, sīlavato sīlasampannassa kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.213; udā. 76; mahāva. 285).
比丘们,如果一位比丘希望:“愿我在同梵行者中间被人喜爱、令人欢喜、受人尊重、值得恭敬”,那么他就应当在戒行上圆满地去做。巴利
‘‘Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu – ‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo, garu ca bhāvanīyo cā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.65).
“愿我的财富生起”这句话里,先说在家人:一个持戒、具足善法的人,无论靠哪种技艺谋生——不管是种田、经商,还是为王宫做事——只要他能按时机、按规矩、极其不放逸地去做,那么他还没生起的财富就会生起,已经生起的财富也会增长。再说出家人:一个戒行与威仪都具足、安住于不放逸、有正念、戒行成就的人,由于戒行成就以及少欲等功德,人们对他的信心生起,就会供养种种殊胜的资具,这样他还没生起的财富就会生起,已经生起的财富也会变得稳固。正如所说的——巴利
Bhogā me uppajjantūti ettha gahaṭṭhassa tāva sīlavato kalyāṇadhammassa yena yena sippaṭṭhānena jīvikaṃ kappeti – yadi kasiyā, yadi vaṇijjāya, yadi rājaporisena, taṃ taṃ yathākālaṃ yathāvidhiñca ativiya appamattabhāvato athassa anuppannā ceva bhogā uppajjanti, uppannā ca bhogā phātiṃ gamissanti. Pabbajitassa pana sīlācārasampannassa appamādavihārissa sato sīlasampannassa sīlasampadāya appicchatādiguṇesu ca pasannā manussā uḷāruḷāre paccaye abhiharanti, evamassa anuppannā ceva bhogā uppajjanti, uppannā ca thirā honti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
再者,居士们,持戒且戒行圆满的人,因为不放逸,能获得大量的财富。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno appamādādhikaraṇaṃ mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ adhigacchatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.213; udā. 76; mahāva. 285).
比丘们,如果一位比丘希望:“愿我能得到衣服、食物、住处,以及生病时所需的医药用品”,那么他就应当在戒律上做到圆满。巴利
‘‘Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu – ‘lābhī assa cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārāna’nti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.65) ca –
剩下的内容就按前面说的那样理解。巴利
Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在偈颂中,“期望者”就是正在期望的人。“三种乐”指三种快乐。“获得财富”指得到钱财,意思是财富的产生。这里特别要明白:称赞带来的是心理上的快乐,财富带来的是身体上的快乐,另一种则是转生后的快乐;同样,第一种是今生今世的快乐,第三种是来世的快乐,第二种则兼含两世的快乐。巴利
Gāthāsu patthayānoti patthayanto. Tayo sukheti tīṇi sukhāni. Vittalābhanti dhanalābhaṃ, bhoguppattinti attho. Visesato cettha pasaṃsāya cetasikasukhaṃ, bhogehi kāyikasukhaṃ, itarena upapattisukhaṃ; tathā paṭhamena diṭṭhadhammasukhaṃ, tatiyena samparāyasukhaṃ, dutiyena ubhayasukhaṃ gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
现在,为了说明称赞等的特殊原因——就像戒的称赞之因一样——也就是避开恶友、亲近善友,并连同它们的过患与利益一起说明,所以说了“不作……”等话。其中,“应被怀疑”是指在恶行上应被怀疑:“这个人必定已经作了恶,或者将来会作恶,因为他就是这样和恶人交往的。”“他的”是指对这个亲近恶人的人,或者说,对这个人的非难,即使不是真的,也会因为他亲近恶人而增长、壮大、扩散开来。或者,“他的”是属格用作处格的意义,意思是“在这个人身上”。他确实会成为那样的人:一个人无论亲近、侍奉的是怎样的恶友或善友,他就会像水随地段而变那样,变成那样,具有恶法或善法。为什么呢?因为共住就是如此;共住、交往,就像水晶沾染颜色一样,会让人沾染上以人为基础的品性,所以不应该和恶人共住,这就是要旨。巴利
Idāni pasaṃsādikāraṇassa sīlassa viya pasaṃsādīnampi visesakāraṇaṃ pāpamittaparivajjanaṃ kalyāṇamittasevanañca ādīnavānisaṃsehi saddhiṃ dassento ‘‘akaronto’’tiādimāha. Tattha saṅkiyoti pāpasmiṃ parisaṅkitabbo ‘‘addhā iminā pāpaṃ kataṃ vā karissati vā, tathā hesa pāpapurisehi saddhiṃ sañcaratī’’ti. Assāti imassa pāpajanasevino puggalassa upari, assa vā puggalassa avaṇṇo abhūtopi pāpajanasevitāya ruhati virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjati pattharati. Assāti vā bhummatthe sāmivacanaṃ, tasmiṃ puggaleti attho. Sa ve tādisako hotīti yo yādisaṃ pāpamittaṃ vā kalyāṇamittaṃ vā bhajati upasevati ca, so puggalo bhūmibhāgavasena udakaṃ viya tādisova hoti, pāpadhammo kalyāṇadhammo vā hoti. Kasmā? Sahavāso hi tādiso; yasmā sahavāso saṃsaggo uparāgo viya phalikamaṇīsu purisaupanissayabhūtaṃ puggalākāraṃ gāhāpeti, tasmā pāpapuggalena saha vāso na kātabboti adhippāyo.
恶人时常亲近根本清净的人,或者被那位清净的人所亲近。由于与那位根本清净的人共住、交往而受到接触,恶人自己也同样受到沾染,并且同样地会使对方受到沾染。就像一支涂了毒的箭,会染污箭囊里其他没沾毒的箭一样;同样,因为害怕被恶所染污,具慧者——也就是有坚定智慧的聪明人——不应该和恶友作伴。巴利
Sevamāno sevamānanti paraṃ pakatisuddhaṃ puggalaṃ kālena kālaṃ attānaṃ sevamānaṃ sevamāno bhajamāno pāpapuggalo, tena vā seviyamāno. Samphuṭṭho samphusanti tena pakatisuddhena puggalena sahavāsena saṃsaggena samphuṭṭho pāpapuggalo sayampi, tathā taṃ phusanto. Saro diddho kalāpaṃ vāti yathā nāma saro visena diddho litto sarakalāpagato sarasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ sarakalāpaṃ attanā phuṭṭhaṃ alittampi upalimpati, evaṃ pāpena upalepabhayā dhīroti dhitisampannattā dhīro paṇḍitapuriso pāpasahāyo na bhaveyya.
用吉祥草梢系臭鱼:就像有人用吉祥草梢把一条腐烂发臭的鱼捆起来,再用叶子包好扎紧,那些吉祥草本来不臭,却因为和臭鱼绑在一起,也变得又臭又难闻。亲近愚人也是这样:应当这样理解亲近愚人。亲近智者也是这样:就像原本不香的树叶,因为和多伽罗香木放在一起而变得芳香;同样,亲近智者,能让本性无戒的人通过受持戒等而散发出戒香。巴利
Pūtimacchaṃ kusaggenāti yathā kucchitabhāvena pūtibhūtaṃ macchaṃ kusatiṇaggena yo puriso upanayhati puṭabandhavasena bandhati, tassa te kusā apūtikāpi pūtimacchasambandhena pūti duggandhameva vāyanti. Evaṃ bālūpasevanāti evaṃsampadā bālajanūpasevanā daṭṭhabbā. Evaṃ dhīrūpasevanāti yathā asurabhinopi pattā tagarasambandhena surabhiṃ vāyanti, evaṃ paṇḍitūpasevanā pakatiyā asīlavato sīlasamādānādivasena sīlagandhavāyanassa kāraṇaṃ hoti.
所以,“因此”是说:因为亲近恶友和亲近善友会带来这样的过患和利益——就像叶子包因接触臭物或香物而染上气味一样,依止不善之人和善人也是如此。了知自己的成就:明白自己苦果和乐果的生起与果之成就之后,就不该去亲近不善的恶友,而应该亲近善的、已寂静的、断除了过失的、或者被称赞的智者。因为确实,不善的人会把人带向地狱,善的人则会让人走向善趣。就这样,世尊在第一首偈颂里开示了前面说的三种乐的因,接着用后面的五首偈颂,结合避开它们的对立面,说明了称叹之乐的生起;最后用结尾的偈颂,结合三种乐的生起原因,说明了最终的安乐。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā akalyāṇamittasevanāya kalyāṇamittasevanāya ca ayaṃ ediso ādīnavo ānisaṃso ca, tasmā pattapuṭasseva palāsapuṭassa viya duggandhasugandhavatthusaṃsaggena asādhusādhujanasannissayena ca. Ñatvā sampākamattanoti attano dukkhudrayaṃ sukhudrayañca phalanipphattiṃ ñatvā jānitvā asante pāpamitte na upaseveyya, sante upasante vantadose pasatthe vā paṇḍite seveyya. Tathā hi asanto nirayaṃ nenti, santo pāpenti suggatinti. Iti bhagavā paṭhamagāthāya yathāvuttāni tīṇi sukhanimittāni dassetvā tato parāhi pañcahi gāthāhi paṭipakkhaparivajjanena saddhiṃ pasaṃsāsukhassa āgamanaṃ dassetvā osānagāthāya tiṇṇampi sukhānaṃ āgamanakāraṇena saddhiṃ osānasukhaṃ dasseti.
第8经《破裂经》的注释巴利
8. Bhidurasuttavaṇṇanā
77 77. 在第八经中,“易坏”指的就是会坏灭。“身”指色身。因为它由大小肢体和头发等聚集而成,又是可厌、可憎之物的生起处,所以也叫身。这里的词源解释是:“它们在这里生起”,所以叫“生处”。什么在这里生起?可厌的头发等。因此,可厌之物的生处也叫身。从义理上说,身是四种相续所生的大种及所造色的聚集体。这里说的是:比丘们,这个四大所造之色身是会坏灭的,具有坏灭的本性,每一刹那都在崩坏。“易坏的”是另一种读法,意思相同。“识”指的是三界(欲界、色界、无色界)的善心等。词源解释是:它了知各种所缘,所以叫“识”。凡是了知、识别所缘的了知作用,那就是识。“离贪法”指具有离贪的性质,意思是具有坏灭的本性。“一切依”指蕴依、烦恼依、行依、五种欲功德依,这些被称为“依”,因为“苦在这里依止”。这一切依,即取蕴、烦恼、行、五种欲功德之法,以不存在之义为无常,以生灭逼迫之义为苦,以老死两种变易本性、舍弃自性之义为变易法。如此,这里以无常观之乐,将色法与识分开取,再以依的分别将一切三界法总摄,以无常、苦随观之门,为那些如此觉悟的个人的意乐,说明了观行。这里,虽然经中只提到了两种相,但由“凡苦者,彼无我”之说,以苦相也显示了无我相,应当知道。巴利
77. Aṭṭhame bhidurāyanti bhiduro ayaṃ. Kāyoti rūpakāyo. So hi aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ jegucchānaṃ āyo uppattidesotipi kāyo. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti etthāti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ āyotipi kāyo . Atthato pana catusantativasena pavattamānānaṃ bhūtupādāyadhammānaṃ puñjo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhikkhave, ayaṃ catumahābhūtamayo rūpakāyo bhiduro bhedanasīlo bhedanasabhāvo khaṇe khaṇe viddhaṃsanasabhāvoti. ‘‘Bhindarāya’’ntipi pāṭho, so evattho. Viññāṇanti tebhūmakaṃ kusalādicittaṃ. Vacanattho pana – taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Yañhi sañjānanapajānanavidhuraṃ ārammaṇavijānanaṃ upaladdhi, taṃ viññāṇaṃ. Virāgadhammanti virajjanadhammaṃ, palujjanasabhāvanti attho. Sabbe upadhīti khandhūpadhi, kilesūpadhi, abhisaṅkhārūpadhi, pañcakāmaguṇūpadhīti ete ‘‘upadhīyati ettha dukkha’’nti upadhisaññitā sabbepi upādānakkhandhakilesābhisaṅkhārapañcakāmaguṇadhammā hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā, udayabbayappaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhā, jarāya maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbasabhāvatāya pakativijahanaṭṭhena vipariṇāmadhammā. Evamettha aniccadassanasukhatāya rūpadhamme viññāṇañca visuṃ gahetvā puna upadhivibhāgena sabbepi tebhūmakadhamme ekajjhaṃ gahetvā aniccadukkhānupassanāmukhena tathābujjhanakānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena sammasanacāro.kathito. Kāmañcettha lakkhaṇadvayameva pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ, ‘‘yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) pana vacanato dukkhalakkhaṇeneva anattalakkhaṇampi dassitamevāti veditabbaṃ.
偈颂里说“在诸依处见到怖畏”,意思是:以怖畏现起智在诸依处上见到怖畏,也就是见到它们确实可怖。这里显示的是强力的观智。怖畏现起智若再加以分别,按它的特殊作用,又可称为过患随观和厌离随观。“超越生死”:这样审察思惟的人,把观智与圣道结合起来,通过一道接一道的圣道证得阿罗汉果,就称为超越生死的人。怎么超越呢?“抵达至高的寂静”:证得至高、无上、无与伦比的寂静,也就是一切行息灭的涅槃。成为这样的人之后,“已修习者”等待时刻:因为修习四种圣道而成就了修证的圆满,获得已修身、已修戒、已修心、已修慧的资格,成为已修习者。他不贪喜死亡,也不贪喜活着,只是等待自己五蕴般涅槃的时刻,对任何地方都没有希求。因此说:巴利
Gāthāyaṃ upadhīsu bhayaṃ disvāti upadhīsu bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇavasena bhayaṃ disvā, tesaṃ bhāyitabbataṃ passitvā. Iminā balavavipassanaṃ dasseti. Bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇameva hi vibhajitvā visesavasena ādīnavānupassanā nibbidānupassanāti ca vuccati. Jātimaraṇamaccagāti evaṃ sammasanto vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggena ghaṭetvā maggaparamparāya arahattaṃ patto jātimaraṇaṃ atīto nāma hoti. Kathaṃ? Sampatvāparamaṃ santinti paramaṃ uttamaṃ anuttaraṃ santiṃ sabbasaṅkhārūpasamaṃ nibbānaṃ adhigantvā. Evaṃbhūto ca kālaṃ kaṅkhati bhāvitattoti catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ vasena bhāvanābhisamayanipphattiyā bhāvitakāyasīlacittapaññattā bhāvitatto maraṇaṃ jīvitañca anabhinandanto kevalaṃ attano khandhaparinibbānakālaṃ kaṅkhati udikkhati, na tassa katthaci patthanā hotīti. Tenāha –
我不贪恋死亡,也不贪恋活着;
我等待着那个时刻,就像雇工等待着工钱。巴利
‘‘Nābhinandāmi maraṇaṃ, nābhinandāmi jīvitaṃ; Kālañca paṭikaṅkhāmi, nibbisaṃ bhatako yathā’’ti. (theragā. 606);
第9经《界相合经》的注释巴利
9. Dhātusosaṃsandanasuttavaṇṇanā
78 78. 在第九经中,“依界”是指依界而言。这里说的“界”,指的是意乐的界、意乐的本性,也称为“意乐倾向”。“相合”:因为界的种类相同,他们就随各自的界、随各自的意乐而附着在一起,成为一体。“和合”:因为意乐相同,他们心意一致而聚到一起,互相亲近、互相交往,并且处处表现出与自己的喜好、认可和见解相符的行为。“劣意乐者”:对低劣的五欲等有意乐,就是劣意乐者,也就是意乐低劣的人。“善净意乐者”:对善净的出离等有意乐,就是善净意乐者,也就是意乐殊胜的人。如果亲教师和依止师不持戒,而弟子和同住比丘持戒,那些持戒的人就不会去亲近亲教师和依止师,只会亲近与自己同类、相应的比丘。反过来,如果亲教师和依止师持戒,而其他人不持戒,那些不持戒的人也不会去亲近亲教师和依止师,只会亲近与自己一样的劣意乐者。为了说明这种亲近不只是现在如此,过去和未来也同样如此,所以接着说:“比丘们,过去也……”总之,执著于杂染法的人就是劣意乐者,执著于清净法的人就是善净意乐者。巴利
78. Navame dhātusoti dhātuto. Dhātūti ca ajjhāsayadhātu ajjhāsayasabhāvo adhippeto, yo adhimuttītipi vuccati. Saṃsandantīti tāya dhātusabhāgatāya yathādhātu yathāajjhāsayaṃ allīyanti ekato honti. Samentīti tāya eva samānajjhāsayatāya ekacittā hutvā samāgacchanti aññamaññaṃ bhajanti upasaṅkamanti, attano rucibhāvakhantidiṭṭhiyo vā tattha tattha same karontā pavattanti. Hīnādhimuttikāti hīne kāmaguṇādike adhimutti etesanti hīnādhimuttikā, hīnajjhāsayā. Kalyāṇādhimuttikāti kalyāṇe nekkhammādike adhimutti etesanti kalyāṇādhimuttikā, paṇītajjhāsayā. Sace hi ācariyupajjhāyā na sīlavanto , antevāsikasaddhivihārikā ca sīlavanto, te ācariyupajjhāyepi na upasaṅkamanti, attano sadise sāruppabhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Sace pana ācariyupajjhāyā sīlavanto, itare na sīlavanto, tepi na ācariyupajjhāye upasaṅkamanti, attano sadise hīnādhimuttikeyeva upasaṅkamanti. Evaṃ upasaṅkamanaṃ pana na kevalaṃ etarahi eva, atha kho atītānāgatepīti dassento ‘‘atītampi, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Saṅkhepato saṃkilesadhammesu abhiniviṭṭhā hīnādhimuttikā , vodānadhammesu abhiniviṭṭhā kalyāṇādhimuttikā.
那么,为什么无戒者只亲近无戒者,持戒者只亲近持戒者,劣慧者只亲近劣慧者,具慧者只亲近具慧者呢?是意乐界在决定。据说,许多比丘在一个村庄里托钵乞食。人们拿了很多食物,把钵装满,说:“请按各自相应的份一起享用吧。”说完就让他们离开了。比丘们说:“贤友们,人们是在做与界相应的行为啊。”意乐界就是这样起决定作用的。应当借“与界相应”这件事来说明这个道理——在灵鹫山上,世尊卧病在床,舍利弗、目犍连等人为守护而住在四周。世尊看见他们各自带着自己的随行比丘在经行,便对比丘们说:“比丘们,你们看见舍利弗和众多比丘一起经行吗?”“是的,世尊。”“比丘们,所有这些比丘都是大智慧者。”(《相应部》2.99)这些都应详细展开解说。巴利
Idaṃ pana dussīlānaṃ dussīlasevanameva, sīlavantānaṃ sīlavantasevanameva, duppaññānaṃ duppaññasevanameva, paññavantānaṃ paññavantasevanameva ko niyāmetīti? Ajjhāsayadhātu niyāmeti. Sambahulā kira bhikkhū ekasmiṃ gāme bhikkhācāraṃ caranti. Te manussā bahuṃ bhattaṃ āharitvā pattāni pūretvā ‘‘yathāsabhāgaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti vatvā uyyojesuṃ. Bhikkhū āhaṃsu ‘‘āvuso, manussā dhātusaṃyuttakamme payojentī’’ti. Evaṃ ajjhāsayadhātu niyāmetīti. Dhātusaṃyuttena ayamattho dīpetabbo – gijjhakūṭapabbatasmiñhi gilānaseyyāya nipanno bhagavā ārakkhatthāya parivāretvā vasantesu sāriputtamoggallānādīsu ekamekaṃ attano parisāya saddhiṃ caṅkamantaṃ oloketvā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘‘passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, sāriputtaṃ sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ caṅkamantanti. Evaṃ, bhante. Sabbe kho ete, bhikkhave, bhikkhū mahāpaññā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.99) sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
在偈颂中,“交往”是指:从杂染的角度来说,通过共住等方式而产生的结合;或者也可以说,有五种交往——见面的交往、听闻的交往、交谈的交往、共同受用的交往、身体接触的交往——就是从这五种交往中的任何一种来说的。“烦恼丛生”是指:烦恼生起了,还没有被圣道彻底根除。“以不交往而断除”是指:通过拒绝交往,先以身远离等在前一阶段断除,然后再以究竟的不交往——即彻底断除的远离——而断除、舍弃。到这里,就简要地说明了劣意乐的生起和灭除。巴利
Gāthāsu saṃsaggāti saṃkilesato sahavāsādivasena samāyogato, atha vā dassanasaṃsaggo, savanasaṃsaggo, samullāpasaṃsaggo, sambhogasaṃsaggo, kāyasaṃsaggoti evaṃ pañcavidhe saṃsagge yato kutoci saṃsaggato. Vanatho jātoti kileso uppanno maggena asamūhato. Asaṃsaggena chijjatīti saṃsaggapaṭikkhepena kāyavivekādinā pubbabhāge chijjitvā puna accantāsaṃsaggena samucchedavivekena chijjati pahīyati. Ettāvatā saṅkhepato hīnādhimuttiyā samudayo atthaṅgamo ca dassito hoti.
因为那些交往和烦恼,都是靠着懈怠才生起、增长的,不是靠着开始精进才生起、增长的。所以,应当避开那些意乐低劣、懈怠的人,亲近那些意乐良善、已经发起精进的人;通过不交往,来断除由交往而生的烦恼丛。为了详细说明上面所说的这个道理,先要显示亲近懈怠者的过患,于是说了“小木……”等话。巴利
Yasmā pana te saṃsaggā te ca kilesā kosajjavasena uppajjanti ceva vaḍḍhanti ca, na vīriyārambhavasena, tasmā hīnādhimuttike kusītapuggale vajjetvā kalyāṇādhimuttike āraddhavīriye sevantena asaṃsaggena saṃsaggajo vanatho chinditabboti yathāvuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento kusītasevanāya tāva ādīnavaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘parittaṃ dāru’’ntiādimāha.
在这里,“小木”是指小小的木筏。“就像在大海中沉没”:好比有人坐上小木筏想横渡大海,还没到岸边,就在大海中间沉没了,掉进水里成了鱼和鳖的食物。同样,“依止懈怠者,活命清净的人也会沉没”:依止那种缺乏精进、被烦恼控制的人,和他交往的人,即使自己活命清净、戒行清净,也会因为这种低劣的交往而生起欲寻思等烦恼,被烦恼吞噬,无法到达彼岸,就在轮回的大海里沉没了。“因此”,因为和懈怠者交往会带来这样的祸患,所以说“由于依止他,因沉溺于懒惰而卑劣地沉没,所以叫懈怠者”。正因为如此,应当完全远离这种劣精进、无精进、不是善知识的人。反过来,应当只和这样的人同住共处:他们因身远离等和彼分远离等而独处,因远离烦恼而成为圣者,清净无染,已确立趣向,以所缘和特相为专注对象而修禅,始终精进不懈,是精进努力、有智慧、有慧的人。巴利
Tattha parittaṃ dārunti khuddakaṃ kaṭṭhamayaṃ kullaṃ. Yathā sīde mahaṇṇaveti yathā khuddakaṃ kullaṃ āruhitvā mahāsamuddaṃ taritukāmo tīraṃ appatvā samuddamajjheyeva sīdeyya, patitvā macchakacchapabhakkho bhaveyya. Evaṃ kusītaṃ āgamma, sādhujīvīpi sīdatīti evameva kusītaṃ vīriyārambharahitaṃ kilesavasikaṃ puggalaṃ nissāya tena katasaṃsaggo sādhujīvīpi parisuddhājīvo parisuddhasīlopi samāno hīnasaṃsaggato uppannehi kāmavitakkādīhi khajjamāno pāraṃ gantuṃ asamattho saṃsāraṇṇaveyeva sīdati. Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ anatthāvaho kusītasaṃsaggo, tasmā taṃ āgamma ālasiyānuyogena kucchitaṃ sīdatīti kusītaṃ. Tato eva hīnavīriyaṃ nibbīriyaṃ akalyāṇamittaṃ parivajjeyya. Ekanteneva pana kāyavivekādīnañceva tadaṅgavivekādīnañca vasena pavivittehi, tato eva kilesehi ārakattā ariyehi parisuddhehi nibbānaṃ paṭipesitattabhāvato pahitattehi ārammaṇalakkhaṇūpanijjhānānaṃ vasena jhāyanato jhāyīhi sabbakālaṃ paggahitavīriyatāya āraddhavīriyehi paṇḍitehi sappaññehiyeva saha āvaseyya saṃvaseyyāti.
第10经《退失经》的注释巴利
10. Parihānasuttavaṇṇanā
79 在第十经的注释里,“导向退没”的意思是:不再增长,成为证得圣道的障碍。不过,对于已经证得的圣道来说,并不存在所谓的退没。“三种法”这句话,是在以法为立足点所开示的法中,为了转而以人为立足点来解说,而把所开示的法加以分别说明,所以世尊说:“比丘们,在这里,有学比丘……”等等。巴利
79. Dasame parihānāya saṃvattantīti avuddhiyā bhavanti, maggādhigamassa paripanthāya honti. Adhigatassa pana maggassa parihāni nāma natthi. ‘‘Tayo dhammā’’ti dhammādhiṭṭhānavasena uddiṭṭhadhamme puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya vibhajanto ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, sekho bhikkhū’’tiādimāha.
在这里,所谓“业园者”,是指业是应当乐着的,因此业就是他的园地,所以叫业园者。“业乐者”就是乐于做事的人。“投身于业园状态者”,是指已经投入、专心于这种以做事为乐、对做事有兴致的状态。这里说的“业”,是指应当做的事,比如:裁剪袈裟、制作袈裟、支撑物、钵袋、肩带、腰带、风箱、支架、足垫、扫帚等这些用具的制作,以及修理精舍里破损、毁坏的地方。确实有一类人,整天就只做这些事情。这段话就是针对这种人说的。但如果有人只是在做这些用具的时候才做这些事,在教授的时候接受教授,在诵习的时候诵习,在做塔庙、庭院等义务的时候做塔庙、庭院等义务,在作意的时候,无论是对一切处业处还是对护持业处作意,那这个人就不叫业园者。对他来说,那……巴利
Tattha kammaṃ āramitabbato ārāmo etassāti kammārāmo. Kamme ratoti kammarato. Kammārāmataṃ kammābhiratiṃ anuyutto payuttoti kammārāmatamanuyutto. Tattha kammaṃ nāma itikattabbaṃ kammaṃ, seyyathidaṃ – cīvaravicāraṇaṃ, cīvarakaraṇaṃ, upatthambhanaṃ, pattatthavikaṃ, aṃsabandhanaṃ, kāyabandhanaṃ, dhamakaraṇaṃ, ādhārakaṃ, pādakathalikaṃ, sammajjanīti evamādīnaṃ upakaraṇānaṃ karaṇaṃ, yañca vihāre khaṇḍaphullādipaṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ . Ekacco hi etāni karonto sakaladivasaṃ etāneva karoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yo pana etesaṃ karaṇavelāyameva etāni karoti, uddesavelāyaṃ uddesaṃ gaṇhāti, sajjhāyavelāyaṃ sajjhāyati, cetiyaṅgaṇavattādikaraṇavelāyaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīni karoti, manasikāravelāyaṃ manasikāraṃ karoti sabbatthakakammaṭṭhāne vā pārihāriyakammaṭṭhāne vā, na so kammārāmo nāma. Tassa taṃ –
对于同梵行者们各种大大小小该做的事,他在那里很能干,不懒惰,具备用适当方法去考察的能力,有能力去做,有能力去安排。巴利
‘‘Yāni kho pana tāni sabrahmacārīnaṃ uccāvacāni kiṃkaraṇīyāni, tattha dakkho hoti analaso, tatrupāyāya vīmaṃsāya samannāgato, alaṃ kātuṃ alaṃ saṃvidhātu’’nti (dī. ni. 3.345; a. ni. 10.18) –
从开头,导师所做的正是被允许的事。巴利
Ādinā satthārā anuññātakaraṇameva hoti.
所谓“乐于谈话的人”,是指有人按照世尊所禁止的王论之类的方式,日夜消磨时光,这种人在谈话上没有节制,所以名叫“乐于谈话的人”。但如果有人无论夜里还是白天都说法、回答问题,这种人话少,在谈话上确实是有节制的。为什么?因为他遵循的正是“比丘们,你们聚集时应当做两件事:法谈或圣默然”这一规定。巴利
Bhassārāmoti yo bhagavatā paṭikkhittarājakathādivasena rattindivaṃ vītināmeti, ayaṃ bhasse pariyantakārī na hotīti bhassārāmo nāma. Yo pana rattimpi divāpi dhammaṃ katheti, pañhaṃ vissajjeti, ayaṃ appabhasso bhasse pariyantakārīyeva. Kasmā? ‘‘Sannipatitānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dvayaṃ karaṇīyaṃ – dhammī vā kathā, ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.273) vuttavidhiṃyeva paṭipannoti.
所谓“以睡眠为乐的人”,是指有人尽情吃饱、撑得肚子发胀之后,就沉溺在躺卧的快乐、坐着的快乐、昏睡的快乐里;还有人在走路、坐着、站着的时候,被昏沉和睡意压倒而睡着,这种人就叫以睡眠为乐的人。但如果有人因为身体生病,心沉入有分,那这个人就不算以睡眠为乐的人。正因如此,世尊说:巴利
Niddārāmoti yo yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ, passasukhaṃ, middhasukhaṃ anuyuñjati, yo ca gacchantopi nisinnopi ṭhitopi thinamiddhābhibhūto niddāyati, ayaṃ niddārāmo nāma. Yassa pana karajakāyagelaññena cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, nāyaṃ niddārāmo, tenevāha –
阿耆毗舍那,我确实记得:在夏季最后一个月,托钵乞食回来、吃完饭后,把僧伽梨衣叠成四层铺好,然后右侧而卧,保持正念和正知,进入睡眠。巴利
‘‘Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, aggivessana, gimhānaṃ pacchime māse pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto catugguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paññāpetvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno niddaṃ okkamitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387).
在这里,即使是凡夫善士,也应当知道他还是有学。因此应当知道:他的这一切殊胜证得,以及其他更高层次的殊胜证得,都应当被理解为退失。至于白分(善法方面)的义理说明,则应当按前面所说黑分(不善法方面)的相反方式来理解。巴利
Ettha ca puthujjanakalyāṇakopi sekhotveva veditabbo. Tasmā tassa sabbassapi visesādhigamassa itaresaṃ upari visesādhigamassa ca parihānāya vattantīti veditabbaṃ. Sukkapakkhassa vuttavipariyāyena atthavibhāvanā veditabbā.
在偈颂中,“掉举者”是指:被那种能令心散乱的掉举所搅动,躁动不安、不得寂静。“少事者”是指:即使是已被允许的、如上所说的那些事务,也只在适当的时候、恰当的时机才去做,因此成为少事者。“少睡眠者”是指:通过“白天以经行、宴坐……”等所说的警醒精勤,而远离睡眠。“不掉举者”是指:对于由乐于谈论而生起的心散乱,由于不乐于谈论并加以回避,所以不掉举、心得寂静,也就是“得定者”的意思。其余部分因为和前面所说的方式相同,所以很容易理解。这样,在这一品中,第一、第二、第五、第六、第七、第八、第九这几部经里讲了流转;其余几部经里则讲了流转与还灭。巴利
Gāthāsu uddhatoti cittavikkhepakarena uddhaccena uddhato avūpasanto. Appakiccassāti anuññātassapi vuttappakārassa kiccassa yuttappayuttakāleyeva karaṇato appakicco assa bhaveyya. Appamiddhoti ‘‘divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāyā’’tiādinā vuttajāgariyānuyogena niddārahito assa. Anuddhatoti bhassārāmatāya uppajjanakacittavikkhepassa abhassārāmo hutvā parivajjanena na uddhato vūpasantacitto, samāhitoti attho. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva. Iti imasmiṃ vagge paṭhamadutiyapañcamachaṭṭhasattamaaṭṭhamanavamesu suttesu vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, itaresu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ.
《寻经》的注释巴利
1. Vitakkasuttavaṇṇanā
80 第四品第一经里说的“不善寻”,是指从不善巧中生起的寻,也就是邪寻,这是它的意思。“与不被他轻视相应”这一句里,“不被他轻视”是指不被别人看不起、不被别人轻蔑、不被别人贬低,也就是心里冒出“啊,但愿别人不要看轻我”这种欲望驱动的念头。与这种“不被他轻视”相应、结合在一起,或者就是缘着这个而生起的寻,就叫“与不被他轻视相应的寻”。所以,这其实是站在那种渴望被人看重的欲望心态里所生起的寻的另一种说法。“与利养、恭敬、名声相应”,是指以衣服等利养、恭敬以及名声称誉为所缘而与之相应。“与慈悯他人相应”,是指以那种表面上像慈悯、实际上属于居家情爱的心态而与之相应。关于这一点,曾这样说:巴利
80. Catutthavaggassa paṭhame akusalavitakkāti akosallasambhūtā vitakkā, micchāvitakkāti attho. Anavaññattipaṭisaṃyuttoti ettha anavaññattīti anavaññā parehi attano ahīḷitatā aparibhūtatā, ‘‘aho vata maṃ pare na avajāneyyu’’nti evaṃ pavatto icchācāro, tāya anavaññattiyā paṭisaṃyutto saṃsaṭṭho, taṃ vā ārabbha pavatto anavaññattipaṭisaṃyutto vitakko. Tasmā ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho maṃ pare gahaṭṭhā ceva pabbajitā ca na orakato daheyyu’’nti sambhāvanakamyatāya icchācāre, ṭhatvā pavattitavitakkassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Lābhasakkārasilokapaṭisaṃyuttoti cīvarādilābhena ceva sakkārena ca kittisaddena ca ārammaṇakaraṇavasena paṭisaṃyutto. Parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyuttoti paresu anuddayatāpatirūpakena gehasitapemena paṭisaṃyutto. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
他与国王、国王的大臣、婆罗门、居士、外道和外道弟子们亲密相处,同喜同忧:别人快乐时他也快乐,别人痛苦时他也痛苦,一有该做的事,就亲自投入其中。巴利
‘‘Saṃsaṭṭho viharati rājūhi rājamahāmattehi brāhmaṇehi gahapatikehi titthiyehi titthiyasāvakehi sahanandī sahasokī, sukhitesu sukhito, dukkhitesu dukkhito, uppannesu kiccakaraṇīyesu attanāva yogaṃ āpajjatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.3; 4.241; vibha. 888).
偈颂中,与不轻视相应的人,就是与不轻视相应者。他恭敬利养和恭敬,却不恭敬法,所以叫恭敬利养恭敬者。在苦乐中不偏爱、共同存在,所以叫同伴,也就是像朋友一样的侍者。因为对这些人怀着世俗的亲情,惯于和他们同喜,所以叫与同伴同喜,这里显示出与怜悯他人相应的寻。所谓远离结的灭尽,是说被这三种寻所压倒的人,在结灭尽的意义上远离阿拉汉果,对他来说,阿拉汉果是难以得到的。这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Gāthāsu anavaññattiyā paṭisaṃyutto puggalo anavaññattisaṃyutto. Lābhasakkāre gāravo etassa, na dhammeti lābhasakkāragāravo. Sukhadukkhesu amā saha bhavāti amaccā, sahāyasadisā upaṭṭhākā. Tehi gehasitapemavasena saha nandanasīlo sahanandī amaccehi, iminā parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyuttaṃ vitakkaṃ dasseti. Ārā saṃyojanakkhayāti imehi tīhi vitakkehi abhibhūto puggalo saṃyojanakkhayato arahattato dūre, tassa taṃ dullabhanti attho.
“子女与牲畜”:指子女和牲畜。这里,“子女”这个词也包含了妻子等人;“牲畜”这个词也包含了马、水牛、田地、宅地等。“婚事”:指操办婚礼。用这个词也涵盖了迎娶。“蓄积”:指拥有的物品,意思是积攒各种资具。也有人读作“亲密”,意思是朋友之间的亲密。“于一切处已舍弃”是连接语。所谓“那样的比丘”,是指像前面所说的那样,舍弃了一切戏论之后,依照导师所教导的正确修行方式而应当被看待的人。他在轮回中看到了怖畏,因此称为比丘,他有能力证得最上的正觉——阿拉汉果。巴利
Puttapasunti putte ca pasavo ca. Puttasaddena cettha dārādayo; pasusaddena assamahiṃsakhettavatthādayo ca saṅgahitā. Vivāheti vivāhakārāpane. Iminā āvāhopi saṅgahito. Saṃharānīti pariggahāni, parikkhārasaṅgahānīti attho. ‘‘Santhavānī’’ti ca paṭhanti, mittasanthavānīti attho. Sabbattha hitvāti sambandho. Bhabbo so tādiso bhikkhūti so yathāvuttaṃ sabbaṃ papañcaṃ pariccajitvā yathā satthārā vuttāya sammāpaṭipattiyā, tathā passitabbato tādiso saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhatīti bhikkhu uttamaṃ sambodhiṃ arahattaṃ pattuṃ arahati.
恭敬经的注释巴利
2. Sakkārasuttavaṇṇanā
81 81. 在第二经中,“由于恭敬”是指以恭敬为原因;或者,“由于恭敬”是指以恭敬为因,或以恭敬为起因。因为在这个世间,有些人依止恭敬,生起恶欲,被欲求所驱使,安住在欲行之中,想着“我要获得恭敬”,于是做出种种不正当、不合适的邪命行为,死后便投生到恶趣。另一些人得到与恭敬相应的利益后,因为这件事而生起慢、醉、悭吝等,陷入放逸,死后也投生到恶趣。针对这种情况,世尊才说:“被恭敬所征服,心被完全占据。”这里“被征服”是指被压倒。“心被完全占据”是指心被耗尽,由于欲行以及慢、醉等,将善心消耗殆尽。或者,“心被完全占据”是指心被遍取,以所说种类的不善部分,使得善心生起的机缘不存在,如此从四面八方被占据心相续,这就是意思。“由于不恭敬”是指由于被他人轻蔑、鄙视而对自己生起的不恭敬为因,或以不恭敬为因,即慢等。“由于恭敬与不恭敬”是指由于某些人给予的恭敬和某些人给予的不恭敬。因为有些人最初受到某些人恭敬,后来那些人知道其无实质后,便不再恭敬他们,针对这种情况才说“由于恭敬与不恭敬”。巴利
81. Dutiye sakkārenāti sakkārena hetubhūtena, atha vā sakkārenāti sakkārahetunā, sakkārahetukena vā. Sakkārañhi nissāya idhekacce puggalā pāpicchā icchāpakatā icchācāre ṭhatvā ‘‘sakkāraṃ nibbattessāmā’’ti anekavihitaṃ anesanaṃ appatirūpaṃ āpajjitvā ito cutā apāyesu nibbattanti, apare yathāsakkāraṃ labhitvā tannimittaṃ mānamadamacchariyādivasena pamādaṃ āpajjitvā ito cutā apāyesu nibbattanti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sakkārena abhibhūtā pariyādinnacittā’’ti. Tattha abhibhūtāti ajjhotthaṭā. Pariyādinnacittāti khepitacittā, icchācārena mānamadādinā ca khayaṃ pāpitakusalacittā. Atha vā pariyādinnacittāti parito ādinnacittā, vuttappakārena akusalakoṭṭhāsena yathā kusalacittassa uppattivāro na hoti, evaṃ samantato gahitacittasantānāti attho. Asakkārenāti hīḷetvā paribhavitvā parehi attani pavattitena asakkārena hetunā, asakkārahetukena vā mānādinā. Sakkārena ca asakkārena cāti kehici pavattitena sakkārena kehici pavattitena asakkārena ca. Ye hi kehici paṭhamaṃ sakkatā hutvā tehiyeva asārabhāvaṃ ñatvā pacchā asakkatā honti, tādise sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkārena ca asakkārena cā’’ti.
在这里,应该以提婆达多等人为例,说明他们是被恭敬所制伏的。对此也有这样的说法:巴利
Ettha sakkārena abhibhūtā devadattādayo nidassetabbā. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
果实确实会毁掉芭蕉树,果实会毁掉竹子,果实会毁掉芦苇;
恭敬供养会毁掉卑劣的人,就像胎儿会害死母骡一样。巴利
‘‘Phalaṃ ve kadaliṃ hanti, phalaṃ veḷuṃ phalaṃ naḷaṃ; Sakkāro kāpurisaṃ hanti, gabbho assatariṃ yathā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.183; a. ni. 4.68; cūḷava. 335);
被施加在善人身上的不恭敬所压倒的丹达基王、迦陵伽王、末阇王等人,应当作为例子来说明。关于这一点也有这样的说法:巴利
Sādhūnaṃ upari katena asakkārena abhibhūtā daṇḍakīrājakāliṅgarājamajjharājādayo nidassetabbā. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
丹达基王因为侮辱了瘦小的牛犊,
他的根已被斩断,连同族人、国土一起。
他在地狱里被烧煮,那地狱名叫“炽燃”。
他的身体上有火星纷纷落下。
如果有人欺骗了那些自律的出家修行者,
宣说正法、没有过失的沙门,
那群狗在别处那椰子。
它们聚到一起,啃咬那个正在挣扎扑腾的。
玛阇王对享有盛誉的摩登伽仙人怀有恶意;
他和自己的随从一起被消灭了,那时中部地方就成了一片森林。巴利
‘‘Kisañhi vacchaṃ avakiriya daṇḍakī, Ucchinnamūlo sajano saraṭṭho; Kukkuḷanāme nirayamhi paccati, Tassa phuliṅgāni patanti kāye. ‘‘Yo saññate pabbajite avañcayi, Dhammaṃ bhaṇante samaṇe adūsake; Taṃ nāḷikeraṃ sunakhā parattha, Saṅgamma khādanti viphandamānaṃ’’. (jā. 2.17.70-71); ‘‘Upahacca manaṃ majjho, mātaṅgasmiṃ yasassine; Sapārisajjo ucchinno, majjhāraññaṃ tadā ahū’’ti. (jā. 2.19.96);
外道们,比如耆那教徒等,被恭敬和不恭敬两方面压服,应当把他们指出来。巴利
Sakkārena ca asakkārena ca abhibhūtā aññatitthiyā nāṭaputtādayo nidassetabbā.
在偈颂中,“两者”是指恭敬和不恭敬这两方面。“定不动摇”就是不动摇,以心一境性而安住。那么,是谁的定不动摇呢?所以说“不放逸住者”。由于那些导致放逸的法——贪等——已被彻底断除,因此是不放逸住者的阿拉汉,他的定不动摇,因为他不会被世间法所动摇。“微细见观者”:为了证得果等至,以微细的见和慧不断观察,所以是微细见观者。“取灭尽乐者”:四取的灭尽即是究竟的阿拉汉果,这是他应当乐于的,所以是取灭尽乐者。其余部分按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Gāthāsu ubhayanti ubhayena sakkārena ca asakkārena ca. Samādhi na vikampatīti na calati, ekaggabhāvena tiṭṭhati. Kassa pana na calatīti āha ‘‘appamādavihārino’’ti. Yo pamādakaradhammānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā appamādavihārī arahā, tassa. So hi lokadhammehi na vikampati. Sukhumadiṭṭhivipassakanti phalasamāpattiatthaṃ sukhumāya diṭṭhiyā paññāya abhiṇhaṃ pavattavipassanattā sukhumadiṭṭhivipassakaṃ. Upādānakkhayārāmanti catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ khayaṃ pariyosānabhūtaṃ arahattaphalaṃ āramitabbaṃ etassāti upādānakkhayārāmaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第三 天声经的注释巴利
3. Devasaddasuttavaṇṇanā
82 82. 在第三经中,“于诸天中”是指除了无色界天和无想天之外的其他往生天。“天声”是指诸天因喜悦而发出的声音。“发出”是说以相互交谈、对话的方式而响起。“依时而时”是指依据时间、依据时机。这里说的是:那些天人在某个时候安住着,等到那个时刻到来就会看见他,也就是依于那个时机到来。“也有人读作‘依各各时’”,他们的意思是“依于彼彼时”。所谓“在那个时候”,是指当对于诸欲和在家生活,通过“诸欲如骸骨”等以及“在家生活是拥挤”等说法,清楚地看到了其中的过患,并且从相反方面对出离清楚地看到了功德,就在那个时候。因为那时他的心必定倾向于出家。“圣弟子”:指圣者佛陀世尊的弟子,或者想要获得弟子身份的人,或者必定会成为圣弟子的人。这里是以最后生的声闻菩萨为对象而开始的。“剃除须发”:就是剃掉头发和胡须。“披着袈裟衣”:因为是用黄褐色染成的,所以叫袈裟,是修梵行者所适合的衣服,把它穿上、披好。“从家出,向往非家的出家而思”:就是从家、从屋舍走出去,想要出家为非家,这样思惟出家、计划出家,也就是出家的意思。在这里,因为在家人有耕田、经商等有帮助的事业,叫做在家事,而出家并没有这些,所以应当知道出家就是无家。巴利
82. Tatiye devesūti ṭhapetvā arūpāvacaradeve ceva asaññadeve ca tadaññesu upapattidevesu. Devasaddāti devānaṃ pītisamudāhārasaddā. Niccharantīti aññamaññaṃ ālāpasallāpavasena pavattanti. Samayā samayaṃ upādāyāti samayato samayaṃ paṭicca. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmiṃ kāle ṭhitā te devā taṃ kālaṃ āgamma naṃ passissanti, tato taṃ samayaṃ sampattaṃ āgammāti. ‘‘Samayaṃ samayaṃ upādāyā’’ti ca keci paṭhanti, tesaṃ taṃ taṃ samayaṃ paṭiccāti attho. Yasmiṃ samayeti yadā ‘‘aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.234; pāci. 417), ‘‘sambādho gharāvāso’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.191; saṃ. ni. 2.154) ca kāmesu gharāvāse ca ādīnavā, tappaṭipakkhato nekkhamme ānisaṃsā ca sudiṭṭhā honti, tasmiṃ samaye. Tadā hissa ekantena pabbajjāya cittaṃ namati. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa buddhassa bhagavato sāvako, sāvakabhāvaṃ upagantukāmo, ariyasāvako vā avassaṃbhāvī . Antimabhavikaṃ sāvakabodhisattaṃ sandhāya ayamārambho. Kesamassuṃ ohāretvāti kese ca massuñca ohāretvā apanetvā. Kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvāti kasāyena rattatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni nivāsetvā ceva pārupitvā ca. Agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajjāya cetetīti agārasmā gharā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajjaṃ pabbajeyyanti pabbajjāya ceteti pakappeti, pabbajatīti attho. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivaṇijjādikammaṃ agāriyanti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi, tasmā pabbajjā anagāriyanti ñātabbā.
“魔”是指烦恼魔。“为了战斗而思”的意思是:为了交战而令心生起,武装自己去征服魔。不过,因为对于这样修行的人,天子魔也会来制造障碍,所以在这里,“魔”也应该理解为天子魔,因为天子魔也会想破坏他的愿望。也就是说,天子魔也会来打断他的意愿。再者,从出家那天起,或者从剃发那时起,当修行者受持戒律、清净持戒,并在止观上精勤用功时,他就会相应地以彼分断和镇伏断来削弱烦恼魔——这时并不算真正交战,因为没有面对面地厮杀。因此说“与魔一起为了战斗而思”。巴利
Mārenāti kilesamārena. Saṅgāmāya cetetīti yujjhanatthāya cittaṃ uppādeti, māraṃ abhivijetuṃ sannayhati. Yasmā pana evarūpassa paṭipajjanakapuggalassa devaputtamāropi antarāyāya upakkamati, tasmā tassapi vasena mārenāti ettha devaputtamārenātipi attho veditabbo. Tassāpi ayaṃ icchāvighātaṃ karissatevāti. Yasmā pana pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya khuraggato vā paṭṭhāya sīlāni samādiyanto parisodhento samathavipassanāsu kammaṃ karonto yathārahaṃ tadaṅgappahānavikkhambhanappahānānaṃ vasena kilesamāraṃ paripāteti nāma, na yujjhati nāma sampahārassa abhāvato, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘mārena saddhiṃ saṅgāmāya cetetī’’ti.
“七”是从类别来说的七种;但如果再细分,它们就成了三十七种。怎么分呢?就是四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八圣道。这样细分虽然有三十七种,但按念处等类别来归纳,还是只有七类,所以说“七”。“菩提分”是指:以觉悟为意义而名为“菩提”的圣者所有的那部分,或者说是属于道智的那部分,也就是菩提的组成部分、菩提的分支。也有写成“bodhipakkhikānaṃ”的读法,意思是具有菩提分的人,或者精勤于观、致力于圣道修习的人。在观的刹那,念处等依方便名为菩提分;而在道的刹那,它们则是非方便名为菩提分。巴利
Sattannanti koṭṭhāsato sattannaṃ, pabhedato pana te sattatiṃsa honti. Kathaṃ? Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā , ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti. Evaṃ pabhedato sattatiṃsavidhāpi satipaṭṭhānādikoṭṭhāsato satteva hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sattanna’’nti. Bodhipakkhiyānanti bujjhanaṭṭhena bodhīti laddhanāmassa ariyapuggalassa maggañāṇasseva vā pakkhe bhavānaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ , bodhikoṭṭhāsiyānanti attho. ‘‘Bodhipakkhikāna’’ntipi pāṭho, bodhipakkhavantānaṃ, bodhipakkhe vā niyuttānanti attho. Bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttoti vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggabhāvanānuyogamanuyutto. Vipassanākkhaṇe hi satipaṭṭhānādayo pariyāyena bodhipakkhiyā nāma, maggakkhaṇeyeva pana te nippariyāyena bodhipakkhiyā nāma honti.
“诸漏的灭尽”,就是欲漏等一切漏的灭尽。因为当诸漏灭尽时,一切烦恼也就随之灭尽。因此,这里说的是阿罗汉道。“无漏”,就是远离诸漏。“心解脱、慧解脱”中,这里用“心”这个词指阿罗汉果的定,用“慧”这个词指与那定相应的慧。其中应当知道,定因为从贪染中解脱,所以叫心解脱;慧因为从无明中解脱,所以叫慧解脱。这正是世尊所说的——巴利
Āsavānaṃ khayāti kāmāsavādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ āsavānaṃ khayā. Āsavesu hi khīṇesu sabbe kilesā khīṇāyeva honti. Tena arahattamaggo vutto hoti. Anāsavanti āsavavirahitaṃ. Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti ettha cetovacanena arahattaphalasamādhi, paññāvacanena taṃsampayuttā ca paññā vuttā. Tattha samādhi rāgato vimuttattā cetovimutti, paññā avijjāya vimuttattā paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,一个人如果有定,那就是他的定根;如果有慧,那就是他的慧根。比丘们,就是这样:因为贪的褪去而有心解脱,因为无明的褪去而有慧解脱。巴利
‘‘Yo hissa, bhikkhave, samādhi, tadassa samādhindriyaṃ. Yā hissa, bhikkhave, paññā, tadassa paññindriyaṃ. Iti kho, bhikkhave, rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.516).
在这里还应知道:止的果是心解脱,观的果是慧解脱。“在现法中”就是指在现在这个生命里。“自己证知、作证”是指以自己的殊胜智慧亲自现见,不依靠他人而了知。“成就而住”是指达到、完成之后而安住。“他战胜了那战场之顶而安住”是指战胜了魔罗,因为已经征服而获得胜利,所以安住于、进入于那被称为“战场”的圣道的顶点——也就是阿罗汉果等至的自在之处,以征服的姿态而安住,这就是它的意思。还应知道,这些“天”的称呼,是通指已见谛的天众,特别是净居天的天众。巴利
Apicettha samathaphalaṃ cetovimutti, vipassanāphalaṃ paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanāyeva abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā aparappaccayena ñatvā. Upasampajja viharatīti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā viharati. Tameva saṅgāmasīsaṃ abhivijiya ajjhāvasatīti māraṃ abhivijinitvā vijitavijayattā tena katasaṅgāmasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa sīsabhūtaṃ arahattaphalasamāpattiissariyaṭṭhānaṃ, abhibhavanto āvasati, samāpajjati icceva attho. Ime ca devasaddā diṭṭhasaccesu devesu pavattanti, visesato suddhāvāsadevesūti veditabbaṃ.
在偈颂中,“大”是指因戒等功德广大而称大。“离畏惧”是指由于能令人畏惧的烦恼不存在,所以远离畏惧,没有怯弱。“人中贤骏”是指像马中良马等一样,在人中成为贤骏、最上之人。“已胜难胜之军”是指战胜、压伏了多数人所无法战胜的烦恼大军。也有人读作“ajjayī”,意思是“已胜”。以无碍解脱战胜死魔之军:“无碍”是因为遍及三界、又可分为一千五百等而广大,也因为他人无法障碍、遮止,所以无碍。以解脱即圣道,战胜死魔——魔罗之军。你战胜了那难胜之军。向你,人中贤骏,礼敬——这是前后关联。巴利
Gāthāsu mahantanti sīlādiguṇamahattena mahantaṃ. Vītasāradanti sārajjakarānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena vigatasārajjaṃ apagatamaṅkubhāvaṃ. Purisājaññāti assādīsu assājānīyādayo viya purisesu ājānīyabhūtā uttamapurisā. Dujjayamajjhabhūti pacurajanehi jetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ kilesavāhiniṃ abhibhavi ajjhotthari. ‘‘Ajjayī’’tipi paṭhanti, ajinīti attho. Jetvāna maccunosenaṃ, vimokkhena anāvaranti lokattayābhibyāpanato diyaḍḍhasahassādivibhāgato ca vipulattā aññehi āvarituṃ paṭisedhetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ca anāvaraṃ, maccuno mārassa senaṃ vimokkhena ariyamaggena jetvā yo tvaṃ dujjayaṃ ajayi, tassa namo, te purisājaññāti sambandho.
“如是”是依照前面所说的方式。“hi”只是一个语气词。这句话是在总结时,再次说明前面已经说过的意思:天神们敬礼这样一位已经达到心之成就、证得阿罗汉果、诸漏已尽的人。或者也可以把“如是”理解为“由于这个原因”。那这个原因是什么呢?就是因为战胜了魔军而达到了心的成就。天神们就是因为这个原因而敬礼他,这就是这里的意思。现在,为了从结果上说明这个原因,所以说:“因为诸天看不到他有什么,会使他落入死王的掌控。”这句话的意思是:即使诸天想要寻找,也丝毫看不到这位人中贤骏有什么原因,会使他走向死亡、落入死亡的控制。因此,清净的天神们敬礼他。巴利
Itīti vuttappakārena. Hi-iti nipātamattaṃ. Etaṃ pattamānasaṃ adhigatārahattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ devatānamassantīti vuttamevatthaṃ nigamanavasena dasseti. Atha vā itīti iminā kāraṇena. Kiṃ pana etaṃ kāraṇaṃ? Namucisenāvijayena pattamānasattaṃ. Iminā kāraṇena taṃ devatā namassantīti attho. Idāni taṃ kāraṇaṃ phalato dassetuṃ ‘‘tañhi tassa na passanti, yena maccuvasaṃ vaje’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yasmā tassa purisājaññassa paṇidhāya gavesantāpi devā aṇumattampi taṃ kāraṇaṃ na passanti, yena so maccuno maraṇassa vasaṃ vaje upagaccheyya. Tasmā taṃ visuddhidevā namassantīti.
第四部 五前兆经的注释巴利
4. Pañcapubbanimittasuttavaṇṇanā
83 83. 在第四经中,“何时”指在某个时候。“天”指化生天。因为天有三种:假名天、化生天、清净天。其中,假名天指国王、刹帝利这类;化生天指从四大王天开始往上的诸天;清净天指诸漏尽者。但这里指的是欲界天,所以说“天指化生天”。“从天身”指从天众之中,或从天的住处,也就是从天界。这里的“身”这个词表示群体或处所。“当死之法”就是死法,意思是因寿命耗尽或福报耗尽而面临死亡。巴利
83. Catutthe yadāti yasmiṃ kāle. Devoti upapattidevo. Tayo hi devā – sammutidevā, upapattidevā, visuddhidevāti. Tesu sammutidevā nāma rājāno khattiyā. Upapattidevā nāma cātumahārājikato paṭṭhāya taduparidevā. Visuddhidevā nāma khīṇāsavā. Idha pana kāmāvacaradevo adhippeto. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘devoti upapattidevo’’ti. Devakāyāti devasamūhato, devaṭṭhānato vā, devalokatoti attho. Samūhanivāsavācako hi ayaṃ kāyasaddo. Cavanadhammoti maraṇadhammo, āyukkhayena vā puññakkhayena vā upaṭṭhitamaraṇoti attho.
五种前兆出现:这位死期将至的天子,五种死亡的前兆生起,或者变得明显可见。花鬘枯萎:他所佩戴的花鬘,就像正午时分被扔在烈日下一样,枯萎了,光彩尽失。巴利
Pañcassapubbanimittāni pātubhavantīti assa upaṭṭhitamaraṇassa devaputtassa pañca maraṇassa pubbanimittāni uppajjanti, pakāsāni vā honti. Mālā milāyantīti tena piḷandhitamālā majjhanhikasamaye ātape khittā viya milātā vihatasobhā honti.
衣服会变脏:他所穿所披的衣服,原本像秋季晴空中渐渐升起的朝阳一样光芒灿烂,有着种种不同的色彩;可是就在那一瞬间,它们就像被扔进泥里踩踏过一样,失去光泽,变得污秽不堪。巴利
Vatthāni kilissantīti saradasamaye vigatavalāhake ākāse abbhussakkamānabālasūriyasadisappabhāni nānāvirāgavaṇṇāni tena nivatthapārutavatthāni taṃ khaṇaṃyeva kaddame khipitvā madditāni viya vihatappabhāni malināni honti.
汗水从两腋流出来:他的身体原本没有汗垢污秽,就像一颗天生纯净无瑕的宝石,又像一位技艺精湛的工匠所打造的金像;可就在那一刻,两腋同时有汗流不断淌下、渗出。而且不只是两腋,他全身各处都冒出汗珠,身体就像被一张珍珠网罩住了一样。巴利
Kacchehi sedā muccantīti suparisuddhajātimaṇi viya susikkhitasippācariyaracitasuvaṇṇapaṭimā viya ca pubbe sedamalajallikārahitasarīrassa tasmiṃ khaṇe ubhohi kacchehi sedadhārā sandanti paggharanti. Na kevalañca kacchehiyeva, sakalasarīratopi panassa sedajalakaṇṇikā muccatiyeva, yena āmuttamuttājālagavacchito viya tassa kāyo hoti.
身体出现丑陋之相:他从前一世结生开始,身体就随着自身的福报之力放光,照亮一由旬、两由旬,乃至整整十二由旬的范围,光辉闪耀,没有斑白、皱纹等缺陷,也不受寒冷和炎热的伤害,就像十六岁的天女,或像二十岁的天子。可就在那一刻,丑陋之相便侵入他那失去光明、失去威势的身体,并停驻下来。巴利
Kāye dubbaṇṇiyaṃ okkamatīti pubbe paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya yathānubhāvaṃ ekayojanaṃ dviyojanaṃ yāva dvādasayojanamattampi padesaṃ ābhāya pharitvā vijjotamāno kāyo hoti khaṇḍiccapāliccādivirahito, na sītaṃ na uṇhaṃ upaghātakaṃ, devadhītā soḷasavassuddesikā viya hoti, devaputto vīsativassuddesiko viya, taṃ khaṇaṃyeva nippabhe nitteje kāye virūpabhāvo anupavisati saṇṭhāti.
天人在自己的天座上不再感到快乐:他不再喜欢和天女们一起嬉戏游乐的天座,内心得不到愉悦。据说,按人间的算法,他再过七天就要死了,于是这些前兆就出现了。因为这些前兆的生起,他心想“我就要和这样的福报永别了”,被强烈的忧愁压垮。于是身体里生起极大的燥热,全身各处都流出汗来。这位长久以来没尝过苦的天人,受不了那种苦,有的人就哭喊着“我烧起来了!我烧起来了!”一边哭一边哀叹,到哪里都找不到一点滋味,嘴里不停地嘟囔、哀号,四处乱跑。有的人则提起正念,身体和言语都不表现出异样,但同样受不了与所爱分离的痛苦,内心煎熬地游荡着。巴利
Sake devo devāsane nābhiramatīti attano accharāgaṇehi saddhiṃ kīḷanaparicaraṇakadibbāsane na ramati, na cittassādaṃ labhati. Tassa kira manussagaṇanāya sattahi divasehi maraṇaṃ bhavissatīti imāni pubbanimittāni pātubhavanti. So tesaṃ uppattiyā ‘‘evarūpāya nāma sampattiyā vinā bhavissāmī’’ti balavasokābhibhūto hoti. Tenassa kāye mahāpariḷāho uppajjati, tena sabbato gattehi sedā muccanti. Cirataraṃ kālaṃ aparicitadukkho taṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto ekacco ‘‘dayhāmi dayhāmī’’ti kandanto paridevanto katthaci assādaṃ alabhanto vijappanto vilapanto tahiṃ tahiṃ āhiṇḍati. Ekacco satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā kāyavācāhi vikāraṃ akarontopi piyavippayogadukkhaṃ asahanto vihaññamāno vicarati.
这些死亡前兆,就像在人间,只有大福德的人——比如国王、大臣之类——才会出现流星坠落、大地震动、月食等征兆,并不是所有人都会遇到;同样,这些前兆也只出现在有大威力的天神身上。当这些前兆出现时,有些天神知道:“这些就是死亡的前兆。”但并不是所有天神都知道。其中,那些因为善业微薄而投生为天神的,就会害怕地想:“现在谁知道我会投生到哪里去呢?”而那些大福德的天神则想:“我曾大量布施,持守戒律,积聚了许多福德,死后一定会投生善趣。”所以他不害怕,也不动摇。这些前兆显现之后,天女们就带他进入欢喜园;在一切天界中,都有欢喜园。巴利
Imāni pana pubbanimittāni yathā loke mahāpuññānaṃ rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃyeva ukkāpātabhūmicālacandaggāhādīni nimittāni paññāyanti, na sabbesaṃ; evameva mahesakkhadevānaṃyeva paññāyati. Uppannāni ca tāni ‘‘imāni maraṇassa pubbanimittāni nāmā’’ti keci devā jānanti, na sabbe. Tattha yo mandena kusalakammena nibbatto, so ‘‘idāni ko jānāti, ‘kuhiṃ nibbattissāmī’’’ti bhāyati. Yo pana mahāpuñño, so ‘‘bahuṃ mayā dānaṃ dinnaṃ, sīlaṃ rakkhitaṃ, puññaṃ upacitaṃ, ito cutassa me sugatiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā’’ti na bhāyati na vikampati. Evaṃ upaṭṭhitapubbanimittaṃ pana taṃ gahetvā devatā nandanavanaṃ pavesenti sabbadevalokesu nandanavanaṃ atthiyeva.
“仁者”是称呼语。巴利
Tīhi vācāhi anumodentīti idāni vuccamānehi tīhi vacanehi anumodenti, modaṃ pamodaṃ uppādenti, assāsenti, abhivadanavasena vā taṃkhaṇānurūpaṃ pamodaṃ karonti. Keci pana ‘‘anumodentī’’ti padassa ‘‘ovadantī’’ti vadanti. Itoti devalokato. Bhoti ālapanaṃ. Sugatinti sundaragatiṃ, manussalokaṃ sandhāya vadanti. Gacchāti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena upehi.
世尊这样说完之后——当时那些天神对那位天子说了“贤者,从这里往善趣去吧”等等该说的话,世尊就照这样作了开示。那时,集会中坐着一位比丘,姓名不为人所知,却擅长把握前后文的关联。他心想:“世尊说这些善趣之类的话,都是笼统而说,意思还不清楚。我来让他把这些说得更明白些。”于是他就开口问:“尊者,这到底是什么意思呢?”等等。因为获得信等功德是投生天界的因,而人的身份正是天神们所公认的殊胜之处,所以世尊说:“比丘,人的身份就是天神们所说的往生善趣。”巴利
Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ tadā tehi devehi tassa ‘‘ito bho sugatiṃ gacchā’’tiādinā vattabbavacane bhagavatā vutte aññataro nāmagottena apākaṭo tassaṃ parisāyaṃ nisinno anusandhikusalo eko bhikkhu ‘‘ete sugatiādayo bhagavatā avisesato vuttā avibhūtā, handa te vibhūtatare kārāpessāmī’’ti etaṃ ‘‘kiṃnu kho, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Saddhādiguṇavisesapaṭilābhakāraṇato devūpapattihetuto ca manussattaṃ devānaṃ abhisammatanti āha ‘‘manussattaṃ kho bhikkhu devānaṃ sugatigamanasaṅkhāta’’nti.
被称为“往善趣”的意思是:正确地说、称赞、赞叹为“往善趣”。这里“得人身者”中的“得”是指向动作的,因此“获得”这个动作被指向,意思是信心的获得。“得人身”指生在人当中,或者已经达到人的状态。因为生在天界的天神大多数很难有机会听闻如来的说法,人则不是这样,所以说“得人身”。在如来所宣说的法与律中,也就是在世尊所教导、包含三种学处的教法当中。它因为不离法的缘故是“法”,又因为能随顺众生的根性调伏应当调伏的人而是“律”,所以叫“法与律”。或者因为具足依止而不离法,能调伏烦恼尘垢微薄的有情,所以叫“法与律”。或者纯粹以法来调伏,不用棍棒刀杖等手段,所以叫“法与律”。或者与法相应而调伏,所以叫“法与律”。或者为了法,也就是为了道果和涅槃而调伏,所以叫“法与律”。或者这种调伏是从大悲、一切知智等法而生起的,所以叫“法与律”。或者世尊本身就是法,是法的体现,是法的拥有者,他的调伏不是推理者所能及的,所以叫“法与律”。或者是在法当中,或者在道果这个应当成就的领域当中生起运作而调伏,所以叫“法与律”。在这法与律之中。巴利
Sugatigamanasaṅkhātanti ‘‘sugatigamana’’nti sammā kathitaṃ, vaṇṇitaṃ thomitanti attho. Yaṃ manussabhūtoti ettha yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, tena paṭilabhatīti ettha paṭilabhanakiriyā āmasīyati, yo saddhāpaṭilābhoti attho. Manussabhūtoti manussesu uppanno, manussabhāvaṃ vā patto. Yasmā devaloke uppannānaṃ tathāgatassa dhammadesanā yebhuyyena dullabhā savanāya, na tathā manussānaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘manussabhūto’’ti. Tathāgatappavedite dhammavinayeti tathāgatena bhagavatā desite sikkhattayasaṅgahe sāsane. Tañhi dhammato anapetattā dhammo ca, āsayānurūpaṃ vineyyānaṃ vinayanato vinayo cāti dhammavinayo, upanissayasampattiyā vā dhammato anapetattā dhammaṃ apparajakkhajātikaṃ vinetīti dhammavinayo. Dhammeneva vā vinayo, na daṇḍasatthehīti dhammavinayo, dhammayutto vā vinayoti dhammavinayo, dhammāya vā saha maggaphalanibbānāya vinayoti dhammavinayo, mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādidhammato vā pavatto vinayoti dhammavinayo. Dhammo vā bhagavā dhammabhūto dhammakāyo dhammassāmī, tassa dhammassa vinayo, na takkiyānanti dhammavinayo, dhamme vā maggaphale nipphādetabbavisayabhūte vā pavatto vinayoti dhammavinayoti vuccati. Tasmiṃ dhammavinaye.
“获得信心”是指通过“世尊善说此法”等说法,让信心生起来。因为,有信心的人在这个法和律当中,按照教导去修行,就能实现现世的利益、来世的利益以及最终的意义。所谓“被称为善得利”,意思是:就像获得金银、田地、房产等财物,能给众生带来受用的快乐,排除饥饿、口渴等痛苦,止息钱财匮乏,成为获得珍珠等宝物的原因,还能带来世间的延续;同样,世间和出世间的信心,也各自随其情况,带来世间和出世间的果报快乐,让以信心为先导而修行的人排除生、老等痛苦,止息功德的匮乏,成为获得念觉支等宝物的原因,还能带来世间的延续。正如这样说——巴利
Saddhaṃpaṭilabhatīti ‘‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo’’tiādinā saddhaṃ uppādeti. Saddho hi imasmiṃ dhammavinaye yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāno diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthe ārādhessati. Suladdhalābhasaṅkhātanti ettha yathā hiraññasuvaṇṇakhettavatthādilābho sattānaṃ upabhogasukhaṃ āvahati, khuppipāsādidukkhaṃ paṭibāhati, dhanadāliddiyaṃ vūpasameti, muttādiratanapaṭilābhahetu hoti, lokasantatiñca āvahati; evaṃ lokiyalokuttarā saddhāpi yathāsambhavaṃ lokiyalokuttaraṃ vipākasukhamāvahati, saddhādhurena paṭipannānaṃ jātijarādidukkhaṃ paṭibāhati, guṇadāliddiyaṃ vūpasameti, satisambojjhaṅgādiratanapaṭilābhahetu hoti, lokasantatiñca āvahati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
有信仰,具足戒行,拥有名声,财富充实;
他无论走到哪个地方,都会在那里受到敬奉。巴利
‘‘Saddho sīlena sampanno, yaso bhogasamappito; Yaṃ yaṃ padesaṃ bhajati, tattha tattheva pūjito’’ti. (dha. pa. 303);
应当这样理解:获得信心,就是真正得到了善利。而且,这种信心的获得会一直跟随修行者,不与他人共有,是一切成就的原因,也是获得世间金银等财富的原因。因为确实是有信心的人,才会去做布施等福德之事,从而得到种种上等美好的财物用具,并用这些来成就自己和别人的真实利益。可是对没有信心的人来说,那些财物用具只会带来损害,不论是在这一世还是未来世都是如此。因此也可以这样理解:信心就是真正得到了善利。正如:巴利
Evaṃ saddhāpaṭilābhassa suladdhalābhatā veditabbā. Yasmā panāyaṃ saddhāpaṭilābho anugāmiko anaññasādhāraṇo sabbasampattihetu, lokiyassa ca hiraññasuvaṇṇādidhanalābhassa kāraṇaṃ. Saddhoyeva hi dānādīni puññāni katvā uḷāruḷāravittūpakaraṇāni adhigacchati, tehi ca attano paresañca atthameva sampādeti. Assaddhassa pana tāni anatthāvahāni honti, idha ceva samparāye cāti, evampi saddhāya suladdhalābhatā veditabbā. Tathā hi –
信能备好旅途的资粮。巴利
‘‘Saddhā bandhati pātheyyaṃ’’. (Saṃ. ni. 1.79).
信是人的第二者。巴利
‘‘Saddhā dutiyā purisassa hotī’’ti ca. (Saṃ. ni. 1.36, 59).
在这世上,信是男子最好的财富。巴利
‘‘Saddhīdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’nti ca. (Saṃ. ni. 1.73; su. ni. 184).
信是大象的手。巴利
‘‘Saddhāhattho mahānāgo’’ti ca. (A. ni. 6.43; theragā. 694).
信是种子,苦行是雨水。巴利
‘‘Saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhī’’ti ca. (Saṃ. ni. 1.197; su. ni. 77).
比丘们,圣弟子是具信者。巴利
‘‘Saddhesiko, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako’’ti (a. ni. 7.67) ca.
依靠信仰,就能渡过瀑流。巴利
‘‘Saddhāya tarati ogha’’nti ca. (Saṃ. ni. 1.246) –
信在许多地方、以许多理由被赞叹。巴利
Anekesu ṭhānesu anekehi kāraṇehi saddhā saṃvaṇṇitā.
现在,为了说明那种信——依靠这种信,一个人在教法中被称作在诸善法上善得安住,并进入决定之道——所以说了“sā kho panassā”等话。其中,“assā”的意思是“这个人的”。“niviṭṭhā”是说已深深执取、已进入心相续。“mūlajātā”是说根已生起。那么,什么才是信的根呢?就是在可信之处,令净信生起的那种作意方法。此外,亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、法随法行,这四种入流支应当知道就是根。“patiṭṭhitā”是说由于证得圣道,以任何人都不可动摇的状态而安住。因此说“daḷhā asaṃhāriyā”。“daḷhā”是说坚固。“asaṃhāriyā”是说不能被任何人收缩、减少或除去。如是,那些诸天期盼他证得入流道,这样说道。他们确实希望这位圣者能享受自己天界的欲乐。因此说“ehi, deva, punappunaṃ”。巴利
Idāni yāya saddhāya sāsane kusaladhammesu suppatiṭṭhito nāma hoti niyāmokkantiyā, taṃ saddhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sā kho panassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha assāti imassa bhaveyyāti attho. Niviṭṭhāti abhiniviṭṭhā cittasantānaṃ anupaviṭṭhā. Mūlajātāti jātamūlā. Kiṃ pana saddhāya mūlaṃ nāma? Saddheyyavatthusmiṃ okappanahetubhūto upāyamanasikāro. Apica sappurisasevanā saddhammassavanaṃ yonisomanasikāro dhammānudhammappaṭipattīti cattāri sotāpattiyaṅgāni mūlāni veditabbāni. Patiṭṭhitāti ariyamaggādhigamena kenaci akampanīyabhāvena avaṭṭhitā. Tenevāha ‘‘daḷhā asaṃhāriyā’’ti. Daḷhāti thirā. Asaṃhāriyāti kenaci saṃharituṃ vā hāpetuṃ vā apanetuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyā. Iti te devā tassa sotāpattimaggasamadhigamaṃ āsīsantā evaṃ vadanti. Attano devaloke kāmasukhūpabhogārahameva hi ariyapuggalaṃ te icchanti. Tenāha ‘‘ehi, deva, punappuna’’nti.
在偈颂里,即使在福德耗尽而死亡的情况下,也是因为命根断绝才发生的,所以世尊说“因寿命耗尽而死去”。“Anumodataṃ”指正在随喜的那些人。“Manussānaṃ sahabyataṃ”指与人类共处,就是和人类在一起的状态。“Saha byeti”就是共处者,即一起活动的人,这种状态叫共处性。“Niviṭṭhassa”指如果安住在其中。“Yāvajīvaṃ”指只要生命还在延续,意思是直到般涅槃。巴利
Gāthāsu puññakkhayamaraṇampi jīvitindriyupacchedeneva hotīti āha ‘‘cavati āyusaṅkhayā’’ti. Anumodatanti anumodantānaṃ. Manussānaṃ sahabyatanti manussehi sahabhāvaṃ. Saha byetīti sahabyo, sahapavattanako, tassa bhāvo sahabyatā. Niviṭṭhassāti niviṭṭhā bhaveyya. Yāvajīvanti yāva jīvitappavattiyā, yāva parinibbānāti attho.
“无量”是指以恭敬、大量、殊胜、多次地行作,因而无可计量。“无依”是指远离烦恼之依,也就是极为清净、无垢的意思。然而,那些天人不喜欢广大善业,因为那会超越欲界,他们只喜欢欲界的功德,所以这里应当这样理解其含义:“从这个天界死后,转生到人间,到了懂事的年纪,舍弃一切身恶行等恶行,累积一切身善行等殊胜广大的善行,并依靠圣道生起信心吧。”不过,因为诸天也希望获得出世间法中的初道或第二道,不愿离开自己往生的天界,所以按照他们的情形,也应这样理解“无量”和“无依”这两个词的含义:通过断除能造成计量的、与邪见相应的粗显欲贪等烦恼,而成为无量;或者,通过舍断会从第七有中生起的蕴依、能产生该蕴依的造作之依,以及各道所应断的烦恼之依,使它们不再生起,因而依止于被称为无依的涅槃,所以叫无依。巴利
Appamāṇanti sakkaccaṃ bahuṃ uḷāraṃ bahukkhattuñca karaṇavasena pamāṇarahitaṃ. Nirūpadhinti kilesūpadhirahitaṃ, suvisuddhaṃ nimmalanti attho. Yasmā pana te devā mahaggatakusalaṃ na icchanti kāmalokasamatikkamanato, kāmāvacarapuññameva icchanti, tasmā evamettha attho veditabbo – ‘‘ito devalokato cuto manussesu uppajjitvā viññutaṃ patto kāyaduccaritādiṃ sabbaṃ duccaritaṃ pahāya kāyasucaritādiṃ sabbaṃ sucaritaṃ uḷāraṃ vipulaṃ upacinitvā ariyamaggena āgatasaddho bhavāhī’’ti. Yasmā pana lokuttaresu paṭhamamaggaṃ dutiyamaggampi vā icchanti attano devalokūpapattiyā anativattanato, tasmā tesampi vasena ‘‘appamāṇaṃ nirūpadhi’’ntipadānaṃ attho veditabbo – pamāṇakarānaṃ diṭṭhekaṭṭhaoḷārikakāmarāgādikilesānaṃ upacchedena appamāṇaṃ, sattamabhavato vā uppajjanārahassa khandhūpadhissa taṃnibbattakaabhisaṅkhārūpadhissa taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesūpadhissa ca pahānena tesaṃ anibbattanato nirupadhisaṅkhātanibbānasannissitattā ca nirupadhīti.
像这样,先说明了能彻底关闭恶趣之门的业之后,现在为了说明能带来天界成就的业,就说了“tato opadhikaṃ”等话。其中,“有依”(opadhika)是指以“依”为异熟,也就是能产生自身成就和财富成就的业。因为“依”(upadhi)指的就是自身。正如所说:“有些少量的恶业受持,因为被自身成就所阻碍,所以不会成熟。”(《分别论》810)五欲也算“依”。正如所说:“人因诸依而忧愁。”(《相应部》1.12;《经集》34)这里的词义是:苦和乐依止于此,所以叫“依”,也就是自身和五欲。以“依”为因,或者说应得“依”的,就叫“有依”,也就是福德。这种福德应当做得广大而殊胜。怎么做?通过布施。因为布施比起其他方式更容易实行,所以这样说。另外,说“通过布施”时,其实也包含了无畏施,并不只是指财物布施;也应该理解为包含了持戒。然而,因为那些天人一心希望阿修罗众减少、天众增满,所以诸天在指出方法时,用“也把其他凡人安置在正法和梵行中”这句话,来劝导人们行法施。“当知时”(yadā vidū):当诸天了知某位天人即将命终时,就以如前所说的悲悯心,出于想除去他痛苦的心意,这样随喜劝勉说:“天友,愿你一次又一次地投生到这个天众中来,来吧!”巴利
Evaṃ accantameva apāyadvārapidhāyakaṃ kammaṃ dassetvā idāni saggasampattinibbattakakammaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tato opadhika’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha opadhikanti upadhivepakkaṃ attabhāvasampattiyā ceva bhogasampattiyā ca nibbattakanti attho. Upadhīti hi attabhāvo vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘santekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni upadhisampattipaṭibāhitāni na vipaccantī’’ti (vibha. 810). Kāmaguṇāpi. Yathāha ‘‘upadhīhi narassa socanā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.12; su. ni. 34). Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – upadhīyati ettha sukhadukkhanti upadhi, attabhāvo kāmaguṇā ca. Upadhikaraṇaṃ sīlaṃ etassa, upadhiṃ vā arahatīti opadhikaṃ, puññaṃ, taṃ bahuṃ uḷāraṃ katvā. Kathaṃ? Dānena. Dānañhi itarehi sukaranti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Dānenāti vā padena abhayadānampi vuttaṃ, na āmisadānamevāti sīlassāpi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā pana te devā asurakāyahāniṃ ekanteneva devakāyapāripūriñca icchanti, tasmā tassa upāyaṃ dassentā ‘‘aññepi macce saddhamme, brahmacariye nivesayā’’ti dhammadāne niyojenti. Yadā vidūti yasmiṃ kāle devā devaṃ cavantaṃ vidū vijāneyyuṃ, tadā imāya yathāvuttāya anukampāya dukkhāpanayanakamyatāya ‘‘deva, ime devakāye punappunaṃ uppajjanavasena ehi āgacchāhī’’ti ca anumodentīti.
《利益众人经》的注释巴利
5. Bahujanahitasuttavaṇṇanā
84 84. 在第五经中,“世间”这个词:有三种世间——众生世间、行世间、器世间。其中,众生世间是依相续流转的、与根相系的色法、无色法及色无色法的聚合;器世间即地、山等种种差别;行世间则是前二者中的诸蕴。此处所指,是众生世间。因此,“世间”意指众生世间。其中并非天界,不是梵天界,而是人界。在人界中,也不是别的轮围世界,正是此轮围世界。其中亦非一切处所,而是如下所界定的中央之地:“东方有名为伽姜伽罗的城镇,其外为大萨罗树,自此之外为边地,以内为中央;东南方有名为萨罗婆提的河流,自此之外为边地,以内为中央;南方有名为塞达甘尼迦的城镇,自此之外为边地,以内为中央;西方有名为图那的婆罗门村,自此之外为边地,以内为中央;北方有名为优尸罗达阇的山,自此之外为边地,以内为中央”(《大品》259)。这片土地,长度三百由旬,宽度二百五十由旬,周围九百由旬,如来出现于此。不仅是如来,独觉佛、上首弟子、八十位大长老、佛母、佛父、转轮王,以及其他成为核心的婆罗门、居士,也都唯现于此地。不过,这里只是在如来这一项目下,才以“一切处”的方式适用这一规则;在其他项目中,则只是部分适用。巴利
84. Pañcame loketi ettha tayo lokā – sattaloko, saṅkhāraloko, okāsalokoti. Tesu indriyabaddhānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ rūpārūpadhammānañca santānavasena vattamānānaṃ samūho sattaloko, pathavīpabbatādibhedo okāsaloko, ubhayepi khandhā saṅkhāraloko. Tesu sattaloko idha adhippeto. Tasmā loketi sattaloke. Tatthāpi na devaloke, na brahmaloke, manussaloke. Manussalokepi na aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe, imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe. Tatrāpi na sabbaṭṭhānesu, ‘‘puratthimāya disāya gajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo, tassa aparena mahāsālā, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe; puratthimadakkhiṇāya disāya sallavatī nāma nadī, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe; dakkhiṇāya disāya setakaṇṇikaṃ nāma nigamo, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā , orato majjhe; pacchimāya disāya thūṇaṃ nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe; uttarāya disāya usiraddhajo nāma pabbato, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe’’ti (mahāva. 259) evaṃ paricchinne āyāmato tiyojanasate vitthārato aḍḍhateyyayojanasate parikkhepato navayojanasate majjhimadese uppajjati tathāgato. Na kevalañca tathāgatova paccekabuddhā aggasāvakā asītimahātherā buddhamātā buddhapitā cakkavattirājā aññe ca sārappattā brāhmaṇagahapatikā ettheva uppajjanti. Idha pana tathāgatavāreyeva sabbatthakavasena ayaṃ nayo labbhati, itaresu ekadesavasena.
“正在生起者生起”,不过这两个词都只是未说完的话。那些正在生起者,是为了多数人的利益而生起,不是由于其他原因——这里的含义应当这样理解。因为在这里,这样的词性特征不可能被另一种词性特征所驳倒。巴利
Uppajjamānāuppajjantīti idaṃ pana ubhayampi vippakatavacanameva, uppajjantā bahujanahitatthāya uppajjanti, na aññena kāraṇenāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Evarūpañhettha saddalakkhaṇaṃ na sakkā aññena saddalakkhaṇena paṭibāhituṃ.
另外,还要知道有这三种区分:正在生起、生起、已经生起。如来发大誓愿时,寻求成佛之法时,圆满诸波罗蜜时,行五大施时,行利益亲族之行时,把利益世间之行和利益成佛之行推到极致时,圆满波罗蜜后住在兜率天时,从那里降下而在最后一生中结生时,住在俗家时,出家时,修大精进时,智慧成熟后登上菩提座、击破魔军时,在初夜忆念宿住时,在中夜清净天眼时,在后夜把智慧投入缘起,以种种方式观照一切行,证入入流道,直到现证不来果——这整个阶段都叫“正在生起”。在阿罗汉道那一刹那,叫“生起”。而在阿罗汉果那一刹那,叫“已经生起”。因为诸佛不像声闻弟子那样,要按次第生起神变智等,而是和阿罗汉道同时,全部佛陀功德聚就已经一起来了。所以,他们因为一切应作都已成办,在阿罗汉果那一刹那,就叫“已经生起”。这里正是就阿罗汉果那一刹那而说“生起”,意思就是“已经成为已经生起”。巴利
Apica uppajjamāno nāma uppajjati nāma uppanno nāmāti ayaṃ pabhedo veditabbo. Tathāgato hi mahābhinīhāraṃ karonto, buddhakare dhamme pariyesanto, pāramiyo pūrento, pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajanto, ñātatthacariyaṃ caranto, lokatthacariyaṃ, buddhatthacariyaṃ koṭiṃ pāpento, pāramiyo pūretvā tusitabhavane tiṭṭhanto, tato otaritvā carimabhave paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanto, agāramajjhe vasanto, abhinikkhamanto, mahāpadhānaṃ padahanto, paripakkañāṇo bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha mārabalaṃ vidhamento paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranto, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhento, pacchimayāme paṭiccasamuppāde ñāṇaṃ otāretvā anekākāraṃ sabbasaṅkhāre sammasitvā sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭivijjhanto yāva anāgāmiphalaṃ sacchikarontopi uppajjamāno eva nāma, arahattamaggakkhaṇe uppajjati nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe pana uppanno nāma. Buddhānañhi sāvakānaṃ viya na paṭipāṭiyā iddhividhañāṇādīnaṃ uppādanakiccaṃ atthi, saheva pana arahattamaggena sakalopi buddhaguṇarāsi āgatova nāma hoti. Tasmā te nibbattasabbakiccattā arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppannā nāma honti. Idha arahattaphalakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vutto. Uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho.
即便是漏尽烦恼的声闻弟子,在他积累作为声闻菩提之因的功德资粮时,在修习前世以来的加行、前世以来的修行、去而复返的梵行时,在最后一生中结生时,逐渐成长到有智慧,看到轮回的过患,生起出家的意愿,把出家这件事做到圆满,圆满持戒等修行,受持头陀支并依之而行,精勤修习不睡眠,生起各种智慧,建立观智,乃至证得较低的道果——在这整个过程中,都叫做“正在生起”。在证得阿罗汉道的那一刹那,叫做“出生”。在证得阿罗汉果的那一刹那,则叫做“已出生”。至于有学圣者,从过去世的前世善根开始,一直到种姓智为止,都叫做“正在生起”。在初道的那一刹那,叫做“出生”。从初果那一刹那开始,叫做“已出生”。到这里,就已经解释了“比丘们,这三种人在世间出现时,就在世间出现”这句话的含义。巴利
Sāvakopi khīṇāsavo sāvakabodhiyā hetubhūte puññasambhāre sambharanto pubbayogaṃ pubbacariyaṃ gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūrento carimabhave nibbattanto anukkamena viññutaṃ patvā saṃsāre ādīnavaṃ disvā pabbajjāya cetayamāno pabbajjaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā sīlādīni paripūrento dhutadhamme samādāya vattamāno jāgariyaṃ anuyuñjanto ñāṇāni nibbattento vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā heṭṭhimamagge adhigacchantopi uppajjamāno eva nāma, arahattamaggakkhaṇe uppajjati nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe pana uppanno nāma. Sekkho pana pubbūpanissayato paṭṭhāya yāva gotrabhuñāṇā uppajjamāno nāma, paṭhamamaggakkhaṇe uppajjati nāma, paṭhamaphalakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya uppanno nāma. Ettāvatā ‘‘tayome, bhikkhave, puggalā loke uppajjamānā uppajjantī’’ti padānaṃ attho vutto hoti.
现在,在“为了多数人的利益”等语句中,“为了多数人的利益”是指为了大众的利益。“为了多数人的安乐”是指为了大众的安乐。“出于对世间的慈悯”是指因为对众生世间的慈悯。是对哪个众生世间呢?是对那些听了如来的说法后通达法、饮下不死甘露的众生。世尊开示《转法轮经》时,以阿若憍陈如为首的十八俱胝梵天都通达了法。这样一直到调伏游方者须跋陀罗为止,通达法的众生数量无法计算。在《大集会经》的说法、《吉祥经》、《小教诫罗睺罗经》、《平等心说法》这四个场合,获得现观的众生数量也无法界定。这就是对无量众生世间的慈悯。至于阿拉汉弟子与有学弟子出于对世间的慈悯而出现,则应当依于法将等人、法库执掌者等人所宣说的法而通达的众生,以及后来由大玛欣德长老等人所宣说的法而通达真理的众生,乃至今天以及未来依靠教法而安住于天界与解脱道中的众生,来阐明这个含义。巴利
Idāni bahujanahitāyātiādīsu bahujanahitāyāti mahājanassa hitatthāya. Bahujanasukhāyāti mahājanassa sukhatthāya. Lokānukampāyāti sattalokassa anukampaṃ paṭicca. Katarasattalokassāti ? Yo tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā dhammaṃ paṭivijjhati, amatapānaṃ pivati, tassa. Bhagavato hi dhammacakkappavattanasuttantadesanāya aññātakoṇḍaññappamukhā aṭṭhārasa brahmakoṭiyo dhammaṃ paṭivijjhiṃsu. Evaṃ yāva subhaddaparibbājakavinayanā dhammaṃ paṭividdhasattānaṃ gaṇanā natthi, mahāsamayasuttantadesanāyaṃ maṅgalasuttaṃ, cūḷarāhulovādaṃ, samacittadesanāyanti imesu catūsu ṭhānesu abhisamayaṃ pattasattānaṃ paricchedo natthi. Evametassa aparimāṇassa sattalokassa anukampāya. Sāvakassa pana arahato sekkhassa ca lokānukampāya uppatti dhammasenāpatiādīhi dhammabhaṇḍāgārikādīhi ca desitadesanāya paṭivedhappattasattānaṃ vasena, aparabhāge ca mahāmahindattherādīhi desitadesanāya paṭividdhasaccānaṃ vasena, yāvajjatanā ito paraṃ anāgate ca sāsanaṃ nissāya saggamokkhamaggesu patiṭṭhahantānaṃ vasenapi ayamattho vibhāvetabbo.
再者,“为了多数人的利益”是指为了大众的利益,也就是通过他们的智慧成就,来宣说对今生和来世都有利的事。“为了多数人的安乐”是指为了大众的安乐,也就是通过成就布施,给予他们生活用具带来的安乐。“出于对世间的慈悯”是指为了慈悯世间,也就是通过成就慈与悲,像父母保护、守护孩子一样保护、守护世间。“为了人天的利益、福祉、安乐”:这里用“人天”来代表,特指那些有能力、可被教化的众生。在第一遍说明中,显示如来是为了让他们证得涅槃的道与果而出现于世间。而在第二、第三遍说明中,则应当分别联系阿拉汉和有学来理解。其中,“为了利益”这个词,是用来说明为了究竟的利益,也就是涅槃。“为了福祉”,是用来说明为了那能证得涅槃的道;因为除了能证得涅槃的道之外,再没有更高的福祉了。“为了安乐”,是用来说明为了体验果定的安乐,因为再没有比这更高的安乐了。确实有这样的说法:“这个定当下带来安乐,未来也结出安乐的果报。”巴利
Apica bahujanahitāyāti bahujanassa hitatthāya, nesaṃ paññāsampattiyā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikahitūpadesakoti. Bahujanasukhāyāti bahujanassa sukhatthāya, cāgasampattiyā upakaraṇasukhasampadāyakoti. Lokānukampāyāti lokassa anukampanatthāya, mettākaruṇāsampattiyā mātāpitaro viya lokassa rakkhitā gopitāti. Atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānanti idha devamanussaggahaṇena bhabbapuggale veneyyasatte eva gahetvā tesaṃ nibbānamaggaphalādhigamāya tathāgatassa uppatti dassitā paṭhamavāre, dutiyatatiyavāresu pana arahato sekkhassa ca vasena yojetabbaṃ. Tattha atthāyāti iminā paramatthāya, nibbānāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Hitāyāti taṃsampāpakamaggatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nibbānasampāpakamaggato hi uttariṃ hitaṃ nāma natthi. Sukhāyāti phalasamāpattisukhatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti, tato uttari sukhābhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’’ti (dī. ni. 3.355; a. ni. 5.27; vibha. 804).
“如来”等词的含义,前面已经讲过了。在“明行足”等词当中,三种明是依照《怖骇经》(《中部》1.34 等)里所说的方法,六种明是按六神通来说的,八种明则见于《阿摩昼经》。以这些明,加上戒律防护等十五种行德,完全具足、成就了这些不共凡夫的功德,就是“明行足”。因为前往的方式善妙、已到达殊胜之处、正确地前往、正确地宣说,所以是“善逝”。因为以一切方式了知世间,所以是“世间解”。没有任何人比他更超越,所以是“无上者”。能引导、调伏那些应当被调伏、堪受教化的众生,所以是“调御丈夫”。能随顺时机,以现世利益、来世利益和究竟利益来教导,所以是“天人师”。对一切应当了知之法,以一切方式依自觉之智而觉悟,所以是“佛陀”。这里只是简要的解释,详细的解释应当从《清净道论》中去了解。巴利
Tathāgatotiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho heṭṭhā vutto. Vijjācaraṇasampannotiādīsu tissopi vijjā bhayabherave (ma. ni. 1.34 ādayo) āgatanayena, chapi vijjā chaḷabhiññāvasena, aṭṭhapi vijjā ambaṭṭhasutte āgatāti vijjāhi, sīlasaṃvarādīhi, pannarasahi caraṇadhammehi ca, anaññasādhāraṇehi sampanno samannāgatoti vijjācaraṇasampanno. Sobhanagamanattā, sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā, sammā gatattā, sammā gadattā ca sugato. Sabbathā viditalokattā lokavidū. Natthi etassa uttaroti anuttaro. Purisadamme purisaveneyye sāreti vinetīti purisadammasārathi. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ anusāsatīti satthā. Sabbassāpi neyyassa sabbappakārena sayambhuñāṇena buddhattā buddhoti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggato (visuddhi. 1.132-133) gahetabbo.
他宣说法,开头善……中间省略……结尾善。这位世尊是因为怜悯众生,即使舍弃了无上的远离之乐,也仍来宣说法。而且无论他说得多还是少,都同样展现出开头善、中间善、结尾善的样子。怎么展现呢?即使只是一首偈颂,因为法整体上都是美好的,所以第一句是开头善,第二、三句是中间善,最后一句是结尾善。一部主题连贯的经,序分是开头善,结语是结尾善,其余部分是中间善。一部由多个连贯主题组成的经,第一个主题是开头善,最后一个主题是结尾善,其余主题是中间善。或者也可以说,佛陀的全部教法:以作为其自身内容的戒为开头善,以止、观、道、果为中间善,以涅槃为结尾善。或者以戒和定为开头善,以观和道为中间善,以果和涅槃为结尾善。或者以佛陀的圆满觉悟为开头善,以法的纯正法性为中间善,以僧团的良好修行为结尾善。或者从听闻之后如实修行、应当证得的角度来说,正等觉是开头善,辟支菩提是中间善,声闻菩提是结尾善。再者,这部法在听闻时,因为能镇伏五盖,单凭听闻就能带来善好,所以是开头善;在修行时,因为能带来止与观的安乐,单凭修行就能带来安乐,所以是中间善;这样修行之后,当修行之果完成、证得如如不动的状态时,因为能带来那种境界,单凭修行之果也能带来善好,所以是结尾善。又因为此法源自世尊,所以以来源清净为开头善,以义理清净为中间善,以作用清净为结尾善。因此说:“他宣说法,开头善……中间省略……结尾善。”巴利
So dhammaṃ deseti ādi…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññaṃ paṭicca hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti. Kathaṃ? Ekagāthāpi hi samantabhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapādena ādikalyāṇā, dutiyatatiyehi majjhekalyāṇā, pacchimena pariyosānakalyāṇā. Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ nidānena ādikalyāṇaṃ, nigamanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesena majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Nānānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ paṭhamena anusandhinā ādikalyāṇaṃ, pacchimena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesehi majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Sakalopi vā sāsanadhammo attano atthabhūtena sīlena ādikalyāṇo, samathavipassanāmaggaphalehi majjhekalyāṇo, nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo. Sīlasamādhīhi vā ādikalyāṇo, vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo, phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo. Buddhasubuddhatāya vā ādikalyāṇo, dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇo, saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipannena adhigantabbāya abhisambodhiyā vā ādikalyāṇo, paccekabodhiyā majjhekalyāṇo, sāvakabodhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Suyyamāno cesa nīvaraṇavikkhambhanato savanenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti ādikalyāṇo, paṭipajjiyamāno samathavipassanāsukhāvahanato paṭipattiyāpi sukhameva āvahatīti majjhekalyāṇo, tathāpaṭipanno ca paṭipattiphale niṭṭhite tādibhāvāvahanato paṭipattiphalenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti pariyosānakalyāṇo. Nāthappabhavattā ca pabhavasuddhiyā ādikalyāṇo, atthasuddhiyā majjhekalyāṇo, kiccasuddhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti ādi…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti.
世尊在说法、阐明教法与梵行、道之梵行时,以种种方式加以开示,那样的法相应于义理的圆满,所以是“有义”;相应于文句的圆满,所以是“有文”。由于具备宣示、明示、开显、分别、显明,并把义理与词句结合起来,所以是“有义”;由于具备字母、词、文句、语法、语源、解说等各方面的圆满,所以是“有文”。又因为义理甚深和通达甚深,所以是“有义”;因为法甚深和说法甚深,所以是“有文”。或者,因为属于义无碍解和辩无碍解的范畴,所以是“有义”;因为属于法无碍解和词无碍解的范畴,所以是“有文”。因为智者能领会,能让审察的人产生净信,所以是“有义”;因为值得信受,能让普通人产生净信,所以是“有文”。因为意趣甚深,所以是“有义”;因为词句浅显,所以是“有文”。因为没有需要增添的,以整体完全圆满,所以是“完全圆满”;因为没有需要删减的,以毫无过失,所以是“完全清净”。再者,从修行体证上说得清楚,所以是“有义”;从教理学习上说得清楚,所以是“有文”。因为戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见这五法蕴圆满,所以是“圆满”;因为远离烦恼杂染、为了度脱生死而运作、不贪著世间利养,所以是“清净”。因为含摄三学,是殊胜的梵行者所应行持的,也是他们的行为,所以是“梵行”。因此说“有义、有文……阐明”。第一,因为按次第计数,也因为在一切世间最为上首,所以是第一人。巴利
Yaṃ pana bhagavā dhammaṃ desento sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, nānānayehi dīpeti, taṃ yathānurūpaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Saṅkāsana, pakāsana, vivaraṇa, vibhajana, uttānīkaraṇa paññattiatthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ, atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi vā sātthaṃ, dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjanaṃ. Atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato vā sātthaṃ, dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjanaṃ. Paṇḍitavedanīyato parikkhakajanappasādakanti sātthaṃ, saddheyyato lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjanaṃ. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthaṃ, uttānapadato sabyañjanaṃ. Upanetabbassa abhāvato sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvena kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ, apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosabhāvena parisuddhaṃ, apica paṭipattiyā adhigamabyattito sātthaṃ, pariyattiyā āgamabyattito sabyañjanaṃ, sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhapāripūriyā paripuṇṇaṃ, nirupakkilesato nittharaṇatthāya pavattito lokāmisanirapekkhato ca parisuddhaṃ, sikkhattayapariggahitattā brahmabhūtehi seṭṭhehi caritabbato tesaṃ cariyabhāvato ca brahmacariyaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ…pe… pakāsetī’’ti vuccati. Paṭhamoti gaṇanānupubbato sabbalokuttamabhāvato ca paṭhamo puggalo.
是那位导师的弟子:意思是,他是在那位具有上述功德的大师——正等正觉者——说法时听法而生的弟子,像法将一样,而不是像富兰那等人那样,仅仅凭口头自称就算作导师的弟子。行道者:因为通过被称为“行道”的圣道,而生于圣洁的家族,所以叫行道者;意思是还没有完成修行任务、正在修行的人。多闻:对于经、应颂等教法,他广泛听闻过,所以叫多闻。戒行具足:他既具足巴帝摩卡防护等戒,又具备阿兰若住等头陀功德,圆满具足、完全拥有,所以叫戒行具足。这样,世尊表明:所谓怜悯世间,就是出于利益众生的心意而说法,而这正是系于这三类人。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Tasseva satthu sāvakoti tasseva yathāvuttaguṇassa satthu sammāsambuddhassa dhammadesanāya savanante jāto dhammasenāpatisadiso sāvako, na pūraṇādi viya paṭiññāmattena satthu sāvako. Pāṭipadoti paṭipadāsaṅkhātena ariyamaggena ariyāya jātiyā jāto bhavoti pāṭipado, aniṭṭhitapaṭipattikicco paṭipajjamānoti attho. Suttageyyādi pariyattidhammo bahuṃ suto etenāti bahussuto. Pātimokkhasaṃvarādisīlena ceva āraññikaṅgādidhutaṅgavatehi ca upapanno sampanno samannāgatoti sīlavatūpapanno. Iti bhagavā ‘‘lokānukampā nāma hitajjhāsayena dhammadesanā, sā ca imesu eva tīsu puggalesu paṭibaddhā’’ti dasseti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在偈颂中,“他的追随者”是指:通过跟随那位导师的修行和教法,而成为他的追随者、由他而生。因为驱散了无明的黑暗,以被称为“法光”的光明照亮自己和他人相续,所以称为“放光者”。“宣说正法”就是讲说四圣谛之法。“开启”就是打开。“不死涅槃之门”就是圣道。“从诸轭中”是指从欲轭等束缚中。“由那位大商主”是指由那位引导应受教化的商队、帮助众生度过生死旷野的大商主——世尊。“沿着善说的道路前进”是指他们遵循那位正说者所善说的圣道,依照他的教导而行。“就在此处”是指在今生今世这个现有的有身上。巴利
Gāthāsu tassanvayoti tasseva satthu paṭipattiyā dhammadesanāya ca anugamanena tassanvayo anujāto. Avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā saparasantānesu dhammālokasaṅkhātāya pabhāya karaṇato pabhaṅkarā. Dhammamudīrayantāti catusaccadhammaṃ kathentā. Apāpurantīti ugghāṭenti. Amatassa nibbānassa. Dvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ. Yogāti kāmayogādito. Satthavāhenāti veneyyasatthavāhanato bhavakantāranittharaṇato satthavāho, bhagavā, tena satthavāhena. Sudesitaṃ maggamanukkamantīti tena sammā desitaṃ ariyamaggaṃ tassa desanānusārena anugacchanti paṭipajjanti. Idhevāti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
第六不净随观经的注释巴利
6. Asubhānupassīsuttavaṇṇanā
85 第六经中,“不净随观者”的意思是:你们要观察身体中的不净,观察不净的相状,一方面按三十二种身体成分来观察,另一方面把在肿胀尸体等上所取之相拿来对照这个身体,这样成为不净随观者而安住。“入出息念”的意思是:对入出息保持念,也就是以入出息为所缘而生起的念,是执持吸气和呼气的念。因为《无碍解道》中这样说:“āna是入息,不是出息;pāna是出息,不是入息”等等。巴利
85. Chaṭṭhe asubhānupassīti asubhaṃ anupassantā dvattiṃsākāravasena ceva uddhumātakādīsu gahitanimittassa upasaṃharaṇavasena ca kāyasmiṃ asubhaṃ asubhākāraṃ anupassakā hutvā viharatha. Ānāpānassatīti ānāpāne sati, taṃ ārabbha pavattā sati, assāsapassāsapariggāhikā satīti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ānanti assāso, no passāso. Pānanti passāso, no assāso’’tiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.160).
Vo就是你们的。内在在这里指的是所缘的内在。面前就是正对着面前。善安立就是好好地安立。这段话的意思是:愿你们的入出息念,好好地安立在业处的面前。或者,面前的另一种解释是摄持与出离。因为在《无碍解道》中这样说:pari是摄持的意思,mukha是出离的意思,sati是安立的意思,因此称为面前念。应当知道,这里展示的就是具备四念处、细分为十六种行相的入出息念业处的修习方法。巴利
Voti tumhākaṃ. Ajjhattanti idha gocarajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Parimukhanti abhimukhaṃ. Sūpaṭṭhitāti suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ānāpānassati ca tumhākaṃ kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitā hotūti. Atha vā parimukhanti pariggahitaniyyānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ – ‘‘parīti pariggahaṭṭho, mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho , satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho, tena vuccati parimukhaṃ sati’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.164). Iminā catusatipaṭṭhānasoḷasappabhedā ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānabhāvanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbā.
就这样,先简要地为贪行者和寻行者指出了适合他们的修行方法:通过不净作意和身随观来修止业处和观业处。现在,为了单独开示纯粹的观业处,世尊说:“你们应当安住在一切行皆无常的随观中。”在这里,要了解四组概念:无常、无常相、无常随观、无常随观者。五蕴因为存在之后又消失,因为具有生起和坏灭的性质,因为只是暂时存在,因为否定了恒常性,所以称为“无常”。那种存在之后又消失的行相,称为“无常相”。以这个无常相为所缘而生起的观,就是“无常随观”。以“无常”这样观照的人,就是“无常随观者”。在这里,十一种不净的论述应当详细说明,修到初禅为止;以十六事为基础的入出息念论述,修到第四禅为止;以及观的相关论述——这些在《清净道论》中已经全面阐述过了,所以应当依照那里所说的来理解。巴利
Evaṃ saṅkhepeneva rāgacaritavitakkacaritānaṃ sappāyaṃ paṭikūlamanasikārakāyānupassanāvasena samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānañca upadisitvā idāni suddhavipassanākammaṭṭhānameva dassento ‘‘sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccānupassino viharathā’’ti āha. Tattha aniccaṃ, aniccalakkhaṇaṃ, aniccānupassanā, aniccānupassīti idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Hutvā, abhāvato, udayabbayayogato, tāvakālikato, niccapaṭikkhepato ca khandhapañcakaṃ aniccaṃ nāma. Tassa yo hutvā abhāvākāro, taṃ aniccalakkhaṇaṃ nāma. Taṃ ārabbha pavattā vipassanā aniccānupassanā. Taṃ aniccanti vipassako aniccānupassī. Ettha ca ekādasavidhā asubhakathā paṭhamajjhānaṃ pāpetvā, soḷasavatthukā ca ānāpānakathā catutthajjhānaṃ pāpetvā, vipassanākathā ca vitthārato vattabbā, sā pana sabbākārato visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.737-740) kathitāti tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
现在,为了说明通过不净随观等修行应当实现的各种殊胜果报,说了“于不净随观者”等话。其中,“于净界”指的是净相,也就是清净的状态。“欲贪随眠”指的是能在净所缘上生起的欲贪随眠。那些修不净随观的人,取头发等(身体部分)或膨胀的尸体等作为不净相,在此基础上证得初禅,再以初禅作为基础来建立观禅,然后通过所证得的不还道将其断除,也就是彻底根除。这个道理确实说过:“应当修习不净,为了断除欲贪。”“外部的”是指因为以外在事物为所依、因为不带来利益,所以是外在的、处于外部的。“寻思之依止”是指诸如欲寻思等邪寻思。那些未被断除的寻思,随依止而行,当因缘和合时便会生起,因此称为寻思之依止。这里,欲寻思已被欲贪一词所摄,因此应当了知,所说的正是其余那些寻思。“属于损恼方面的”是指属于苦的、能产生欲愿损恼的。它们不存在,即它们被断除。害寻思、恼害寻思、亲里寻思、国土寻思、不死寻思、与不轻蔑相联系的寻思、与利养恭敬名声相联系的寻思、与悲悯他人相联系的寻思,这八种,加上欲寻思,共九种大寻思,在入出息念定以及依止于它的观禅的前分阶段被镇伏。以它为基础,通过所证得的圣道,随其所应无余断除。这也说过:“应当修习入出息念,为了切断寻思。”巴利
Idāni asubhānupassanādīhi nipphādetabbaṃ phalavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘asubhānupassīna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha subhāya dhātuyāti subhabhāve, subhanimitteti attho. Rāgānusayoti subhārammaṇe uppajjanāraho kāmarāgānusayo. So kesādīsu uddhumātakādīsu vā asubhānupassīnaṃ asubhanimittaṃ gahetvā tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā taṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā adhigatena anāgāmimaggena pahīyati, sabbaso samucchindīyatīti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘asubhā bhāvetabbā kāmarāgassa pahānāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.3; udā. 31). Bāhirāti bahiddhāvatthukattā anatthāvahattā ca bāhirā bahibhūtā. Vitakkāsayāti kāmasaṅkappādimicchāvitakkā. Te hi appahīnā āsayānugatā sati paccayasamavāye uppajjanato vitakkāsayāti vuttā. Kāmavitakko cettha kāmarāgaggahaṇena gahito evāti tadavasesā vitakkā eva vuttāti veditabbā. Vighātapakkhikāti dukkhabhāgiyā, icchāvighātanibbattanakā vā. Te na hontīti te pahīyanti. Byāpādavitakko, vihiṃsāvitakko, ñātivitakko, janapadavitakko, amarāvitakko, anavaññattipaṭisaṃyutto vitakko, lābhasakkārasilokapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko, parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakkoti aṭṭha, kāmavitakkena saddhiṃ navavidhā mahāvitakkā ānāpānassatisamādhinā tannissitāya ca vipassanāya pubbabhāge vikkhambhitā. Taṃ pādakaṃ katvā adhigatena ariyamaggena yathārahaṃ anavasesato pahīyanti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.3; udā. 31).
无明被彻底断除,指的是那种遮蔽诸法真实本质、带来一切祸害、作为整个轮回之苦根源的无明。当人安住在无常随观中修行时,这种无明就被彻底斩断。据说,这是世尊针对一位从无常行相出起、修干观而漏尽的阿拉汉来说的。这段话的简要含义是:对于在欲界、色界、无色界三界一切行法中,从无常等角度确立观照、修习观智的人,当“无常”的观智持续生起,而趋向出起的观智与圣道衔接时,阿拉汉道便次第生起。对这些安住在无常随观中的人来说,无明被无余地断除,阿拉汉道的智慧随之生起。“安住在无常随观中”这句话,是因为无常相在他们心中非常明显,或者因为无常相是把握另外两个相(苦、无我)的方法,才这样说的,并不是说他们只随观无常这一个相而已。经中确实这样说过:“凡是无常的,就是苦;凡是苦的,就是无我。”还有另外一段经文说:“弥醯,对于已生起无常想的人,无我想便能安立;具足无我想的人,便能彻底拔除我慢。”巴利
Yā avijjā, sā pahīyatīti yā saccasabhāvapaṭicchādinī sabbānatthakārī sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa mūlabhūtā avijjā, sā aniccānupassīnaṃ viharataṃ samucchijjati. Idaṃ kira bhagavatā aniccākārato vuṭṭhitassa sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – tebhūmakesu sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccādito sammasanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā vipassantānaṃ yadā aniccanti pavattamānā vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanā maggena ghaṭīyati, anukkamena arahattamaggo uppajjati, tesaṃ aniccānupassīnaṃ viharataṃ avijjā anavasesato pahīyati, arahattamaggavijjā uppajjatīti. Aniccānupassīnaṃ viharatanti idaṃ aniccalakkhaṇassa tesaṃ pākaṭabhāvato itarassa lakkhaṇadvayassa gahaṇe upāyabhāvato vā vuttaṃ, na pana ekasseva lakkhaṇassa anupassitabbato. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15). Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘aniccasaññino hi, meghiya, anattasaññā saṇṭhāti, anattasaññī asmimānasamugghātaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti.
在这些偈颂中,“于入出息具念”是指:对入出息之相,一次又一次地保持正念,也就是正念现前的意思。“他们看见”是指:以漏尽智之眼,看见诸行寂灭的涅槃。“一切时中热诚”是指:不中途停歇,在不净随观等业处上持续不断地热诚、精勤相应;正因为如此,无论他是以何种方式精勤,或是已以正性决定而确定,他就在那一切诸行寂灭的涅槃中,通过阿拉汉果的解脱而获得解脱。其余部分正如前面所说的那样。巴利
Gāthāsu ānāpāne paṭissatoti ānāpānanimittasmiṃ paṭi paṭi sato, upaṭṭhitassatīti attho. Passanti āsavakkhayañāṇacakkhunā saṅkhārūpasamaṃ nibbānaṃ passanto. Ātāpī sabbadāti antarāvosānaṃ anāpajjitvā asubhānupassanādīsu satataṃ ātāpī yuttappayutto, tato eva yato vāyamamāno, niyato vā sammattaniyāmena tattha sabbasaṅkhārasamathe nibbāne arahattaphalavimuttiyā vimuccati. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第七 法随法行经的注释巴利
7. Dhammānudhammapaṭipannasuttavaṇṇanā
86 86. 在第七经中,“法随法行者”这里,“法”指的是九种出世间法。那个法的“随法”,就是戒清净等属于前行阶段的修行法。为了证得那个法随法而正在修行的人,就是“法随法行者”。“这成为随法”的意思是:这成为相称的、恰当的体性。“可记说”的意思是:可以用来讲说。“法随法行者”中的“者”表示行为主体。这段话的意思是:凭借某种随法而修习那个法随法,当他被称作“法随法行者”时,就是正确地称说,不会因此被智者们呵责。或者,“者”是指向动作的,由此显示:“所谓法随法行者,就是这位比丘:他唯说法,唯思惟法,当两者都没有时,便安住于观舍。如此之‘者’,正是恰当的因、契合的理由,正适合这种称说。”“正说法者唯应说法”的意思是:正在开示的人,只应讲说如十论事那样的法,不应讲说与之相违的多欲等非法。这其实已经说过了。巴利
86. Sattame dhammānudhammapaṭipannassāti ettha dhammo nāma navavidho lokuttaradhammo, tassa dhammassa anudhammo sīlavisuddhiādi pubbabhāgapaṭipadādhammo, taṃ dhammānudhammaṃ paṭipannassa adhigantuṃ paṭipajjamānassa. Ayamanudhammo hotīti ayaṃ anucchavikasabhāvo patirūpasabhāvo hoti. Veyyākaraṇāyāti kathanāya. Dhammānudhammapaṭipannoyanti yanti karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yena anudhammena taṃ dhammānudhammaṃ paṭipannoti byākaramāno sammadeva byākaronto nāma siyā, na tatonidānaṃ viññūhi garahitabbo siyāti. Yanti vā kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘yadidaṃ dhammasseva bhāsanaṃ, dhammavitakkasseva ca vitakkanaṃ tadubhayābhāve ñāṇupekkhāya, ayaṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipannassa bhikkhuno tathārūpo ayanti kathanāyānurūpahetu anucchavikakāraṇaṃ. Bhāsamāno dhammaṃyeva bhāseyyāti kathento ce dasakathāvatthudhammaṃyeva katheyya, na tappaṭipakkhamahicchatādiadhammaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
有一种谈论能削减烦恼,有助于打开心扉,完全导向厌离、离欲、灭尽、寂静、证智、正觉、涅槃。具体来说就是:少欲论、知足论、远离论、不交际论、发勤精进论、戒论、定论、慧论、解脱论、解脱智见论。对于这样的谈论,他能随意获得,容易获得,毫不费力地获得。巴利
‘‘Yāyaṃ kathā abhisallekhikā cetovivaraṇasappāyā ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati. Seyyathidaṃ – appicchakathā, santuṭṭhikathā, pavivekakathā, asaṃsaggakathā, vīriyārambhakathā, sīlakathā, samādhikathā, paññākathā, vimuttikathā, vimuttiñāṇadassanakathā , evarūpāya kathāya nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī’’ti (a. ni. 9.3; udā. 31).
只有真正得到这种能削减烦恼的谈论的人,才会去说那样的法。由此就显示了善知识具备的成就。巴利
Abhisallekhikāya kathāya lābhī eva hi taṃ bhāseyya. Etena kalyāṇamittasampadā dassitā.
“法寻思”是指:当人思维那不离于法的出离寻等,心想“我要圆满戒等修持”,他的精进就会一层比一层更加增长。然而这种寻思应当这样理解:它避开对戒等无益的法,以培养有益之法的方式,脱离退分,也不停留在住分,而是被引向殊胜分和通达分,如此以种种差别而运作。“不思维非法寻”:意思是不要思维欲寻。“或者,所谓此两者”:这里说的两者,就是为了利益他人而说法,以及为了利益自己而思维法。或者,把这两者都舍离、不实行、不作。“成为舍者”:意思是在那样的修行方式中保持中立,只是随顺增长止观而安住;或者在止的修习上成为舍者之后,专精于观而安住。即使策励了观,在观中也依行舍智而成为舍者;只要观智还没有与圣道衔接,他就让心保持锐利、勇健、明净地运作,像这样具念、正知而安住。巴利
Dhammavitakkanti nekkhammavitakkādiṃ dhammato anapetaṃ vitakkayato ‘‘sīlādipaṭipadaṃ paripūressāmī’’ti uparūpari ussāho abhivaḍḍhissati. So pana vitakko sīlādīnaṃ anupakāradhamme vajjetvā upakāradhamme anubrūhanavasena hānabhāgiyabhāvaṃ apanetvā ṭhitibhāgiyabhāvepi aṭṭhatvā visesabhāgiyataṃ nibbedhabhāgiyatañca pāpanavasena pavattiyā anekappabhedo veditabbo. No adhammavitakkanti kāmavitakkaṃ no vitakkeyyāti attho. Tadubhayaṃ vā panāti yadetaṃ paresaṃ anuggahaṇatthaṃ dhammabhāsanaṃ attano anuggahaṇatthaṃ dhammavitakkanañca vuttaṃ. Atha vā pana taṃ ubhayaṃ abhinivajjetvā appaṭipajjitvā akatvā. Upekkhakoti tathāpaṭipattiyaṃ udāsīno samathavipassanābhāvanameva anubrūhanto vihareyya, samathapaṭipattiyaṃ upekkhako hutvā vipassanāyameva kammaṃ karonto vihareyya. Vipassanampi ussukkāpetvā tatthapi saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇavasena upekkhako yāva vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggena ghaṭīyati, tāva yathā taṃ tikkhaṃ sūraṃ pasannaṃ hutvā vahati, tathā vihareyya sato sampajānoti.
在偈颂中,止与观这两种法因为是应当修习的对象,所以成了他心中的园林,因此他被称为“法园者”。他就在这法当中感到喜悦,所以叫“法喜者”。由于他反复地思惟这法,所以叫“随念法”——意思是把心转向这法、作意这法。“随念”就是指:依靠一再修习的力量,不断地随念那法本身。或者也可以这样理解:安住在解脱处的名目下,以为他人说法的方式,把戒等法作为应当修习的园林,所以他是“法园者”。同样,他在那些戒等法当中感到喜悦、欢喜,所以叫“法喜者”。他寻求那些戒等法的趣向,不给欲寻等机会,只反复思惟出离寻等法,所以叫“随念法”。或者,他对那两者以粗显的方式观察后,不作舍置,只依靠一再修习的力量随念止与观这两种法,以不断增长的方式使其现前。“正法”:在三十七菩提分法和九种出世间法上无有退失,不久便能证得,这就是此句的义理。巴利
Gāthāsu samathavipassanādhammo āramitabbaṭṭhena ārāmo etassāti dhammārāmo. Tasmiṃyeva dhamme ratoti dhammarato. Tasseva dhammassa punappunaṃ vicintanato dhammaṃ anuvicintayaṃ taṃ dhammaṃ āvajjento, manasi karontoti attho. Anussaranti tameva dhammaṃ uparūparibhāvanāvasena anussaranto. Atha vā vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā paresaṃ desanāvasena sīlādidhammo āramitabbaṭṭhena ārāmo etassāti dhammārāmo. Tatheva tasmiṃ dhamme rato abhiratoti dhammarato. Tesaṃyeva sīlādidhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesanto kāmavitakkādīnaṃ okāsaṃ adatvā nekkhammasaṅkappādidhammaṃyeva anuvicintanato dhammaṃ anuvicintayaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ vā pana oḷārikato dahanto ajjhupekkhitvā samathavipassanādhammameva uparūpari bhāvanāvasena anussaranto anubrūhanavasena pavattento. Saddhammāti sattatiṃsappabhedā bodhipakkhiyadhammā navavidhalokuttaradhammā ca na parihāyati, na cirasseva taṃ adhigacchatīti attho.
现在,为了说明他随念的方法,经文说了“或行”等话。其中,“或行”是指为了托钵而行走,或者为了经行而行走。“或站”就是站着,“或坐”就是坐着,“或卧”就是躺着。这样涵盖了行、住、坐、卧四种姿势。“于内,调伏其心”的意思是:在前面所说的禅修业处所缘这个内在对象上,通过止息贪等烦恼、舍弃它们的方式,来调伏自己的心。“他证得寂静”就是:他达到了最究竟的寂静——涅槃本身。巴利
Idāni tassa anussaraṇavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘caraṃ vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha caraṃ vāti bhikkhācāravasena caṅkamanavasena ca caranto vā. Yadi vā tiṭṭhanti tiṭṭhanto vā nisinno vā, uda vā sayanti sayanto vā. Evaṃ catūsupi iriyāpathesu. Ajjhattaṃ samayaṃ cittanti yathāvutte kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte gocarajjhatte attano cittaṃ rāgādikilesānaṃ vūpasamanavasena pajahanavasena samayaṃ samento. Santimevādhigacchatīti accantasantiṃ nibbānameva pāpuṇātīti.
《作盲经》注释巴利
8. Andhakaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
87 第八项中,不善寻就是从无善巧所生的寻。在“能令人盲”等说法里,这些寻在谁心中自己生起,就通过障碍他如实看见真相而使他盲目,所以叫能令人盲。它们不让人生起智慧之眼,所以叫能令人无眼。它们造成无知,所以叫能令人无知。令慧灭,是指业自作慧、禅那慧、观慧这三种慧,它们通过使这些慧不能生起而令其灭去,所以叫令慧灭。由于会带来不可意的果报,它们站在被称为苦的恼害那一边,所以叫属于恼害一边。它们不导向烦恼的涅槃,所以叫不导向涅槃。巴利
87. Aṭṭhame akusalavitakkāti akosallasambhūtā vitakkā. Andhakaraṇātiādīsu yassa sayaṃ uppajjanti, taṃ yathābhūtadassananivāraṇena andhaṃ karontīti andhakaraṇā. Na paññācakkhuṃ karontīti acakkhukaraṇā. Aññāṇaṃ karontīti aññāṇakaraṇā. Paññānirodhikāti kammassakatāpaññā, jhānapaññā, vipassanāpaññāti imā tisso paññā appavattikaraṇena nirodhentīti paññānirodhikā. Aniṭṭhaphaladāyakattā dukkhasaṅkhātassa vighātassa pakkhe vattantīti vighātapakkhikā. Kilesanibbānaṃ na saṃvattayantīti anibbānasaṃvattanikā.
欲寻,就是与欲相应的寻。它伴随着烦恼欲,在所依的欲乐对象上生起。与嗔恚相应的寻就是嗔寻。与伤害相应的寻就是害寻。后两种寻,既能在有情身上生起,也能在诸行上生起。具体来说:当人寻思可爱、可意的有情或诸行时,欲寻就会生起;对不可爱、不可意的有情或诸行,从心生愤怒而注视对方开始,一直到想要毁灭对方,这期间生起的就是嗔寻;害寻不会在诸行上生起,因为诸行并没有所谓该被伤害的道理,只有当心里生起这样的念头——“愿这些有情被杀、被绑、被灭绝、被毁灭,或者干脆不存在”——在这样思量的时候,害寻才会在有情身上生起。巴利
Kāmavitakkoti kāmapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko. So hi kilesakāmasahito hutvā vatthukāmesu pavattati. Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko byāpādavitakko. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko vihiṃsāvitakko. Ime dve ca sattesupi saṅkhāresupi uppajjanti. Kāmavitakko hi piyamanāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā vitakkentassa uppajjati, byāpādavitakko appiye amanāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā kujjhitvā olokanakālato paṭṭhāya yāva nāsanā uppajjati, vihiṃsāvitakko saṅkhāresu na uppajjati, saṅkhārā dukkhāpetabbā nāma natthi, ‘‘ime sattā haññantu vā bajjhantu vā ucchijjantu vā vinassantu vā mā vā ahesu’’nti cintanakāle pana sattesu uppajjati.
这些其实就是欲思惟等等。因为从含义上说,欲寻等和欲思惟等并没有差别;而与它们相应的想等,就是欲想等。至于欲界等,则正如巴利圣典中所说:巴利
Imeyeva pana kāmasaṅkappādayo. Atthato hi kāmavitakkādīnaṃ kāmasaṅkappādīnañca nānākaraṇaṃ natthi, taṃsampayuttā pana saññādayo kāmasaññādayo. Kāmadhātuādīnaṃ pana yasmā pāḷiyaṃ –
与欲相应的思择、寻……乃至邪思惟,这称为欲界。一切不善法也都是欲界。与嗔恚相应的思择、寻……乃至邪思惟,这称为嗔界。在十种愤恨事中,心的愤恨、嗔恚……乃至心的不悦,这称为嗔界。与害相应的思择、寻、邪思惟,这称为害界。在这里,有人用手、土块、棍杖、刀械、绳索,或者用其他任何一种方式去伤害有情,这就是害界。巴利
‘‘Kāmapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… micchāsaṅkappo, ayaṃ vuccati kāmadhātu, sabbepi akusalā dhammā kāmadhātu. Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… micchāsaṅkappo, ayaṃ vuccati byāpādadhātu. Dasasu āghātavatthūsu cittassa āghāto paṭighāto…pe… anattamanatā cittassa, ayaṃ vuccati byāpādadhātu. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko micchāsaṅkappo , ayaṃ vuccati vihiṃsādhātu. Idhekacco pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā rajjuyā vā aññataraññatarena satte viheṭheti, ayaṃ vihiṃsādhātū’’ti (vibha. 182, 910) –
因为是从它而来的缘故,所以能得出这个差别。巴利
Āgatattā viseso labbhati.
在这里,有两种解说:总摄说和不杂说。其中,当取欲界时,其余两界也就被说为已经一并取入了。然后从中分出来,指出“这是嗔界,这是害界”,这就叫总摄说。而世尊在解说欲界时,把嗔界放在嗔界的位置上,把害界放在害界的位置上,只把剩下的部分称为“欲界”,这就叫不杂说。巴利
Tattha dve kathā sabbasaṅgāhikā ca asambhinnā ca. Tattha kāmadhātuyā gahitāya itarā dvepi gahitā nāma honti. Tato pana nīharitvā ayaṃ byāpādadhātu, ayaṃ vihiṃsādhātūti dassetīti ayaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikā nāma. Kāmadhātuṃ kathento pana bhagavā byāpādadhātuṃ byāpādadhātuṭṭhāne , vihiṃsādhātuṃ vihiṃsādhātuṭṭhāne ṭhapetvāva avasesaṃ kāmadhātu nāmāti kathesīti ayaṃ asambhinnakathā nāma.
在白分(善分)这一边,应当按照前面所说的相反方式来理解它的含义。与出离相应的寻,就是出离寻。它在修不净观的前行阶段属于欲界,在证得不净禅那时属于色界,以那个禅那作为基础而生起道与果的时候,则属于出世间。与无嗔相应的寻,就是无嗔寻。它在修慈的前行阶段属于欲界,在证得慈禅那时属于色界,以那个禅那作为基础而生起道与果的时候,则属于出世间。与无害相应的寻,就是无害寻。它在修悲的前行阶段属于欲界,在证得悲禅那时属于色界,以那个禅那作为基础而生起道与果的时候,则属于出世间。再者,当无贪为首时,其余两个就跟随它生起;当慈为首时,其余两个就跟随它生起;当悲为首时,其余两个就跟随它生起。巴利
Sukkapakkhe vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko nekkhammavitakko. So asubhapubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti, asubhajjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko abyāpādavitakko. So mettāpubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti, mettājhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko avihiṃsāvitakko. So karuṇāpubbabhāge kāmāvacaro, karuṇājjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Yadā pana alobho sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā honti. Yadā mettā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā honti. Yadā karuṇā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā honti.
而这里说的,正是出离思惟等这一类。从含义上说,出离寻等和出离思惟等并没有差别;与它们相应的想等,就是出离想等。至于出离界等,因为在圣典中这样说——巴利
Imeyeva pana nekkhammasaṅkappādayo. Atthato hi nekkhammavitakkādīnaṃ nekkhammasaṅkappādīnañca nānākaraṇaṃ natthi, taṃsampayuttā pana saññādayo nekkhammasaññādayo. Nekkhammadhātuādīnaṃ pana yasmā pāḷiyaṃ –
与出离相应的思索、寻、思惟,这称为出离界;一切善法也都是出离界。与无嗔相应的思索、寻、思惟,这称为无嗔界;对众生的慈爱、慈愍、慈心解脱,这称为无嗔界。与无害相应的思索、寻、思惟,这称为无害界;对众生的悲悯、悲愍、悲心解脱,这称为无害界。巴利
‘‘Nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko saṅkappo, ayaṃ vuccati nekkhammadhātu, sabbepi kusalā dhammā nekkhammadhātu. Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko saṅkappo, ayaṃ vuccati abyāpādadhātu. Yā sattesu metti mettāyanā mettācetovimutti , ayaṃ vuccati abyāpādadhātu. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko saṅkappo – ayaṃ vuccati avihiṃsādhātu. Yā sattesu karuṇā karuṇāyanā karuṇācetovimutti – ayaṃ vuccati avihiṃsādhātū’’ti. (Vibha. 182) –
因为是从那里引来的,所以差别就能看出来。这里也一样,“总摄说”和“不杂说”这两种说法,应当按前面所讲的方式来理解。剩下的部分很容易明白。巴利
Āgatattā viseso labbhati. Idhāpi sabbasaṅgāhikā, asambhinnāti dve kathā vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在偈颂中,“vitakkayeti”的意思是应当寻思。“nirākareti”的意思是从自己的相续中去除、驱散,也就是应当断除。偈颂说:“save vitakkāni vicāritāni, sameti vuṭṭhīva rajaṃ samūhataṃ。”就像热季最后一个月,大地上被扬起、从四面八方升起的尘土,被非时大雨落下的雨水就地平息;同样,那位修行者使那些寻——也就是邪寻——以及那些伺——也就是与这些寻相应的伺——平息、止息、断除。当他达到这种状态,便以寻止息之心——因为一切邪寻都已止息,所以叫“寻止息”,也就是以圣道心——在当下现前之法中,证得寂静处,即涅槃。巴利
Gāthāsu vitakkayeti vitakkeyya. Nirākareti attano santānato nīhareyya vinodeyya, pajaheyyāti attho. Save vitakkāni vicāritāni, sameti vuṭṭhīva rajaṃ samūhatanti yathā nāma gimhānaṃ pacchime māse pathaviyaṃ samūhataṃ samantato uṭṭhitaṃ rajaṃ mahato akālameghassa vassato vuṭṭhi ṭhānaso vūpasameti, evameva so yogāvacaro vitakkāni micchāvitakke ca vicāritāni taṃsampayuttavicāre ca sameti vūpasameti samucchindati. Tathābhūto ca vitakkūpasamena cetasā sabbesaṃ micchāvitakkānaṃ upasamanato vitakkūpasamena ariyamaggacittena. Idheva diṭṭheva dhamme, santipadaṃ nibbānaṃ, samajjhagā samadhigato hotīti.
第九经《内垢经》的注释巴利
9. Antarāmalasuttavaṇṇanā
88 第九经中说的“antarāmalā”(中间的垢秽),这里的“antarā”一词——巴利
88. Navame antarāmalāti ettha antarāsaddo –
在河岸边、在集会处,也在街道上;
人们聚在一起议论:我和他之间到底是怎么回事。巴利
‘‘Nadītīresu saṇṭhāne, sabhāsu rathiyāsu ca; Janā saṅgamma mantenti, mañca tañca kimantara’’nti. –
在“原因”这类用法里(《相应部》1.228等),它表示“原因”。在“尊者,有个女人在闪电的间隙里洗钵”这类经文里(《中部》2.149),它表示“时刻”。在“而且这温泉是从两个大地狱之间的空隙流出来的”这类经文里(《波罗夷》231),它表示“空隙”。巴利
Ādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.228) kāraṇe āgato. ‘‘Addasā maṃ, bhante, aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṃ dhovantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) khaṇe. ‘‘Apicāyaṃ tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 231) vivare.
穿着金色衣服,挂着金色幢幡,以金色饰品装饰;
你穿着柔软的金黄色内衣,看起来就像戴着饰品一样光彩照人。巴利
‘‘Pītavatthe pītadhaje, pītālaṅkārabhūsite; Pītantarāhi vaggūhi, apiḷandhāva sobhasī’’ti. –
在《分别论注》658等处的“上衣”义项中,以及在“若人内心无忿怒”等句(《自说经》20)中,指的是心。这里也应当理解为心。因此,存在于内心之中的,就是“内部的”。由于它在某个心相续中生起时,会使那个心相续变得染污,所以称为“垢”。其中,垢有两种:身垢和心垢。在这两者中,身垢是汗垢等生于身体的东西,以及附着在身体上的外来尘垢,这些用水就能清除,并不像那样具有染污性。而心垢则是贪等烦恼性的染污,只有通过圣道才能清除。古代大德们确实这样说过:巴利
Ādīsu (vi. va. 658) uttarisāṭake. ‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā’’tiādīsu (udā. 20) citte. Idhāpi citte eva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā antare citte bhavā antarā. Yasmiṃ santāne uppannā, tassa malinabhāvakaraṇato malā. Tattha malaṃ nāma duvidhaṃ – sarīramalaṃ, cittamalanti. Tesu sarīramalaṃ sedajallikādi sarīre nibbattaṃ, tattha laggaṃ āgantukarajañca, taṃ udakenapi nīharaṇīyaṃ, na tathā saṃkilesikaṃ. Cittamalaṃ pana rāgādisaṃkilesikaṃ, taṃ ariyamaggeheva nīharaṇīyaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
青年们被染污的色所染污;
人们以为单靠清净的诸色就能得到清净——这并不是大仙(佛陀)所宣说的。
心被染污了,青年们就跟着染污;
心清净了,众生就清净——这是大仙所说的。巴利
‘‘Rūpena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Rūpe suddhe visujjhanti, anakkhātaṃ mahesinā. ‘‘Cittena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Citte suddhe visujjhanti, iti vuttaṃ mahesinā’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106);
因此,世尊说:“比丘们,众生因为心被染污而被染污,因为心清净而清净。”(《相应部》3.100)所以,为了说明在这里也应当致力于清除心的污垢,世尊说:“比丘们,有三种内部的污垢。”巴利
Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘cittasaṃkilesā, bhikkhave, sattā saṃkilissanti, cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.100). Tasmā bhagavā idhāpi cittamalavisodhanāya paṭipajjitabbanti dassento ‘‘tayome, bhikkhave, antarāmalā’’ti āha.
贪等烦恼在众生心中生起后,会使心变得污浊,造成种种杂染,所以它们是内在的垢染。同样,它们就像一起吃饭、一起睡觉、伺机寻找下手的敌人和怨敌一样,直接在心中生起,给众生带来种种危害,制造种种痛苦。为了说明这一点,世尊说了“内在的敌人”等话。其中,因为与朋友相反,所以叫“非友”;因为做怨敌该做的事,所以叫“怨敌”;因为伤害他人,所以叫“杀手”;因为直接站在对立面,所以叫“敌人”。巴利
Yathā cete lobhādayo sattānaṃ citte uppajjitvā malinabhāvakarā nānappakārasaṃkilesavidhāyakāti antarāmalā, evaṃ ekato bhuñjitvā, ekato sayitvā, otāragavesī amittasattu viya citte eva uppajjitvā sattānaṃ nānāvidhaanatthāvahā, nānappakāradukkhanibbattakāti dassento ‘‘antarāamittā’’tiādimāha. Tattha mittapaṭipakkhato amittā, sapattakiccakaraṇato sapattā, hiṃsanato vadhakā, ujuvipaccanīkato paccatthikā.
在这里,要从两个方面来理解贪等烦恼和敌人等是相似的。比如一个怀恨在心的人,一旦找到机会,就会用刀砍下仇人的脑袋,或者用手段造成巨大的伤害。而贪等这些烦恼,通过砍断智慧之头和让人投胎受生,所产生的伤害比那还要猛烈。怎么讲呢?当合意的对象等出现在眼门面前时,贪等烦恼就随着各种情况缘着这些对象生起,光是这样,这个人的智慧之头就已经被砍掉了。耳门等其他诸门也是同样的道理。以上就是从砍断智慧之头这一方面,来理解贪等和敌人等的相似性。其次,贪等烦恼作为业的根源,把众生推入卵生等四种投生方式中。一旦投胎受生,二十五种大怖畏和三十二种刑罚就随之而来,这些在经典中都有记载。以上就是从导致投胎受生这一方面,来理解它们和敌人等的相似性。因此,贪等烦恼既和敌人等相似,又是从心中生起的,所以被称为“内部的敌人”等等。再者,敌人做不到的事情,贪等烦恼却能做;而敌人的敌对状态也是由贪等烦恼产生的,所以应该知道贪等烦恼就等同于敌人等。关于这一点,经中确实说过:巴利
Tattha dvīhi ākārehi lobhādīnaṃ amittādibhāvo veditabbo. Verīpuggalo hi antaraṃ labhamāno attano verissa satthena vā sīsaṃ pāteti, upāyena vā mahantaṃ anatthaṃ uppādeti. Ime ca lobhādayo paññāsirapātanena yonisampaṭipādanena ca tādisaṃ tato balavataraṃ anatthaṃ nibbattenti. Kathaṃ? Cakkhudvārasmiñhi iṭṭhādīsu ārammaṇesu āpāthagatesu yathārahaṃ tāni ārabbha lobhādayo uppajjanti, ettāvatāssa paññāsiraṃ pātitaṃ nāma hoti. Sotadvārādīsupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ tāva paññāsirapātanato amittādisadisatā veditabbā. Lobhādayo pana kammanidānā hutvā aṇḍajādibhedā catasso yoniyo upanenti. Tassa yoniupagamanamūlakāni pañcavīsati mahābhayāni dvattiṃsa kammakaraṇāni ca āgatāneva honti. Evaṃ yonisampaṭipādanatopi nesaṃ amittādisadisatā veditabbā. Iti lobhādayo amittādisadisatāya cittasambhūtatāya ca ‘‘antarāamittā’’tiādinā vuttā. Apica amittehi kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ lobhādayo karonti, amittādibhāvo ca lobhādīhi jāyatīti tesaṃ amittādibhāvo veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
仇敌能对仇敌做的,或者怀恨者能对怀恨者做的,
心若被错误地导向,它造成的危害比那更严重。巴利
‘‘Diso disaṃ yantaṃ kayirā, verī vā pana verinaṃ; Micchāpaṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, pāpiyo naṃ tato kare’’ti. (dha. pa. 42; udā. 33);
在偈颂里,因为它会给自己和他人带来不利,所以叫“带来不利者”。关于这一点也说过:巴利
Gāthāsu attano paresañca anatthaṃ janetīti anatthajanano. Vuttañhetaṃ –
当一个贪心的人以身、语、意去造作时,那是不善的;当一个贪心的人被贪欲压倒、心被贪欲完全占据,以杀害、捆绑、掠夺、辱骂或驱逐,或者以妄语对他人造成痛苦,或者心想“我有力量,我要达成目的”时,那也是不善的。就这样,许多由贪而生、以贪为根源、以贪为起因、以贪为条件的种种恶不善法,就产生了。巴利
‘‘Yadapi luddho abhisaṅkharoti kāyena vācāya manasā tadapi akusalaṃ; yadapi luddho lobhena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto parassa asatā dukkhaṃ uppādeti vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā garahāya vā pabbājanāya vā balavamhi balattho iti, tadapi akusalaṃ, itissame lobhajā lobhanidānā lobhasamudayā lobhapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavantī’’ti (a. ni. 3.70).
另外也说过——巴利
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
婆罗门,一个人被贪欲染着,被贪欲压倒,心被贪欲彻底控制时,就会盘算伤害自己,也会盘算伤害别人,也会盘算同时伤害自己和别人,并且感受到内心的痛苦和忧愁。巴利
‘‘Ratto kho, brāhmaṇa, rāgena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attabyābādhāyapi ceteti, parabyābādhāyapi ceteti, ubhayabyābādhāyapi ceteti, cetasikampi dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’tiādi (a. ni. 3.54).
心的搅扰,就是心的波动混乱。因为贪欲在面对可贪着的事物生起时,会搅动心、扰动心、使心转变、让心发生变异,不让心以澄净等方式正常运作。怖畏从内部生起,人们却不觉知:这种名为贪的、从自己内心内部生起的、能产生无益并搅扰内心等的怖畏,以及怖畏的根源,这些愚痴的凡夫大众不觉察、不了知。巴利
Cittappakopanoti cittasaṅkhobhano. Lobho hi lobhanīye vatthusmiṃ uppajjamāno cittaṃ khobhento pakopento vipariṇāmento vikāraṃ āpādento uppajjati, pasādādivasena pavattituṃ na deti. Bhayamantarato jātaṃ, taṃ jano nāvabujjhatīti taṃ lobhasaṅkhātaṃ antarato abbhantare attano citteyeva jātaṃ anatthajananacittappakopanādiṃ bhayaṃ bhayahetuṃ ayaṃ bālamahājano nāvabujjhati na jānātīti.
贪心的人不了知利益,是说贪心的个人不能如实了知自利、他利等不同种类的利益。不见法,是说贪心的人被贪欲征服、心被彻底控制,便不能亲眼看见、不能了知十善业道法,更不用说超越常人的法了。经中也这样说:巴利
Luddho atthaṃ na jānātīti attatthaparatthādibhedaṃ atthaṃ hitaṃ luddhapuggalo yathābhūtaṃ na jānāti. Dhammaṃ na passatīti dasakusalakammapathadhammampi luddho lobhena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto na passati paccakkhato na jānāti, pageva uttarimanussadhammaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
婆罗门,一个被贪欲染着的人,被贪欲征服、心被彻底控制时,就无法如实了知自己的利益,也无法如实了知他人的利益,更无法如实了知自他双方的利益。等等。巴利
‘‘Ratto kho, brāhmaṇa, rāgena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attatthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti, paratthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti, ubhayatthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānātī’’tiādi (a. ni. 3.55).
“盲目黑暗”是指造成盲目状态的黑暗。“Yaṃ”在这里表示处所,是以主格形式表达处格的意思。也就是说,当贪欲征服、压制一个人时,那时就是盲目黑暗。或者,“yaṃ”表示原因。因为生起的贪欲征服、压制了人,所以那时就是盲目黑暗——应该这样理解其义理关联,因为“ya”和“ta”这两个词有固定的对应关系。又或者,“yaṃ”是在指涉动作:在“贪欲征服”这句话里,所说的贪的征服与压制,就是走向那造成盲目状态之黑暗的生起,这就是它的意思。再或者,应该这样理解其义理:贪欲征服、压制了哪个人,那个人那时就有盲目黑暗,正因如此,所以说“贪者不了知义利,贪者不见法”。巴利
Andhatamanti andhabhāvakaraṃ tamaṃ. Yanti yattha. Bhummatthe hi etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Yasmiṃ kāle lobho sahate abhibhavati naraṃ, andhatamaṃ tadā hotīti. Yanti vā kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā lobho uppajjamāno naraṃ sahate abhibhavati, tasmā andhatamaṃ tadā hotīti yojanā, ya-ta-saddānaṃ ekantasambandhabhāvato. Atha vā yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, ‘‘lobho sahate’’ti ettha yadetaṃ lobhassa sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ vuttaṃ. Etaṃ andhabhāvakarassa tamassa gamanaṃ uppādoti attho. Atha vā yaṃ naraṃ lobho sahate abhibhavati, tassa andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, tato ca luddho atthaṃ na jānāti, luddho dhammaṃ na passatīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
如果有人在前一阶段,根据情况用彼分断和镇伏断的方式,通过止和观来断除贪,那么由于这样断贪的缘故,即使可爱的、天界的色等所缘出现在他面前,他也不会起贪。凭借强大观智的力量,贪从他那里被断除,所以说,圣者以圣道断除贪、舍断贪,永远彻底舍弃它。这像什么呢?就像莲叶上的水珠一样,即如同从莲叶上滚落的水滴。其余偈颂的义理,也应当按这种方法来理解。巴利
Yo ca lobhaṃ pahantvānāti yo pubbabhāge tadaṅgavasena vikkhambhanavasena ca yathārahaṃ samathavipassanāhi lobhaṃ pajahitvā tathā pajahanahetu lobhaneyye dibbepi rūpādike upaṭṭhite na lubbhati, balavavipassanānubhāvena lobho pahīyate tamhāti tasmā ariyapuggalā ariyamaggena lobho pahīyati pajahīyati, accantameva pariccajīyati. Yathā kiṃ? Udabindūva pokkharāti paduminipaṇṇato udakabindu viya. Sesagāthānampi iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
对嗔也是如此——巴利
Tathā dosassa –
一个人被嗔怒控制,用身体、语言或心意去造作什么,那都是不善。一个人被嗔怒压制,心完全被嗔怒占据,用杀害、捆绑、抢夺财物、辱骂或驱逐这些方式,拿不实的事情去伤害别人,心里想着“我有力量,就要用力量压过去”,那也同样是不善。这样一来,种种由嗔怒产生、以嗔怒为根源、从嗔怒生起、靠嗔怒引发的恶不善法,就都生起来了。巴利
‘‘Yadapi duṭṭho abhisaṅkharoti kāyena vācāya manasā tadapi akusalaṃ; yadapi duṭṭho dosena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto parassa asatā dukkhaṃ uppādeti vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā garahāya vā pabbājanāya vā balavamhi balattho iti, tadapi akusalaṃ. Itissame dosajā dosanidānā dosasamudayā dosapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavantī’’ti (a. ni. 3.70).
婆罗门,一个被嗔怒打败的人,心被嗔怒彻底控制,就会想伤害自己,也会想伤害别人,还会想同时伤害自己和别人,并且心里感受到苦和忧。巴利
‘‘Duṭṭho kho, brāhmaṇa, dosena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attabyābādhāyapi ceteti, parabyābādhāyapi ceteti, ubhayabyābādhāyapi ceteti cetasikampi dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti (a. ni. 3.55).
婆罗门,一个被嗔怒击败、心被嗔怒彻底控制的人,确实无法如实看清自己的利益,无法如实看清他人的利益,也无法如实看清自他双方的利益。巴利
‘‘Duṭṭho kho, brāhmaṇa, dosena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attatthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti , paratthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti, ubhayatthampi yathā bhūtaṃ na pajānātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.55) –
依照这些经文的语句来理解,应当知道它会产生无益,也是损害利益的原因。巴利
Ādisuttapadānusārena anatthajananatā atthahānihetutā ca veditabbā.
同样地,对于痴,应当依据经中这些语句来了知:比如“即使愚痴者以身、语、意造作……”,又如“婆罗门,愚痴者被痴征服,心被痴完全控制,便想要伤害自己……”,再如“不能如实了知自己的利益……”等等。巴利
Tathā mohassa ‘‘yadapi mūḷho abhisaṅkharoti kāyena vācāya manasā’’tiādinā (a. ni. 3.70), ‘‘mūḷho kho, brāhmaṇa, mohena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attabyābādhāyapi cetetī’’tiādinā(a. ni. 3.55), ‘‘attatthampi yathābhūtaṃ na pajānātī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 3.55) ca āgatasuttapadānusārena veditabbā.
就像棕榈果因为热力从果柄脱落一样,由于第三道智的生起,嗔就从他的心中被断除、被舍弃,这就是这句话的意思。他以第四道智破除、消灭、彻底斩断一切无余的无明。就像太阳升起时驱散黑暗一样。巴利
Tālapakkaṃvabandhanāti tālaphalaṃ viya usumuppādena vaṇṭato, tatiyamaggañāṇuppādena tassa cittato doso pahīyati, pariccajīyatīti attho. Mohaṃ vihanti so sabbanti so ariyapuggalo sabbaṃ anavasesaṃ mohaṃ catutthamaggena vihanti vidhamati samucchindati. Ādiccovudayaṃ tamanti ādicco viya udayaṃ uggacchanto tamaṃ andhakāraṃ.
第十:提婆达多经的注释巴利
10. Devadattasuttavaṇṇanā
89 第十经中,“诸比丘,被三种非正法所征服”这句话是因何而说的呢?原来,提婆达多堕入无间大地狱后,提婆达多的党羽和外道们诽谤说:“沙门乔达摩诅咒了提婆达多,他才陷入地中。”听到这话,对教法还没有生起净信的人们便产生了疑惑:“也许真像他们说的那样吧?”比丘们把这件事禀告了世尊。于是世尊说:“诸比丘,如来不会诅咒任何人,所以提婆达多并不是被我诅咒,他是因自己的业而堕入地狱的。”为了破除他们的错误执取,世尊便以这个因缘宣说了这部经。巴利
89. Dasame tīhi, bhikkhave, asaddhammehi abhibhūtoti kā uppatti? Devadatte hi avīcimahānirayaṃ paviṭṭhe devadattapakkhiyā aññatitthiyā ca ‘‘samaṇena gotamena abhisapito devadatto pathaviṃ paviṭṭho’’ti abbhācikkhiṃsu. Taṃ sutvā sāsane anabhippasannā manussā ‘‘siyā nu kho etadevaṃ, yathā ime bhaṇantī’’ti āsaṅkaṃ uppādesuṃ. Taṃ pavattiṃ bhikkhū bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Atha bhagavā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, tathāgatā kassaci abhisapaṃ denti, tasmā na devadatto mayā abhisapito, attano kammeneva nirayaṃ paviṭṭho’’ti vatvā tesaṃ micchāgāhaṃ paṭisedhento imāya aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi.
在这里,“由非正法”是指由非善人的法,或由不存在的法。“无救”是指连诸佛也无法使他回转,因为投生无间地狱之后已无可救治,所以叫无救,意思是不可医治。“恶欲者”是指怀着希求虚假功德表彰的意图而生起的邪恶欲求属于此人,这种状态就是恶欲性,以恶欲性。他生起了这样的欲求:“我要成佛,我要统领比丘僧团。”“恶友”是指果卡利迦等人是此人的邪恶低劣之友,这种状态就是恶友性,以恶友性。“更上应作”是指以禅那和神通为更上应作之事,即应证得的道果;当他尚未证得时,就是说他没能证得那应证得的。“仅以微小之量”是指仅以微不足道的禅那和神通。“以殊胜证得”是指证得上人法。“中途”是指在中间。“达到停止”是指所作未办,却自以为“我已所作皆办”,从而偏离了沙门法。就这样,世尊通过这部经特别揭示了凡夫状态的过患——凡夫状态实在沉重,因为即使修成了以禅那和神通为顶点的成就,却仍然不离虚假功德表彰、恶人交往和懈怠放逸,这些带来种种无益、种种苦因,最终将造下在无间地狱住一劫、无可救治的罪恶。巴利
Tattha asaddhammehīti asataṃ dhammehi, asantehi vā dhammehi. Atekicchoti buddhehipi anivattanīyattā avīcinibbattiyā tikicchābhāvato atekiccho, atikicchanīyoti attho. Asantaguṇasambhāvanādhippāyena pavattā pāpā icchā etassāti pāpiccho, tassa bhāvo pāpicchatā, tāya. ‘‘Ahaṃ buddho bhavissāmi, saṅghaṃ pariharissāmī’’ti tassa icchā uppannā. Kokālikādayo pāpā lāmakā mittā etassāti pāpamitto, tassa bhāvo pāpamittatā, tāya. Uttarikaraṇīyeti jhānābhiññāhi uttarikaraṇīye adhigantabbe maggaphale anadhigate sati eva, taṃ anadhigantvāti attho. Oramattakenāti appamattakena jhānābhiññāmattena. Visesādhigamenāti uttarimanussadhammādhigamena. Antarāti vemajjhe. Vosānaṃ āpādīti akatakiccova samāno ‘‘katakiccomhī’’ti maññamāno samaṇadhammato vigamaṃ āpajji. Iti bhagavā iminā suttena visesato puthujjanabhāve ādīnavaṃ pakāsesi bhāriyo puthujjanabhāvo, yatra hi nāma jhānābhiññāpariyosānā sampattiyo nibbattetvāpi anekānatthāvahaṃ nānāvidhaṃ dukkhahetuṃ asantaguṇasambhāvanaṃ asappurisasaṃsaggaṃ ālasiyānuyogañca avijahanto avīcimhi kappaṭṭhiyaṃ atekicchaṃ kibbisaṃ pasavissatīti.
偈颂里的“莫”是禁止词。“决定”是确定无疑的意思。“任何人”是总括一切的说法。“于世间”指众生世间。这里说的是:“愿在这众生世间,任何一个人都绝对不要成为恶欲者。”你们也应当由此知道恶欲者的趣向——恶欲者会有什么样的趣向、什么样的成就、什么样的来世,你们也应当通过这个因由来知道。世尊举提婆达多为例,这样说道。“被称为智者”:因为博学多闻而被人认为是智者。“被认为是已修心者”:因为禅那和神通而被大家认可为已修心的人。确实,他以前曾被法将舍利弗长老称赞为:“有大神通的瞿低子,有大威力的瞿低子。”“他如火焰般以名声而立,以提婆达多之名而闻名”:他凭自己的名声和眷属,像火焰一样炽盛、一样闪耀地立着,以“提婆达多”这个名字如此闻名、如此显赫。也有读作“我闻”的,意思是“我所听闻的”,仅仅是听闻而已;因为没过多久事情就变得不是那样了,所以对他来说,那不过是听了智者之类的名头而已。巴利
Gāthāsu māti paṭisedhe nipāto. Jātūti ekaṃsena. Kocīti sabbasaṅgāhakavacanaṃ. Lokasminti sattaloke. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘imasmiṃ sattaloke koci puggalo ekaṃsena pāpiccho mā hotū’’ti. Tadamināpi jānātha, pāpicchānaṃ yathā gatīti pāpicchānaṃ puggalānaṃ yathā gati yādisī nipphatti, yādiso abhisamparāyo, taṃ imināpi kāraṇena jānāthāti devadattaṃ nidassento evamāha. Paṇḍitoti samaññātoti pariyattibāhusaccena paṇḍitoti ñāto. Bhāvitattoti sammatoti jhānābhiññāhi bhāvitacittoti sambhāvito. Tathā hi so pubbe ‘‘mahiddhiko godhiputto, mahānubhāvo godhiputto’’ti dhammasenāpatināpi pasaṃsito ahosi. Jalaṃva yasasā aṭṭhā, devadattoti vissutoti attano kittiyā parivārena jalanto viya obhāsento viya ṭhito devadattoti evaṃ vissuto pākaṭo ahosi. ‘‘Me sutta’’ntipi pāṭho, mayā sutaṃ sutamattaṃ, katipāheneva atathābhūtattā tassa taṃ paṇḍiccādi savanamattamevāti attho.
提婆达多就是这样的人,他把自己和正自觉者看成一样,还去冒犯如来。他心里想:“佛陀是释迦族人,我也是释迦族人;佛陀是沙门,我也是沙门;佛陀有神通,我也有神通;佛陀有天眼,我也有天眼;佛陀有天耳,我也有天耳;佛陀得到了他心通,我也得到了他心通;佛陀知道过去、未来、现在的法,我也知道这些法。”他不清楚自己的分量,把自己和正自觉者摆在同等位置,怀着“现在我要成佛,要统领比丘僧团”这种傲慢的动机,去冒犯、触恼、伤害如来。也有人读作“pamādamanujīno”(随放逸而退失),意思是:按前面所说陷入放逸,依靠放逸,因为想和世尊争胜的念头,连同禅那和神通一起退失穷尽。他堕入了四门怖畏的无间地狱——因为那里的火焰连续不断,或者因为投生到那里的众生没有间隔,所以叫“无间”;四方各有大门,所以叫“四门”;那是极其可怕的大地狱,他以结生的方式投生其中。确实有这样的偈颂说:巴利
So samānamanuciṇṇo, āsajja naṃ tathāgatanti so evaṃbhūto devadatto ‘‘buddhopi sakyaputto, ahampi sakyaputto, buddhopi samaṇo, ahampi samaṇo, buddhopi iddhimā, ahampi iddhimā, buddhopi dibbacakkhuko, ahampi dibbacakkhuko, buddhopi dibbasotako, ahampi dibbasotako, buddhopi cetopariyañāṇalābhī, ahampi cetopariyañāṇalābhī, buddhopi atītānāgatapaccuppanne dhamme jānāti, ahampi te jānāmī’’ti attano pamāṇaṃ ajānitvā sammāsambuddhaṃ attanā samasamaṭṭhapanena samānaṃ āpajjanto ‘‘idānāhaṃ buddho bhavissāmi, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pariharissāmī’’ti abhimārapayojanā tathāgataṃ āsajja āsādetvā viheṭhetvā. ‘‘Pamādamanujīno’’tipi paṭhanti. Tassattho ‘‘vuttanayena pamādaṃ āpajjanto pamādaṃ nissāya bhagavatā saddhiṃ yugaggāhacittuppādena saheva jhānābhiññāhi anujīno parihīno’’ti. Avīcinirayaṃ patto, catudvāraṃ bhayānakanti jālānaṃ tattha uppannasattānaṃ vā nirantaratāya ‘‘avīcī’’ti laddhanāmaṃ catūsu passesu catumahādvārayogena catudvāraṃ atibhayānakaṃ mahānirayaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena patto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
四方形,四道门,按部分划分得均匀整齐;
四周以铁墙为界,上面用铁板盖住。
他的地面是铁做的,燃烧着,带着他的热力。
从四面八方一百由旬之内,它始终遍满而安住。巴利
‘‘Catukkaṇṇo catudvāro, vibhatto bhāgaso mito; Ayopākārapariyanto, ayasā paṭikujjito. ‘‘Tassa ayomayā bhūmi, jalitā tejasā yutā; Samantā yojanasataṃ, pharitvā tiṭṭhati sabbadā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.250; a. ni. 3.36; pe. va. 693-694; jā. 2.19.86-87);
对无嗔者:指心无嗔恨的人。加害:就是毁坏。那恶本身就触及:那恶、下劣的恶果,会触及、追上并压倒那个加害无嗔者的恶人。可怖:因广大甚深而仿佛令人恐惧,意思是广大甚深。以过失:指以嗔恨。伤害:就是恼害、触犯。过失在彼处不增长:他人强加于如来的过失,在如来身上既不增长,也无法安住,就像把毒瓶投入大海,大海不会因此产生任何变化,这就是其含义。巴利
Aduṭṭhassāti aduṭṭhacittassa. Dubbheti dūseyya. Tameva pāpaṃ phusatīti tameva aduṭṭhadubbhiṃ pāpapuggalaṃ pāpaṃ nihīnaṃ pāpaphalaṃ phusati pāpuṇāti abhibhavati. Bhesmāti vipulabhāvena gambhīrabhāvena ca bhiṃsāpento viya, vipulagambhīroti attho. Vādenāti dosena. Vihiṃsatīti bādhati āsādeti. Vādo tamhi na rūhatīti tasmiṃ tathāgate parena āropiyamāno doso na ruhati, na tiṭṭhati, visakumbho viya samuddassa, na tassa vikāraṃ janetīti attho.
就这样,先用六首偈颂说明具足恶欲等染污法的人会堕入地狱,从而显示他们没能从苦中解脱出来。现在,为了说明具足与此相反之法的人能够灭尽苦,而说出这最后一首偈颂——“这样的朋友”。它的意思是:一个正确修行、随顺于道、依道而行的人,因为具足少欲等功德,就能到达整个轮回之苦的彻底灭尽。像这样的佛陀,或者佛陀的弟子,智者、有智慧的人,应当把他当作自己的朋友,与他建立友谊,亲近他、侍奉他。巴利
Evaṃ chahi gāthāhi pāpicchatādisamannāgatassa nirayūpagabhāvadassanena dukkhato aparimuttataṃ dassetvā idāni tappaṭipakkhadhammasamannāgatassa dukkhakkhayaṃ dassento ‘‘tādisaṃ mitta’’nti osānagāthamāha. Tassattho – yassa sammā paṭipannassa maggānugo paṭipattimaggaṃ anugato sammā paṭipanno appicchatādiguṇasamannāgamena sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa khayaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇeyya. Tādisaṃ buddhaṃ vā buddhasāvakaṃ vā paṇḍito sappañño, attano mittaṃ kubbetha tena mettikaṃ kareyya, tañca seveyya tameva payirupāseyyāti.
这一品里,第六经和第七经讲的是还灭,其余各经则既讲流转也讲还灭。巴利
Iti imasmiṃ vagge chaṭṭhasattamasuttesu vivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, itaresu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.
1. 《最胜净信经》的注释巴利
1. Aggappasādasuttavaṇṇanā
90 90. 第五品第一经中,“最胜净信”这个词里,agga(最胜)一词可以在“开始”“顶端”“部分”“最胜”这几种意思中出现。比如“从今天起,贤友守门人,我关闭尼乾陀男众和尼乾陀女众的门户”(《中部》2.70)、“从今天起,直到命终,我皈依”(《长部》1.250;《波罗夷》15)等句子中,它出现在“开始”的意思上。比如“用那个指尖去碰那个指尖”(《论事》441)、“甘蔗顶端、竹子顶端”等句子中,它出现在“顶端”的意思上。比如“酸的一份,或甜的一份,或苦的一份”(《相应部》5.374)、“诸比丘,我允许按精舍的份额或周边范围的份额来分配”(《小品》318)等句子中,它出现在“部分”的意思上。比如“这是四种人中最胜、最上、最高、最殊胜的”(《增支部》4.95)、“我是世间最胜者”(《长部》2.31;《中部》3.207)等句子中,它出现在“最胜”的意思上。这里也应该理解为“最胜”的意思。因此,对最胜者生起的净信,或者说本身即是最胜、最上的净信,就是“最胜净信”的意思。巴利
90. Pañcamavaggassa paṭhame aggappasādāti ettha ayaṃ aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīnaṃ (ma. ni. 2.70). Ajjatagge pāṇupetaṃ saraṇaṃ gata’’nti (dī. ni. 1.250; pārā. 15) ca ādīsu ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya (kathā. 441). Ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’nti ca ādīsu koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā (saṃ. ni. 5.374). Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’nti (cūḷava. 318) ca ādīsu koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ aggo ca seṭṭho ca uttamo ca pavaro ca (a. ni. 4.95). Aggohamasmi lokassā’’ti ca ādīsu (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) seṭṭhe. Svāyamidhāpi seṭṭheyeva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā aggesu seṭṭhesu pasādā, aggabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtā vā pasādā aggappasādāti attho.
前面讲“最胜”这个词的时候,指的是佛、法、僧三宝。在三宝当中,世尊之所以称为“最胜”,有三个层面的意思:无人能比、德行超胜、无与伦比。
先说“无人能比”:世尊从最初发大愿、对十种波罗蜜的深入抉择开始,凭借这些菩提资粮的功德和佛陀的功德,跟其他所有众生完全不同,所以从“无人能比”这个意义上说,他是最胜的。
再说“德行超胜”:世尊所具有的大悲等种种功德,远远超过其他众生的功德,而且他在一切众生中最为尊上,所以从“德行超胜”这个意义上说,他也是最胜的。
再说“无与伦比”:过去那些正自觉者虽然也超胜一切众生,但世尊在色身功德和法身功德上,跟他们完全平等,所以从“无与伦比”这个意义上说,他也是最胜的。
此外,因为世尊出现于世极为难得,是不可思议的人,能给众多众生带来利益和安乐,而且没有第二个人、没有同伴,所以世间称他为“最胜”。正如经文所说:巴利
Purimasmiñca atthe aggasaddena buddhādiratanattayaṃ vuccati. Tesu bhagavā tāva asadisaṭṭhena, guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhena, asamasamaṭṭhena ca aggo. So hi mahābhinīhāraṃ dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ pavicayañca ādiṃ katvā tehi bodhisambhāraguṇehi ceva buddhaguṇehi ca sesajanehi asadisoti asadisaṭṭhena aggo. Ye cassa guṇā mahākaruṇādayo, te sesasattānaṃ guṇehi visiṭṭhāti guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhenapi sabbasattuttamatāya aggo. Ye pana purimakā sammāsambuddhā sabbasattehi asamā, tehi saddhiṃ ayameva rūpakāyaguṇehi ceva dhammakāyaguṇehi ca samoti asamasamaṭṭhenapi aggo. Tathā dullabhapātubhāvato acchariyamanussabhāvato bahujanahitasukhāvahato adutiyaasahāyādibhāvato ca bhagavā loke aggoti vuccati. Yathāha –
比丘们,有一个人出现在世间,是极难得的。是哪一个人呢?就是如来、阿罗汉、正等正觉者。巴利
‘‘Ekapuggalassa , bhikkhave, pātubhāvo dullabho lokasmiṃ, katamassa ekapuggalassa? Tathāgatassa arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
比丘们,世间有一个人出现时,是以奇妙之人的身份出现的。巴利
‘‘Ekapuggalo , bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati acchariyamanusso.
比丘们,有一个人出现在世间时,是为了众多人的利益……(中略)……作为正自觉者而出现。巴利
‘‘Ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujana…pe… sammāsambuddho.
比丘们,在这世间,有一个人出现时,他是没有第二个人、没有同伴、无可比拟、没有等同、没有匹敌、没有对手,无与伦比、无可比肩,是两足众生中最尊贵的。这一个人是谁呢?就是如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者。巴利
‘‘Ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati, adutiyo asahāyo appaṭimo appaṭisamo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggalo asamo asamasamo dvipadānaṃ aggo. Katamo ekapuggalo? Tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti (a. ni. 1.170-172, 174).
法与僧众也是最上的,因为与其他法和僧众不相似,具有殊胜的功德,出现又极为难得等缘故。确实,以善说性、善修行性等功德特胜来说,根本找不到与其他法和僧众相等、相近或更差的,更何况更殊胜的呢?正是他们自身具有殊胜功德,所以才是最胜的。同样,他们具有难得出现、稀有、能带来众多人的利益与安乐、无第二、无伴侣等特质。从世尊难得出现这一点来说,法与僧众也同样难得。稀有性等也是如此。对于这些最上、最胜、无上、殊胜、功德优越的对象所生起的净信,就叫最胜净信。巴利
Dhammasaṅghāpi aññadhammasaṅghehi asadisaṭṭhena visiṭṭhaguṇatāya dullabhapātubhāvādinā ca aggā. Tathā hi tesaṃ svākkhātatādisuppaṭipannatādiguṇavisesehi aññadhammasaṅghā sadisā appataranihīnā vā natthi, kuto seṭṭhā. Sayameva ca pana tehi visiṭṭhaguṇatāya seṭṭhā. Tathā dullabhuppādaacchariyabhāvabahujanahitasukhāvahā adutiyaasahāyādisabhāvā ca te. Yadaggena hi bhagavā dullabhapātubhāvo, tadaggena dhammasaṅghāpīti. Acchariyādibhāvepi eseva nayo. Evaṃ aggesu seṭṭhesu uttamesu pavaresu guṇavisiṭṭhesu pasādāti aggappasādā.
其次,从第二种含义来说:对于前面所说的最胜者——佛陀等——生起的净信,因为是最胜的净信,所以叫“最胜净信”。而通过圣道获得的不坏净信,必定就是最胜的净信,所以也叫“最胜净信”。正如经中所说:“比丘们,在这里,圣弟子对佛具足不坏净信……”等等。又因为这些净信能带来最胜的果报,所以也是“最胜净信”。经中确实说过:“对最胜者生起净信的人,果报也是最胜的。”巴利
Dutiyasmiṃ pana atthe yathāvuttesu aggesu buddhādīsu uppattiyā aggabhūtā pasādā aggappasādā. Ye pana ariyamaggena āgatā aveccappasādā, te ekanteneva aggabhūtā pasādāti aggappasādā. Yathāha ‘‘idha , bhikkhave, ariyasāvako buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hotī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1027). Aggavipākattāpi cete aggappasādā. Vuttañhi ‘‘agge kho pana pasannānaṃ aggo vipāko’’ti.
“yāvatā”的意思是“凡是……”。“sattā”指有情众生。“apadā”指没有脚的。“dvipadā”指有两只脚的。剩下两种(四足、多足)也按同样方式理解。“vā”这个词表示总括,不表示选择。比如“未生起的欲漏生起,或已生起的欲漏增长”(《中部》1.17),这里的意思是“未生起的和已生起的”。又比如“为了已生众生的存续,或为了寻求再生者的资助”(《中部》1.402;《相应部》2.12),这里的意思是“已生众生的和寻求再生者的”。又比如“从火,或从水,或从离间”(《长部》2.152;《自说》76;《大品》286),这里的意思是“从火、从水和从离间”。同样地,在“无足者或……乃至……被称为最胜”这句里,也应当按总括的方式理解为“无足者和两足者等”。因此说:“vā这个词表示总括,不表示选择。”巴利
Yāvatāti yattakā. Sattāti pāṇino. Apadāti apādakā. Dvipadāti dvipādakā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Vā-saddo samuccayattho, na vikappattho. Yathā ‘‘anuppanno vā kāmāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā kāmāsavo pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.17) ettha anuppanno ca uppanno cāti attho. Yathā ca ‘‘bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.402; saṃ. ni. 2.12) ettha bhūtānañca sambhavesīnañcāti attho. Yathā ca ‘‘aggito vā udakato vā mithubhedato vā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.152; udā. 76; mahāva. 286) ettha aggito ca udakato ca mithubhedato cāti attho, evaṃ ‘‘apadā vā…pe… aggamakkhāyatī’’ti etthāpi apadā ca dvipadā cāti sampiṇḍanavasena attho daṭṭhabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vā-saddo samuccayattho, na vikappattho’’ti.
有色者,就是具有色身的。无色者,就是没有色身的。有想者,就是具有想蕴的。无想者,就是没有想蕴的。非想非非想者,是指属于有顶天的众生。到这里为止,法王已经毫无遗漏地总摄并开示了九种存在中的有情:欲有、色有、无色有、一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有、想有、无想有、非想非非想有。其中,通过“有色者”这一表述,开示了欲有、色有、五蕴有和一蕴有;通过“无色者”这一表述,开示了无色有和四蕴有;而想有等则是直接按其自身的样子开示的。通过“无足者”等表述,开示了欲有、五蕴有以及想有的一部分。巴利
Rūpinoti rūpavanto. Na rūpinoti arūpino. Saññinoti saññāvanto. Na saññinoti asaññino. Nevasaññināsaññino nāma bhavaggapariyāpannā. Ettāvatā ca kāmabhavo, rūpabhavo, arūpabhavo, ekavokārabhavo, catuvokārabhavo, pañcavokārabhavo, saññībhavo, asaññībhavo, nevasaññīnāsaññībhavoti navavidhepi bhave satte anavasesato pariyādiyitvā dassesi dhammarājā. Ettha hi rūpiggahaṇena kāmabhavo rūpabhavo pañcavokārabhavo ekavokārabhavo ca dassito, arūpiggahaṇena arūpabhavo catuvokārabhavo ca dassito. Saññībhavādayo pana sarūpeneva dassitā. Apadādiggahaṇena kāmabhavapañcavokārabhavasaññībhavānaṃ ekadeso dassitoti.
那么,为什么这里不像《无第二经》那样,只提“两足者中最胜”,而是把无足者等等也一并提出来呢?回答是:在《无第二经》里,只是从更殊胜的角度,才只提了两足者。因为在这个世间,所谓最胜者出现时,不会出现在无足、四足或多足的有情当中,只会出现在两足者当中。是哪种两足者呢?就是人和天神。出现在人当中时,他成为能自在地统御整个世间的佛陀而出现。《增支部义注》里则说:“能自在地统御三千大千世界。”出现在天神当中时,他成为能自在地统御一万世界的大梵天而出现,而那个大梵天就成了他的净人或寺院杂役。所以,那部经里也是从更殊胜的角度,才说“两足者中最胜”;而在这里,则是为了毫无遗漏地完全涵盖一切,才这样说。因为,凡是属于自身存在范畴的有情,无论是无足的……乃至非想非非想者,如来在他们当中都被称为最胜。这里的“他们中”是简别用法的属格,“m”是连音字母。词的分析是:aggo akkhāyati(被称为最胜)。巴利
Kasmā panettha yathā adutiyasutte ‘‘dvipadānaṃ aggo’’ti dvipadānaṃ gahaṇameva akatvā apadādiggahaṇaṃ katanti? Vuccate – adutiyasutte tāva seṭṭhataravasena dvipadaggahaṇameva kataṃ. Imasmiñhi loke seṭṭho nāma uppajjamāno apadacatuppadabahuppadesu na uppajjati, dvipadesuyeva uppajjati. Kataresu dvipadesu? Manussesu ceva devesu ca. Manussesu uppajjamāno sakalalokaṃ vase vattetuṃ samattho buddho hutvā uppajjati. Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuṃ vase vattetuṃ samattho’’ti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.174) vuttaṃ. Devesu uppajjamāno dasasahassilokadhātuṃ vase vattanako mahābrahmā hutvā uppajjati, so tassa kappiyakārako vā ārāmiko vā sampajjati. Iti tatopi seṭṭhataravasenesa ‘‘dvipadānaṃ aggo’’ti tattha vutto, idha pana anavasesapariyādānavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Yāvattakā hi sattā attabhāvapariyāpannā apadā vā…pe… nevasaññīnāsaññino vā, tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, makāro padasandhikaro. Aggo akkhāyatīti padavibhāgo.
果报是最胜的,意思是:对最胜的正等正觉者生起净信的人,他所生起的净信是最胜的、最好的、无上的、达到顶点的,因此,那净信的果报也是最胜的、最好的、无上的、达到顶点的、最广大的、最微妙的。不过,这净信有两种,按世间和出世间的区分。其中,先说世间的——巴利
Aggo vipāko hotīti agge sammāsambuddhe pasannānaṃ yo pasādo, so aggo seṭṭho uttamo koṭibhūto vā, tasmā tassa vipākopi aggo seṭṭho uttamo koṭibhūto uḷāratamo paṇītatamo hoti. So pana pasādo duvidho lokiyalokuttarabhedato. Tesu lokiyassa tāva –
凡是已经皈依佛陀的人,他们都不会堕入恶趣之地;
舍弃人身之后,他们将成就天身。
当人称赞“佛陀”的时候,身体里生起的那种喜。
这喜确实更殊胜,就算拿整个赡部洲来换也比不上。
“一百头象,一百匹马,一百辆骡车,
十万名佩戴宝珠耳环的少女,
它们连迈出一步的十六分之一都抵不上。巴利
‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, devakāyaṃ paripūressanti. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37); ‘‘Buddhoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti; Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenapi jambudīpassa. ‘‘Sataṃ hatthī sataṃ assā, sataṃ assatarī rathā; Sataṃ kaññāsahassāni, āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalā; Ekassa padavītihārassa, kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasiṃ’’. (saṃ. ni. 1.242; cūḷava. 305);
帝释,皈依佛陀确实是很好的。帝释,正是因为皈依佛陀,这里有些众生在身体毁坏、死后,会投生到善趣、天界。他们以十种方面胜过其他天人:天寿、天色、天乐、天誉、天威,以及天界的色、声、香、味、触。巴利
‘‘Sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti. Te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti – dibbena āyunā, dibbena vaṇṇena, dibbena sukhena, dibbena yasena, dibbena ādhipateyyena, dibbehi rūpehi, dibbehi saddehi, dibbehi gandhehi, dibbehi rasehi, dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341) –
像这样,根据这些经文句子,应当了知信心与果报差别之间的关联。因此,应当把这种信心看作既能消除恶趣之苦,又能在善趣生命中带来快乐果报的。而出世间的信心,则能带来沙门果,也能止息轮回之苦。而且,这一切信心都能通过辗转相续,最终止息轮回之苦。因为曾这样说过:巴利
Evamādīnaṃ suttapadānaṃ vasena pasādassa phalavisesayogo veditabbo. Tasmā so apāyadukkhavinivattanena saddhiṃ sampattibhavesu sukhavipākadāyakoti daṭṭhabbo. Lokuttaro pana sāmaññaphalavipākadāyako vaṭṭadukkhavinivattako ca. Sabbopi cāyaṃ pasādo paramparāya vaṭṭadukkhaṃ vinivattetiyeva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,当圣弟子随念自己的信心时,就在那个时刻,他的心不会被贪欲缠住,不会被嗔恨缠住,不会被愚痴缠住,那时他的心是正直的。心正直就会生起欢悦,欢悦就会生起喜……中略……他了知:不再有这种状态了。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ , bhikkhave, samaye ariyasāvako attano saddhaṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosapariyuṭṭhitaṃ, na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti. Ujugatacittassa pāmojjaṃ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati…pe… nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātī’’ti (a. ni. 6.10; 26).
所谓“法”,就是自性法。“有为”,是指由种种因缘聚合、共同造作而成的,所以叫有为,也就是有因缘条件之法。不由任何因和缘造作而成的,就是“无为”,即不依因缘的涅槃。为了与“有为”相对,所以用复数形式说“诸无为”。“离贪在这些法中被说为最上”:在那些有为法和无为法当中,那个被称为离贪的无为法,因为它自性上就是微细、柔和的,是更寂静、更殊胜的,是甚深等的,并且能摧破迷醉等,所以被称为最上、最胜、最尊、最妙。“即此”是虚词,意思是“这个”。“摧破迷醉”等,全都是涅槃的同义词。因为依靠涅槃,一切像我慢、人慢之类的迷醉都被摧破、被压伏;一切像欲贪、渴爱之类的渴爱都被消除;一切像欲爱窟宅之类的窟宅都被断除;一切业轮、烦恼轮、果报轮都被截断;所有一百零八种渴爱全都耗尽;一切烦恼都离染;一切苦都灭尽,所以称为“摧破迷醉……乃至……灭”。再者,那种渴爱通过“有”而使“有”生起,又通过果报把业交织联系在一起,所以叫“缚”。而涅槃中没有这个缚,或者说,证得涅槃的圣者身上没有这个缚,所以叫涅槃。巴利
Dhammāti sabhāvadhammā. Saṅkhatāti samecca sambhuyya paccayehi katāti saṅkhatā, sappaccayadhammā. Hetūhi paccayehi ca na kehici katāti asaṅkhatā, appaccayanibbānaṃ. Saṅkhatānaṃ paṭiyogibhāvena ‘‘asaṅkhatā’’ti puthuvacanaṃ. Virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti tesaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhammānaṃ yo virāgasaṅkhāto asaṅkhatadhammo, so sabhāveneva saṇhasukhumabhāvato santatarapaṇītatarabhāvato gambhīrādibhāvato madanimmadanādibhāvato ca aggaṃ seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ pavaranti vuccati. Yadidanti nipāto, yo ayanti attho. Madanimmadanotiādīni sabbāni nibbānavevacanāniyeva. Tathā hi taṃ āgamma mānamadapurisamadādiko sabbo mado nimmadīyati pamaddīyati, kāmapipāsādikā sabbā pipāsā vinīyati, kāmālayādikā sabbepi ālayā samugghātīyanti, sabbepi kammavaṭṭakilesavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭā upacchijjanti, aṭṭhasatabhedā sabbāpi taṇhā khīyati, sabbepi kilesā virajjanti, sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, tasmā madanimmadano…pe… nirodhoti vuccati. Yā panesā taṇhā bhavena bhavaṃ, phalena kammaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti katvā vānanti vuccati. Taṃ vānaṃ ettha natthi, etasmiṃ vā adhigate ariyapuggalassa na hotīti nibbānaṃ.
“果报最为殊胜”,在这里也是同样的意思——巴利
Aggo vipāko hotīti etthāpi –
凡是已经皈依法的众生……
当人赞叹“法”的时候,身体里生起的那种喜……巴利
‘‘Ye keci dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse…pe…. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37); ‘‘Dhammoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti…pe….
帝释,皈依法确实是好的。帝释,正是因为皈依法的缘故,这里有些人……(中略)……享受到天界的触乐。巴利
‘‘Sādhu kho, devānaminda, dhammaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti. Dhammaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce…pe… dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341) –
应当依据这类经文语句,了知对法的净信与殊胜果报之间的关联。如此,在这里虽然只是依无为法而说其最为殊胜,但为了显示对一切有为法的出离,依圣道也同样能得到这个道理。对此,确实有这样的说法——巴利
Evamādīnaṃ suttapadānaṃ vasena dhamme pasādassa phalavisesayogo veditabbo. Evamettha asaṅkhatadhammavaseneva aggabhāvo āgato, sabbasaṅkhatanissaraṇadassanatthaṃ ariyamaggavasenapi ayamattho labbhateva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,在一切有为法中,八支圣道被称为最上的。巴利
‘‘Yāvatā , bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34).
诸道之中,八支道最殊胜。巴利
‘‘Maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho’’ti ca. (Dha. pa. 273).
“僧或众”是指世间上一切被称为人群、团体的僧或众。“如来声闻僧”是指由八位圣者组成的团体,他们因为见解和戒行相同而和合在一起,这就是如来的声闻僧。“在他们当中被称为最上”是指:凭着自己戒、定、慧、解脱等功德的殊胜,他在这些僧众当中被称为最上、最胜、最尊、最优。“即此”就是指这些。“四双人”是按双来算的:初道者与初果者算第一双,一直到第四道者与第四果者算第四双,这样就有四双人。“八辈人”是按个人来算的:初道者一位、初果者一位,这样算下来共有八辈人。这里“人”和“补特伽罗”是同一个意思,只是为了适应受教化者的根机才这样分别说。“这就是世尊的声闻僧团”是指:上面按双算的四双人,按个人算的八辈人,这就是世尊的声闻僧团。巴利
Saṅghā vā gaṇā vāti janasamūhasaṅkhātā yāvatā loke saṅghā vā gaṇā vā. Tathāgatasāvakasaṅghoti aṭṭhaariyapuggalasamūhasaṅkhāto diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhato tathāgatassa sāvakasaṅgho. Tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti attano sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttiādiguṇavisesena tesaṃ saṅghānaṃ aggo seṭṭho uttamo pavaroti vuccati. Yadidanti yāni imāni. Cattāri purisayugānīti yugaḷavasena paṭhamamaggaṭṭho paṭhamaphalaṭṭhoti idamekaṃ yugaḷaṃ, yāva catutthamaggaṭṭho catutthaphalaṭṭhoti idamekaṃ yugaḷanti evaṃ cattāri purisayugāni. Aṭṭha purisapuggalāti purisapuggalavasena eko paṭhamamaggaṭṭho eko paṭhamaphalaṭṭhoti iminā nayena aṭṭha purisapuggalā. Ettha ca purisoti vā puggaloti vā ekatthāni etāni padāni, veneyyavasena panevaṃ vuttaṃ. Esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅghoti yānimāni yugavasena cattāri purisayugāni, pāṭekkato aṭṭha purisapuggalā, esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho.
在“应受供养”等说法里,把东西带来后应当献供,这就是“献供”;意思是从远处也来,应当布施给持戒的人。这是指四种资具。因为能带来大果报,所以值得接受这种献供,就叫“应受供养”。另一种解释是:从远处也来,甚至一切财产都应在这里献出,值得帝释天等来邀请,所以叫“应受邀请”。婆罗门们所说的“应受邀请之火”,他们相信供在这火里有大果报。如果那火因为供养有大果报而叫“应受邀请”,那么僧团才是真正应受邀请的。因为供养僧团确实有大果报。正如所说——巴利
Āhuneyyotiādīsu ānetvā hunitabbanti āhunaṃ, dūratopi āgantvā sīlavantesu dātabbanti attho. Catunnaṃ paccayānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Mahapphalabhāvakaraṇato taṃ āhunaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yuttoti āhuneyyo. Atha vā dūratopi āgantvā sabbaṃ sāpateyyampi ettha hunitabbaṃ, sakkādīnampi āhavanaṃ arahatīti vā āhavanīyo. Yo cāyaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ āhavanīyo nāma aggi, yattha hutaṃ mahapphalanti tesaṃ laddhi, so ce hutassa mahapphalatāya āhavanīyo, saṅghova āhavanīyo. Saṅghe hutañhi mahapphalaṃ hoti. Yathāha –
假如有人哪怕在树林里侍奉火神整整一百年,
哪怕只是片刻,也应当供养一位已修心有成的人;
哪怕只是片刻间供养一位有修行的人,也胜过用一百年做供奉祭祀。巴利
‘‘Yo ca vassasataṃ jantu, aggiṃ paricare vane; Ekañca bhāvitattānaṃ, muhuttamapi pūjaye; Sā eva pūjanā seyyo, yañce vassasataṃ huta’’nti. (dha. pa. 107);
这件事在其他部派的经典里写作“āhavanīyo”,而在这里则用“āhuneyyo”这个词来表达,两者在含义上是同一个,只是在文字上有一点小差别,所以就这样作了义理上的解释。巴利
Tayidaṃ nikāyantare ‘‘āhavanīyo’’ti padaṃ idha ‘‘āhuneyyo’’ti iminā padena atthato ekaṃ, byañjanato pana kiñcimattameva nānaṃ, tasmā evamatthavaṇṇanā katā.
应受客供者(pāhuneyya)在这里,“客供”(pāhuna)指的是:为从四面八方远道而来的亲族朋友,以恭敬心特意准备的招待来客的布施。即便把那份客供搁置一旁,那样的客供也只应该布施给僧伽。因为事实上,即使在一佛住世期间,这种情况也能见到,而且从未间断。这里这个词的意思是:由于具备能让人感到可爱、可意的诸法,所以对他行客供是恰当的,他领受客供也是恰当的,因此称为“应受客供者”。有些版本中这个词写作“pāhavanīyo”(应受供养),他们的看法是:因为僧伽值得受到最先的礼敬,所以应该先把僧伽请来,在这里对僧伽行供养,因此叫“应受供养”;或者因为僧伽值得以一切方式献供,所以叫“应受供养”。而在这里,正是基于同样的义理,才称为“应受客供者”。巴利
Pāhuneyyoti ettha pana pāhunaṃ vuccati disāvidisato āgatānaṃ piyamanāpānaṃ ñātimittānaṃ atthāya sakkārena paṭiyattaṃ āgantukadānaṃ, tampi ṭhapetvā te tathārūpe pāhunake saṅghasseva dātuṃ yuttaṃ. Tathā hesa ekabuddhantarepi dissati abbokiṇṇañca. Ayaṃ panettha padattho – ‘‘piyamanāpattakarehi dhammehi samannāgato’’ti evaṃ pāhunamassa dātuṃ yuttaṃ, pāhunañca paṭiggahetuṃ yuttoti pāhuneyyo. Yesaṃ pana pāhavanīyoti pāḷi, tesaṃ yasmā saṅgho pubbakāraṃ arahati, tasmā saṅgho sabbapaṭhamaṃ ānetvā ettha hunitabbanti pāhavanīyo, sabbappakārena vā āhavanaṃ arahatīti pāhavanīyo. Svāyamidha teneva atthena pāhuneyyoti vuccati.
“供养”是指相信有他世而应当布施的施物。这份供养值得(僧伽接受),或者说,由于能令布施成就大果报、从而使布施得以清净,它利益于供养,所以称为“应供者”。一切世间众生把双手合举到头顶所行的合掌礼,值得(僧伽)承受,所以称为“应合掌者”。所谓“世间无上的福田”,是指对一切世间来说无可比拟的、能让福德生长的地方。就像红稻或大麦生长的地方被称为“红稻田”“麦田”一样,僧伽就是包括天神在内的世间中让福德生长的地方。因为正是依靠僧伽,世间种种利益与安乐的福德才得以生长,所以僧伽是“世间无上的福田”。这里也同样说道:巴利
‘‘Dakkhiṇā’’ti paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbadānaṃ, taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ arahati dakkhiṇāya vā hito mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena visodhanatoti dakkhiṇeyyo. Ubho hatthe sirasi patiṭṭhapetvā sabbalokena kariyamānaṃ añjalikammaṃ arahatīti añjalikaraṇīyo. Anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassāti sabbalokassa asadisaṃ puññavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā hi rattasālīnaṃ vā yavānaṃ vā virūhanaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘rattasālikkhettaṃ yavakkhetta’’nti vuccati, evaṃ saṅgho sadevakassa lokassa puññavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṅghaṃ nissāya hi lokassa nānappakārahitasukhanibbattakāni puññāni virūhanti, tasmā saṅgho anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassa. Idhāpi –
凡是已经皈依僧团、以僧团为依靠的人……
当人称赞“僧伽”时,身体里生起的那种喜……巴利
‘‘Ye keci saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse…pe…. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37); ‘‘Saṅghoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti…pe…’’.
帝释,皈依僧团确实是好的;帝释,正是因为皈依僧团的缘故……中略……以天界的触尘……巴利
‘‘Sādhu kho, devānaminda, saṅghaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, saṅghaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho devānaminda…pe… dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341) –
依靠这些经文开头的语句,可以知道对僧团的净信会带来殊胜的果报关联,因此应当了解它的“最上”和“最上果报”。同样,获得无上成就、从第七世起彻底断除轮回之苦、证得无上安乐等,通过这样成办广大殊胜果报的方式,应当了解其最上果报。巴利
Ādīnaṃ suttapadānaṃ vasena saṅghe pasādassa phalavisesayogo, tenassa aggatā aggavipākatā ca veditabbā. Tathā anuttariyapaṭilābho sattamabhavādito paṭṭhāya vaṭṭadukkhasamucchedo anuttarasukhādhigamoti evamādiuḷāraphalanipphādanavasena aggavipākatā veditabbā.
在偈颂中,“最胜”是指对最胜的三宝,或者因为具有最胜的状态而对之生起净信的人。“最胜的法”是指了知并证知三宝最胜本质的人——也就是佛陀极善觉悟的本质、正法极善法性的本质、僧伽极善修行的本质,这是三宝不共于他者、最殊胜的本质;或者是指了知并证知十力等、善说性、善修行性等功德本质的人。这样以共通的方式显示了最胜净信的所依之后,现在为了以不共的方式分别显示它,而说“于最胜的佛”等句。其中,“净信者”是指以不动净信和其他净信而净信、已倾向的人。“于离贪与寂灭中”是指于离贪和寂灭中,也就是作为一切贪的究竟离贪之因和一切烦恼的究竟寂灭之因。“于乐中”是指于具有轮回苦灭尽的状态和诸行寂灭乐的状态的安乐中。巴利
Gāthāsu aggatoti agge ratanattaye, aggabhāvato vā pasannānaṃ. Aggaṃ dhammanti aggasabhāvaṃ buddhasubuddhataṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiṃ ratanattayassa anaññasādhāraṇaṃ uttamasabhāvaṃ , dasabalādisvākkhātatādisuppaṭipannatādiguṇasabhāvaṃ vā vijānataṃ vijānantānaṃ. Evaṃ sādhāraṇato aggappasādavatthuṃ dassetvā idāni asādhāraṇato taṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘agge buddhe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pasannānanti aveccappasādena itarappasādena ca pasannānaṃ adhimuttānaṃ. Virāgūpasameti virāge upasame ca, sabbassa rāgassa sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ accantavirāgahetubhūte accantaupasamahetubhūte cāti attho. Sukheti vaṭṭadukkhakkhayabhāvena saṅkhārūpasamasukhabhāvena ca sukhe.
“在最胜者中行布施”的意思是:向最胜的三宝行布施,把应当施舍的东西舍出去。其中,有人以四种资具侍奉、供养、恭敬还在世的世尊;也有人为了已经般涅槃的世尊,去侍奉、供养、恭敬舍利塔等,这就叫作“对佛陀行布施”。有人心想“我们要供养法”,于是以四种资具侍奉、供养、恭敬那些持法的人,并让正法长久住世,这就叫作“对法行布施”。同样,有人以四种资具侍奉、供养、恭敬圣僧伽,又为了圣僧伽而对其他僧众也同样去做,这就叫作“对僧伽行布施”。“最胜福德增长”:如此以对三宝生起的净信心,行广大施舍和广大供养恭敬的人,日复一日地积集最胜、广大的善法。现在,为了显示那福德的殊胜果报之殊胜性,而说“最胜寿”等。其中,“最胜寿”是指天界或人界中最胜、最殊妙的寿命。“增长”是指向上再向上地增长。“色”是指容貌圆满。“誉”是指眷属圆满。“称”是指赞叹之声。“乐”是指身体和心的快乐。“力”是指身力和智力。巴利
Aggasmiṃ dānaṃ dadatanti agge ratanattaye dānaṃ dentānaṃ deyyadhammaṃ pariccajantānaṃ. Tattha dharamānaṃ bhagavantaṃ catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahantā pūjentā sakkarontā parinibbutañca bhagavantaṃ uddissa dhātucetiyādike upaṭṭhahantā pūjentā sakkarontā buddhe dānaṃ dadanti nāma. ‘‘Dhammaṃ pūjessāmā’’ti dhammadhare puggale catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahantā pūjentā sakkarontā dhammañca ciraṭṭhitikaṃ karontā dhamme dānaṃ dadanti nāma. Tathā ariyasaṅghaṃ catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahantā pūjentā sakkarontā taṃ uddissa itarasmimpi tathā paṭipajjantā saṅghe dānaṃ dadanti nāma. Aggaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti evaṃ ratanattaye pasannena cetasā uḷāraṃ pariccāgaṃ uḷārañca pūjāsakkāraṃ pavattentānaṃ divase divase aggaṃ uḷāraṃ kusalaṃ upacīyati. Idāni tassa puññassa aggavipākatāya aggabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aggaṃ āyū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha aggaṃ āyūti dibbaṃ vā mānusaṃ vā aggaṃ uḷāratamaṃ āyu. Pavaḍḍhatīti uparūpari brūhati. Vaṇṇoti rūpasampadā. Yasoti parivārasampadā. Kittīti thutighoso. Sukhanti kāyikaṃ cetasikañca sukhaṃ. Balanti kāyabalaṃ ñāṇabalañca.
对最胜者布施的人,就是对最胜的三宝作布施;或者也可以说,是对最胜的应施之物做了广大的布施之后,在其中让福德运转起来的人。具足最胜法的人,就是靠着最胜的净信法和布施等法而安住、具备,与不动摇的净信相应;或者也可以说,是具备了由那布施之果所生、令众人喜爱悦意等法的人。达到最胜的人欢喜,意思是无论投生在哪一类众生当中,就在那里获得了最胜的状态、最上的地位;或者证得了最胜的出世间的道与果,因此欢喜、欣悦、满足。巴利
Aggassa dātāti aggassa ratanattayassa dātā, atha vā aggassa deyyadhammassa dānaṃ uḷāraṃ katvā tattha puññaṃ pavattetā. Aggadhammasamāhitoti aggena pasādadhammena dānādidhammena ca samāhito samannāgato acalappasādayutto, tassa vā vipākabhūtehi bahujanassa piyamanāpatādidhammehi yutto. Aggappatto pamodatīti yattha yattha sattanikāye uppanno, tattha tattha aggabhāvaṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ adhigato, aggabhāvaṃ vā lokuttaramaggaphalaṃ adhigato pamodati abhiramati paritussatīti.
第二部 谋生方式经的注释巴利
2. Jīvikasuttavaṇṇanā
91 91. 第二经是因事缘而说的。有一次,世尊住在迦毗罗卫的尼拘律园中,那时比丘们正在为客比丘铺设住处、收拾衣钵,而沙弥们在分配利养的地方,领取到来者的利养,发出大声喧闹。世尊听到后,就把那些比丘遣散了。据说他们都是新近才来到这法与律中的。大梵天知道这件事后,就前来为那些被遣散的比丘向世尊请求摄受,说:“尊者,请世尊欢喜比丘僧团!”世尊答应了。于是大梵天心想:“我已得到世尊的许可了。”便礼敬世尊,右绕而去。之后,世尊向阿难尊者示意:“让比丘僧团来吧。”于是,那些比丘被阿难尊者叫来,来到世尊面前,面带惭色,坐在一边。世尊思量什么开示适合他们,心想:“他们是因为贪图利养才被遣散的,关于钵食正命的开示对他们合适。”于是开示了这段法:“比丘们,这是极端……”巴利
91. Dutiyaṃ aṭṭhuppattivasena desitaṃ. Ekasmiñhi samaye bhagavati kapilavatthusmiṃ nigrodhārāme viharante bhikkhū āgantukabhikkhūnaṃ senāsanāni paññāpentā pattacīvarāni paṭisāmentā sāmaṇerā ca lābhabhājanīyaṭṭhāne sampattasampattānaṃ lābhaṃ gaṇhantā uccāsaddā mahāsaddā ahesuṃ. Taṃ sutvā bhagavā bhikkhū paṇāmesi. Te kira sabbeva navā adhunāgatā imaṃ dhammavinayaṃ. Taṃ ñatvā mahābrahmā āgantvā ‘‘abhinandatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅgha’’nti (ma. ni. 2.158) tesaṃ paṇāmitabhikkhūnaṃ anuggaṇhanaṃ yāci. Bhagavā tassa okāsaṃ akāsi. Atha mahābrahmā ‘‘katāvakāso khomhi bhagavatā’’ti bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Atha bhagavā ‘‘bhikkhusaṅgho āgacchatū’’ti ānandattherassa ākāraṃ dassesi. Atha te bhikkhū ānandattherena pakkositā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā sārajjamānarūpā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Bhagavā tesaṃ sappāyadesanaṃ vīmaṃsanto ‘‘ime āmisahetu paṇāmitā, piṇḍiyālopadhammadesanā nesaṃ sappāyā’’ti cintetvā ‘‘antamidaṃ, bhikkhave’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ desesi.
在这里,“anta”这个词出现在“诸比丘,有些沙门婆罗门是前际论者、持前际见者”这类语句中时,意思是“开端”;在“他给苦作了终结,这个世界有边、周圆”这类语句中,意思是“界限”;在“青草边、道路边、岩石边”这类语句中,意思是“边际”;在“肠与肠间膜”这类语句中,意思是“肠间膜”;在“他们游走于世间,被随从簇拥,内里不净,外表光鲜”这类语句中,意思是“内部”;在“有些青莲花、红莲花或白莲花,生于水中,长于水中,随水上升,内里深深潜藏滋养”这类语句中,意思是“内部”。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ antasaddo ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.29) koṭṭhāse āgato. ‘‘Antamakāsi dukkhassa, antavā ayaṃ loko parivaṭumo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.55) paricchede. ‘‘Haritantaṃ vā pathantaṃ vā selantaṃ vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.304) mariyādāyaṃ. ‘‘Antaṃ antaguṇa’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.377; khu. pā. 3.dvattiṃsākāra) sarīrāvayave ‘‘caranti loke parivārachannā, anto asuddhā bahi sobhamānā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.122; mahāni. 191) citte. ‘‘Appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṃvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni anto nimuggaposīnī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.69; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 9) abbhantare.
野兽当中,豺狼最差;鸟类当中,则是乌鸦。
蓖麻是树丛中最低劣的,三种怪物凑到了一起。巴利
‘‘Migānaṃ koṭṭhuko anto, pakkhīnaṃ pana vāyaso; Eraṇḍo anto rukkhānaṃ, tayo antā samāgatā’’ti. (jā. 1.3.135) –
在这些词当中,“低劣”就是指下等。这里也同样应该理解为低劣。所以,“比丘们,这是谋生方式中的极端”意思是:比丘们,这是各种谋生方式中最极端、最低下、最卑劣的,是一切活命方式中最下贱的。“也就是托钵”的意思是:以寻找团食、沿街乞食来维持生活的人的活法。这里词的含义是这样:为了团食而到处奔走,所以叫“托钵者”;他的这种行为就叫“托钵”,意思就是以寻找团食来活命。巴利
Ādīsu lāmake. Idhāpi lāmake eva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā antamidaṃ bhikkhave jīvikānanti bhikkhave idaṃ jīvikānaṃ antaṃ pacchimaṃ lāmakaṃ, sabbanihīnaṃ jīvitanti attho. Yadidaṃ piṇḍolyanti yaṃ idaṃ piṇḍapariyesanena bhikkhācariyāya jīvikaṃ kappentassa jīvitaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha padattho – piṇḍāya ulatīti piṇḍolo, tassa kammaṃ piṇḍolyaṃ, piṇḍapariyesanena jīvikāti attho.
咒骂就是辱骂。因为发怒的人会这样骂自己的仇敌:“你该穿着破布片,手里拿着破碗,到处讨饭过日子。”或者骂:“你有什么做不出来的?明明有这么大的力气和本事,却丢掉惭愧心,像个穷叫花子一样,拿着钵到处游荡。”这也是辱骂。而“此即所谓”的意思是:那就像被咒骂一样的托钵生活。善男子们为了义利而来出家,是指在我的教法中,出身良家的人和行为端正的良家子弟,是为了义利、为了正当的理由,基于正当的动机而来出家修行的。巴利
Abhisāpoti akkoso. Kupitā hi manussā attano paccatthikaṃ ‘‘pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ nivāsetvā kapālahattho piṇḍaṃ pariyesamāno careyyāsī’’ti akkosanti. Atha vā ‘‘kiṃ tuyhaṃ akātabbaṃ atthi, yo tvaṃ evaṃ balavīriyūpapannopi hirottappaṃ pahāya kapaṇo piṇḍolo vicarasi pattapāṇī’’ti evampi akkosantiyeva. Tañcakho etanti taṃ etaṃ abhisapampi samānaṃ piṇḍolyaṃ. Kulaputtā upenti atthavasikāti mama sāsane jātikulaputtā ca ācārakulaputtā ca atthavasikā kāraṇavasikā hutvā kāraṇavasaṃ paṭicca upenti upagacchanti.
在“国王所押”等说法中,有些人吃了国王的东西,被国王关进牢里,后来逃出来出家,因为他们是被国王抓去关押的,所以叫“国王所押”。还有些人在森林里被盗贼抓住,眼看一些人要被杀,另一些人就说:“主人,如果你们放我们走,我们不居家,而是去出家。我们会到处做供养佛陀等功德,再把功德回向给你们。”他们被放走后去出家了,因为他们是被盗贼带到可能被杀的地步,所以叫“贼所押”。还有些人借了债还不起,逃出来出家,这些人叫“为债所迫”。然而,善男子们在我的教法里行这托钵,并不是因为被国王所押……也不是因为被生计败坏所迫,而是因为“我们陷在生……愿得以明了”,所以才行托钵。这就是这些句子之间的关联。巴利
Rājābhinītātiādīsu ye rañño santakaṃ khāditvā raññā bandhanāgāre bandhāpitā palāyitvā pabbajanti, te raññā bandhanaṃ abhinītattā rājābhinītā nāma. Ye pana corehi aṭaviyaṃ gahetvā ekaccesu māriyamānesu ekacce ‘‘mayaṃ sāmi tumhehi vissaṭṭhā gehaṃ anajjhāvasitvā pabbajissāma, tattha tattha yaṃ yaṃ buddhapūjādipuññaṃ karissāma, tato tato tumhākaṃ pattiṃ dassāmā’’ti tehi vissaṭṭhā pabbajanti, te corābhinītā nāma corehi māretabbataṃ abhinītattā. Ye pana iṇaṃ gahetvā paṭidātuṃ asakkontā palāyitvā pabbajanti, te iṇaṭṭā nāma. Tañca kho etaṃ piṇḍolyaṃ kulaputtā mama sāsane neva rājābhinītā…pe… na ājīvikāpakatā upenti, apica kho ‘‘otiṇṇamhā jātiyā…pe… paññāyethā’’ti upentīti padasambandho.
在这里,“陷入”的意思是我们已经陷进去了。关于“生”等词:在各种有情众中,诸蕴最初产生就是生,诸蕴成熟就是老,诸蕴坏灭就是死。被亲族厄运、疾病、财产损失、戒行败坏、见解错误等触及后,内心的灼烧、内在的焦煎就是愁;被这些触及后,口中发出的乱语就是悲叹。不可意的触境撞击身体时,身体受到的逼迫就是苦;对可嗔恨的事,内心受到伤害、内心被逼迫就是忧。被亲族厄运等触及后,连悲叹也无法忍受,心中生起的极度焦灼、极度忧苦就是绝望。被这些生等淹没,就是被苦淹没,就是被这些生等之苦从内部渗入。被苦所制伏,就是被那些苦和苦的所依所压倒。因为生等作为苦的所依,所以是苦;而愁、悲叹、苦、忧、绝望,因为本质上就是苦,所以也是苦。但愿……能够了知……也就是说,但愿能对这整个轮回苦聚的界限划定、最终终结,也能够了知。巴利
Tattha otiṇṇamhāti otiṇṇā amhā. Jātiyātiādīsu tamhi tamhi sattanikāye khandhānaṃ paṭhamābhinibbatti jāti, paripāko jarā, bhedo maraṇaṃ. Ñātirogabhogasīladiṭṭhibyasanehi phuṭṭhassa santāpo anto nijjhānaṃ soko, tehi phuṭṭhassa vacīvippalāpo paridevo. Aniṭṭhaphoṭṭhabbapaṭihatakāyassa kāyapīḷanaṃ dukkhaṃ, āghātavatthūsu upahatacittassa cetopīḷanaṃ domanassaṃ. Ñātibyasanādīhi eva phuṭṭhassa paridevenapi adhivāsetuṃ asamatthassa cittasantāpasamuṭṭhito bhuso āyāso upāyāso. Etehi jātiādīhi otiṇṇā dukkhotiṇṇā, tehi jātiādidukkhehi anto anupaviṭṭhā. Dukkhaparetāti tehi dukkhadukkhavatthūhi abhibhūtā. Jātiādayo hi dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhā, dukkhabhāvato ca sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā dukkhāti. Appeva nāma…pe… paññāyethāti imassa sakalassa vaṭṭadukkharāsissa paricchedakaraṇaṃ osānakiriyā api nāma paññāyeyya.
像这样,他成了有贪欲的人。这句话是为了说明:有位良家子最初生起“我要灭尽苦”的心而出家,后来却没办法让他的出家修行达到那样的程度。其中,“有贪欲的人”是指贪求他人财物的人。“极重染著”是指强烈的贪染。“心怀嗔害”是指因为嗔恨而内心腐坏、心意败坏。“恶意思维”是指像头角锋利的暴牛一样,以伤害他人为本质的凶恶心意。“忘失正念”是指像把饭丢下引来乌鸦、把肉丢下引来野狗那样,正念丢失了,在这里做过的事,在这里记不得。“不正知”是指没有智慧,不能简择五蕴等诸法。“心不定”是指像急流中系缚的船,心神不宁、无法安稳。“乱心”是指像路上受惊之鹿,心意迷乱散逸。“不护根门”是指如在家人,因无有防护,面对眷属、财产时六根敞开、不知收敛,因而成为不守护根门之人。巴利
So ca hoti abhijjhālūti idaṃ yo kulaputto ‘‘dukkhassantaṃ karissāmī’’ti pubbe cittaṃ uppādetvā pabbajito aparabhāge taṃ pabbajjaṃ tathārūpaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijjhālūti parabhaṇḍānaṃ abhijjhāyitā. Tibbasārāgoti balavarāgo. Byāpannacittoti byāpādena pūtibhūtattā vipannacitto. Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappoti tikhiṇasiṅgo viya caṇḍagoṇo paresaṃ upaghātavasena duṭṭhacitto. Muṭṭhassatīti bhattanikkhittakāko viya, maṃsanikkhittasunakho viya ca naṭṭhassati, idha kataṃ ettha na sarati. Asampajānoti nippañño khandhādiparicchedarahito. Asamāhitoti caṇḍasote baddhanāvā viya asaṇṭhito. Vibbhantacittoti panthāruḷhamigo viya bhantamano. Pākatindriyoti yathā gihī saṃvarābhāvena pariggahaparijane olokenti asaṃvutindriyā, evaṃ asaṃvutindriyo hoti.
“腐尸焦木”是指火化尸体之处烧焦的木头。“两端燃烧、中间涂粪”是说一根大约八指长的木头,两端都在燃烧,中间涂着粪便。“既非村中”的意思是:如果这根木头能用来做轭、犁、椽子、翼板、绳端之类的东西,那它在村里就能当柴火用;如果能用来铺田间小屋的柴床或卧床之类,那它在林子里也能当柴火用。但因为它两端燃烧、中间沾粪,两处都用不上,所以才这么说。“我作此譬喻”是说,我用这个像腐尸焦木一样的譬喻,来说明前面所说的那种人。“从在家受用中退失”是说,当在家人的遗产被分配时,本该得到的那份受用却失去了,这就是从在家受用中退失。“沙门义利”是指依止亲教师和轨范师的教导,通过教理通达和证悟通达所应获得的沙门利益,他却不能圆满成就。应当知道,大师并非针对破戒者而举这个譬喻,而是针对那些戒行清净却懈怠、内心被贪欲等过失所染污的人而举的。巴利
Chavālātanti chavānaṃ daḍḍhaṭṭhāne alātaṃ. Ubhatopadittaṃ majjhe gūthagatanti pamāṇena aṭṭhaṅgulamattaṃ ubhato dvīsu koṭīsu ādittaṃ majjhe gūthamakkhitaṃ. Neva gāmeti sace hi taṃ yuganaṅgalagopānasipakkhapāsakādīnaṃ atthāya upanetuṃ sakkā assa gāme kaṭṭhatthaṃ phareyya. Sace khettakuṭiyā kaṭṭhattharamañcakādīnaṃ atthāya upanetuṃ sakkā assa, araññe kaṭṭhatthaṃ phareyya. Yasmā pana ubhayatthāpi na sakkā, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathūpamāhanti tathūpamaṃ chavālātasadisaṃ ahaṃ imaṃ yathāvuttapuggalaṃ vadāmi. Gihibhogā ca parihīnoti yo agāre vasantehi gihīhi dāyajje bhājiyamāne aññathā ca bhogo laddhabbo assa, tato ca parihīno. Sāmaññatthañcāti ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā pariyattipaṭivedhavasena pattabbaṃ sāmaññatthañca na paripūreti. Imaṃ pana upamaṃ satthā na dussīlassa vasena āhari , parisuddhasīlassa pana alasassa abhijjhādīhi dosehi dūsitacittassa puggalassa vasena āharīti veditabbaṃ.
在偈颂里说“在家人的享乐”,是指感官欲乐的享受。“退失”就是失去。“沙门义”是指证悟上的多闻和教理上的多闻。那样的人因为懈怠,没法听闻未曾听闻的法,也没法让已听闻的法变得清净。“极恶运者”就是运气极差、不吉祥、像黑耳不祥之人那样的人。“正在毁坏”就是正在消亡。“散坏”就是散落、破坏。这一切都是针对未来沙门义无法生起而说的。“像腐尸焦木一样消亡”,是说那样的人就像前面说的腐尸焦木一样,对谁都用不上,因为两边都脱落了,就这样消亡。如此,通过显示“即使身语没有违犯,但不净化内心的人也会这样消亡,更何况已经违犯的破戒者”,指出了破戒者的过患——他们将堕入苦处。大师为了让众生远离他们,接着用“袈裟绕颈”等两首偈颂来说,其中的含义下面已经讲过了。巴利
Gāthāsu gihibhogāti kāmasukhasambhogato. Parihīnoti jīno. Sāmaññatthanti paṭivedhabāhusaccañceva pariyattibāhusaccañca. Tādiso hi asutaṃ sotuṃ sutaṃ pariyodāpetuṃ na sakkoti alasabhāvato. Duṭṭhu bhagoti dubbhago, alakkhiko kāḷakaṇṇipuriso. Paridhaṃsamānoti vinassamāno. Pakiretīti vikireti viddhaṃseti. Sabbametaṃ bhāvino sāmaññatthassa anuppādanameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Chavālātaṃva nassatīti so tādiso puggalo yathāvuttaṃ chavālātaṃ viya kassaci anupayujjamāno eva nassati ubhato paribhaṭṭhabhāvato. Evaṃ ‘‘kāyavācāhi akatavītikkamopi cittaṃ avisodhento nassati, pageva katavītikkamo dussīlo’’ti tassa apāyadukkhabhāgibhāvadassanena dussīle ādīnavaṃ dassetvā tato satte vivecetukāmo ‘‘kāsāvakaṇṭhā’’tiādinā gāthādvayamāha. Tassattho heṭṭhā vutto eva.
《僧伽帝角经》的注疏巴利
3. Saṅghāṭikaṇṇasuttavaṇṇanā
92 在第三部经的注释中,“僧伽梨角”指的是袈裟的边角。“抓住”就是拉住、触碰。“随逐他”意思是就会跟在他后面。“这段话要说明的是:‘比丘们,假如这里有个比丘,用手抓住我所披的善逝大衣的衣角,像这样跟着我走,以这种方式住得离我很近。’”“将足置于足”是指:在我行走时,我刚从落脚的地方抬脚,他紧接着就把自己的脚放在我踩过的地方。这两者都说明:“他希望在站立、行走等一切姿势中都不离开我,时时刻刻都住在我身边。”然而,如果那位比丘不圆满实践我所教导的修行之道,那么他离我很远,我也离他很远。借此,世尊指出:用肉眼看见如来、与如来的色身共住,是没有意义的;只有以智慧之眼看见法、与法身共住,才是真正的标准。因此世尊说:“比丘们,那位比丘没有看见法,没有看见法的人也就没有看见我。”这里所说的“法”,是指九种出世间法。而内心被贪欲等过失所染污的人,是无法看见法的,所以由于看不见法,他也就看不见法身。正如经文所说:巴利
92. Tatiye saṅghāṭikaṇṇeti cīvarakoṭiyaṃ. Gahetvāti parāmasitvā. Anubandho assāti anugato bhaveyya. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘bhikkhave, idhekacco bhikkhu attano hatthena mayā pārutassa sugatamahācīvarassa kaṇṇe parāmasanto viya maṃ anugaccheyya, evaṃ mayhaṃ āsannataro hutvā vihareyyā’’ti. Pāde pādaṃ nikkhipantoti gacchantassa mama pāde pādaṃ nikkhittaṭṭhāne pāduddhāraṇānantaraṃ attano pādaṃ nikkhipanto. Ubhayenāpi ‘‘ṭhānagamanādīsu avijahanto sabbakālaṃ mayhaṃ samīpe eva vihareyya cepī’’ti dasseti. So ārakāva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassāti so bhikkhu mayā vuttaṃ paṭipadaṃ apūrento mama dūreyeva, ahañca tassa dūreyeva. Etena maṃsacakkhunā tathāgatadassanaṃ rūpakāyasamodhānañca akāraṇaṃ, ñāṇacakkhunāva dassanaṃ dhammakāyasamodhānameva ca pamāṇanti dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘dhammañhi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na passati, dhammaṃ apassanto na maṃ passatī’’ti. Tattha dhammo nāma navavidho lokuttaradhammo. So ca abhijjhādīhi dūsitacittena na sakkā passituṃ, tasmā dhammassa adassanato dhammakāyañca na passatīti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
婆迦梨,你看着这具腐烂发臭的身体有什么用?婆迦梨,见到法的人就是见到我,见到我的人就是见到法。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ te, vakkali, iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena? Yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati so maṃ passati; yo maṃ passati, so dhammaṃ passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.87).
成为法者,成为梵者。巴利
‘‘Dhammabhūto brahmabhūto’’ti (ma. ni. 1.203; paṭi. ma. 3.5) ca.
“法身也是如此,梵身也是如此”(《长部》3.118)等等。巴利
‘‘Dhammakāyo itipi, brahmakāyo itipī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.118) ca ādi.
“在百由旬处”是指在百由旬的地方,意思是百由旬的尽头。其余部分应当按与前面相反的方式来理解。而他因为证得圣道,应当看作具备无贪等状态。巴利
Yojanasateti yojanasate padese, yojanasatamatthaketi attho. Sesaṃ vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ. Ariyamaggādhigamavasena cassa anabhijjhāluādibhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
在偈颂里,“大欲者”是指对诸欲有强烈贪著,所以叫大欲者。“有劳苦者”是指因为心念被污染,对众生怀有嗔恨,又因为大欲而得不到想要的东西,所以有劳苦。“随贪逐流者”是指像成了名叫“贪欲”的渴爱的奴仆一样,跟着它走。“未寂灭者”是指被贪等烦恼的炽热所压倒,所以没有寂灭。“贪婪者”是指对色等境界不断期盼,所以贪婪。你看,差距有多远:对于无贪欲者、已寂灭者、离贪者、正自觉者,即使就在附近,可那大欲、有劳苦、随贪逐流、未寂灭、贪婪的愚痴凡夫,从法性上来说离得有多远,你就看看那种远吧,甚至连说都很难说清楚——这就是这段话的意思。正如所说的:巴利
Gāthāsu mahicchoti kāmesu tibbasārāgatāya mahāiccho. Vighātavāti paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappatāya sattesu āghātavasena mahicchatāya icchitālābhena ca vighātavā. Ejānugoti ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya dāso viya hutvā taṃ anugacchanto. Rāgādikilesapariḷāhābhibhavena anibbuto. Rūpādivisayānaṃ abhikaṅkhanena giddho. Passa yāvañca ārakāti anejassa nibbutassa vītagedhassa sammāsambuddhassa okāsavasena samīpepi samāno mahiccho vighātavā ejānugo anibbuto giddho bālaputhujjano dhammasabhāvato yattakaṃ dūre, tassa so dūrabhāvo passa, vattumpi na sukaranti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ –
天空遥远,大地也遥远,
彼岸的大海那样遥远;
因此,人们说,那比这还要远得多。
善人的法和不善人的法,大王啊!巴利
‘‘Nabhañca dūre pathavī ca dūre, Pāraṃ samuddassa tathāhu dūre; Tato have dūrataraṃ vadanti, Satañca dhammo asatañca rājā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.47; jā. 2.21.414);
“以胜智了知法”:在前分阶段,以所知遍知、审度遍知等相应方式,对四圣谛法已了知、已知。“以了知法”:在后分阶段,以道智依遍知等方式,如实地、在应有的范围内了知这同一个法。“是智者”:因为证悟和多闻而成为智者。“如无风处的湖”:就像在无风的地方,湖水不动摇、远离烦恼的扰动而寂止;正如那湖水在无风处不被风吹动,平静安住,同样,这位一切烦恼都已止息、远离烦恼动摇的人,依阿罗汉果定而寂止,一切时中本性寂静。“无动摇者”:这位具有无动摇等本性的阿罗汉,对于具有无动摇等本性的正等正觉者来说,即使从处所上看很远,从法性上看却并不远,就在近处。巴利
Dhammamabhiññāyāti catusaccadhammaṃ abhiññāya aññāya ñātatīraṇapariññāhi yathārahaṃ pubbabhāge jānitvā. Dhammamaññāyāti tameva dhammaṃ aparabhāge maggañāṇena pariññādivasena yathāmariyādaṃ jānitvā. Paṇḍitoti paṭivedhabāhusaccena paṇḍito. Rahadova nivāte cāti nivātaṭṭhāne rahado viya anejo kilesacalanarahito upasammati, yathā so rahado nivātaṭṭhāne vātena anabbhāhato sannisinnova hoti, evaṃ ayampi sabbathāpi paṭippassaddhakileso kilesacalanarahito arahattaphalasamādhinā vūpasammati, sabbakālaṃ upasantasabhāvova hoti. Anejoti so evaṃ anejādisabhāvo arahā anejādisabhāvassa sammāsambuddhassa okāsato dūrepi samāno dhammasabhāvato adūre santike evāti.
第四《火经》的注释巴利
4. Aggisuttavaṇṇanā
93 93. 在第四经中,火是燃烧的意思;贪本身就是火,所以叫贪火。因为贪生起时会燃烧、烧灼众生,所以称为火。其余两种(嗔和痴)也是同样的道理。其中,就像火依靠什么燃料生起,就烧尽那燃料,并产生强烈的热恼一样,这些贪等也是如此:它们在哪个心相续中自身生起,就烧尽那个心相续,产生强烈且难以熄灭的热恼。其中,被贪的热恼灼烧内心、因求不得苦而死去的有情,数量无法计算。以上就是贪的燃烧性质。至于嗔的燃烧,特别以心恼怒的天人为例子;痴的燃烧,则以游戏放逸的天人为例子。因为那些天人由于痴而失去正念,所以沉浸在游戏中而错过了进食的时间,因此死去。以上就是贪等在此生中的燃烧情形。至于来世的燃烧,则是通过驱使众生投生到地狱等处,更加恐怖且难以忍受。这个道理应当通过燃烧的法门来阐明。巴利
93. Catutthe anudahanaṭṭhena aggi, rāgo eva aggi rāgaggi. Rāgo hi uppajjamāno satte anudahati jhāpeti, tasmā ‘‘aggī’’ti vuccati. Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo. Tattha yathā aggi yadeva indhanaṃ nissāya uppajjati, taṃ nidahati, mahāpariḷāho ca hoti, evamimepi rāgādayo yasmiṃ santāne sayaṃ uppannā, taṃ nidahanti, mahāpariḷāhā ca honti dunnibbāpayā. Tesu rāgapariḷāhena santattahadayānaṃ icchitālābhadukkhena maraṇappattānaṃ sattānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi. Ayaṃ tāva rāgassa anudahanatā. Dosassa pana anudahanatāya visesato manopadosikā devā, mohassa anudahanatāya khiḍḍāpadosikā devā ca nidassanaṃ. Mohavasena hi tesaṃ satisammoso hoti, tasmā khiḍḍāvasena āhāravelaṃ ativattentā kālaṃ karonti. Ayaṃ tāva rāgādīnaṃ diṭṭhadhammiko anudahanabhāvo. Samparāyiko pana nirayādīsu nibbattāpanavasena ghorataro duradhivāso ca. Ayañca attho ādittapariyāyena vibhāvetabbo.
在偈颂中,“于诸欲贪著”是指对事欲生起极度迷恋、愚痴、放逸和邪行的人,因为他们势必会沉溺其中。“嗔害”与“燃烧”相连,意思是嗔害之心在燃烧。“对于杀人者”这一句是针对嗔火特别重的人。“于圣法不善巧”是指那些对蕴、处等法完全没有通过诵习、遍问和作意而通达的人,他们对圣法不善巧,被痴所征服,因此特别被称为极度痴迷者。“不知这些火”是指不知道“这些贪火等在此生和来世都会燃烧”,所以没有通过遍知通达和断除通达而彻见。“喜身见”是指对身见,也就是五取蕴,以渴爱、邪见、我慢和欢喜而取乐。“增长”是指通过反复生起而使它们增长、累积。“地狱”指八大地狱、十六种近边地狱等一切地狱。“傍生之趣”即畜生道。“阿修罗”指阿修罗身和饿鬼趣,这些也都会增长——这是句子的连接。巴利
Gāthāsu kāmesu mucchiteti vatthukāmesu pātabyatāvasena mucchaṃ bālyaṃ pamādaṃ micchācāraṃ āpanne. Byāpanneti byāpannacitte dahatīti sambandho. Nare pāṇātipātinoti idaṃ dosaggissa. Ariyadhamme akovideti ye khandhāyatanādīsu sabbena sabbaṃ uggahaparipucchāya manasikārarahitā ariyadhammassa akusalā, te sammohena abhibhūtā visesena sammūḷhā nāmāti vuttā. Ete aggī ajānantāti ‘‘ete rāgaggiādayo idha ceva samparāye ca anudahantī’’ti ajānanttāā pariññābhisamayavasena pahānābhisamayavasena ca appaṭivijjhantā. Sakkāyābhiratāti sakkāye upādānakkhandhapañcake taṇhādiṭṭhimānanandanābhiratā. Vaḍḍhayantīti punappunaṃ uppajjanena vaḍḍhayanti ācinanti. Nirayanti aṭṭhavidhaṃ mahānirayaṃ, soḷasavidhaṃ ussadanirayanti sabbampi nirayaṃ. Tiracchānañca yoniyoti tiracchānayoniyo ca. Asuranti asurakāyaṃ pettivisayañca vaḍḍhayantīti sambandho.
到这一步,先通过指出贪火等在此生和来世都具有燃烧性质,显示了轮回;现在为了通过熄灭它们来显示还灭,所以说了“于日夜……”等话。其中“相应”是指依修习精进而相应。在哪里相应?在正等正觉者的教法中。这就显示出,在其他教法中没有贪火等的熄灭。正因如此,简要地显示他们那种不共外道、熄灭贪火等的方法——不净业处,而说:巴利
Ettāvatā rāgaggiādīnaṃ idha ceva samparāye ca anudahanabhāvadassanamukhena vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā idāni nesaṃ nibbāpanena vivaṭṭaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca rattindivā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yuttāti bhāvanānuyogavasena yuttā. Kattha? Sammāsambuddhasāsane. Tena aññasāsane rāgaggiādīnaṃ nibbāpanābhāvaṃ dasseti. Tathā hi anaññasādhāraṇaṃ tesaṃ nibbāpanavidhiṃ asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ saṅkhepeneva dassento –
他们恒常具不净想,熄灭贪欲之火。
而那些最胜之人,则用慈心熄灭嗔火;
用智慧灭掉痴火,这智慧就是能导向通达的那一种。巴利
‘‘Te nibbāpenti rāgaggiṃ, niccaṃ asubhasaññino; Dosaggiṃ pana mettāya, nibbāpenti naruttamā; Mohaggiṃ pana paññāya, yāyaṃ nibbedhagāminī’’ti. –
世尊说:在这里,具备不净想的人,是通过三十二种身体成分以及肿胀相等等方式修习不净观,从而具有不净想。慈心,是指依照“他以与慈俱行的心,遍满一方而安住”这段经文所说的慈心修习。在这里还应当知道:以不净禅那作为基础,通过由此生起的阿那含道,来熄灭贪火和嗔火。智慧,是指与观智相应的道智。因此说“那导向穿透”。因为这种智慧能穿透烦恼蕴而前进、运作,所以称为“导向穿透”。完全般涅槃,是指以阿罗汉道完全熄灭贪火等之后,安住于有余涅槃界;由于智慧达到圆满,成为明智者;由于先前以正勤彻底断除了懈怠;由于进入果定而没有疲倦;日夜不懈怠;在最后心灭尽时,于无余涅槃界完全般涅槃。从此,他们彻底而无余地超越了轮回之苦。巴利
Āha . Tattha asubhasaññinoti dvattiṃsākāravasena ceva uddhumātakādivasena ca asubhabhāvanānuyogena asubhasaññino. Mettāyāti ‘‘so mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.64, 66) vuttāya mettābhāvanāya. Ettha ca asubhajjhānañca pādakaṃ katvā nibbattitaanāgāmimaggena rāgaggidosaggīnaṃ nibbāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Paññāyāti vipassanāpaññāsahitāya maggapaññāya. Tenevāha ‘‘yāyaṃ nibbedhagāminī’’ti. Sā hi kilesakkhandhaṃ vinivijjhantī gacchati pavattatīti nibbedhagāminīti vuccati. Asesaṃ parinibbantīti arahattamaggena asesaṃ rāgaggiādiṃ nibbāpetvā saupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā ṭhitā paññāvepullappattiyā nipakā pubbeva sammappadhānena sabbaso kosajjassa suppahīnattā phalasamāpattisamāpajjanena akilāsubhāvena ca rattindivamatanditā carimakacittanirodhena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā asesaṃ parinibbanti. Tato ca asesaṃ nissesaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ accaguṃ atikkamaṃsu.
像这样,先说明那些熄灭贪火等烦恼的人是以无余涅槃而寂灭,接着现在要赞叹他们所证得的功德,于是说出结尾的偈颂。其中,“圣见者”:涅槃是佛陀等圣者所应见的,或者因为远离烦恼而称为圣,也就是涅槃;又或者是指已经观见四圣谛本身,所以叫圣见者。“达吠陀者”:“吠陀”指道智,由于具有这种智,或者依这种智而到达轮回的尽头,所以叫达吠陀者。“正确了知”:以正智如实了知一切应知之法,比如善法等以及蕴等。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Evaṃ ye rāgaggiādike nibbāpenti, tesaṃ anupādisesanibbānena nibbutiṃ dassetvā idāni paṭividdhaguṇehi thomento osānagāthamāha. Tattha ariyaddasāti ariyehi buddhādīhi passitabbaṃ kilesehi vā ārakattā ariyaṃ nibbānaṃ, ariyaṃ catusaccameva vā diṭṭhavantoti ariyaddasā. Vedassa maggañāṇassa, tena vā vedena saṃsārassa pariyosānaṃ gatāti vedaguno. Sammadaññāyāti sammadeva sabbaṃ ājānitabbaṃ kusalādiṃ khandhādiñca jānitvā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
《审察经》注释巴利
5. Upaparikkhasuttavaṇṇanā
94 94. 第五经中,“如是如是”是指以这种或那种方式。“应审察”是指应当探究、衡量或思察。“当他如此审察时”是指当那位比丘这样审察的时候。“而他的识于外不散乱、不流散”:因为在外部色等所缘上不生起散乱,所以识不散乱,而是安住专注;正因如此,它才不流散。这里说的是:比丘们,当这位已开始修观的比丘以种种方式审察、以观智思察诸行时,他先前通过标记安住之相而取止相,然后认真、不间断地让思察智运作;此时,他自己的观心不应在业处之外的色等所缘上生起,也不应因为精进过猛而偏向掉举。比丘应当以这种或那种方式审察、衡量。“于内不滞住”:因为当精进力软弱时,由于定力强盛,被懈怠所压倒,心便向内收缩,停滞在被称为内在行处的业处所缘上,这就叫“滞住”。然而,当精进与定平衡配合时,心就不滞住,而走上正道。因此,当他如此审察时,识于内不滞住、走上正道,他就应当这样审察。“不执取则不惊恐”:当他如此审察时,不以“这是我的,这是我的自我”这种渴爱与邪见的执取,执取色等中的任何行;正因如此,他就不因渴爱与邪见的执取而惊恐。应当这样审察,这就是前后关联。那么,当他审察时,这三种情况怎样才能出现呢?他避免掉举一边和懈怠一边的诸法,使精进与定平衡,先从观随烦恼中净化心,然后正确地让观智走上观的道路,他就是这样思察的。巴利
94. Pañcame tathā tathāti tena tena pakārena. Upaparikkheyyāti vīmaṃseyya parituleyya sammaseyya vā. Yathā yathāssa upaparikkhatoti yathā yathā assa bhikkhuno upaparikkhantassa. Bahiddhācassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭanti bahiddhā rūpādiārammaṇe uppajjanakavikkhepābhāvato avikkhittaṃ samāhitaṃ, tato eva avisaṭaṃ siyā . Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhikkhave, yena yena pakārena imassa āraddhavipassakassa bhikkhuno upaparikkhato saṅkhāre sammasantassa pubbe samāhitākārasallakkhaṇavasena samathanimittaṃ gahetvā sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ pavattentassa attano vipassanācittaṃ kammaṭṭhānato bahiddhā rūpādiārammaṇe uppajjanakaṃ na siyā, accāraddhavīriyatāya uddhaccapakkhiyaṃ na siyā, tena tena pakārena bhikkhu upaparikkheyya parituleyyāti. Ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitanti yasmā vīriye mandaṃ vahante samādhissa balavabhāvato kosajjābhibhavena ajjhattaṃ gocarajjhattasaṅkhāte kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe saṅkocavasena ṭhitattā saṇṭhitaṃ nāma hoti, vīriyasamatāya pana yojitāya asaṇṭhitaṃ hoti vīthiṃ paṭipannaṃ. Tasmā yathā yathāssa upaparikkhato viññāṇaṃ ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ assa, vīthipaṭipannaṃ siyā, tathā tathā upaparikkheyya. Anupādāya na paritasseyyāti yathā yathāssa upaparikkhato ‘‘etaṃ mama, eso me attā’’ti taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhavasena rūpādīsu kañci saṅkhāraṃ aggahetvā tato eva taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhavasena na paritasseyya, tathā tathā upaparikkheyyāti sambandho. Kathaṃ pana upaparikkhato tividhampetaṃ siyāti? Uddhaccapakkhiye kosajjapakkhiye ca dhamme vajjento vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā pubbeva vipassanupakkilesehi cittaṃ visodhetvā yathā sammadeva vipassanāñāṇaṃ vipassanāvīthiṃ paṭipajjati, tathā sammasato.
世尊这样为一位以四圣谛为修行所缘的比丘,依次开示了在道智见清净的修习过程中,如何净化被精进过猛、精进过松以及观染污所弄脏的心。现在,为了说明当观智这样被净化之后,不久就能把观与道连接起来,从而超越整个轮回之苦,所以说了“诸比丘,在外……”等话。这段话的含义和前面所说的一样。至于所说的“未来生老死之苦的集与生起不再出现”,它的意思是:这样把观与道连接起来之后,依照道的次第,以最高的道彻底断尽一切烦恼,在未来世,那被称为生老死这一切轮回之苦的集与生起就不再发生;或者说,被称为生的苦之集,以及被称为老死的苦之生起,都不再出现。巴利
Iti bhagavā catusaccakammaṭṭhānikassa bhikkhuno anukkamena paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiyā āraddhāya accāraddhavīriyaatisithilavīriyavipassanupakkilesehi cittassa visodhanūpāyaṃ dassetvā idāni tathā visodhite vipassanāñāṇe na cirasseva vipassanaṃ maggena ghaṭetvā sakalavaṭṭadukkhasamatikkamāya saṃvattantīti dassento ‘‘bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe’’tiādimāha, taṃ vuttanayameva. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’’ti, tassattho – evaṃ vipassanaṃ maggena ghaṭetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā aggamaggena anavasesato kilesesu khīṇesu āyatiṃ anāgate jātijarāmaraṇasakalavaṭṭadukkhasamudayasaṅkhāto sambhavo uppādo ca na hoti, jātisaṅkhāto vā dukkhasamudayo jarāmaraṇasaṅkhāto dukkhasambhavo ca na hoti.
偈颂里说的“因断了七种结而称为断了七种结的人”,是指贪爱结、邪见结、慢结、嗔恨结、无明结、烦恼结、恶行结这七种结。因为已经断除了这七种结,所以叫“断了七种结的人”。不过也有人主张:“七种随眠就是七种结。”“已经斩断引导的人”,是指已经斩断通向“有”的引导的人。“生之轮回已经灭尽”,是指这个轮回因为一再出生而持续流转,又以生为根本、成为生的状态,所以叫“生之轮回”。这个人因为已经斩断了通向“有”的引导,所以轮回已经灭尽、彻底穷尽,正因如此,他不会再有任何来生。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ sattasaṅgappahīnassāti taṇhāsaṅgo, diṭṭhisaṅgo, mānasaṅgo, kodhasaṅgo, avijjāsaṅgo, kilesasaṅgo, duccaritasaṅgoti imesaṃ sattannaṃ saṅgānaṃ pahīnattā sattasaṅgappahīnassa. Keci pana ‘‘sattānusayā eva satta saṅgā’’ti vadanti. Netticchinnassāti chinnabhavanettikassa . Vikkhīṇo jātisaṃsāroti punappunaṃ jāyanavasena pavattiyā jātihetukattā ca jātibhūto saṃsāroti jātisaṃsāro, so bhavanettiyā chinnattā vikkhīṇo parikkhīṇo, tato eva natthi tassa punabbhavoti.
6. 《欲再生经》的注释巴利
6. Kāmūpapattisuttavaṇṇanā
95 95. 第六经中,“欲再生”指获得欲乐或享受欲乐。“现前欲者”指被欲乐绑住、被所缘绑住的人,就像人类那样。人类确实在固定的对象上行使支配。他们对所执着的对象心生系恋,即使付出百千钱财,也要把那女子带来,享受固定的欲乐。某些天神也是如此。从四大王天开始,住在四种天界的众生都在固定的对象上行使支配。这里可以举五髻的故事作为例证。同样地,除了地狱众生之外,其余一部分恶趣众生也在固定的对象上行使支配。因为鱼对自己的母鱼、龟对自己的母龟都是如此,一切畜生、饿鬼、堕入恶道者也都一样。因此,除了地狱众生,从其余恶趣众生一直到兜率天的这些众生,都称为“现前欲者”。“化乐天”指乐于自己化现之物者,所以叫化乐天。他们想要什么样的形色,青色、黄色等等,就化现出那样的形色来享乐,就像在尊者阿那律面前出现的可爱身天神一样。“他化自在天”指在他人所化现的欲乐中行使支配、自在享受者。他们了知他人的心意后,他人就按照他们的喜好化现出欲乐享受,他们在其中行使支配。他们怎么知道他人的心意呢?靠惯常的享受方式。就像熟练的厨师知道国王吃饭时喜欢什么、不喜欢什么一样,他们凭惯常的喜好知道所缘,然后化现出那样的东西,他们在其中行使支配,以交合等方式享受欲乐。不过有些人说“只要笑一笑、看一眼、抱一下、牵一下手,他们的欲乐之事就完成了”,这种说法在义注中已被否定:“这是不对的。”因为身体没有接触,就不可能完成触感的欲乐之事。六种欲界天神的欲乐都是自然而有的。确实如此说过——巴利
95. Chaṭṭhe kāmūpapattiyoti kāmapaṭilābhā kāmapaṭisevanā vā. Paccupaṭṭhitakāmāti nibaddhakāmā nibaddhārammaṇā yathā taṃ manussā. Manussā hi nibaddhavatthusmiṃ vasaṃ vattenti. Yattha paṭibaddhacittā honti, satampi sahassampi datvā tameva mātugāmaṃ ānetvā nibaddhabhogaṃ bhuñjanti. Ekacce ca devā. Cātumahārājikato paṭṭhāya hi catudevalokavāsino nibaddhavatthusmiṃyeva vasaṃ vattenti. Pañcasikhavatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Tathā ekacce āpāyike nerayike ṭhapetvā sesaapāyasattāpi nibaddhavatthusmiṃyeva vasaṃ vattenti. Macchā hi attano macchiyā, kacchapo kacchapiyāti evaṃ sabbepi tiracchānā petā vinipātikā ca. Tasmā nerayike ṭhapetvā sesaapāyasatte upādāya yāva tusitakāyā ime sattā paccupaṭṭhitakāmā nāma, nimmānaratinoti sayaṃ nimmite nimmāne rati etesanti nimmānaratino. Te hi nīlapītādivasena yādisaṃ yādisaṃ rūpaṃ icchanti, tādisaṃ tādisaṃ nimminitvā ramanti āyasmato anuruddhassa purato manāpakāyikā devatā viya. Paranimmitavasavattinoti parehi nimmite kāme vasaṃ vattentīti paranimmitavasavattino. Tesañhi manaṃ ñatvā pare yathārucitaṃ kāmabhogaṃ nimminanti, te tattha vasaṃ vattenti. Kathaṃ te parassa manaṃ jānantīti? Pakatisevanāvasena. Yathā hi kusalo sūdo rañño bhuñjantassa yaṃ yaṃ ruccati, taṃ taṃ jānāti, evaṃ pakatiyā abhirucitārammaṇaṃ ñatvā tādiseyeva nimminanti, te tattha vasaṃ vattenti, methunasevanādivasena kāme paribhuñjanti. Keci pana ‘‘hasitamattena olokitamattena āliṅgitamattena hatthaggahaṇamattena ca tesaṃ kāmakiccaṃ ijjhatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘etaṃ pana natthī’’ti paṭikkhittaṃ. Na hi kāyena aphusantassa phoṭṭhabbaṃ kāmakiccaṃ sādheti. Channampi kāmāvacaradevānaṃ kāmā pākatikā eva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
这六种属于欲界,具足一切欲乐。
一切众生的寿命,如果统一算作一类,到底有多长?巴利
‘‘Cha ete kāmāvacarā, sabbakāmasamiddhino; Sabbesaṃ ekasaṅkhātaṃ, āyu bhavati kittaka’’nti. (vibha. 1023);
在偈颂中,“以及其他人”是指:除了上面所说的那些天神之外,其他享受欲乐的人——包括人类,以及一部分投生到恶趣的众生,全都是。“此有与异有”是指:以现在这样获得的存在状态为一类,以及以再生到另一种存在、也就是所谓“从此处变成另一种样子”为另一类,这两种形态的轮回,他们都没有超越,无法越过。“应当舍弃一切欲”是说:对天界等种种欲,无论是对境欲还是烦恼欲,都应当舍弃。当以不还道断除烦恼欲时,才叫作舍弃了对境欲。“耽著于可爱可意之物”是说:对色等可爱的事物,以乐受的滋味而耽著、贪染。“切断难以越渡的河流”是说:以阿罗汉道,把别人难以越渡、难以跨越的渴爱之流彻底切断。其余内容与前面所说相同。巴利
Gāthāsu ye caññeti ye yathāvuttadevehi aññe ca kāmabhogino manussā ceva ekacce apāyūpagā ca sabbe te. Itthabhāvaññathābhāvanti imaṃ yathāpaṭiladdhattabhāvañceva, upapattibhavantarasaṅkhātaṃ ito aññathābhāvañcāti dvippabhedaṃ saṃsāraṃ nātivattare na atikkamanti. Sabbe pariccaje kāmeti dibbādibhede sabbepi kāme vatthukāme ca kilesakāme ca pariccajeyya. Kilesakāme anāgāmimaggena pajahantoyeva hi vatthukāme pariccajati nāma. Piyarūpasātagadhitanti piyarūpesu rūpādīsu sukhavedanassādena gadhitaṃ giddhaṃ. Chetvā sotaṃ duraccayanti aññehi duraccayaṃ duratikkamaṃ taṇhāsotaṃ arahattamaggena samucchinditvā. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayamevāti.
第七 欲轭经的注释巴利
7. Kāmayogasuttavaṇṇanā
96 96. 第七经中,“与欲轭相应者”:对五欲功德的贪爱就是欲轭,被它系缚就是与欲轭相应,这是对尚未断尽欲贪者的同义说法。对色界和无色界存在的欲贪是有轭,同样,对禅那的贪恋以及伴随常见而生的贪,也属于有轭;被它系缚就是与有轭相应,意思是还没有断除有贪。“来者”:即使住在梵天界,也会因为结生而具有再来这个人间的习性,所以世尊说“来至此性”。所谓“此性”,指人的身体,具有再来此处的法性,意思是有再投生到人间的习性。当然,在这里,欲轭是再来此性的原因。为了说明凡是与欲轭相应的人,也必定与有轭相应,所以把两者合在一起说:“诸比丘,与欲轭相应者,就是与有轭相应者。”巴利
96. Sattame kāmayogayuttoti pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmayogo, tena yutto kāmayogayutto, asamucchinnakāmarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo bhavayogo, tathā jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahagato ca rāgo, tena yutto bhavayogayutto, appahīnabhavarāgoti attho. Āgāmīti brahmaloke ṭhitopi paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena imaṃ manussalokaṃ āgamanasīlo. Tenevāha ‘‘āgantā itthatta’’nti. Manussattabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ itthabhāvaṃ āgamanadhammo , manussesu upapajjanasīloti attho. Kāmañcettha kāmayogo itthattaṃ āgamanassa kāraṇaṃ. Yo pana kāmayogayutto, so ekantena bhavayogayuttopi hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘kāmayogayutto, bhikkhave, bhavayogayutto’’ti ubhayampi ekajjhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ.
已离欲轭:在这里,即使是不净禅,也算是离欲轭;但以它为基础而证得的不来道,才是绝对的离欲轭。所以,安住在第三道果的圣者,被称为“已离欲轭”。然而,因为对色界和无色界存在的欲贪并没有被不来道断除,所以他由于还没有断除有轭,就被称为“与有轭相应”。“不来者”:因为不再以结生的方式来到欲界,所以叫不来者。正是由于离欲轭,连同无余地断除五下分结,从而成就了内在结缚的不存在,他不再来此界,在那里般涅槃,成为不还法者。至于那位已经无余断除有轭的人,由于无明轭等残余烦恼与它同属一类的缘故,也一并被断除了,因此他是有结已尽者,被称为“阿拉汉、漏尽者”。因此说:“诸比丘,已离欲轭、已离有轭者,是阿拉汉、漏尽者。”在这里应当知道:说已离欲轭的不来者,就像第四禅舍离了乐、苦、喜与忧,也像第三道彻底灭尽了见、疑、戒禁取结,是为了赞叹第四道而说的。第一句摄尽了一切凡夫以及入流者、一来者;第二句则摄尽了一切不来者;第三句摄尽了阿拉汉。如此,以阿拉汉果为顶点,结束了说法。巴利
Kāmayogavisaṃyuttoti ettha asubhajjhānampi kāmayogavisaṃyogo, taṃ pādakaṃ katvā adhigato anāgāmimaggo ekanteneva kāmayogavisaṃyogo nāma, tasmā tatiyamaggaphale ṭhito ariyapuggalo ‘‘kāmayogavisaṃyutto’’ti vutto. Yasmā pana rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo anāgāmimaggena na pahīyati, tasmā so appahīnabhavayogattā ‘‘bhavayogayutto’’ti vutto. Anāgāmīti kāmalokaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena anāgamanato anāgāmī. Kāmayogavisaṃyogavaseneva hi saddhiṃ anavasesaorambhāgiyasaṃyojanasamugghātena ajjhattasaṃyojanābhāvasiddhito itthattaṃ anāgantvā hoti, tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo. Yassa pana anavasesaṃ bhavayogo pahīno, tassa avijjāyogādiavasiṭṭhakilesāpi tadekaṭṭhabhāvato pahīnā eva hontīti , so parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojano ‘‘arahaṃ khīṇāsavo’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmayogavisaṃyutto, bhikkhave, bhavayogavisaṃyutto arahaṃ hoti khīṇāsavo’’ti. Ettha ca kāmayogavisaṃyogo anāgāmī catutthajjhānassa sukhadukkhasomanassadomanassappahānaṃ viya, tatiyamaggassa diṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanaparikkhayo viya ca catutthamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paṭhamapadena sotāpannasakadāgāmīhi saddhiṃ sabbo puthujjano gahito, dutiyapadena pana sabbo anāgāmī, tatiyapadena arahāti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
偈颂中“两者”是指以两种,即与欲轭和与有轭相应,这是意思。众生流转轮回:凡夫、入流者、一来者这三种众生,因为没有断除欲轭和有轭,所以流转轮回。正因如此,他们才走向生与死。在这里,三种入流者——一种子者、家家者、七返有者——当中,根器最钝的七返有者不再生起第八有,只是按自己限定的一生次数而流转,其他两类也是这样。一来者当中,有人在此世证得一来道,投生天界后,又再回到此世受生,他也只是按自己限定的生数而流转。但那些一来者,如果不以混杂的方式,而只是在各处天界或人界分别受生,他们为了证得更高的道,直到诸根成熟,会一再出生,确实仍在流转。至于凡夫,那就更不必说了,因为一切有结完全没有断尽。因此说:巴利
Gāthāsu ubhayanti ubhayena, kāmayogena, bhavayogena ca saṃyuttāti attho. Sattā gacchanti saṃsāranti puthujjanā sotāpannā sakadāgāminoti ime tividhā sattā kāmayogabhavayogānaṃ appahīnattā gacchanti saṃsāranti. Tato eva jātimaraṇagāmino honti. Ettha ekabījī, kolaṃkolo, sattakkhattuparamoti tīsu sotāpannesu sabbamudu sattakkhattuparamo, so aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ na nibbatteti, attano paricchinnajātivasena pana saṃsarati, tathā itarepi. Sakadāgāmīsupi yo idha sakadāgāmimaggaṃ patvā devaloke uppajjitvā puna idha nibbattati, so attano paricchinnajātivaseneva saṃsarati. Ye pana sakadāgāmino vomissakanayena vinā tattha tattha devesuyeva manussesuyeva vā nibbattanti, te uparimaggādhigamāya yāva indriyaparipākā punappunaṃ uppajjanato saṃsarantiyeva. Puthujjane pana vattabbameva natthi sabbabhavasaṃyojanānaṃ aparikkhīṇattā. Tena vuttaṃ –
被欲轭系缚,也被有轭系缚,两者皆然。
众生在轮回中流转,走向生与死。巴利
‘‘Kāmayogena saṃyuttā, bhavayogena cūbhayaṃ; Sattā gacchanti saṃsāraṃ, jātimaraṇagāmino’’ti.
“已断诸欲”:以不来道断除了名为欲贪的烦恼欲。“已断疑惑者”:疑惑已彻底断除,而这其实只是由入流道所断。不过,为了赞叹第四道才这样说。因为这里所说的“已断疑惑者”,实际指的是阿拉汉。所以接着说“已尽慢与后有者”:对他们来说,九种慢以及未来的后有都已彻底灭尽,因此称为已尽慢与后有者。这里提到“慢”,是因为它与慢同属一类,或者就其特征而言,也一并包含了所有由第四道所断的烦恼。由于慢已尽,便说的是有余涅槃界;由于后有已尽,便说的是无余涅槃界。其余内容很容易理解。巴利
Kāme pahantvānāti kāmarāgasaṅkhāte kilesakāme anāgāmimaggena pajahitvā. Chinnasaṃsayāti samucchinnakaṅkhā, tañca kho sotāpattimaggeneva. Vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ pana catutthamaggassa evaṃ vuttaṃ. Arahanto hi idha ‘‘chinnasaṃsayā’’ti adhippetā. Tenevāha ‘‘khīṇamānapunabbhavā’’ti. Sabbaso khīṇo navavidhopi māno āyatiṃ punabbhavo ca etesanti khīṇamānapunabbhavā. Mānaggahaṇena cettha tadekaṭṭhatāya lakkhaṇavasena vā sabbo catutthamaggavajjho kileso gahitoti. Khīṇamānatāya ca saupādisesā nibbānadhātu vuttā hoti, khīṇapunabbhavatāya anupādisesā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第八 善戒经注巴利
8. Kalyāṇasīlasuttavaṇṇanā
97 第八项。“善戒者”:指戒行美好、戒行殊胜、戒行圆满的人。其中,戒的圆满通过两种原因达成:正确看到戒的缺失会带来过患,以及看到戒的具足会带来利益。但在这里,应当依据完全脱离一切障碍、一切方面都圆满的道戒和果戒来理解其善。“善法者”:指的是所有菩提分法,因此,具有善的念处等菩提分法的人,就是善法者。“善慧者”:也是依据道与果的慧而说为善慧。因为只有出世间的戒等法,才由于不动摇的本性而被称为究竟善。有些人说:依据四遍净戒而说善戒,依据观与道法而说善法,依据道与果慧而说善慧。另一些人说:只有无学者的戒、法、慧,才称为善。还有一些人说:入流者与一来者的道果戒,名为善戒,因此“善戒者”这个词包含了入流者和一来者,因为他们是于戒上圆满的人。不来道果法及最上道法,名为善法,因为其中的菩提分法已达到修习圆满。因此,“善法者”这个词包含了从第三道位起的三位圣者。由于慧的作用达到顶点,最胜果中的慧名为善慧,因此,慧达到广大的阿罗汉被称为“善慧者”。同样,也就把相应的人包含进来了。这些繁琐讨论有什么用呢?在这里,无上道果法就是所说的“善戒”等——这是我们认可的看法。因为这是依于法分类的人分类,而非法分类。巴利
97. Aṭṭhame kalyāṇasīloti sundarasīlo, pasatthasīlo, paripuṇṇasīlo. Tattha sīlapāripūrī dvīhi kāraṇehi hoti sammadeva sīlavipattiyā ādīnavadassanena, sīlasampattiyā ca ānisaṃsadassanena. Idha pana sabbaparibandhavippamuttassa sabbākāraparipuṇṇassa maggasīlassa phalasīlassa ca vasena kalyāṇatā veditabbā. Kalyāṇadhammoti sabbe bodhipakkhiyadhammā adhippetā, tasmā kalyāṇā satipaṭṭhānādibodhipakkhiyadhammā etassāti kalyāṇadhammo. Kalyāṇapaññoti ca maggaphalapaññāvaseneva kalyāṇapañño. Lokuttarā eva hi sīlādidhammā ekantakalyāṇā nāma akuppasabhāvattā. Keci pana ‘‘catupārisuddhisīlavasena kalyāṇasīlo, vipassanāmaggadhammavasena kalyāṇadhammo, maggaphalapaññāvasena kalyāṇapañño’’ti vadanti. Asekkhā eva te sīladhammapaññāti eke. Apare pana bhaṇanti – sotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ maggaphalasīlaṃ kalyāṇasīlaṃ nāma, tasmā ‘‘kalyāṇasīlo’’ti iminā sotāpanno sakadāgāmī ca gahitā honti. Te hi sīlesu paripūrakārino nāma. Anāgāmimaggaphaladhammā aggamaggadhammā ca kalyāṇadhammā nāma. Tattha hi bodhipakkhiyadhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Tasmā ‘‘kalyāṇadhammo’’ti iminā tatiyamaggaṭṭhato paṭṭhāya tayo ariyā gahitā honti. Paññākiccassa matthakappattiyā aggaphale paññā kalyāṇapaññā nāma, tasmā paññāvepullappatto arahā ‘‘kalyāṇapañño’’ti vutto. Evameva puggalā gahitā hontīti. Kiṃ iminā papañcena? Aggamaggaphaladhammā idha kalyāṇasīlādayo vuttāti ayamamhākaṃ khanti. Dhammavibhāgena hi ayaṃ puggalavibhāgo, na dhammavibhāgoti.
“完全者”在这里,“完全”指的是涅槃,因为它不与任何事物混杂,所以远离一切有为法。由于证得了它,阿罗汉就叫“完全者”。或者说,因为断除与修习都已圆满,最终的无过失法也已圆满,阿罗汉果就以善的含义和无杂染的安乐性而称为“完全”;由于证得这个果,漏已尽的人就叫“完全者”。“已住完成”是指已经修习了道的梵行生活,把它做到圆满,然后安住。“上人”则是因为具足最上、最高的无学法,所以称为“上人”。巴利
Kevalīti ettha kevalaṃ vuccati kenaci avomissakatāya sabbasaṅkhatavivittaṃ nibbānaṃ, tassa adhigatattā arahā kevalī. Atha vā pahānabhāvanāpāripūriyā pariyosānaanavajjadhammapāripūriyā ca kalyāṇakaṭṭhena abyāsekasukhatāya ca kevalaṃ arahattaṃ, tadadhigamena kevalī khīṇāsavo. Maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vasitvā pariyosāpetvā ṭhitoti vusitavā. Uttamehi aggabhūtehi vā asekkhadhammehi samannāgatattā ‘‘uttamapuriso’’ti vuccati.
“具戒者”这里,“戒”是按什么含义说的?是按“戒行”的含义称为戒。什么叫戒行?就是心的专一安定;也就是因为良好的戒行,使身业等不散乱,这就是它的意思。或者也可以说,是“持守”;也就是作为禅那等善法安住的基础,起到支撑的作用,这就是它的意思。因此,无论是“戒行”还是“持守”,都称为戒。以上是依照词形分析的方法来说明戒的含义。另有一些老师则从语源的角度解释:最上、殊胜的含义就是戒的含义,清凉的含义就是戒的含义,吉祥的含义就是戒的含义。这个人因为戒已经圆满或极为殊胜,所以拥有戒,因此称为“具戒者”,意思是依四种清净戒而戒行具足。在这里,有些老师的意图是:为了详细阐明那最根本的戒,所以才接着说“具足巴帝摩卡防护”等。巴利
Sīlavāti ettha kenaṭṭhena sīlaṃ? Sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Kimidaṃ sīlanaṃ nāma? Samādhānaṃ, susīlyavasena kāyakammādīnaṃ avippakiṇṇatāti attho. Atha vā upadhāraṇaṃ, jhānādikusaladhammānaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena ādhārabhāvoti attho. Tasmā sīlati, sīletīti vā sīlaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva saddalakkhaṇanayena sīlaṭṭho. Apare pana ‘‘siraṭṭho sīlaṭṭho, sītalaṭṭho sīlaṭṭho, sivaṭṭho sīlaṭṭho’’ti niruttinayena atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Tayidaṃ pāripūrito atisayato vā sīlaṃ assa atthīti sīlavā, catupārisuddhisīlavasena sīlasampannoti attho. Tattha yaṃ jeṭṭhakasīlaṃ , taṃ vitthāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’tiādi vuttanti ekaccānaṃ ācariyānaṃ adhippāyo.
另有一些长老这样说:世尊在两种场合都讲过巴帝摩卡防护。因为只有巴帝摩卡防护才是戒,其余几种——根律仪只是守护六根门而已,活命清净只是如法地获取资具而已,资具依止只是在得到资具之后,审察“这是有意义的”然后受用而已。从根本上说,只有巴帝摩卡防护才是戒。谁破坏了它,谁就像被砍断头颅的人,不能指望剩下的手脚还能“保护其余部分”。反过来,谁若它完好无损,就像头颅未断的人,能够把那些部分恢复常态并加以守护。因此,“具戒者”这个词,其实只是指巴帝摩卡戒;为了详细展开它,才说了“具足巴帝摩卡防护”等话。巴利
Aparena pana bhaṇanti – ubhayatthāpi pātimokkhasaṃvaro bhagavatā vutto. Pātimokkhasaṃvaro eva hi sīlaṃ, itaresu indriyasaṃvaro chadvārarakkhaṇamattameva, ājīvapārisuddhi dhammena paccayuppādanamattameva, paccayasannissitaṃ paṭiladdhapaccaye ‘‘idamattha’’nti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanamattameva. Nippariyāyena pātimokkhasaṃvarova sīlaṃ. Yassa so bhinno, so sīsacchinno puriso viya hatthapāde ‘‘sesāni rakkhissatī’’ti na vattabbo. Yassa pana so arogo, acchinnasīso viya puriso, tāni puna pākatikāni katvā rakkhituṃ sakkoti. Tasmā sīlavāti iminā pātimokkhasīlameva uddisitvā taṃ vitthāretuṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’tiādi vuttanti.
在这里,“波罗提木叉”指的是学处戒。因为,谁能守护、保护它,它就能让谁从地狱等恶趣的痛苦中解脱出来,所以叫波罗提木叉。“防护”就是律仪,也就是不以身体和言语去违犯。波罗提木叉本身就是律仪,所以叫“波罗提木叉律仪”;以这种律仪防护自己、关闭身语恶行的人,就是“具足波罗提木叉律仪”。这是在说明他在这条戒上站稳了脚跟。“安住”是说明他具备与这种戒相应的生活方式。“具足行处与行境”是说明那些既能帮助下面基础层面的波罗提木叉律仪、也能帮助上面更高层次修行的法。“在极微小的过失中也看到危险”是说明他具有从波罗提木叉戒上不退失、不毁坏的本性。“受持”是说明他对学处毫无遗漏地领受持守。“学”是说明他正在具备修学。“在学处上”是说明所应当修学的法。巴利
Tattha pātimokkhanti sikkhāpadasīlaṃ. Tañhi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehīti pātimokkhaṃ. Saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro, kāyavācāhi avītikkamo. Pātimokkhameva saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro, tena saṃvuto pihitakāyavācoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto. Idamassa tasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Viharatīti tadanurūpavihārasamaṅgibhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Ācāragocarasampannoti heṭṭhā pātimokkhasaṃvarassa, upari visesānuyogassa ca upakārakadhammaparidīpanaṃ. Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvīti pātimokkhasīlato acavanadhammatāparidīpanaṃ. Samādāyāti sikkhāpadānaṃ anavasesato ādānaparidīpanaṃ. Sikkhatīti sikkhāya samaṅgibhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Sikkhāpadesūti sikkhitabbadhammaparidīpanaṃ.
另一种解释:因为烦恼势力强大,恶行容易做,善行却难以实行,所以众生屡屡堕入恶趣,因此叫“堕者”,说的是凡夫。或者,因为无常,在诸有中被业力抛来抛去,就像水车一样不停转动,无法安住而四处流转,由于这种不断运行的习性,所以叫“堕者”;或者,以死亡来说,在各类众生中不断舍弃自身,这种众生相续叫“堕者”,或者就是指心。能使这个“堕者”从轮回之苦中解脱出来的,就是“巴帝摩卡”。因为众生正是通过心的解脱而解脱的。经中说过:“由心清净而得清净”,又说“无所执取,心从诸漏中解脱”。或者说,以无明等为因,在轮回中堕落、流转、生起,这叫“堕”。经中说过:“被无明遮蔽的众生,被渴爱结缚,奔走流转。”这个“堕者”众生,通过它而从渴爱等三种杂染中解脱出来,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。应当像理解“黑颈者”等复合词那样,了知这里的构词方式。巴利
Aparo nayo – kilesānaṃ balavabhāvato pāpakiriyāya sukarabhāvato puññakiriyāya ca dukkarabhāvato bahukkhattuṃ apāyesu patanasīloti pātī, puthujjano. Aniccatāya vā bhavādīsu kammavegakkhitto ghaṭiyantaṃ viya anavaṭṭhānena paribbhamanato gamanasīloti pātī, maraṇavasena vā tamhi tamhi sattanikāye attabhāvassa pātanasīloti pātī, sattasantāno, cittameva vā. Taṃ pātinaṃ saṃsāradukkhato mokkhetīti pātimokkho. Cittassa hi vimokkhena satto vimutto . ‘‘Cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.100) ‘‘anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimutta’’nti (ma. ni. 2.206) ca vuttaṃ. Atha vā avijjādinā hetunā saṃsāre patati gacchati pavattatīti pāti. ‘‘Avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ sattānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarata’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.124; 5.520) hi vuttaṃ. Tassa pātino sattassa taṇhādisaṃkilesattayato mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. ‘‘Kaṇṭhekālo’’tiādīnaṃ viyassa samāsasiddhi veditabbā.
或者,“巴帝摩卡”也可以这样理解:它使心堕落、令心坠入痛苦,所以叫“堕”(pāti),这里指的是心。经中确实说过:“世间被心引导,被心拖拽。”从这“堕”中解脱出来的方法,就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,使人堕入恶趣之苦和轮回之苦的,叫“堕”,也就是渴爱等烦恼染污。经中确实说过:“渴爱造作出人”,以及“以渴爱为伴侣的人”等等。从这“堕”中解脱出来,就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,堕落发生的地方叫“堕”,也就是六内处和六外处。经中确实说过:“世间依六处生起,在六处建立亲近关系。”从被称为六内处、六外处的“堕”中解脱出来,就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,有堕落、有恶趣,这叫“有堕”,指的是轮回。从轮回中解脱出来,就是“巴帝摩卡”。又或者,因为世尊统御一切世间、于法自在,所以称为“主”(pati);依此而解脱,就是“解脱”(mokkha)。主的解脱因它而被施设,所以叫“主解脱”(patimokkha),“主解脱”就是“巴帝摩卡”(pātimokkha)。又或者,因为是一切功德的根本,以最殊胜之义称为“主”;同时,因为具有前面所说的解脱之义而称为“脱”,所以叫“主脱”,“主脱”就是“巴帝摩卡”。正如经中所说:“巴帝摩卡,就是入口,就是首要。”详细解释如彼所说。巴利
Atha vā pāteti vinipāteti dukkheti pāti, cittaṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittena nīyati loko, cittena parikassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.62). Tassa pātino mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. Patati vā etena apāyadukkhe saṃsāradukkhe cāti pāti, taṇhādisaṃkileso. Vuttañhi ‘‘taṇhā janeti purisaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.56-57), taṇhādutiyo puriso’’ti (itivu. 15, 105; cūḷani. pārāyanānugītigāthāniddesa 107) ca ādi. Tato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā patati etthāti pāti, cha ajjhattikāni bāhirāni ca āyatanāni. Vuttañhi ‘‘chasu loko samuppanno, chasu kubbati santhava’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.70). Tato chaajjhattikabāhirāyatanasaṅkhātato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā pāto vinipāto assa atthīti pātī, saṃsāro. Tato mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā sabbalokādhipatibhāvato dhammissaro bhagavā patīti vuccati, muccati etenāti mokkho, patino mokkho tena paññattattāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Sabbaguṇānaṃ vā mūlabhāvato uttamaṭṭhena pati ca so yathāvuttaṭṭhena mokkho cāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhanti mukhametaṃ pamukhameta’’nti (mahāva. 135) vitthāro.
或者,“pati”是“种种方式”的意思,“ati”是表示“彻底、究竟”的虚词。因此,以种种方式彻底解脱,就是“巴帝摩卡”。因为这条戒本身能通过彼分断而解脱;当它与定相应、与慧相应时,则能通过镇伏断和正断而彻底解脱、释放,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。又或者说,从每一种、每一种应当违犯的过失中分别解脱出来,就是“巴帝摩卡”,意思是“各别解脱”。或者说,“解脱”就是涅槃,而巴帝摩卡是那解脱的映现,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。因为巴帝摩卡戒律仪就像太阳曙光升起一样,是涅槃生起的先兆,如同涅槃的倒影,能随宜息灭烦恼,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”;巴帝摩卡本身就是“巴帝摩卡”。又或者说,它朝向解脱、面向解脱而运作,所以是“向解脱”;“向解脱”就是“巴帝摩卡”。关于“巴帝摩卡”这个词的含义,首先应当这样来理解。巴利
Atha vā paiti pakāre, atīti accantatthe nipāto. Tasmā pakārehi accantaṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkho. Idañhi sīlaṃ sayaṃ tadaṅgavasena, samādhisahitaṃ paññāsahitañca vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena ca accantaṃ mokkheti mocetīti pātimokkhaṃ. Pati pati mokkhoti vā patimokkho, tamhā tamhā vītikkamitabbadosato pati paccekaṃ mokkhoti attho. Patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Mokkhoti vā nibbānaṃ, tassa mokkhassa paṭibimbabhūtanti patimokkhaṃ. Pātimokkhasīlasaṃvaro hi sūriyassa aruṇuggamanaṃ viya nibbānassa udayabhūto tappaṭibhāgo viya hoti yathārahaṃ kilesanibbāpanatoti patimokkhaṃ, patimokkhaṃ eva pātimokkhaṃ. Atha vā mokkhaṃ pati vattati mokkhābhimukhanti patimokkhaṃ, patimokkhameva pātimokkhanti evaṃ tāvettha pātimokkhasaddassa attho veditabbo.
“防护”就是借此阻挡、遮止,所以叫防护;波罗提木叉本身就是防护,所以叫波罗提木叉防护。但从实际含义来说,它是对各种可能违犯之处加以远离,也就是远离或思心所。一个人以这样的波罗提木叉防护来装备自己、完全具备它,就说他是“具足波罗提木叉防护”。这在《分别论》中也是这样说的:巴利
Saṃvarati pidahati etenāti saṃvaro, pātimokkhameva saṃvaroti pātimokkhasaṃvaro. Atthato pana tato tato vītikkamitabbato viratiyo cetanā vā, tena pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto samannāgato pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti vutto. Vuttañhetaṃ vibhaṅge –
他通过这种巴帝摩卡防护而具备、完全具备、达到、完全达到、圆满、成就。因此,他被称为以巴帝摩卡防护防护者。巴利
‘‘Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto upagato samupagato sampanno samannāgato. Tena vuccati pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti (vibha. 511).
“住”是指以行住坐卧的威仪而住,也就是活动、运作。“具足行仪与行境”是指:不做竹杖施之类的邪命之事,也不做身体上的粗鲁举动等,彻底避免一切不合宜的行为;成就了“身不违越、语不违越”这种与比丘相称的行仪;又避开妓女等不合适的去处,具足为了托钵等目的而适合前往的场所——这叫作行境——因此两方面都圆满,所以说具足行仪与行境。此外,如果有一位比丘对导师恭敬、顺从,对同梵行者恭敬、顺从,具足惭与愧,下衣穿得整齐、上衣披得整齐,前进、后退、前视、旁视、屈伸、垂目都端正庄严,威仪圆满,守护根门,饮食知量,精勤于觉醒,具足正念正知,少欲、知足、远离、不混杂,对增上行仪认真去做、常怀恭敬,那么这位比丘就称为具足行仪。巴利
Viharatīti iriyāpathavihārena viharati, iriyati, vattati. Ācāragocarasampannoti veḷudānādimicchājīvassa kāyapāgabbhiyādīnañca akaraṇena, sabbaso anācāraṃ vajjetvā ‘‘kāyiko avītikkamo, vācasiko avītikkamo’’ti evaṃ vuttabhikkhusāruppaācārasampattiyā vesiyādiagocaraṃ vajjetvā piṇḍapātādiatthaṃ upasaṅkamituṃ yuttaṭṭhānasaṅkhātagocarena ca sampannattā ācāragocarasampanno. Apica yo bhikkhu satthari sagāravo sappatisso sabrahmacārīsu sagāravo sappatisso hirottappasampanno sunivattho supāruto pāsādikena abhikkantena paṭikkantena ālokitena vilokitena samiñjitena pasāritena okkhittacakkhu iriyāpathasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyānuyutto satisampajaññena samannāgato appiccho santuṭṭho pavivitto asaṃsaṭṭho ābhisamācārikesu sakkaccakārī garucittīkārabahulo viharati, ayaṃ vuccati ācārasampanno.
行境有三种:依止行境、守护行境、系心行境。
其中,依止行境是指:一位具足十种论议功德、具有如上所说特征的善知识,依靠他,就能听闻未曾听闻的,让已听闻的变得清净,超越疑惑,使见解端正,令心生净信;跟随他学习时,信心增长,戒增长,所闻增长,施舍增长,智慧增长。这就是依止行境。
守护行境是指:比丘进入村落、走上街道时,眼睛低垂,只看一轭之远,收摄而行,不看象、不看马、不看车、不看步兵、不看女人、不看男人,不向上看,不向下看,也不东张西望地环顾四方和四维而行。这就是守护行境。
系心行境则是四念处,比丘把心系念在这上面。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
Gocaro pana – upanissayagocaro, ārakkhagocaro, upanibandhagocaroti tividho. Tattha dasakathāvatthuguṇasamannāgato vuttalakkhaṇo kalyāṇamitto yaṃ nissāya asutaṃ suṇāti, sutaṃ pariyodapeti, kaṅkhaṃ vitarati, diṭṭhiṃ ujukaṃ karoti, cittaṃ pasādeti, yassa ca anusikkhanto saddhāya vaḍḍhati, sīlena, sutena, cāgena, paññāya vaḍḍhati, ayaṃ upanissayagocaro. Yo bhikkhu antaragharaṃ paviṭṭho vīthiṃ paṭipanno okkhittacakkhu yugamattadassāvī saṃvuto gacchati, na hatthiṃ olokento, na assaṃ, na rathaṃ, na pattiṃ, na itthiṃ, na purisaṃ olokento, na uddhaṃ olokento, na adho olokento, na disāvidisā pekkhamāno gacchati, ayaṃ ārakkhagocaro. Upanibandhagocaro pana cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, yattha bhikkhu attano cittaṃ upanibandhati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,什么才是比丘自己的、从亲族继承来的行境呢?就是四念处。巴利
‘‘Ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno gocaro sako pettiko visayo? Yadidaṃ – cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.372).
就是这样,因为具备了前面所说的行仪成就和这里的行境成就,所以称为行仪行境具足。巴利
Iti yathāvuttāya ācārasampattiyā imāya ca gocarasampattiyā samannāgatattā ācāragocarasampanno.
对于极微小的过失也见到怖畏:对于极微细、极小的、不是故意犯的众学处类以及不善心生起等种种过失,具有见到它们就怖畏的习性。如果一位比丘把极微小的过失看成高达六十八万由旬的须弥山王,或者一位比丘把极轻微的一句恶语看成等同于波罗夷,这位比丘就叫做对于极微小的过失也见到怖畏。于诸学处受持而学:凡是学处中应当学的,以一切方式、完全、彻底、毫无遗漏地受持而学、奉行、圆满——这就是其含义。如是具善戒:以这种方式成为具足善戒者。其实,这是就人而解说戒,在“诸比丘,比丘如是具足善戒”这句中,也是就所说的人而作总结;为了在“善法”部分开演法义,点明“此戒是他们诸法的基础”,所以又说“如是具善戒”。“七菩提分等”的内容,其义全都如前所述。再说“具善戒”等,是总结之语。巴利
Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvīti appamattakesu aṇuppamāṇesu asañcicca āpannasekhiyaakusalacittuppādādibhedesu vajjesu bhayadassanasīlo. Yo hi bhikkhu paramāṇumattaṃ vajjaṃ aṭṭhasaṭṭhiyojanasatasahassubbedhasinerupabbatarājasadisaṃ katvā passati, yopi bhikkhu sabbalahukaṃ dubbhāsitamattaṃ pārājikasadisaṃ katvā passati, ayaṃ aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī nāma. Samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti yaṃ kiñci sikkhāpadesu sikkhitabbaṃ, taṃ sabbena sabbaṃ sabbathā sabbaṃ anavasesaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhati vattati, pūretīti attho. Iti kalyāṇasīloti iminā pakārena kalyāṇasīlo samāno. Puggalādhiṭṭhānavasena hi niddiṭṭhaṃ sīlaṃ ‘‘evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kalyāṇasīlo hotī’’ti vuttapuggalādhiṭṭhānavaseneva nigametvā ‘‘kalyāṇadhammo’’ti ettha vuttadhamme niddisitukāmena ‘‘tesaṃ dhammānaṃ idaṃ sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāna’’nti dassetuṃ puna ‘‘iti kalyāṇasīlo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sattannaṃ bodhipakkhiyānantiādi sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttatthameva. Puna kalyāṇasīlotiādi nigamanaṃ.
在偈颂中,“恶作”是指做得很坏,意思是恶行。“具惭者”是指有惭、具足惭的人,其本性就是对一切恶行的生起都感到厌恶;或者说,“具惭者”是指与惭相应的心。应当知道,这里通过提到“惭”,也同时包含了“愧”。而通过提出惭和愧,说明了使一切恶行不存在的因,也就是从因的角度阐明了善戒的性质。“正觉”是指圣者的智慧,前往它、亲近它,所以叫“趣向正觉者”,意思是菩提分法。“无增上慢”是指没有贪等增上慢。也有人读作“如是类者”,意思是:就像前面所说的“专精修习菩提分诸法”,就是那样、那种状态。“于苦”:指轮回之苦,或者指轮回苦的因。“即于此而自知灭尽”:通过证得漏尽,他了知自己轮回苦的因——属于集谛方面的烦恼聚,就在此生、就在这个身体中已经灭尽、不再生起;或者说,他了知轮回苦本身,由于最后心的灭去,就在此生中已经灭尽、已经穷尽。“具足他们法”:就是具足前面所说的戒等那些法。“无所依”:因为已经断除了爱、见等依止,所以无所依,在任何地方都不依止。“于一切世间”:指一切有情世间。其余内容如前所说。巴利
Gāthāsu dukkaṭanti duṭṭhu kataṃ, duccaritanti attho. Hirimananti hirimantaṃ hirisampannaṃ, sabbaso pāpapavattiyā jigucchanasabhāvanti attho. Hirimananti vā hirisahitacittaṃ. Hiriggahaṇeneva cettha ottappampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Hirottappaggahaṇena ca sabbaso duccaritābhāvassa hetuṃ dassento kalyāṇasīlataṃ hetuto vibhāveti. Sambodhīti ariyañāṇaṃ, taṃ gacchanti bhajantīti sambodhigāmino, bodhipakkhikāti attho. Anussadanti rāgussadādirahitaṃ. ‘‘Tathāvidha’’ntipi paṭhanti. ‘‘Bodhipakkhikānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto’’ti yathā yathā pubbe vuttaṃ, tathāvidhaṃ tādisanti attho. Dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhassa, vaṭṭadukkhahetuno vā. Idheva khayamattanoti āsavakkhayādhigamena attano vaṭṭadukkhahetuno samudayapakkhiyassa kilesagaṇassa idheva imasmiṃyeva attabhāve khayaṃ anuppādaṃ pajānāti, vaṭṭadukkhasseva vā idheva carimakacittanirodhena khayaṃ khīṇabhāvaṃ pajānāti. Tehi dhammehi sampannanti tehi yathāvuttasīlādidhammehi samannāgataṃ. Asitanti taṇhādiṭṭhinissayānaṃ pahīnattā asitaṃ, katthaci anissitaṃ. Sabbalokassāti sabbasmiṃ sattaloke. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第九部《施经》的注释巴利
9. Dānasuttavaṇṇanā
98 98. 第九,「施」是指应当布施的东西;或者,以具体事物为依托的思心所就是施,这也是「舍弃所得」的别名。「财施」是指以四种资具作为可布施之物,所以叫财施。这些资具之所以被称为「财」,是因为它们会被贪爱等所沾染。或者,舍弃这些资具的思心所就是财施。「法施」:在这里,有人这样分别善与不善的业道,说:「这些法是善的,这些法是不善的;这些法有罪过,这些法没有罪过;这些法受智者责备,这些法受智者称赞;这些法若完全执取、受持,会导致无益与痛苦,这些法则导致利益与安乐。」他如此分别善不善业道,犹如现前亲眼看见一般,将业与业果、此世与他世明显揭示,令众生从不善法中回转,安立于善法中,这就是说法,这就是法施。然而,若有人分别诸谛:「这些法应证知,这些法应遍知,这些法应断除,这些法应作证,这些法应修习」,为了证得不死而宣说行道之法,这名为达到顶点的法施。Etadaggaṃ 即此为最上。Yadidaṃ 即凡此所说的法施,这在两种布施中是最上、最殊胜、最第一。因为依止趣向还灭的法施,能从一切无益中解脱,超越整个轮回之苦。而世间法施则是一切布施的因,是一切圆满的根本。因此说——巴利
98. Navame dānanti dātabbaṃ, savatthukā vā cetanā dānaṃ, sampattipariccāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āmisadānanti cattāro paccayā deyyabhāvavasena āmisadānaṃ nāma. Te hi taṇhādīhi āmasitabbato āmisanti vuccanti. Tesaṃ vā pariccāgacetanā āmisadānaṃ. Dhammadānanti idhekacco ‘‘ime dhammā kusalā, ime dhammā akusalā, ime dhammā sāvajjā, ime dhammā anavajjā, ime viññugarahitā, ime viññuppasatthā; ime samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, ime hitāya sukhāya saṃvattantī’’ti kusalākusalakammapathe vibhajanto kammakammavipāke idhalokaparaloke paccakkhato dassento viya pākaṭaṃ karonto akusalehi dhammehi nivattāpento, kusalesu dhammesu patiṭṭhāpento, dhammaṃ deseti, idaṃ dhammadānaṃ. Yo pana ‘‘ime dhammā abhiññeyyā , ime pariññeyyā, ime pahātabbā, ime sacchikātabbā, ime bhāvetabbā’’ti saccāni vibhāvento amatādhigamāya paṭipattidhammaṃ deseti, idaṃ sikhāppattaṃ dhammadānaṃ nāma. Etadagganti etaṃ aggaṃ. Yadidanti yaṃ idaṃ dhammadānaṃ vuttaṃ, etaṃ imesu dvīsu dānesu aggaṃ seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ. Vivaṭṭagāmidhammadānañhi nissāya sabbānatthato parimuccati, sakalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ atikkamati. Lokiyaṃ pana dhammadānaṃ sabbesaṃ dānānaṃ nidānaṃ sabbasampattīnaṃ mūlaṃ. Tenāha –
法施胜过一切布施,法味胜过一切滋味;
法喜胜过一切喜乐,灭尽渴爱胜过一切苦。巴利
‘‘Sabbadānaṃ dhammadānaṃ jināti, sabbarasaṃ dhammaraso jināti; Sabbaratiṃ dhammaratī jināti, taṇhakkhayo sabbadukkhaṃ jinātī’’ti. (dha. pa. 354) –
在这里,无畏施应当理解为已经被法施包含在内。巴利
Abhayadānamettha dhammadāneneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
怀着“共同受用”的心意,本来该自己享用的四种资具,不独自享用而分给别人,这就是财施。同样怀着“共同受用”的心意,对自己已经了知、已经证得的法,不懈怠地而去教导别人,这就是法施。用四种资具和四种摄事来饶益、怜悯别人,这就是财摄。依照前面所说的方式,用法来饶益、怜悯别人,这就是法摄。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Sādhāraṇabhogitādhippāyena attanā paribhuñjitabbato catupaccayato sayameva abhuñjitvā paresaṃ saṃvibhajanaṃ āmisasaṃvibhāgo. Sādhāraṇabhogitādhippāyeneva attanā viditassa adhigatassa dhammassa appossukko ahutvā paresaṃ upadeso dhammasaṃvibhāgo. Catūhi paccayehi catūhi ca saṅgahavatthūhi paresaṃ anuggaṇhanaṃ anukampanaṃ āmisānuggaho. Vuttanayeneva dhammena paresaṃ anuggaṇhanaṃ anukampanaṃ dhammānuggaho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
偈颂里说“布施是至高”,意思是:因为心、福田、所施之物都极为殊胜,所以这布施是至高、最上的;或者因为能圆满财富等果报,所以是至上的;又或者因为能压伏、摧破与它相反的贪、悭等烦恼,所以诸佛世尊称之为“至高”。所谓“无上”,是说这布施因为思等各方面都达到极致,最为殊胜,且能带来最上的果报,没有比它更高的,能成就无上的状态,所以称为“无上”。在“分施”这个词这里,也要把“至高”和“无上”两个词带进来一起配合。所谓“称叹”,就是赞叹、称赞,并依“诸比丘!施与食物者,施主即给予受者五种处所”等语,以及“诸比丘!若众生能了知布施分施的果报”等语而称赞。然而,为了显示布施与分施如何是至高、无上,所以说“在最胜的”等语。其中“在最胜的”,是指因戒等功德殊胜相应而最胜、无上的福德田,即正自觉者及圣者僧团。“净信心”,是指以对业果的信心和对三宝的信心,令心清净、笃信。因为心具足与田具足,即使所施之物微少,布施也会有大威力、大光明、大广大。这确实是说过的——巴利
Gāthāsu yamāhu dānaṃ paramanti yaṃ dānaṃ cittakhettadeyyadhammānaṃ uḷārabhāvena paramaṃ uttamaṃ, bhogasampattiādīnaṃ vā pūraṇato phalanato, parassa vā lobhamacchariyādikassa paṭipakkhassa maddanato hiṃsanato ‘‘parama’’nti buddhā bhagavanto āhu. Anuttaranti yaṃ dānaṃ cetanādisampattiyā sātisayapavattiyā aggabhāvena aggavipākattā ca uttararahitaṃ anuttarabhāvasādhanaṃ cāti āhu. Yaṃ saṃvibhāganti etthāpi ‘‘paramaṃ anuttara’’nti padadvayaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Avaṇṇayīti kittayi, ‘‘bhojanaṃ, bhikkhave, dadamāno dāyako paṭiggāhakānaṃ pañca ṭhānāni detī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 5.37), ‘‘evaṃ ce, bhikkhave, sattā jāneyyuṃ dānasaṃvibhāgassa vipāka’’ntiādinā (itivu. 26) ca pasaṃsayi. Yathā pana dānaṃ saṃvibhāgo ca paramaṃ anuttarañca hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aggamhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha aggamhīti sīlādiguṇavisesayogena seṭṭhe anuttare puññakkhette sammāsambuddhe ariyasaṅghe ca. Pasannacittoti kammaphalasaddhāya ratanattayasaddhāya ca cittaṃ pasādento okappento. Cittasampattiyā hi khettasampattiyā ca parittepi deyyadhamme dānaṃ mahānubhāvaṃ hoti mahājutikaṃ mahāvipphāraṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
心清净信时,布施绝不算少。
无论是对如来、正等觉者,还是对他的弟子们。巴利
‘‘Natthi citte pasannamhi, appakā nāma dakkhiṇā; Tathāgate vā sambuddhe, atha vā tassa sāvake’’ti. (vi. va. 804; netti. 95);
智者就是有智慧的人。了知,就是如实透彻地了知布施的果报和布施的利益。在合适的时机,谁会不去供养呢?在恰当的时候,谁又不会去布施呢?因为只有当信心、施物、受者这三者同时现前时,布施才能成立,否则就不能成立;或者说,是在适合布施给受者的时候。巴利
Viññūti sappañño. Pajānanti sammadeva dānaphalaṃ dānānisaṃsaṃ pajānanto. Ko na yajetha kāleti yuttappattakāle ko nāma dānaṃ na dadeyya? Saddhā, deyyadhammo, paṭiggāhakāti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammukhibhūtakāleyeva hi dānaṃ sambhavati, na aññathā, paṭiggāhakānaṃ vā dātuṃ yuttakāle.
像这样,先用第一首偈颂说明了财物的布施、分享与资助,现在为了说明法的布施、分享与资助,而说出“他们宣说”等第二首偈颂。其中,“两者”指的是所说的“宣说者”和“听受者”这两种人。这里简要的意思是:凡是对于善逝世尊的教法、对正法生起净信心,安住在解脱处之首而宣说和领受的人,对于这些宣说者和听受者来说,那就是被称为法施、法分享、法资助的利益。因为能成就究竟之义,所以是最上的;通过清除贪爱等一切烦恼垢秽而得以清净。是什么样的人呢?就是在善逝的教法中不放逸的人。又说:巴利
Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya āmisadānasaṃvibhāgānuggahe dassetvā idāni dhammadānasaṃvibhāgānuggahe dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ceva bhāsantī’’ti dutiyagāthamāha. Tattha ubhayanti ‘‘bhāsanti suṇantī’’ti vuttā desakā paṭiggāhakāti ubhayaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – ye sugatassa bhagavato sāsane saddhamme pasannacittā vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā desenti paṭiggaṇhanti ca, tesaṃ desakapaṭiggāhakānaṃ so dhammadānadhammasaṃvibhāgadhammānuggahasaṅkhāto attho. Paramatthasādhanato paramo. Taṇhāsaṃkilesādisabbasaṃkilesamalavisodhanena visujjhati. Kīdisānaṃ? Ye appamattā sugatassa sāsane. Ye ca –
不造作一切恶,圆满成就善行;
净化自己的心,这就是诸佛的教法。巴利
‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadā; Sacittapariyodapanaṃ, etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti. (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183) –
简单来说,在正自觉者的教法里,当教诫和教导这样被开示时,那些不放逸的人会恭敬地圆满增上戒学等。他们的清净得以成就,因为以阿罗汉果的清净而变得极其纯净。巴利
Saṅkhepato evaṃ pakāsite sammāsambuddhassa sāsane ovāde anusiṭṭhiyaṃ appamattā adhisīlasikkhādayo sakkaccaṃ sampādenti. Tesaṃ visujjhati, arahattaphalavisuddhiyā ativiya vodāyatīti.
第10经 三明经的注释巴利
10. Tevijjasuttavaṇṇanā
99 第99段:第十经里说的“依法”,是指依照正理,也就是以被称为正行的因由、原因。因为让人成为三明者的那条行道,在这里就应当理解为“法”。那么,那条行道是什么呢?就是行成就和明成就。“三明”是指具足宿住随念智等三种明。“婆罗门”是指已舍弃恶行的婆罗门。“我宣说”是指我让人知道、确认他是婆罗门。“不是仅凭他人言说”是指:我不把另一个仅凭出身,或者仅凭八支等口头虚妄言说者宣说为婆罗门。另一种解释是,“仅凭言说”是指仅仅讽诵咒文。这两种解释都是在否定那些认为只要讽诵三吠陀等就成为三明婆罗门的人。世尊为了说明:这些称“婆呼”者被无明所覆,从究竟意义上把非三明婆罗门称为“三明婆罗门”;而像这样真正成为三明婆罗门的人,才是真正的三明婆罗门。于是,随顺那些能够觉悟者的心意,开始了这次开示。巴利
99. Dasame dhammenāti ñāyena, sammāpaṭipattisaṅkhātena hetunā kāraṇena. Yāya hi paṭipadāya tevijjo hoti, sā paṭipadā idha dhammoti veditabbā. Kā pana sā paṭipadāti? Caraṇasampadā ca vijjāsampadā ca. Tevijjanti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇādīhi tīhi vijjāhi samannāgataṃ. Brāhmaṇanti bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇaṃ. Paññāpemīti ‘‘brāhmaṇo’’ti jānāpemi patiṭṭhapemi. Nāññaṃ lapitalāpanamattenāti aññaṃ jātimattabrāhmaṇaṃ aṭṭhakādīhi lapitamattavippalapanamattena brāhmaṇaṃ na paññāpemīti. Atha vā lapitalāpanamattenāti mantānaṃ ajjhenaajjhāpanamattena. Ubhayathāpi yaṃ pana brāhmaṇā sāmavedādivedattayaajjhenena tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadanti, taṃ paṭikkhipati. Bhagavatā hi ‘‘paramatthato atevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃyeva cete bhovādino avijjānivutā ‘tevijjo brāhmaṇo’ti vadanti, evaṃ pana tevijjo brāhmaṇo hotī’’ti dassanatthaṃ tathā bujjhanakānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena ayaṃ desanā āraddhā.
在这里,因为具足明的人必定也具足行,若没有行成就,明成就就不可能存在。所以,把行成就包含在内,只以“明”为代表来安立婆罗门。世尊想要这样安立,就先发起开示:“比丘们,我如法安立三明婆罗门。”接着为了说明“比丘们,我怎样如法安立三明婆罗门”,先提出问题,然后以人为立足点来开示,分析三种明,说道:“比丘们,在这里,有比丘……”等等。巴利
Tattha yasmā vijjāsampanno caraṇasampannoyeva hoti caraṇasampadāya vinā vijjāsampattiyā abhāvato, tasmā caraṇasampadaṃ antogadhaṃ katvā vijjāsīseneva brāhmaṇaṃ paññāpetukāmo ‘‘dhammenāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ paññāpemī’’ti desanaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘kathañcāhaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammena tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ paññāpemī’’ti kathetukamyatāya pucchaṃ katvā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya vijjattayaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“多种多样”是指种种不同的,或者是以多种方式产生的,意思是“被详细说明的”。“宿住”是指从紧挨着的过去世开始,在各处安住过的诸蕴相续。“所住”是指曾居住、曾经历的,在自己相续中生起后又灭去的;或者是指所住的法;或者是以行境为住处而住的,是被自己的识所了知的,也是被其他识所了知的,比如在随念断灭行处等的时候。“随念”是指按照“一生、二生”这样以生的顺序追溯而忆念,或者一再随念,当心转向时,在准备工作之后紧接着就忆念。巴利
Tattha anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ, anekehi vā pakārehi pavattitaṃ, saṃvaṇṇitanti attho. Pubbenivāsanti samanantarātītabhavaṃ ādiṃ katvā tattha tattha nivutthakkhandhasantānaṃ. Nivutthanti ajjhāvutthaṃ anubhūtaṃ, attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhaṃ, nivutthadhammaṃ vā nivutthaṃ, gocaranivāsena nivutthaṃ, attano viññāṇena viññātaṃ paraviññāṇaviññātampi vā chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsu. Anussaratīti ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti evaṃ jātipaṭipāṭivasena anugantvā sarati, anudeva vā sarati, citte abhininnāmite parikammasamanantaraṃ sarati.
“如下”这个词是用来显示前面所说的种类的。正是通过它,为了显示那已经开始的宿住智的种类,才说了“一生”等。其中,“一生”是指以一次结生为根本、以死亡为终点、包含在一期生命中的蕴相续。“二生”等也是同样的道理。而在“许多坏劫”等中,正在衰坏的劫叫“坏劫”,正在增长的劫叫“成劫”。其中,因为坏劫是坏住劫的根本,所以用坏劫含摄了坏住劫;用成劫含摄了成住劫。这样一来,《增支部》所说的“诸比丘,有这四种不可计数的劫。哪四种?坏劫、坏住劫、成劫、成住劫”,这四种不可计数的劫就都被包含在内了。巴利
Seyyathidanti āraddhappakāradassanatthe nipāto. Teneva yvāyaṃ pubbenivāso āraddho hoti, tassa pakāraṃ dassento ‘‘ekampi jāti’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ekampi jātinti ekampi paṭisandhimūlakaṃ cutipariyosānaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhasantānaṃ. Esa nayo dvepi jātiyotiādīsu. Anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappetiādīsu pana parihāyamāno kappo saṃvaṭṭakappo , vaḍḍhamāno vivaṭṭakappo. Tattha saṃvaṭṭena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī gahito hoti tammūlakattā, vivaṭṭena ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evañhi sati yāni tāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Saṃvaṭṭo, saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī, vivaṭṭo, vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī’’ti (a. ni. 4.156) vuttāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni, tāni pariggahitāni honti.
在这里,有三种毁灭:火毁灭、水毁灭、风毁灭。三种毁灭的界限是:光音天、遍净天、广果天。当劫被火毁灭时,从光音天往下都被火烧尽。当劫被水毁灭时,从遍净天往下都被水消融。当劫被风毁灭时,从广果天往下都被风吹散。详细来说,百千俱胝的轮围世界同时毁灭。就这样,这样忆念宿住的比丘,能随念许多坏劫、许多成劫、许多成坏劫。怎么随念呢?就是通过“我在彼处”这样的方式。巴利
Tattha tayo saṃvaṭṭā – tejosaṃvaṭṭo, āposaṃvaṭṭo, vāyosaṃvaṭṭoti. Tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmā – ābhassarā, subhakiṇhā, vehapphalāti. Yadā kappo tejena saṃvaṭṭati, ābhassarato heṭṭhā agginā ḍayhati. Yadā udakena saṃvaṭṭati, subhakiṇhato heṭṭhā udakena vilīyati. Yadā vātena saṃvaṭṭati, vehapphalato heṭṭhā vātena viddhaṃsiyati. Vitthārato pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaṃ ekato vinassati. Iti evarūpo ayaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranto bhikkhu anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe anussarati. Kathaṃ? Amutrāsintiādinā nayena.
在这里,“我在那边”是指:我在那个坏劫中,或在那种存在、那种生处、那种趣、那种识住、那种有情居、那种有情群体中曾经是。“名叫某某”是指:叫帝须或弗沙。“姓某某”是指:姓乔达摩或迦叶。“容貌某某”是指:白色或黑色。“食物某某”是指:吃米饭肉食,或吃自然落下的果实。“感受这样的苦乐”是指:感受种种身体和心里的苦乐,包括有染着的、无染着的等各种类型。“寿命这样有限”是指:寿命大约一百岁,或者寿命长达八十四万劫。“我从彼处没,转生他处”是指:我从彼有、彼胎、彼趣、彼识住、彼有情居、彼有情群体死后,又在某某有、胎、趣、识住、有情居、有情群体中出生。“在那里也是如此”是指:又在彼有……乃至彼有情群体中,我再度存在。“名叫某某”等如前所说之理。巴利
Tattha amutrāsinti amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe amumhi bhave vā yoniyā vā gatiyā vā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā vā sattāvāse vā sattanikāye vā ahamahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmoti tisso vā phusso vā. Evaṃgottoti gotamo vā kassapo vā. Evaṃvaṇṇoti odāto vā sāmo vā. Evamāhāroti sālimaṃsodanāhāro vā pavattaphalabhojano vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti anekappakārānaṃ kāyikacetasikānaṃ sāmisanirāmisādippabhedānaṃ vā sukhadukkhānaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ vassasataparimāṇāyupariyanto vā caturāsītikappasatasahassaparimāṇāyupariyanto vā. So tato cuto amutra udapādinti sohaṃ tato bhavato yonito gatito viññāṇaṭṭhitito sattāvāsato sattanikāyato vā cuto puna amukasmiṃ nāma bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā udapādiṃ. Tatrāpāsinti atha tatrapi bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā puna ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmotiādi vuttanayameva.
或者,因为“我在那里”是逐步向上回忆的人,按照自己的愿行、随自己的能力去忆念;而“他从那里死后”是返回省察的人所作的观察。所以,紧接着“生在这里”之后,就说“在那里出生了”。“在那里我也曾存在”:就是在那里,在有……乃至在众生群体中,我也曾存在。“这样的名字”:就是达多或密多。“这样的姓氏”:就是婆塞吒或迦叶。“这样的容貌”:就是黑色或白色。“这样的食物”:就是以净食为食,或以米饭等为食。“这样感受乐与苦”:就是感受天界的乐,或感受人界的乐与苦。“这样的寿命限度”:就是这样的、各种不同的最高寿命限度。“他从那里死后”:就是我从那里,从那一趣死后。“生在这里”:就是在这里,在这最后一生中成为人后,投生、出生了。巴利
Atha vā yasmā ‘‘amutrāsi’’nti idaṃ anupubbena ārohantassa attano abhinīhārānurūpaṃ yathābalaṃ saraṇaṃ, ‘‘so tato cuto’’ti paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ, tasmā ‘‘idhūpapanno’’ti imissā idhūpapattiyā anantaraṃ ‘‘amutra udapādi’’nti vuttaṃ. Tatrāpāsinti tatrapi bhave…pe… sattanikāye vā āsiṃ. Evaṃnāmoti datto vā mitto vā, evaṃgottoti vāseṭṭho vā kassapo vā. Evaṃvaṇṇoti kāḷo vā odāto vā. Evamāhāroti sudhāhāro vā sāliodanādiāhāro vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti dibbasukhappaṭisaṃvedī vā mānusasukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī vā. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ taṃtaṃparamāyupariyanto. So tato cutoti sohaṃ tato bhavādito cuto. Idhūpapannoti idha imasmiṃ carimabhave manusso hutvā upapanno nibbatto.
所谓“如此”,就是这样的意思。“有特征、有指示”:通过姓名、族姓等来指示,就是“有指示”;通过肤色等来显示,就是“有特征”。因为众生通过姓名、族姓被指示为“提舍”“乔达摩”,通过肤色等被了知为“黑”“白”等种种差别。所以,姓名、族姓是指示,其余的是特征。“这是他证得的第一明”:这位比丘因为最初证得,所以称为“第一”;以令知为含义,所以称为“明”;此明已被证得、已被现证。那么它令知什么呢?它令知宿住。“无明”:对于那宿住,以令不知为含义,那覆盖它的痴就称为“无明”。“暗”:那个痴,因为覆盖的含义,称为“暗”。“光”:那个明,因为照亮的含义,称为“光”。在这里,“明已证得”是实质含义,其余的是赞叹之辞。这里的连接是:这位比丘确实已证得明;对于已证得明的他,无明已被破坏,即已灭尽。为什么呢?因为明已生起。其余两句的道理也一样。巴利
Itīti evaṃ. Sākāraṃ sauddesanti nāmagottādivasena sauddesaṃ, vaṇṇādivasena sākāraṃ. Nāmagottena hi sattā ‘‘tisso gotamo’’ti uddisīyanti, vaṇṇādīhi ‘‘sāmo odāto’’ti nānattato paññāyanti. Tasmā nāmagottaṃ uddeso, itare ākārā. Ayamassa paṭhamā vijjā adhigatāti ayaṃ iminā bhikkhunā paṭhamaṃ adhigamavasena paṭhamā, viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā adhigatā sacchikatā hoti. Kiṃ panāyaṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsaṃ. Avijjāti tasseva pubbenivāsassa aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena tassa paṭicchādakamoho vuccati. Tamoti sveva moho paṭicchādakaṭṭhena tamoti vuccati. Ālokoti sā eva vijjā obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena āloko. Ettha ca vijjā adhigatāti ayaṃ attho, sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Yojanā panettha – ayaṃ kho tena bhikkhunā vijjā adhigatā, tassa adhigatavijjassa avijjā vihatā, vinaṭṭhāti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannāti. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
这里,“yathā taṃ”中的“yathā”是比喻的意思,“taṃ”只是一个小品词。因为正念没有丢失,所以是“不放逸的人”。因为精进的热力,所以是“热忱的人”。因为对身体和生命都不眷恋,所以是“心已发出、心已派遣的人”,意思就是心已投向目标。这里说的是:就像一位不放逸、热忱、心已发出的人安住时,无明会被破坏,明会生起,黑暗会被破坏,光明会生起;同样,那位比丘的无明已被破坏,明已生起,黑暗已被破坏,光明已生起,他得到了与精勤修行相应的果报而安住。巴利
Yathā tanti ettha yathāti opammatthe, tanti nipātamattaṃ. Satiyā avippavāsena appamattassa. Vīriyātāpena ātāpino. Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pahitattassa pesitacittassāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avijjā vihaññeyya, vijjā uppajjeyya, tamo vihaññeyya, āloko uppajjeyya; evameva tassa bhikkhuno avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā , tamo vihato, āloko uppanno, tassa padhānānuyogassa anurūpameva phalaṃ labhitvā viharatīti.
“以天眼”这里,应当说的内容前面已经讲过了。“清净”:因为通过看见死与生而成为见清净的原因,所以是清净。为什么呢?如果有人只看见死而没看见生,他就会执取断见;如果有人只看见生而没看见死,他就会执取有新众生出现的邪见。如果有人死与生两者都看见,那么因为他超越了这两种邪见,所以他的这种看见就成为见清净的原因。而这位佛弟子两者都看见。因此说“因为通过看见死与生而成为见清净的原因,所以是清净”。或者,因为远离了十一种随烦恼,所以是清净。正如经中说:“‘疑是心的随烦恼’——这样知道之后,他舍断了疑这个心的随烦恼;不作意……乃至昏沉睡眠、惊悚、高举、粗恶、过度勤精进、过度懈怠、欲求、种种想、对色的过度沉思,都是心的随烦恼。”像这样,因为不被这十一种随烦恼所染污,所以是清净。“超越人”:因为超越了人类感官的范围,能看见色法,所以是超越人的;或者因为超越了肉眼,所以是超越人的。以那清净、超越人的天眼。“看见众生”是指像以人的肉眼一样看见众生、观察、注视。巴利
Dibbenacakkhunāti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Visuddhenāti cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetubhāvato visuddhaṃ. Yo hi cutimattameva passati na upapātaṃ, so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo upapātamattameva passati na cutiṃ, so navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana tadubhayaṃ passati, so yasmā duvidhampi taṃ diṭṭhigataṃ ativattati, tasmāssa taṃ dassanaṃ diṭṭhivisuddhihetu hoti, tadubhayampāyaṃ buddhaputto passati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetubhāvato visuddha’’nti. Ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā visuddhaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vicikicchā cittassa upakkilesoti – iti viditvā vicikicchaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahiṃ, amanasikāro…pe… thinamiddhaṃ, chambhitattaṃ, uppillaṃ, duṭṭhullaṃ, accāraddhavīriyaṃ, atilīnavīriyaṃ, abhijappā, nānattasaññā, atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkileso’’ti (ma. ni. 3.242) evaṃ vuttehi ekādasahi upakkilesehi anupakkiliṭṭhattā visuddhaṃ. Manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanena atikkantamānusakaṃ, maṃsacakkhuṃ vā atikkantattā atikkantamānusakaṃ. Tena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena. Satte passatīti manussamaṃsacakkhunā viya satte passati dakkhati āloketi.
正在死亡和正在投生:在这里,死亡那一刹那和投生那一刹那,即使以天眼也无法看见。不过,那些临近死亡、现在就要死去的人,叫作“正在死亡”;那些已经取得结生或刚刚投生的人,叫作“正在投生”。这段经文显示,他看见这样的正在死亡者和正在投生者。“卑下”:因为与痴的等流相应,所以是就低贱的种姓、家族、财富等而言,指卑微、受人轻视。“胜妙”:因为与无痴的等流相应,所以与此相反。“美貌”:因为与无嗔的等流相应,所以具有可爱、称心、可意的色泽。“丑陋”:因为与嗔的等流相应,所以具有不可爱、不称心、不可意的色泽;也有美丽和丑陋的意思。“善趣”:生于善趣;或者因为与无贪的等流相应,指富裕、拥有大财富。“恶趣”:生于恶趣;或者因为与贪的等流相应,指贫穷、缺乏饮食。“随业而生”:随各自所造作积累的业而投生到相应的去处。在这里,前面“正在死亡”等语句说明了天眼的作用,而这一句则说明随业趣智的作用。巴利
Cavamāne upapajjamāneti ettha cutikkhaṇe upapattikkhaṇe vā dibbacakkhunāpi daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā. Ye pana āsannacutikā idāni cavissanti, te cavamānā. Ye ca gahitapaṭisandhikā sampatinibbattā vā, te upapajjamānāti adhippetā. Te evarūpe cavamāne upapajjamāne ca passatīti dasseti. Hīneti mohanissandayuttattā hīnānaṃ jātikulabhogādīnaṃ vasena hīḷite paribhūte. Paṇīteti amohanissandayuttattā tabbiparīte. Suvaṇṇeti adosanissandayuttattā iṭṭhakantamanāpavaṇṇayutte. Dubbaṇṇeti dosanissandayuttattā aniṭṭhaakantāmanāpavaṇṇayutte. Abhirūpe virūpetipi attho. Sugateti sugatigate, alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane. Duggateti duggatigate, lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapānabhojane. Yathākammūpageti yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ upacitaṃ, tena tena upagate . Tattha purimehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttaṃ, iminā pana padena yathākammūpagañāṇakiccaṃ.
这个智的生起过程是这样的:在这里,比丘向下朝地狱的方向扩展光明,看见地狱众生正在承受巨大的痛苦,这种看见就是天眼智的作用。他接着这样作意:“这些众生到底造了什么业,才承受这样的痛苦?”于是,以“他们造了这种业”为所缘的智就生起了。同样,他向上朝天界的方向扩展光明,在欢喜园、杂合园、粗涩园等处看见众生正在享受天界的福报,这种看见也是天眼智的作用。他这样作意:“这些众生到底造了什么业,才享受这样的福报?”于是,以“他们造了这种业”为所缘的智就生起了,这叫作随业趣智。这个智没有单独的遍作。未来分智也和它一样,没有单独的遍作。因为这些智都是以天眼为基础,和天眼一起成就的。关于“以身恶行”等部分应当说明的内容,和前面所说的方法相同。在这里,“明”指天眼智明。“无明”指遮蔽众生死亡与结生的无明。其余内容如前所述。巴利
Tassa ca ñāṇassa ayaṃ uppattikkamo – idha bhikkhu heṭṭhā nirayābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nerayike satte passati mahantaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavamāne, idaṃ dassanaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇakiccameva. So ca evaṃ manasi karoti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavantī’’ti, athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Tathā upari devalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nandanavanamissakavanaphārusakavanādīsu satte passati dibbasampattiṃ anubhavamāne, idampi dassanaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇakiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavantī’’ti? Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ nāma. Imassa visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā cimassa, evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassapi. Dibbacakkhupādakāneva hi imāni dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhanti. Kāyaduccaritenātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Idha vijjāti dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjā. Avijjāti sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在第三部分中,“明”指的是阿罗汉道智与明。“无明”指的是遮蔽四圣谛的无明。其余内容因为与下文所述方式相同,所以很容易理解。“如是……”等语句是总结。巴利
Tatiyavāre vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇavijjā. Avijjāti catusaccappaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva. Evaṃ khotiādi nigamanaṃ.
在这些偈颂里,简要的意思是:如果有人像前面所说的那样,如实了知自己的宿命,也就是按照所说的方式,把它弄清楚、明白地知道。也可以读作“yovedī”,意思是“他已经知道”,也就是已经了知并安住其中。他以天眼,按照前面所说的方式,看见被称为二十六层天界的天界,以及四种恶趣。此后,他就证得了所谓“生已尽”的阿拉汉果,或者说就是涅槃本身。正是由于这个,他依靠殊胜的道智——也就是最上的智慧——了知了应当了知的四圣谛法,因为该做的事已经完成,所以达到了究竟圆满。他具足牟尼法,是牟尼,是漏已尽的人。因为具足了前面所说的这三种明,又由于第三明而彻底断除了一切恶,所以被称为三明婆罗门。因此,我只说这样的人是三明婆罗门;至于其他那些只会空谈、背诵夜柔吠陀等咒语、以教人诵持为业的人,我不说他们是三明婆罗门,我不称他们为三明。巴利
Gāthāsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yo yathāvuttaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ aveti avagacchati, vuttanayena pākaṭaṃ katvā jānāti. ‘‘Yovedī’’tipi pāṭho, yo avedi viditaṃ katvā ṭhitoti attho. Chabbīsatidevalokasaṅkhātaṃ saggaṃ catubbidhaṃ apāyañca vuttanayeneva dibbacakkhunā passati. Athoti tato paraṃ jātikkhayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ nibbānameva vā patto adhigato. Tato eva abhiññā abhivisiṭṭhāya maggapaññāya jānitabbaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ jānitvā kiccavosānena vosito niṭṭhānappatto. Moneyyadhammasamannāgamena muni, khīṇāsavo yasmā etāhi yathāvuttāhi tīhi vijjāhi samannāgatattā tato tatiyavijjāya sabbathā bāhitapāpattā ca tevijjo brāhmaṇo nāma hoti. Tasmā tameva ahaṃ tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmi, aññaṃ pana lapitalāpanaṃ yajuādimantapadānaṃ ajjhāpanaparaṃ tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ na vadāmi, tevijjoti taṃ na kathemīti.
因此应当知道:在这一品里,第二经讲的是轮回,第五、第八和第十经讲的是还灭,其余几经则既讲了轮回也讲了还灭。巴利
Iti imasmiṃ vagge dutiyasutte vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, pañcamaaṭṭhamadasamasuttesu vivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, itaresu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.